DGC 2020ES Combined Manuals English PDF

DGC-2020ES
Digital Genset Controller

Quick Start Instruction Manual
12570 Route 143 • Highland, Illinois 62249-1074 USA Publication

Tel +1 618.654.2341 • Fax +1 618.654.2351 9469200993, Rev B
www.basler.com • info@basler.com
November 2019
WARNING: California's Proposition 65 requires special warnings for
products that may contain chemicals known to the state of California to
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Please note that
by posting this Proposition 65 warning, we are notifying you that one or
more of the Proposition 65 listed chemicals may be present in products
we sell to you. For more information about the specific chemicals found
in this product, please visit https://www.basler.com/Prop65.
9469200993 i
Preface
This instruction manual provides basic installation and setup information for the DGC-2020ES Digital
Genset Controller. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:
• Mounting
• Terminals and connectors
• Typical applications
• BESTCOMSPlus® software
• Configuration
• BESTlogic™Plus
• Controls and indicators
Conventions Used in this Manual

Important safety and procedural information is emphasized and presented in this manual through
Warning, Caution, and Note boxes. Each type is illustrated and defined as follows.
Warning!
Warning boxes call attention to conditions or actions that may cause

personal injury or death.
Caution
Caution boxes call attention to operating conditions that may lead to
equipment or property damage.
Note
Note boxes emphasize important information pertaining to Digital
Genset Controller installation or operation.
DGC-2020ES Instruction Manual Catalog

Available instruction manuals for the DGC-2020ES are listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Instruction Manuals
Part Number Description
9469200993 Quick Start (this manual)
9469200994 Installation
9469200995 Configuration
9469200996 Operation
9469200997 Accessories
DGC-2020ES Preface
ii 9469200993
12570 State Route 143

Highland IL 62249-1074 USA
www.basler.com
info@basler.com
Tel: +1 618.654.2341
Fax: +1 618.654.2351
© 2019 by Basler Electric

All rights reserved
First printing: April 2017
Warning!
READ THIS MANUAL. Read this manual before installing, operating, or maintaining the DGC-2020ES.
Note all warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual as well as on the product. Keep this manual with
the product for reference. Only qualified personnel should install, operate, or service this system.
Failure to follow warning and cautionary labels may result in personal injury or property damage.
Exercise caution at all times.
Basler Electric does not assume any responsibility to compliance or noncompliance with national code, local code,
or any other applicable code. This manual serves as reference material that must be well understood prior to
installation, operation, or maintenance.
For terms of service relating to this product and software, see the Commercial Terms of Products and Services
document available at www.basler.com/terms.
This publication contains confidential information of Basler Electric Company, an Illinois corporation. It is loaned for
confidential use, subject to return on request, and with the mutual understanding that it will not be used in any
manner detrimental to the interests of Basler Electric Company and used strictly for the purpose intended.
It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual provide
data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design of all features
and options are subject to modification without notice. Over time, improvements and revisions may be made to this
publication. Before performing any of the following procedures, contact Basler Electric for the latest revision of this
manual.
The English-language version of this manual serves as the only approved manual version.
Preface DGC-2020ES
9469200993 iii
Revision History
A historical summary of the changes made to this instruction manual is provided below. Revisions are
listed in reverse chronological order.
Visit www.basler.com to download the latest hardware, firmware, and BESTCOMSPlus® revision
histories.
Instruction Manual Revision History

Manual
Change
Revision and Date
B, Nov-19 • Removed Rev Letter from all pages
• Changed sequential numbering to sectional numbering
• Moved Instruction Manual Revision History into Preface
• Removed standalone Revision History chapter
A1, Apr-2019 • Added Prop 65 warning on back of cover page
A, Sep-2018 • Updated Revision History chapter
—, Apr-2017 • Initial release
DGC-2020ES Contents
iv 9469200993
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200993 v
Contents
Introduction................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Mounting..................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Terminals and Connectors ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Typical Connections ................................................................................................................................... 4-1
BESTCOMSPlus® ...................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
BESTlogic™Plus ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1
Controls and Indicators .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1
DGC-2020ES Contents
vi 9469200993
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200993 1-1
1 • Introduction
This manual provides basic installation and setup information for the DGC-2020ES Digital Genset
Controller. For complete information, refer to the appropriate DGC-2020ES instruction manual.
Caution
This Quick Start manual is intended for use by qualified personnel
only.
Default Settings
Each DGC-2020ES is delivered with default settings that are based on average values and may not be
appropriate for your application. All settings must be properly configured for your application before
running the engine-generator set.
Warning!
Do not place the DGC-2020ES controller into service until all settings
have been properly configured.
Features and Functions

The DGC-2020ES Digital Genset Controller provides integrated engine-genset control, protection, and
metering in a rugged and economical package. Its features set make the DGC-2020ES ideal for
standalone genset applications where paralleling or load sharing is not required. Microprocessor based
technology allows for exact measurement, setpoint adjustment, and timing functions. Front panel controls
and indicators enable quick and simple DGC-2020ES operation. Basler Electric communication software
(BESTCOMSPlus®) allows units to be easily customized for each application. Because of the low sensing
burden in the DGC-2020ES, dedicated potential transformers (PTs) are not required. A liquid crystal
display (LCD) with backlighting can be viewed under a wide range of ambient light and temperature
conditions.
The DGC-2020ES Digital Genset Controller has the following features:
• Generator Control
• Engine and Generator Protection
• Automatic Transfer Switch Control (Mains Failure)
• Automatic Generator Configuration Detection
• Programmable Analog Engine Senders
• Seven Programmable Contact Inputs
• Programmable Logic
• Exercise Timer
• ECU Communications via SAE J1939
• Additional contact input/output module available to expand the capabilities of the DGC-2020ES
DGC-2020ES Digital Genset Controllers perform the following functions:
Generator Protection and Metering

Multifunction generator protection guards against generator overvoltage, undervoltage, reverse power,
loss of excitation, underfrequency, overfrequency, and overcurrent. Each generator protection function
has an adjustable pickup and time delay setting.
Metered generator parameters include voltage, current, real power (watts), apparent power (VA), and
power factor (PF).
DGC-2020ES Introduction
1-2 9469200993
Engine Protection and Metering

Engine protection features include oil pressure and coolant temperature monitoring, overcrank protection,
ECU specific protection elements, and diagnostic reporting.
Metered engine parameters include oil pressure, coolant temperature, battery voltage, speed, fuel level,
engine load, coolant level (from ECU), ECU specific parameters, and run-time statistics.
Event Recording
An event log retains a history of system events in nonvolatile memory. Up to 30 event types are retained
and each record contains a time stamp of the first and last occurrence, and the number of occurrences for
each event.
Contact Inputs and Outputs

DGC-2020ES controllers have seven programmable contact inputs. All contact inputs recognize dry
contacts. The programmable inputs can be configured to initiate a pre-alarm or alarm. An input can be
programmed to receive an input from an automatic transfer switch. Inputs can also be programmed to
override DGC-2020ES alarms and protection functions. Each input can be assigned a user-defined name
for easy identification at the front panel display and in fault records.
Output contacts include three dedicated relays for energizing an engine’s glow plugs, fuel solenoid, and
starter solenoid. Four additional user-programmable output contacts are provided.
Additional contact inputs and output contact requirements can be accommodated with an optional CEM-
2020 (Contact Expansion Module). Contact Basler Electric for ordering information.
Automatic Transfer Switch Control (Mains Failure)

The DGC-2020ES can detect a mains failure via a single- or three-phase bus input. A mains failure is
established when any one of the following conditions are met:
• Any phase of bus voltage falls below dead the bus threshold
• Any phase of bus voltage is unstable due to overvoltage or undervoltage
• Any phase of bus voltage is unstable due to overfrequency or underfrequency
At this time, the DGC-2020ES will start the genset and when ready, apply power to the load via the
genset. The DGC-2020ES implements open transitions to and from the mains. When the mains returns
and is considered stable, the DGC-2020ES will transfer the load back to the mains.
Communication
DGC-2020ES communication features include a standard USB port for local (and temporary)
communication, SAE J1939 interface for remote communication, and RS-485 interface for communication
with an optional Remote Display Panel.
USB Port
The USB communication port can be used with BESTCOMSPlus software to quickly configure a DGC-
2020ES with the desired settings or retrieve metering values and event log records.
CAN Interface
The CAN interface provides high-speed communication between the DGC-2020ES and the engine
control unit (ECU) on an electronically controlled engine. This interface provides access to oil pressure,
coolant temperature, and engine speed data by reading these parameters directly from the ECU. When
available, engine diagnostic data can also be accessed. The CAN interface supports the following
protocols:
• SAE J1939 Protocol - Oil pressure, coolant temperature, and engine speed data are received
from the ECU. In addition, DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) help diagnose any engine or related
failures. The engine DTCs are displayed on the front panel of the DGC-2020ES and may be
obtained using BESTCOMSPlus® software.
Introduction DGC-2020ES
9469200993 1-3
• MTU Protocol - A DGC-2020ES connected to a genset equipped with an MTU ECU receives oil
pressure, coolant temperature, and engine speed data from the engine controller, along with
various alarms and pre-alarms that are MTU specific. In addition, the DGC-2020ES tracks and
displays the active fault codes issued by the MTU engine ECU.
Style Number
Standard-order DGC-2020ES controllers are identified by a style number which consists of a combination
of letters and numbers that define the controller’s electrical characteristics and operational features. The
model number, together with the style number, describes the options included in a specific controller.
Figure 1-1 illustrates the DGC-2020ES style number identification chart.
Figure 1-1. DGC-2020ES Style Chart
For example, a DGC-2020ES with style number 5A2, has the following characteristics and features.
5 5 Aac Current Sensing Inputs
A Analog Senders
2 Mains Failure Detection
Optional Features and Capabilities

CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module)
The optional CEM-2020 provides 10 additional contact inputs and 18 or 24 additional output contacts
(depending on module type) to the DGC-2020ES. The CEM-2020 communicates with the DGC-2020ES
through a CAN interface. Refer to the CEM-2020 chapter in the Accessories manual for more information.
Remote Display Panel

The optional Remote Display Panel provides remote indication of many pre-alarm and alarm conditions.
The DGC-2020ES communicates with the Remote Display Panel through an RS-485 interface. Refer to
the Communication chapter in the Configuration manual for more information.
DGC-2020ES Introduction
1-4 9469200993
Introduction DGC-2020ES
9469200993 2-1
2 • Mounting
DGC-2020ES controllers are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage. Upon receipt of a
unit, check the part number against the requisition and packing list for agreement. Inspect for damage,
and if there is evidence of such, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler Electric
regional sales office or your sales representative.
If the device is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and dust-
free environment.
Hardware
The front panel is resistant to moisture, salt fog, humidity, dust, dirt, and chemical contaminants. DGC-
2020ES controllers are mounted using the four permanently attached 10-24 studs. The torque applied to
the mounting hardware should not exceed 20 inch-pounds (2.2 newton meters).
Dimensions
Panel cutting and drilling dimensions are shown in Figure 2-1. Overall dimensions are shown in Figure
2-2. All dimensions are shown in inches with millimeters in parenthesis.
7.635 (194.0) max

7.615 (193.4) min
0.218 (5.5) diameter 7.433 (188.8) max
7.393 (187.8) min 0.242 (6.2) max
0.182 (4.6) min
5.433 (138) max

5.393 (137) min
CUTOUT
5.635 (143.2) max
5.615 (142.6) min
0.320 (8.1) max

0.280 (7.1) min
45°
0.242 (6.2) max
0.182 (4.6) min P0067-98
Figure 2-1. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions
DGC-2020ES Mounting
2-2 9469200993
Figure 2-2. Overall Dimensions
Mounting DGC-2020ES
9469200993 3-1
3 • Terminals and Connectors

All DGC-2020ES terminals and connectors are located on the rear panel. DGC-2020ES terminals consist
of a mini-B USB socket and plug-in connectors with spring clamp terminals.
Figure 3-1 illustrates the rear panel terminals. Locator letters in the illustration correspond to the terminal
block and connector descriptions in Table 3-1.
Figure 3-1. Rear Panel
DGC-2020ES Terminals and Connectors

3-2 9469200993
Table 3-1. Rear Panel Terminal and Connector Descriptions

Locator Description
A The majority of external, DGC-2020ES wiring is terminated at 8- or 15-position
connectors with spring clamp terminals. These connectors plug into headers on the
DGC-2020ES. The connectors and headers have a dovetailed edge that ensures
proper connector orientation. Each connector and header is uniquely keyed to ensure
that a connector mates only with the correct header. Spring clamp terminals accept a
maximum wire size of 12 AWG.
B The mini-B USB socket mates with a standard USB cable and is used with a PC
running BESTCOMSPlus® software for local communication with the DGC-2020ES.
Note
Be sure that the DGC-2020ES is hard-wired to earth ground with no
smaller than 12 AWG copper wire attached to the chassis ground
terminal (terminal 16) on the rear of the controller.
Operating power from the battery must be of the correct polarity.
Although reverse polarity will not cause damage, the DGC-2020ES will
not operate.
For the DGC-2020ES to correctly meter power factor, the generator
must be rotating clockwise (A-B-C).
Terminals and Connectors DGC-2020ES

9469200993 4-1
4 • Typical Connections
Typical connection diagrams are provided in this chapter as a guide when wiring the DGC-2020ES for
communication, mechanical senders, contact inputs and outputs, sensing, and control power.
Connections for Typical Applications

Typical connections for applications using three-phase wye, three-phase delta, single-phase AB, and
single-phase AC generator voltage sensing are shown on the following pages.
Figure 4-1 illustrates typical three-phase wye generator voltage sensing connections.
GEN CKT MAINS CKT
BKR L BKR
L1
O A
GENERATOR L2 A B
≤ 480V
L3 D
C
N
N
1 1 1
38 37 36 35 34 33 45 43 41 40 46 48 50
M 2
P
IA+
IA–
IB+
IB–
IC+
IC–
GEN VA
GEN VB
GEN VC
GEN VN
BUS VA
BUS VB
BUS VC
P0071-48
U
32 MPU+
25
31 MPU–
OUT 1 26
52 OIL OUT 2 27
3
Analog 53 COOLANT
Senders
1 FUEL 28
2 SENDER COM DGC-2020ES OUT 3 29

4
OUT 4 30
9 INPUT 7
GLOW PLUGS
5
8 INPUT 6 PRE 24 6
To ECU
7 INPUT 5 23 Power or
Key-on
Terminal
6 INPUT 4
Mini-B FUEL
5 INPUT 3 RUN 22
USB SOLENOID
5
4 INPUT 2 21
485 SHIELD
RDP TxD +
RDP TxD –
3
CHASSIS
7 Emergency Stop INPUT 1

SHIELD
BATT+
BATT–
CAN H
CAN L
START
START 20 SOLENOID
5
13 14 15 10 11 12 16 17 18 19
6
To ECU
CAN bus
12/24V
1 Current inputs are 1A or 5A, depending on style. 5 If component is under ECU control, do not connect to DGC-2020ES.
Bus sensing inputs are optional, depending on style. Connect to the ECU on an electronically controlled engine when the
2 6 DGC-2020ES has the J1939 CAN interface option (style xCx).
Oil pressure and coolant temperature senders are only available when Labels indicate the functions assigned by the default programmable
3 7
the DGC-2020ES has the Analog Senders option (style xAx). The fuel logic to the contact inputs.
sender is always available.
4 Connect near engine block (negative battery terminal) side of senders.
Figure 4-1. Three-Phase Wye Connections for Typical Applications
DGC-2020ES Typical Connections

4-2 9469200993
Figure 4-2 illustrates typical three-phase delta generator voltage sensing connections.
GEN CKT MAINS CKT

BKR L BKR
L1
O A
GENERATOR L2 A B
≤ 480V
L3 D
C
N
N
1 1 1
38 37 36 35 34 33 45 43 41 40 46 48 50
M 2
P
IA+
IA–
IB+
IB–
IC+
IC–
GEN VA
GEN VB
GEN VC
GEN VN
BUS VA
BUS VB
BUS VC
P0071-49
U
32 MPU+
25
31 MPU–
OUT 1 26
52 OIL OUT 2 27
3
Analog 53 COOLANT
Senders
1 FUEL 28

4
OUT 4 30
9 INPUT 7
GLOW PLUGS
5
8 INPUT 6 PRE 24 6
To ECU
Key-on
Terminal
6 INPUT 4
Mini-B FUEL
5 INPUT 3 RUN 22
USB SOLENOID
5
4 INPUT 2 21
485 SHIELD
RDP TxD +
RDP TxD –
3
CHASSIS

SHIELD
BATT+
BATT–
CAN H
CAN L
START
START 20 SOLENOID
5
13 14 15 10 11 12 16 17 18 19
6
To ECU
CAN bus
12/24V
3 7
Figure 4-2. Three-Phase Delta Connections for Typical Applications
Typical Connections DGC-2020ES

9469200993 4-3
Figure 4-3 illustrates typical single-phase A-B generator voltage sensing connections.
GEN CKT L MAINS CKT

BKR BKR
L1 O
A
L2
A
GENERATOR
≤ 480V D B
N
N
1 1
38 37 36 35 34 33 45 43 41 40 46 48 50
M 2
P
GEN VA
GEN VB
GEN VC
GEN VN
IA+
IA–
IB+
IB–
IC+
IC–
BUS VA
BUS VB
BUS VC
P0071-50
U
32 MPU+
25
31 MPU–
OUT 1 26
52 OIL OUT 2 27
3
Analog 53 COOLANT
Senders
1 FUEL 28

4
OUT 4 30
9 INPUT 7
GLOW PLUGS
5
8 INPUT 6 PRE 24 6
To ECU
Key-on
Terminal
6 INPUT 4
Mini-B FUEL
5 INPUT 3 RUN 22
USB SOLENOID
5
4 INPUT 2 21
485 SHIELD
RDP TxD +
RDP TxD –
3
CHASSIS

SHIELD
BATT+
BATT–
CAN H
CAN L
START
START 20 SOLENOID
5
13 14 15 10 11 12 16 17 18 19
6
To ECU
CAN bus
12/24V
1 Curren t inputs ar e 1A or 5A, dep ending on style. 5 If co mp onent is unde r E CU co ntro l, do not con nect to DGC-202 0ES.
Bus se nsin g i nputs are optiona l, dep ending on style. Conne ct to th e E CU on an electro nica lly controlled en gine when the
2 6 DGC-202 0ES has the J193 9 CAN in terface option (style xCx).
Oil pressure and coolan t te mp erature se nders a re only availab le whe n Lab els ind icate th e functions a ssigne d b y th e d efa ult prog ramma ble
3 7
the DG C-202 0ES has the An alog Sen ders op tio n (style xA x). The fue l logi c to the co nta ct in puts.
sender is a lwa ys ava ilable.
4 Conne ct n ear engine bl ock (neg ative batte ry terminal) side of sende rs.
Figure 4-3. Single-Phase A-B Connections for Typical Applications

4-4 9469200993
Figure 4-4 illustrates typical single-phase A-C generator voltage sensing connections.
GEN CKT L MAINS CKT
BKR BKR
L1 O
A
L3
A
GENERATOR
≤ 480V D C
N
N
1 1
38 37 36 35 34 33 45 43 41 40 46 48 50
M 2
P
GEN VA
GEN VB
GEN VC
GEN VN
IA+
IA–
IB+
IB–
IC+
IC–
BUS VA
BUS VB
BUS VC
P0071-51
U
32 MPU+
25
31 MPU–
OUT 1 26
52 OIL OUT 2 27
3
Analog 53 COOLANT
Senders
1 FUEL 28

4
OUT 4 30
9 INPUT 7
GLOW PLUGS
5
8 INPUT 6 PRE 24 6
To ECU
Key-on
Terminal
6 INPUT 4
Mini-B FUEL
5 INPUT 3 RUN 22
USB SOLENOID
5
4 INPUT 2 21
485 SHIELD
RDP TxD +
RDP TxD –
3
CHASSIS

SHIELD
BATT+
BATT–
CAN H
CAN L
START
START 20 SOLENOID
5
13 14 15 10 11 12 16 17 18 19
6
To ECU
CAN bus
12/24V
3 7
Figure 4-4. Single-Phase A-C Connections for Typical Applications

9469200993 4-5
CAN Connections
Typical CAN connections are shown in Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6.
Note
1. If the DGC-2020ES is providing one end of the J1939 bus, a
120 ohm, ½ watt terminating resistor should be installed across
terminals 14 (CANL) and 13 (CANH).
2. If the DGC-2020ES is not providing one end of the J1939 bus, the
stub connecting the DGC-2020ES to the bus should not exceed
914 mm (3 ft) in length.
3. The maximum bus length, not including stubs, is 40 m (131 ft).
4. The J1939 drain (shield) should be grounded at one point only. If
grounded elsewhere, do not connect the drain to the DGC-
2020ES.
CEM-2020
(Optional)
Stub Bus
CAN-H
DGC-2020ES Engine
CAN-L
P0067-85
120 ohm 120 ohm
Termination Other Termination
Devices
Figure 4-5. CAN Interface with DGC-2020ES Providing One End of the Bus
CEM-2020
(Optional)
Stub Bus
CAN-H
Other
Engine
Devices
CAN-L
P0067-86
120 ohm 120 ohm
Termination Termination
DGC-2020ES
Figure 4-6. CAN Interface with Other Devices

4-6 9469200993
CEM-2020 Connections
The CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module) is an optional module that may be installed with the DGC-
2020ES. It is a remote auxiliary device that provides additional contact inputs and outputs for the DGC-
2020ES. This module interfaces to the DGC-2020ES via CAN, thus the CAN terminals are the only
common connections (Figure 4-7) between the DGC-2020ES and CEM-2020. Refer to the CEM-2020
chapter for more information.
Refer to Terminals and Connectors for details on DGC-2020ES CAN connections.
GND
CANH DGC-2020ES
CANL
GND/SHIELD
GND
CANH
CANH CEM-2020
CANL
CANL
P0067-87
Figure 4-7. DGC-2020ES and CEM-2020 CAN Connections
Installation for CE Systems

For CE compliant systems, it may be required to route ac voltage and current sensing wires separately
from other wires.
Installation in an Ungrounded System Application

When the DGC-2020ES is controlling equipment that is part of an ungrounded system, it is recommended
that potential transformers be employed on the voltage sensing inputs to provide full isolation between the
DGC-2020ES and monitored voltage phases.

9469200993 5-1
5 • BESTCOMSPlus®
BESTCOMSPlus provides the user with a point-and-click means to set and monitor the DGC-2020ES.
BESTCOMSPlus uses plugins, allowing the user to manage several different Basler Electric products.
The DGC-2020ES plugin must be activated before use. The plugin can be activated automatically by
connecting to a DGC-2020ES, or manually by requesting an activation key from Basler Electric.
Figure 5-1 illustrates the typical user interface components of the DGC-2020ES plugin with
BESTCOMSPlus.
Figure 5-1. Typical User Interface Components
Installation
Note
Do not connect a USB cable until setup completes successfully.
Connecting a USB cable before setup is complete may result in errors.
Download BESTCOMSPlus
DGC-2020ES controllers are delivered with a CD-ROM that contains BESTCOMSPlus software and
instruction manuals. If a CD-ROM is not available, use the following procedure to download
BESTCOMSPlus from the Basler Electric website.
1. Navigate to https://www.basler.com/Downloads.
2. Select DGC-2020ES from the model drop down menu.
3. Under the Software heading, click the download link for BESTCOMSPlus.
4. Sign in or create an account to continue with the download.
DGC-2020ES BESTCOMSPlus®
5-2 9469200993
Install BESTCOMSPlus from CD

When BESTCOMSPlus installation is complete, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows
programs menu. This folder is accessed by clicking the Windows Start button and then accessing the
Basler Electric folder in the Programs menu. The Basler Electric folder contains an icon that starts
BESTCOMSPlus when clicked.
Activation of the DGC-2020ES Plugin

The DGC-2020ES plugin is a module that runs inside the BESTCOMSPlus shell. The DGC-2020ES
plugin contains specific operational and logic settings for only the DGC-2020ES. Uploading settings to the
DGC-2020ES is possible only after activating the DGC-2020ES plugin.
The DGC-2020ES plugin can be activated automatically or manually. Automatic activation is achieved by
using a USB cable to establish communication between the DGC-2020ES and BESTCOMSPlus. Manual
activation is initiated by contacting Basler Electric for an activation key and entering the key into
BESTCOMSPlus. Manual activation is useful if you want to create a settings file prior to receiving your
DGC-2020ES. Refer to Manual Activation of DGC-2020ES Plugin.
Connect a USB Cable

The USB driver was copied to your PC during BESTCOMSPlus installation and is installed automatically
after powering the DGC-2020ES. USB driver installation progress is shown in the Windows taskbar area.
Windows will notify you when installation is complete.
Connect a USB cable between the PC and your DGC-2020ES. Apply control power to the DGC-2020ES.
Wait until the boot sequence is complete.
Start BESTCOMSPlus® and Activate the DGC-2020ES Plugin Automatically

To start BESTCOMSPlus, click the Windows Start button, point to Programs, Basler Electric, and then
click the BESTCOMSPlus icon. During initial startup, the BESTCOMSPlus Select Language screen is
displayed (Figure 5-2). You can choose to have this screen displayed each time BESTCOMSPlus is
started, or you can select a preferred language and this screen will be bypassed in the future. Click OK to
continue. This screen can be accessed later by selecting Tools and Select Language from the menu bar.
Figure 5-2. BESTCOMSPlus Language Selection Dialog

The BESTCOMSPlus platform window opens. Select New Connection from the Communication pull-down
menu and select DGC-2020ES. See Figure 5-3. The DGC-2020ES plugin is activated automatically after
connecting to a DGC-2020ES.
BESTCOMSPlus® DGC-2020ES
9469200993 5-3
Figure 5-3. Communication Pull-Down Menu

The DGC-2020ES Connection screen, shown in Figure 5-4, appears.
Figure 5-4. DGC-2020ES Connection Dialog

Select COM Port. The USB drivers are installed automatically during the BESTCOMSPlus installation
process. To select the correct COM Port, open the Windows Device Manager and expand the Ports
(COM & LPT) branch. Locate the device named CP2101 USB to UART Bridge Controller (COMx). The
COM Port number will be displayed in parenthesis (COMx). Be sure control power is applied to the DGC-
2020ES and the USB cable is connected before opening the Device Manager. See Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5. Device Manager

The DGC-2020ES plugin opens indicating that activation was successful. You can now configure the
DGC-2020ES communication ports and other settings.
5-4 9469200993
Installing the USB Driver if Automatic Installation Fails

To install the USB driver for the DGC-2020ES:
1. Apply control power to the DGC-2020ES and wait for the boot sequence to complete.
2. Connect a USB cable between the PC and DGC-2020ES.
3. The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.
4. Select “No, not this time” and select Next to continue.
5. Choose to “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)” and select Next to continue.
6. Insert the CD-ROM labeled BESTCOMSPlus into the PC CD-ROM drive.
7. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Basler Electric\BESTCOMSPlus\USBDeviceDrivers\ and select
Next to continue.
When installation of the driver is complete, you may be asked to restart your computer.
Manual Activation of the DGC-2020ES Plugin

Manual activation of the DGC-2020ES plugin is required only if your initial use of BESTCOMSPlus will be
on a PC that is not connected to a DGC-2020ES. Manual activation is described in the following
paragraphs.
Requesting an Activation Key

When initially running the DGC-2020ES plugin, the Activate Device Plugin pop-up appears. You must
contact Basler Electric for an activation key before you can activate the DGC-2020ES plugin. You can
request an activation key through email or the Basler Electric website. Click either the Website or Email
button. Click the Activate button when you are ready to enter the activation key you received from Basler
Electric. The Activate Device Plugin pop-up appears. Refer to Figure 5-6.
Entering an Activation Key

Select DGC-2020ES from the Device pull-down menu. Enter your Email Address and Activation Key
provided by Basler Electric. If you received an email containing the Activation Key, you can select all of
the text in the email and copy it to the Windows clipboard using normal Windows techniques. The Get
Data button will extract the Device, Email Address, and Activation Key from the Windows clipboard and
paste it into the appropriate fields. Click the Activate button to continue. The Activate Device Plugin
screen is also found by selecting Activate Device from the Tools pull-down menu of the BESTCOMSPlus
main screen.
Figure 5-6. Activate Device Plugin
9469200993 5-5
Establishing Communication
Communication between BESTCOMSPlus and the DGC-2020ES is established by clicking on the
Connect button on the DGC-2020ES Connection screen (see Figure 5-4) or by clicking on the Connect
button on the lower menu bar of the main BESTCOMSPlus screen (Figure 5-1). Download all settings
and logic from the DGC-2020ES by selecting Download Settings and Logic from the Communication pull-
down menu. BESTCOMSPlus will read all settings and logic from the DGC-2020ES and load them into
BESTCOMSPlus memory. See Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7. Processing, Please Wait…
Advanced Properties
Click the Advanced button on the Connection screen to display the Advanced Properties dialog. Default
settings are shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8. Advanced Properties Dialog
5-6 9469200993
9469200993 6-1
6 • Configuration
The DGC-2020ES must be properly configured for operation with a specific application prior to running.
An incomplete list of basic settings to consider when configuring the DGC-2020ES is provided below with
their locations in BESTCOMSPlus and the front panel. Ensure that all settings required for your
application are configured in accordance with the generator/engine manufacturer(s) recommendations,
authority having jurisdiction, and customer requirements. For detailed information on all settings, refer to
the Configuration manual.
Basic Settings
For front panel interface components, refer to the Controls and Indicators chapter. For BESTCOMSPlus
interface components, refer to the BESTCOMSPlus Software chapter.
System Settings
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, System Settings
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > System Settings
CAN Bus Setup

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, CAN Bus Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > CAN Bus 1 (I/O) Setup and CAN Bus 2
(ECU) Setup
ECU Setup
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, ECU Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > CAN Bus 2 (ECU) Setup > ECU Setup
Rated Data
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Paths:
Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Rated Data, Generator Rated Data
Front Panel Navigation Paths:
Settings > System Parameters > Rated Data, Gen
Remote Module Setup

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Remote Module Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Settings > Remote Module Setup
Crank Settings
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Crank Settings
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Crank Settings
Relay Control Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Relay Control
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Relay Control
Engine Sender Characteristic Curves Setup: Fuel, Temperature, and Oil

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders
Front Panel Navigation Path: Not available through the front panel
Contact Inputs
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Contact Inputs
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Programmable Inputs > Contact Inputs
DGC-2020ES Configuration
6-2 9469200993
Programmable Functions
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Programmable
Functions
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Programmable Inputs > Programmable Functions
Programmable Output Configuration

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Contact Outputs
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Programmable Outputs > Contact Outputs
Configurable Elements
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Configurable
Elements
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Programmable Outputs > Configurable Elements
Generator Breaker Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Breaker Hardware
Mains Breaker Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Breaker Hardware
Generator Protection
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Generator Protection
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Generator Protection
Saving Settings
Front Panel
When settings are configured through the front panel interface, they are automatically saved.
BESTCOMSPlus®
After the desired settings are configured in BESTCOMSPlus, the settings must be uploaded to a
connected DGC-2020ES. Refer to the following procedure to upload settings via BESTCOMSPlus.
1. Ensure that communication between a PC running BESTCOMSPlus and the DGC-2020ES is
established.
2. In the Upper Menu Bar, Click Communications > Upload Settings to Device
3. You are prompted to enter the password. The default password is “OEM”.
4. Press Enter or click Log In and the settings are uploaded to the connected DGC-2020ES.
Configuration DGC-2020ES
9469200993 7-1
7 • BESTlogic™Plus
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic is a programming method used for managing the input, output,
protection, control, monitoring, and reporting capabilities of Basler Electric's DGC-2020ES Digital Genset
Controller.
BESTlogic™Plus Composition
There are three main groups of objects used for programming BESTlogicPlus. These groups are I/O,
Components, and Elements. For details on how these objects are used to program BESTlogicPlus, see
the paragraphs on Programming BESTlogicPlus, later in this chapter.
Logic Schemes
A logic scheme is a group of logic variables written in equation form that defines the operation of a DGC-
2020ES Digital Genset Controller. Each logic scheme is given a unique name. This gives you the ability
to select a specific scheme and be confident that the selected scheme is in operation. One logic scheme
is configured for typical control applications and is the default active logic scheme. Only one logic scheme
can be active at a given time.
In most applications, preprogrammed logic schemes eliminate the need for custom programming.
Preprogrammed logic schemes may provide more inputs, outputs, or features than are needed for a
particular application. This is because a preprogrammed scheme is designed for a large number of
applications with no special programming required. Unneeded logic block outputs may be left open to
disable a function or a function block can be disabled through operating settings.
When a custom logic scheme is required, programming time is reduced by modifying the default logic
scheme.
The Active Logic Scheme

Digital Genset Controllers must have an active logic scheme in order to function. All Basler Electric DGC-
2020ES units are delivered with a default, active logic scheme pre-loaded in memory. If the function block
configuration and output logic of the default logic scheme meets the requirements of your application,
then only the operating settings (power system parameters and threshold settings) need to be adjusted
before placing the DGC-2020ES in service.
Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes

Copying a saved logic scheme to the active logic and assigning a unique name is accomplished by
loading the saved logic scheme into BESTCOMSPlus and then typing over the logic scheme's name.
Changes are not activated until the new settings have been saved and uploaded to the device.
Sending and Retrieving Logic Schemes

To retrieve settings from the DGC-2020ES, it must be connected to a computer through a
communications port. Once the necessary connections are made, settings can be downloaded from the
DGC-2020ES by selecting Download Settings and Logic on the Communication pull-down menu.
To send settings to the DGC-2020ES, it must be connected to a computer through a communications
port. Once the necessary connections are made, settings can be uploaded to the DGC-2020ES by
selecting Upload Settings and Logic on the Communication pull-down menu.
DGC-2020ES BESTlogic™Plus
7-2 9469200993
Caution
Always remove the DGC-2020ES from service prior to changing or
modifying the active logic scheme. Attempting to modify a logic
scheme while the DGC-2020ES is in service could generate
unexpected or unwanted outputs.
Modifying a logic scheme in BESTCOMSPlus does not automatically
make that scheme active in the DGC-2020ES. The modified scheme
must be uploaded into the DGC-2020ES.
Programming BESTlogic™Plus
Use BESTCOMSPlus to program BESTlogicPlus. Using BESTCOMSPlus is analogous to physically
attaching wire between discrete DGC-2020ES terminals. To program BESTlogicPlus, use the Settings
Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus to open the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic tree branch as shown
in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1. Settings Explorer, BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic Screen

The drag and drop method is used to connect a variable or series of variables to the logic inputs, outputs,
components, and elements. To draw a wire/link from port to port (triangles), click the left mouse button on
a port, pull the wire onto another port, and release the left mouse button. A red port indicates that a
connection to the port is required or missing. A black port indicates that a connection to the port is not
required. Drawing wires/links from input to input or output to output is not allowed. Only one wire/link can
be connected to any one output. If the proximity of the endpoint of the wire/link is not exact, it may attach
to an unintended port.
If an object or element is disabled, it will have a yellow X on it. To enable the element, navigate to the
settings page for that element. A red X indicates that an object or element is not available per the style
number of the DGC-2020ES.
The view of the Main Logic, Physical Outputs, Remote Outputs, and LCR Outputs can be automatically
arranged by clicking the right mouse button on the window and selecting Auto-Layout.
The following must be met before BESTCOMSPlus will allow logic to be uploaded to the DGC-2020ES:
BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020ES
9469200993 7-3
• A minimum of two inputs and a maximum of four inputs on any multi-port (AND, OR, NAND,
NOR, XOR, and XNOR) gate.
• A maximum of five logic levels for any particular path. A path being an input block or an output
side of an element block through gates to an output block or an input side of an element block.
This is to include any OR gates on the Physical Output or Remote Output tab/pages, but not the
matched pairs of Physical Output blocks or Remote Output blocks.
• Only 20 gates per logic level. All output blocks and input sides of element blocks are at the
maximum logic level of the diagram. All gates are pushed forward/upwards in logic levels and
buffered to reach the final output block or element block if needed. A maximum of 50 gates
allowed per diagram.
• At all levels there can only be 64 used link/wired or endpoints. Endpoints being inputs, outputs,
both sides of element blocks.
Three status indicators are located in the lower right corner of the BESTlogicPlus window. These
indicators show the Logic Save Status, Logic Diagram Status, and Logic Layer Status. Table 7-1 defines
the colors for each indicator.
Table 7-1. Status Indicators
Indicator Color Definition
Logic Save Status Amber Logic has changed since last save.
(Left Indicator) Green Logic has NOT changed since last save.
Logic Diagram Status Red Requirements NOT met as listed above.
(Center Indicator) Green Requirements met as listed above.
Logic Layer Status Red Requirements NOT met as listed above.
(Right Indicator) Green Requirements met as listed above.
Offline Logic Simulator

The offline logic simulator allows you to change the state of various logic elements to illustrate how that
state travels through the system. Before running the logic simulator, you must click the Save button on
the BESTlogicPlus toolbar to save the logic to memory. Changes to the logic (other than changing the
state) are disabled when the simulator is enabled. Colors are selected by clicking the Options button on
the BESTlogicPlus toolbar. By default, Logic 0 is red and Logic 1 is green. Using your mouse, double-
click on a logic element to change its state.
An example of the offline logic simulator is shown in Figure 7-2. Output 1 is Logic 0 (red) when Virtual
Switch 1 is Logic 0 (red) and Fixed 1 is Logic 1 (green).
7-4 9469200993
Figure 7-2. Offline Logic Simulator Example
BESTlogic™Plus Examples
Example 1 - GENBRK Logic Block Connections
Figure 7-3 illustrates the GENBRK logic block, three input logic blocks, and two output logic blocks.
Output 3 is active while the GENBRK is sending an “open breaker” command and Output 4 is active while
the GENBRK is sending the “close breaker” command.
Figure 7-3. Example 1 – GENBRK Logic Block Connections
Example 2 - AND Gate Connections

Figure 7-4 illustrates a typical AND gate connection. In this example, Output 11 will become active when
the Low Fuel alarm AND the Low Oil Pressure alarm are true.
Figure 7-4. Example 2 – AND Gate Connections
Example 3 - Multiple Logic Connections

In this example, there are two comment boxes, which may be placed on the logic diagram. Double-click a
comment box to modify the inside text. Output 3 becomes true when the 27TRIP is true. Output 1
9469200993 7-5
becomes true when the High Coolant Temp is true. Output 2 becomes true when the DGC-2020ES is in
RUN mode (RUN Mode true). Refer to Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5. Example 3 – Multiple Logic Connections
7-6 9469200993
9469200993 8-1
8 • Controls and Indicators

DGC-2020ES controls and indicators are illustrated in Figure 8-1. Lettered locators in Figure 8-1
correspond to the control and indicator descriptions of Table 8-1.
Figure 8-1. Front Panel
Table 8-1. Front-Panel HMI Descriptions

Locator Description
A Liquid Crystal Display. The backlit, 64 by 128 pixel LCD serves as the local information
source for metering, alarms, pre-alarms, and protective functions. Display operation is
maintained at −40°C.
B Supplying Load Indicator. This green LED lights when the generator current is greater
than Emergency Power Supply (EPS) threshold current.
C Alarm Indicator. This red LED lights continuously during alarm conditions and flashes
during pre-alarm conditions.
D Not in Auto Indicator. This red LED lights when the DGC-2020ES is not operating in Auto
mode. When the DGC-2020ES is operating in Run or Off mode, this LED is on.
DGC-2020ES Controls and Indicators

8-2 9469200993
E Run Pushbutton and Mode Indicator. Pressing this button places the DGC-2020ES in
Run mode. The green Run mode LED lights when Run mode is active.
F Off Pushbutton and Mode Indicator. Pressing this button places the DGC-2020ES in Off
mode. The red Off mode LED lights when the DGC-2020ES is in Off mode. This button
also resets the Breaker Management Pre-Alarms and all MTU ECU Alarms.
G Auto Pushbutton and Mode Indicator. Pressing the Auto button places the DGC-2020ES
in Auto mode. The green Auto mode LED lights when Auto mode is active.
H Back Pushbutton. This button is pressed to cancel a settings editing session and discard
any settings changes. When navigating through menus, pressing this button moves
upward a level. When pressed momentarily, this button also resets the Breaker
Management Pre-Alarms and all MTU ECU Alarms. This button is also used to reset the
Maintenance Interval when pressed for 10 seconds while viewing Hours Until
Maintenance or Maintenance Due Pre-Alarm.
I Alarm Silence Pushbutton Combination. Simultaneously pressing both the Back and Edit
buttons opens the relay output programmed as the horn output.
J Edit Pushbutton. Pressing this button starts an editing session and enables changes to
DGC-2020ES settings. At the conclusion of an editing session, the Edit pushbutton is
pressed again to save the setting changes. When navigating through menus, pressing
this button moves downward one level. When entering a string, such as a password, this
button locks the selected character and moves to the next position. When finished, press
Edit twice to submit the string.
K Arrow Pushbuttons. These two buttons are used to navigate through the front-panel
display menus and modify settings. Within a level, the up- and down-arrow buttons are
used to move among items within the menu level. Pressing the down-arrow button moves
to items lower in the list. Pressing the up-arrow button moves to items higher in the list.
During a settings editing session, the up- and down-arrow buttons are used to raise and
lower the value of the selected setting.
L Lamp Test Pushbutton Combination. Simultaneously pressing both the Up- and Down-
arrow buttons tests the DGC-2020ES indicators by exercising all LCD pixels and lighting
all LEDs for as long as both buttons are held.
Controls and Indicators DGC-2020ES

9469200993 9-1
9 • Troubleshooting
If you do not get the results that you expect from the DGC-2020ES, first check the programmable settings
for the appropriate function. Use the following troubleshooting procedures when difficulties are
encountered in the operation of your genset control system.
Communications
USB Port Does Not Operate Properly
Step 1. Verify that the proper port of your computer is being used. For more information, refer to the
Communication chapter in the Configuration manual.
CAN Communication Does Not Operate Properly

Step 1: Verify that there is a 120-ohm termination resistor on each end of the bus section of the wiring,
and that there are not any termination resistors at any node connections that are on stubs from
the main bus.
Step 2: Check all CAN wiring for loose connections and verify that the CAN H and CAN L wires have
not gotten switched somewhere on the network.
Step 3: Verify that the cable length of the bus section of the wiring does not exceed 40 meters (131
feet), and verify that any stubs from the main bus do not exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet) in length.
Step 4: If the engine is equipped with a Volvo or MTU ECU, verify that the ECU Configuration setting is
set to match the actual ECU configuration.
Inputs and Outputs

Programmable Inputs Do Not Operate as Expected
Step 1. Verify that all wiring is properly connected. Refer to the Typical Connections chapter in the
Installation manual.
Step 2. Confirm that the inputs are programmed properly.
Step 3. Ensure that the input at the DGC-2020ES is actually connected to the BATT– terminal (17).
Programmable Outputs Do Not Operate as Expected

Step 2. Confirm that the outputs are programmed properly.
Metering/Display
Incorrect Display of Battery Voltage, Coolant Temperature, Oil Pressure, or Fuel Level
Step 2. Confirm that the SENDER COM terminal (2) is connected to the negative battery terminal and
the engine-block side of the senders. Current from other devices sharing this connection can
cause erroneous readings.
Step 3. If the displayed battery voltage is incorrect, ensure that the proper voltage is present between
the BATT+ terminal (18) and the SENDER COM terminal (2).
Step 4. Verify that the correct senders are being used.
DGC-2020ES Troubleshooting
9-2 9469200993
Step 5. Use a voltmeter connected between the BATT– terminal (17) and the SENDER COM terminal
(2) on the DGC-2020ES to verify that there is no voltage difference at any time. Any voltage
differences may manifest themselves as erratic sender readings. Wiring should be corrected so
that no differences exist.
Step 6: Check the sender wiring and isolate sender wiring from any of the ac wiring in the system. The
sender wiring should be located away from any power ac wiring from the generator and any
ignition wiring. Separate conduits should be used for sender wiring and any ac wiring.
Incorrect Display of Generator Voltage

Step 2. Ensure that the proper voltage is present at the DGC-2020ES voltage sensing inputs (40, 41,
43, and 45).
Step 3. Verify that the voltage transformer ratio and sensing configuration is correct.
Step 4. Confirm that the voltage sensing transformers are correct and properly installed.
Incorrect Measurement or Display of Generator Current

Step 2. Ensure that the proper current is present at the DGC-2020ES current sensing inputs 33, 34, 35,
36, 37, and 38.
Step 3. Verify that the current sensing transformer ratios are correct.
Step 4. Confirm that the current sensing transformers are correct and properly installed.
Incorrect Display of Engine RPM

Step 2. Verify that the flywheel teeth setting is correct.
Step 3. Verify that the prime mover governor is operating properly.
Step 4. Verify that the measured frequency of the voltage at the MPU input (31 and 32) is correct.
Step 5. If the MPU is shared with the governor, verify that the polarity of the MPU input to the governor
matches the polarity of the MPU input to the DGC-2020ES.
DGC-2020ES Indicates Incorrect Power Factor

Check the rotation of the machine and the labeling of the A-B-C terminals. The machine must be rotating
in the same phase sequence as dictated by the generator phase rotation setting for correct power factor
metering. A power factor indication of 0.5 with resistive load present is a symptom of incorrect phase
rotation.
LCD is Blank and all LEDs are Flashing at Approximately Two-Second Intervals
This indicates that the DGC-2020ES does not detect that valid application firmware is installed. The unit
is running its boot loader program, waiting to accept a firmware upload.
Step 1. Start BESTCOMSPlus®. Use the top pull-down menu and select FILE > NEW > DGC-2020ES.
Step 2. Select COMMUNICATIONS > UPLOAD DEVICE FILES and select the device package file that
contains the firmware and language you want to upload.
Step 3. Check the boxes for DGC-2020ES Firmware and DGC-2020ES Language Module. Click the
UPLOAD button to start the upload process.
Troubleshooting DGC-2020ES
9469200993 9-3
Ground Faults Detected in Ungrounded System Applications

Step 1: Verify that there is no connection from the neutral connection of the generator to the system
ground.
Step 2: Perform insulation resistance tests on the system wiring to check for insulation integrity in the
overall system.
Step 3: If ground faults are detected on a DGC-2020ES in an ungrounded system application, it is
recommended that potential transformers be employed on the voltage sensing inputs to provide
full isolation between the DGC-2020ES and monitored voltage phases.
Step 4: If potential transformers are in place, remove the connectors from the DGC-2020ES one at a
time. If removal of a connector removes the ground fault, check the system wiring to that
connector and out into the system to verify that connections are secure and all wiring insulation
is in good condition.
Generator Breaker and Mains Breaker

Generator Breaker Will Not Close to a Dead Bus
Step 1: Review the description of how the generator breaker logic element functions contained in the
GENBRK logic element description in the BESTlogic™Plus chapter in the Configuration
manual.
Step 2: Review the section on breaker close requests in the Breaker Management chapter in the
Configuration manual.
Step 3: Navigate to the SETTINGS > BREAKER MANAGEMENT > BREAKER HARDWARE > GEN
BREAKER screen and set DEAD BUS CL ENBL to ENABLE.
Step 4: Verify that the Generator status is stable. The breaker will not close if the generator status is
not stable. Check status by using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus and verify that
when the generator is running, the GEN STABLE status LED is lit. If necessary, modify the
settings on the SETTINGS > BREAKER MANAGEMENT > BUS CONDITION DETECTION
screen.
Step 5: Verify the bus status is DEAD. Check status by using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus
and verify that when the generator is running, the BUS DEAD status LED is lit. If necessary,
modify the settings on the SETTINGS > BREAKER MANAGEMENT > BUS CONDITION
DETECTION screen.
Step 6: Verify the connections in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic to the generator breaker logic
element. The Status input must be driven by an “A” or normally open contact from the generator
breaker. The OPEN and CLOSE command inputs on the left side of the logic block are inputs
for open and close commands. These can be wired to physical inputs if it is desired to have
open and close command switches. If they are wired, they must either be pulsed inputs, or
some logic must be employed so that the open and close command inputs are never driven at
the same time. If these are both driven at the same time, the breaker is receiving open and
close commands simultaneously. The breaker will not change state if it is being commanded to
open and close at the same time.
Step 7: Verify the breaker is receiving a close command. Breaker close command sources are:
• The DGC-2020ES itself when the automatic mains fail transfer (ATS) feature is enabled.
• The DGC-2020ES itself when the RUN WITH LOAD logic element receives a Start pulse in
the programmable logic.
• The DGC-2020ES itself when started from the Exercise Timer and the Run with Load box
is checked in the Generator Exerciser settings.
• Manual Breaker Close Input Contacts applied to the Open and Close inputs on the left side
of the Generator Breaker logic element in the programmable logic.
9-4 9469200993
Step 8: Verify the wiring to the breaker from the DGC-2020ES. If it seems OK, you can do a manual
close and open by modifying the programmable logic. Map some unused outputs to the OPEN
and CLOSE outputs from the Gen Breaker Block in the programmable logic. Map a virtual
switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker open output. Map another virtual
switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Connect with
BESTCOMSPlus, and exercise the virtual switches using the Control panel located in the
Metering Explorer. Never turn open and close on at the same time. This could damage the
breaker and/or motor operator. If everything is working as expected, restore the logic to its
original diagram.
Generator Breaker Does Not Open When It Should

GENBRK logic element description in the BESTlogicPlus chapter in the Configuration manual.
Step 2: Review the section on breaker operation requests in the Breaker Management chapter in the
Step 4: Verify the breaker is receiving an open command. Breaker open command sources are:
• The DGC-2020ES itself when the automatic transfer (ATS) feature is enabled.
• The DGC-2020ES itself when the RUN WITH LOAD logic element receives a Stop pulse in
• The DGC-2020ES itself when shutting down the engine due to an active alarm.
• The DGC-2020ES itself when ending a run session from the Exercise Timer and the Run
with Load box is checked in the Generator Exerciser settings.
• Manual Breaker Open Input Contacts applied to the Open and Close inputs on the left side
original diagram.
Mains Breaker Does Not Open When Mains Fails

Step 1: Verify that a Mains Breaker has been configured by examining the settings on the SETTINGS >
BREAKER MANAGEMENT > BREAKER HARDWARE screen.
Step 2: Verify the mains breaker has been correctly included in the programmable logic.
Step 3: Verify that the MAINS FAIL TRANSFER parameter is set to ENABLE on the SETTINGS >
Step 4: Verify that a failure of the mains is detected by the DGC-2020ES. Check status using the
Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus and verify that the MAINS FAIL status LED is lit when
9469200993 9-5
the power on the DGC-2020ES bus voltage input is either out of voltage or frequency range. If
necessary, modify the settings on the SETTINGS > BREAKER MANAGEMENT > BUS
CONDITION DETECTION screen to achieve correct detection.
switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Map another virtual
original diagram.
Mains Breaker Does Not Close After Mains Returns

Step 4: Verify that stable mains power is detected by the DGC-2020ES. Check status using the
Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus and verify that the MAINS STABLE status LED is lit
when the power on the DGC-2020ES bus voltage input is good. If necessary, modify the
screen to achieve correct detection.
original diagram.
DGC-2020ES Front Panel Debug Screen

There is one debug screen in the DGC-2020ES that can be useful for debugging I/O module related
issues. The following debug screen is available: CEM DEBUG
CEM DEBUG
This screen shows the binary data that is being sent between the CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module)
and the DGC-2020ES.
The CEM DEBUG screen is located on the front panel at SETTINGS > SYSTEM PARAMS > REMOTE
MODULE SETUP > CEM SETUP > CEM DEBUG MENU.
The following parameters are visible on the CEM DEBUG screen:
• DGC TO CEM BP: DGC-2020ES to CEM-2020 Binary Points. This is the status of the CEM-2020
output relays being transmitted from the DGC-2020ES to the CEM-2020. This is a 32-bit, bit packed
number representing the desired states of the CEM-2020 outputs. The left most bit is the first output,
etc.
• CEM TO DGC BP: CEM-2020 to DGC-2020ES Binary Points. This is the status of the CEM-2020
inputs being transmitted from the CEM-2020 to the DGC-2020ES. This is a 32-bit, bit packed number
representing the metered states of the CEM-2020 inputs. The left most bit is the first input, etc.
9-6 9469200993
12570 State Route 143 No. 59 Heshun Road Loufeng District (N) 111 North Bridge Road
Highland IL 62249-1074 USA Suzhou Industrial Park 15-06 Peninsula Plaza
Tel: +1 618.654.2341 215122 Suzhou Singapore 179098
Fax: +1 618.654.2351 P.R. CHINA Tel: +65 68.44.6445
email: info@basler.com Tel: +86 512.8227.2888 Fax: +65 68.44.8902
Fax: +86 512.8227.2887 email: singaporeinfo@basler.com
email: chinainfo@basler.com
DGC-2020ES
Installation Instruction Manual

Tel +1 618.654.2341 • Fax +1 618.654.2351 9469200994, Rev B
November 2019
cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. Please note that
9469200994 i
Preface
This instruction manual provides information about the installation of the DGC-2020ES Digital Genset
Controller. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:
• Mounting
• Terminals and connectors
• Typical applications
• Power input
• Voltage and current sensing
• Speed signal inputs
• Specifications
• Maintenance and troubleshooting

Warning!

Caution
Note

9469200993 Quick Start
9469200994 Installation (this manual)
DGC-2020ES Preface
ii 9469200994

www.basler.com
info@basler.com
Tel: +1 618.654.2341
Fax: +1 618.654.2351

All rights reserved
Warning!
manual.
Preface DGC-2020ES
9469200994 iii
Revision History
histories.

Manual
Change
Revision and Date
B, Nov-19 • Removed Rev Letter from all pages.
• Changed sequential numbering to sectional numbering.
• Moved Instruction Manual Revision History into Preface.
• Removed standalone Revision History chapter.
• Corrected Figures 3-3 and 3-4. Added GEN VN connection.
A1, Apr-19 • Updated Proposition 65 statement
DGC-2020ES Contents
iv 9469200994
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200994 v
Contents
Mounting..................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Terminals and Connectors ......................................................................................................................... 2-1
Typical Connections ................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Power Input ................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Voltage and Current Sensing ..................................................................................................................... 5-1
Speed Signal Inputs ................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 7-1
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 8-1
DGC-2020ES Contents
vi 9469200994
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200994 1-1
1 • Mounting
DGC-2020ES controllers are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage. Upon receipt of a
unit, check the part number against the requisition and packing list for agreement. Inspect for damage,
and if there is evidence of such, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler Electric
regional sales office or your sales representative.
free environment.
Hardware
The front panel is resistant to moisture, salt fog, humidity, dust, dirt, and chemical contaminants. DGC-
2020ES controllers are mounted using the four permanently attached 10-24 studs. The torque applied to
the mounting hardware should not exceed 20 inch-pounds (2.2 newton meters).
Dimensions
Panel cutting and drilling dimensions are shown in Figure 1-1. Overall dimensions are shown in Figure
1-2. All dimensions are shown in inches with millimeters in parenthesis.
7.635 (194.0) max

7.615 (193.4) min
0.218 (5.5) diameter 7.433 (188.8) max
7.393 (187.8) min 0.242 (6.2) max
0.182 (4.6) min
5.433 (138) max

5.393 (137) min
CUTOUT
5.635 (143.2) max
5.615 (142.6) min
0.320 (8.1) max

0.280 (7.1) min
45°
0.242 (6.2) max
0.182 (4.6) min P0067-98
Figure 1-1. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions
DGC-2020ES Mounting
1-2 9469200994
Figure 1-2. Overall Dimensions
Mounting DGC-2020ES
9469200994 2-1
2 • Terminals and Connectors

All DGC-2020ES terminals and connectors are located on the rear panel. DGC-2020ES terminals consist
of a mini-B USB socket and plug-in connectors with spring clamp terminals.
Figure 2-1 illustrates the rear panel terminals. Locator letters in the illustration correspond to the terminal
block and connector descriptions in Table 2-1.
Figure 2-1. Rear Panel

2-2 9469200994
Table 2-1. Rear Panel Terminal and Connector Descriptions

Locator Description
A The majority of external, DGC-2020ES wiring is terminated at 8- or 15-position
connectors with spring clamp terminals. These connectors plug into headers on the
DGC-2020ES. The connectors and headers have a dovetailed edge that ensures
proper connector orientation. Each connector and header is uniquely keyed to ensure
that a connector mates only with the correct header. Spring clamp terminals accept a
maximum wire size of 12 AWG.
B The mini-B USB socket mates with a standard USB cable and is used with a PC
running BESTCOMSPlus® software for local communication with the DGC-2020ES.
Connections
DGC-2020ES connections are dependent on the application. Incorrect wiring may result in damage to the
controller.
Note
Be sure that the DGC-2020ES is hard-wired to earth ground with no
terminal (terminal 16) on the rear of the controller.
Although reverse polarity will not cause damage, the DGC-2020ES will
not operate.
must be rotating clockwise (A-B-C).
The DGC-2020ES terminals are grouped by function and include operating power, generator current
sensing, generator voltage sensing, bus voltage sensing, analog engine sender inputs, magnetic pickup
input, contact sensing inputs, output contacts, USB interface, CAN interface, and Remote Display Panel
connections.
DGC-2020ES terminal groups are described in the following paragraphs.
Operating Power
The DGC-2020ES operating power input accepts either 12 Vdc or 24 Vdc and tolerates voltage over the
range of 6 to 32 Vdc. Operating power must be of the correct polarity. Although reverse polarity will not
cause damage, the DGC-2020ES will not operate. Operating power terminals are listed in Table 2-2.
It is recommended that a fuse be added for additional protection for the wiring to the battery input of the
DGC-2020ES. A fuse helps prevent wire damage and nuisance trips due to initial power supply inrush
current. To follow UL guidelines, a 5 A maximum, 32 Vdc supplementary fuse must be implemented in the
battery input circuit to the DGC-2020ES
Table 2-2. Operating Power Terminals
Terminal Description
16 (CHASSIS) Chassis ground connection
17 (BATT–) Negative side of operating power input
18 (BATT+) Positive side of operating power input

9469200994 2-3
Generator Current Sensing

The DGC-2020ES has sensing inputs for A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase generator current. A DGC-
2020ES with a style number of 1xx has a 1 Aac nominal current sensing and a DGC-2020ES with a style
number of 5xx indicates 5 Aac nominal current sensing. Generator current sensing terminals are listed in
Table 2-3.
Table 2-3. Generator Current Sensing Terminals
Terminals Description
37 (IA–) A-phase current sensing input
38 (IA+)
35 (IB–) B-phase current sensing input
36 (IB+)
33 (IC–) C-phase current sensing input
34 (IC+)
Note
Unused current sensing inputs should be shorted to minimize noise
pickup.
Caution
Generator current sensing terminals 37 (IA–), 35 (IB–), and 33 (IC–)
must be terminated to ground for proper operation.
Generator Voltage Sensing

The DGC-2020ES accepts either line-to-line or line-to-neutral generator sensing voltage over the range of
12 to 576 volts, rms line-to-line. Generator voltage sensing terminals are listed in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4. Generator Voltage Sensing Terminals
40 (GEN VN) Neutral generator voltage sensing input
41 (GEN VC) C-phase generator voltage sensing input
43 (GEN VB) B-phase generator voltage sensing input
45 (GEN VA) A-phase generator voltage sensing input

Bus Voltage Sensing

Sensing of bus voltage enables the DGC-2020ES to detect failures of the mains (utility). The DGC-
2020ES senses A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase bus voltage. Bus voltage sensing terminals are listed in
Table 2-5.

2-4 9469200994
Table 2-5. Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals

46 (BUS VA) A-phase bus voltage sensing input
48 (BUS VB) B-phase bus voltage sensing input
50 (BUS VC) C-phase bus voltage sensing input

Analog Engine Sender Inputs

Inputs are provided for oil pressure, fuel level, and coolant temperature senders. For a listing of oil
pressure, fuel level, and coolant temperature senders that are compatible with the DGC-2020ES, refer to
the Engine Sender Inputs chapter in the Configuration manual. Analog engine sender input terminals are
listed in Table 2-6.
Table 2-6. Sender Input Terminals
1 (FUEL) Fuel level sender input
2 (SENDER COM) Sender return terminal
52 (OIL) Oil pressure sender input
53 (COOLANT) Coolant temperature sender input
Magnetic Pickup Input

The magnetic pickup input accepts a speed signal over the range of 3 to 35 volts peak and 32 to 10,000
hertz. Magnetic pickup input terminals are listed in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7. Magnetic Pickup Input Terminals
31 (MPU–) Magnetic pickup return input
32 (MPU+) Magnetic pickup positive input
Contact Sensing Inputs

Contact sensing inputs consist of seven programmable inputs. The programmable inputs accept normally
open, dry contacts. Terminal 17 (BATT–) serves as the common return line for the programmable inputs.
While input 1 is programmed to recognize an emergency stop input by default, it can be programmed for
any function. Information about configuring the programmable inputs is provided in the Contact Inputs
chapter in the Configuration manual. Contact sensing input terminals are listed in Table 2-8.
Table 2-8. Contact Sensing Inputs
17 (BATT–) Common return line for programmable contact inputs
3 (INPUT 1) Programmable contact input 1 (ESTOP by default)
4 (INPUT 2) Programmable contact input 2

9469200994 2-5
Output Contacts
The DGC-2020ES has three sets of fixed-function output contacts: Pre, Start, and Run. The Pre contacts
supply battery power to the engine glow plugs, the Start contacts supply power to the starter solenoid,
and the Run contacts supply power to the fuel solenoid. Connections to the three sets of contacts are
made at terminals 19 through 24. The Pre, Start, and Run relay terminals are listed in Table 2-9.
Table 2-9. Fixed-Function Output Contact Terminals
19 (START) Start output contact (Start solenoid)
20 (START)
21 (RUN) Run output contact (Fuel solenoid)
22 (RUN)
23 (PRE) Pre-start output contact (Glow plugs)
24 (PRE)
Four programmable output contacts are provided in two sets. Each set of two output contacts share a
common terminal. Programmable output contact terminals are listed in Table 2-10.
Table 2-10. Programmable Output Contact Terminals
25 (COM 1, 2) Common connection for outputs 1 and 2
26 (OUT 1) Programmable output 1
28 (COM 3, 4) Common connection for outputs 3 and 4
USB Interface
A mini-B USB socket enables local communication with a PC running BESTCOMSPlus software. The
DGC-2020ES is connected to a PC using a standard USB cable equipped with a type A plug on one end
(PC termination) and a mini-B plug on the other end (DGC-2020ES termination).
CAN Interface
These terminals provide communication using the SAE J1939 protocol or the MTU protocol and provide
high-speed communication between the DGC-2020ES and an ECU on an electronically controlled
engine. Connections between the ECU and DGC-2020ES should be made with twisted-pair, shielded
cable. CAN interface terminals are listed in Table 2-11. For typical CAN connections, refer to the Typical
Connections chapter.

2-6 9469200994
Table 2-11. CAN Interface Terminals

13 (CAN H) CAN high connection
14 (CAN L) CAN low connection
15 (SHIELD) CAN drain connection
Note
2020ES
Optional Remote Display Panel Connections

Terminals are provided for connection with the optional Remote Display Panel. These terminals provide
dc operating power to the Remote Display Panel and enable communication between the DGC-2020ES
and Remote Display Panel. Twisted-pair conductors are recommended for connecting the communication
terminals of the DGC-2020ES and Remote Display Panel. Communication may become unreliable if the
connection wires exceed 1,219 m (4,000 ft). Table 2-12 lists the DGC-2020ES terminals that connect to
the Remote Display Panel.
Table 2-12. Remote Display Panel Interface Terminals
10 (RDP TxD–) Remote Display Panel terminal (TxD–)
11 (RDP TxD+) Remote Display Panel terminal (TxD+)
17 (BATT–) Remote Display Panel terminal DC COM (–)
18 (BATT+) Remote Display Panel terminal 12/24 (+)

9469200994 3-1
3 • Typical Connections
Typical connection diagrams are provided in this chapter as a guide when wiring the DGC-2020ES for
communication, mechanical senders, contact inputs and outputs, sensing, and control power.
Connections for Typical Applications

Typical connections for applications using three-phase wye, three-phase delta, single-phase AB, and
single-phase AC generator voltage sensing are shown on the following pages.
Figure 3-1 illustrates typical three-phase wye generator voltage sensing connections.
GEN CKT MAINS CKT
BKR L BKR
L1
O A
GENERATOR L2 A B
≤ 480V
L3 D
C
N
N
1 1 1
38 37 36 35 34 33 45 43 41 40 46 48 50
M 2
P
IA+
IA–
IB+
IB–
IC+
IC–
GEN VA
GEN VB
GEN VC
GEN VN
BUS VA
BUS VB
BUS VC
P0071-48
U
32 MPU+
25
31 MPU–
OUT 1 26
52 OIL OUT 2 27
3
Analog 53 COOLANT
Senders
1 FUEL 28

4
OUT 4 30
9 INPUT 7
GLOW PLUGS
5
8 INPUT 6 PRE 24 6
To ECU
Key-on
Terminal
6 INPUT 4
Mini-B FUEL
5 INPUT 3 RUN 22
USB SOLENOID
5
4 INPUT 2 21
485 SHIELD
RDP TxD +
RDP TxD –
3
CHASSIS

SHIELD
BATT+
BATT–
CAN H
CAN L
START
START 20 SOLENOID
5
13 14 15 10 11 12 16 17 18 19
6
To ECU
CAN bus
12/24V
3 7
Figure 3-1. Three-Phase Wye Connections for Typical Applications

3-2 9469200994
Figure 3-2 illustrates typical three-phase delta generator voltage sensing connections.
GEN CKT MAINS CKT

BKR L BKR
L1
O A
GENERATOR L2 A B
≤ 480V
L3 D
C
N
N
1 1 1
38 37 36 35 34 33 45 43 41 40 46 48 50
M 2
P
IA+
IA–
IB+
IB–
IC+
IC–
GEN VA
GEN VB
GEN VC
GEN VN
BUS VA
BUS VB
BUS VC
P0071-49
U
32 MPU+
25
31 MPU–
OUT 1 26
52 OIL OUT 2 27
3
Analog 53 COOLANT
Senders
1 FUEL 28

4
OUT 4 30
9 INPUT 7
GLOW PLUGS
5
8 INPUT 6 PRE 24 6
To ECU
Key-on
Terminal
6 INPUT 4
Mini-B FUEL
5 INPUT 3 RUN 22
USB SOLENOID
5
4 INPUT 2 21
485 SHIELD
RDP TxD +
RDP TxD –
3
CHASSIS

SHIELD
BATT+
BATT–
CAN H
CAN L
START
START 20 SOLENOID
5
13 14 15 10 11 12 16 17 18 19
6
To ECU
CAN bus
12/24V
3 7
Figure 3-2. Three-Phase Delta Connections for Typical Applications

9469200994 3-3
Figure 3-3 illustrates typical single-phase A-B generator voltage sensing connections.
GEN CKT L MAINS CKT

BKR BKR
L1 O
A
L2
A
GENERATOR
≤ 480V D B
N
N
1 1
38 37 36 35 34 33 45 43 41 40 46 48 50
M 2
P
GEN VA
GEN VB
GEN VC
GEN VN
IA+
IA–
IB+
IB–
IC+
IC–
BUS VA
BUS VB
BUS VC
P0071-50
U
32 MPU+
25
31 MPU–
OUT 1 26
52 OIL OUT 2 27
3
Analog 53 COOLANT
Senders
1 FUEL 28

4
OUT 4 30
9 INPUT 7
GLOW PLUGS
5
8 INPUT 6 PRE 24 6
To ECU
Key-on
Terminal
6 INPUT 4
Mini-B FUEL
5 INPUT 3 RUN 22
USB SOLENOID
5
4 INPUT 2 21
485 SHIELD
RDP TxD +
RDP TxD –
3
CHASSIS

SHIELD
BATT+
BATT–
CAN H
CAN L
START
START 20 SOLENOID
5
13 14 15 10 11 12 16 17 18 19
6
To ECU
CAN bus
12/24V
3 7
Figure 3-3. Single-Phase A-B Connections for Typical Applications

3-4 9469200994
Figure 3-4 illustrates typical single-phase A-C generator voltage sensing connections.
GEN CKT L MAINS CKT
BKR BKR
L1 O
A
L3
A
GENERATOR
≤ 480V D C
N
N
1 1
38 37 36 35 34 33 45 43 41 40 46 48 50
M 2
P
GEN VA
GEN VB
GEN VC
GEN VN
IA+
IA–
IB+
IB–
IC+
IC–
BUS VA
BUS VB
BUS VC
P0071-51
U
32 MPU+
25
31 MPU–
OUT 1 26
52 OIL OUT 2 27
3
Analog 53 COOLANT
Senders
1 FUEL 28

4
OUT 4 30
9 INPUT 7
GLOW PLUGS
5
8 INPUT 6 PRE 24 6
To ECU
Key-on
Terminal
6 INPUT 4
Mini-B FUEL
5 INPUT 3 RUN 22
USB SOLENOID
5
4 INPUT 2 21
485 SHIELD
RDP TxD +
RDP TxD –
3
CHASSIS

SHIELD
BATT+
BATT–
CAN H
CAN L
START
START 20 SOLENOID
5
13 14 15 10 11 12 16 17 18 19
6
To ECU
CAN bus
12/24V
3 7
Figure 3-4. Single-Phase A-C Connections for Typical Applications

9469200994 3-5
CAN Connections
Typical CAN connections are shown in Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6.
Note
2020ES.
CEM-2020
(Optional)
Stub Bus
CAN-H
DGC-2020ES Engine
CAN-L
P0067-85
120 ohm 120 ohm
Devices
Figure 3-5. CAN Interface with DGC-2020ES Providing One End of the Bus
CEM-2020
(Optional)
Stub Bus
CAN-H
Other
Engine
Devices
CAN-L
P0067-86
120 ohm 120 ohm
DGC-2020ES
Figure 3-6. CAN Interface with Other Devices

3-6 9469200994
CEM-2020 Connections
The CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module) is an optional module that may be installed with the DGC-
2020ES. It is a remote auxiliary device that provides additional contact inputs and outputs for the DGC-
2020ES. This module interfaces to the DGC-2020ES via CAN, thus the CAN terminals are the only
common connections (Figure 3-7) between the DGC-2020ES and CEM-2020. Refer to the CEM-2020
chapter for more information.
Refer to Terminals and Connectors for details on DGC-2020ES CAN connections.
GND
CANH DGC-2020ES
CANL
GND/SHIELD
GND
CANH
CANH CEM-2020
CANL
CANL
P0067-87
Figure 3-7. DGC-2020ES and CEM-2020 CAN Connections
Installation for CE Systems

For CE compliant systems, it may be required to route ac voltage and current sensing wires separately
from other wires.


9469200994 4-1
4 • Power Input
Control power for the DGC-2020ES is typically supplied by the genset starter battery. Power from the
battery is supplied to an internal power supply that provides power for DGC-2020ES logic, protection, and
control functions.
Nominal Voltage Input and Acceptable Range of Input Voltage

A nominal voltage of 12 or 24 Vdc within a range of 6 to 32 Vdc is accepted. Control power must be of the
correct polarity. Although reverse polarity will not cause damage, the DGC-2020ES will not operate.
Terminal Assignments
Input power is applied to terminals 18 (BATT+), 17 (BATT–), and 16 (CHASSIS).
Power Consumption
The amount of power consumed by the DGC-2020ES varies based on the selected mode. The power
saving Sleep mode consumes 4.5 W with all relays de-energized. The Normal Operational Mode
consumes 6.5 watts in Run mode with the LCD heater off and 3 relays energized. The Maximum
Operational Mode consumes 14 watts in Run mode with the LCD heater on and 7 relays energized.
Battery Ride-Through Capability

Starting at 10 Vdc, withstands cranking ride-through down to 0 Vdc for 50 milliseconds.
Fuse Protection
To follow UL guidelines, a 5 A maximum, 32 Vdc supplementary fuse must be implemented in the battery
input circuit to the DGC-2020ES.
DGC-2020ES Power Input

4-2 9469200994
Power Input DGC-2020ES

9469200994 5-1
5 • Voltage and Current Sensing

The DGC-2020ES senses generator voltage, generator current, and bus voltage through dedicated,
isolated inputs.
Generator Voltage
The DGC-2020ES accepts either line-to-line or line-to-neutral generator sensing voltage over the range of
12 to 576 volts, rms line-to-line. Single-phase generator voltage is sensed across phases A and B.
Generator voltage sensing terminals are listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1. Generator Voltage Sensing Terminals
40 (GEN VN) Neutral generator voltage sensing input
41 (GEN VC) C-phase generator voltage sensing input
43 (GEN VB) B-phase generator voltage sensing input
45 (GEN VA) A-phase generator voltage sensing input
Bus Voltage
Bus sensing over the range of 12 to 576 volts rms line-to-line is accepted by the DGC-2020ES. Sensing
of bus voltage enables the DGC-2020ES to detect failures of the mains (utility). Controllers with style
number xx2 measure bus voltage sensing to perform automatic mains failure transfers. Single-phase bus
voltage is sensed across phases A and B. Bus voltage sensing terminals are listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals
46 (BUS VA) A-phase bus voltage sensing input
48 (BUS VB) B-phase bus voltage sensing input
50 (BUS VC) C-phase bus voltage sensing input
Generator Current
The DGC-2020ES has sensing inputs for A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase generator current. Depending
on the style number, a DGC-2020ES has a nominal sensing current rating of 1 Aac or 5 Aac. A style
number of 1xx indicates 1 Aac nominal current sensing and a style number of 5xx indicates 5 Aac
nominal current sensing. Generator current sensing terminals are listed in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3. Generator Current Sensing Terminals
38 (IA+)
A-phase generator current sensing input
37 (IA–)
36 (IB+)
B-phase generator current sensing input
35 (IB–)
34 (IC+)
C-phase generator current sensing input
33 (IC–)
DGC-2020ES Voltage and Current Sensing

5-2 9469200994
Note
Unused current sensing inputs should be shorted to minimize noise
pickup.
Caution
Generator current sensing terminals 37 (IA–), 35 (IB–), and 33 (IC–)
must be terminated to ground for proper operation.
Voltage and Current Sensing DGC-2020ES

9469200994 6-1
6 • Speed Signal Inputs

The DGC-2020ES uses signals from the generator voltage sensing inputs and magnetic pickup (MPU)
input to detect machine speed.
Magnetic Pickup
Voltage supplied by a magnetic pickup is scaled and conditioned for use by the internal circuitry as a
speed signal source. The MPU input accepts a signal over the range of 3 to 35 volts peak and 32 to
10,000 hertz.
Terminals
Magnetic pickup connections are provided at terminals 31 (+) and 32 (–).
Generator Sensing Voltage

The generator voltage sensed by the DGC-2020ES is used to measure frequency and can be used to
measure machine speed.
Terminals
Sensing voltage is applied to terminals 45 (A-phase), 43 (B-phase).
DGC-2020ES Speed Signal Inputs

6-2 9469200994
Speed Signal Inputs DGC-2020ES

9469200994 7-1
7 • Specifications
DGC-2020ES electrical and physical characteristics are listed in the following paragraphs.
Control Power
Nominal ............................................ 12 or 24 Vdc
Range ............................................... 6 to 32 Vdc
Terminals.......................................... 18 (+), 17 (–), 16 (chassis ground)
Power Consumption
Sleep Mode ...................................... 4.5 W - LCD heater off, all relays de-energized
Normal Operational Mode ................ 6.5 W - Run mode, LCD heater off, 3 relays energized
Maximum Operational Mode ............ 14 W - Run mode, LCD heater on, 7 relays energized
Battery Ride Through

Starting at 10 Vdc, withstands cranking ride-through down to 0 Vdc for 50 ms
Current Sensing
Burden .............................................. 1 VA
Terminals.......................................... 38, 37 (A-phase)
36, 35 (B-phase)
34, 33 (C-phase)
1 Aac Current Sensing

Continuous Rating ............................ 0.02 to 1.0 Aac
1 Second Rating ............................... 5 Aac
0.050 Second Rating ........................ 10 Aac
5 Aac Current Sensing

Continuous Rating ............................ 0.1 to 5.0 Aac
1 Second Rating ............................... 25 Aac
0.050 Second Rating ........................ 50 Aac
Voltage Sensing
Range ............................................... 12 to 576 V rms, line-to-line
Frequency ........................................ 50/60 Hz
Frequency Range ............................. 10 to 72 Hz
Burden .............................................. 1 VA
1 Second Rating ............................... 720 V rms
Generator Sensing
Configuration .................................... Line-to-line or line-to-neutral
Generator Sensing Terminals .......... 45 (A-phase)
43 (B-phase)
41 (C-phase)
40 (Neutral)
DGC-2020ES Specifications
7-2 9469200994
Bus Sensing
Configuration .................................... Line-to-line
Bus Sensing Terminals .................... 46 (A-phase)
(Optional with style number xx2) 48 (B-phase)
50 (C-phase)
Contact Sensing
Contact sensing inputs include seven programmable inputs. All inputs accept dry contacts.
Time from a DGC-2020ES input application to:
• Shutdown the generator via an alarm = 490 ms max
• Close a relay on board the DGC-2020ES = 215 ms max
• Close a relay on board the CEM-2020 = 400 ms max
Notes
A contact input is true (on) if the input is connected to battery ground
with a resistance of less than 240 ohms.
The maximum length of wire that can be accommodated depends on
the resistance of the wire, and the resistance of the contacts of the
device driving the input at the far end of the wire.
The maximum wire length can be calculated as follows:
Lmax = (240 – Rdevice)/(Resistance per Foot of Desired Wire)
Terminals
Input 1 .............................................. 3, 17
Input 2 .............................................. 4, 17
Input 3 .............................................. 5, 17
Input 4 .............................................. 6, 17
Input 5 .............................................. 7, 17
Input 6 .............................................. 8, 17
Input 7 .............................................. 9, 17
Engine System Inputs

Stated accuracies are subject to the accuracy of the senders used. Values within these ranges are
deemed “good” and the DGC-2020ES will use them for the appropriate calculation and protection. Values
outside these ranges are deemed “bad” and the DGC-2020ES will begin timing towards a sender failure
condition.
Fuel Level Sensing

Resistance Range ............................ 5 to 250 Ω nominal
Terminals.......................................... 1, 2 (sender common)
Accuracy........................................... ±1.3 Ω or ±2.1% of actual resistance
Coolant Temperature Sensing

Resistance Range ............................ 5 to 2,750 Ω nominal
Accuracy........................................... ±6 Ω or ±2.4% of actual resistance
Specifications DGC-2020ES
9469200994 7-3
Oil Pressure Sensing

Resistance Range ............................ 5 to 250 Ω nominal
Accuracy........................................... ±1.4 Ω or ±2.3% of actual resistance
Engine Speed Sensing

Magnetic Pickup
Voltage Range ................................. 3 to 35 V peak (6 to 70 V peak-peak)
Frequency Range ............................. 32 to 10,000 Hz
Terminals.......................................... 32 (+), 31 (–)
Generator Voltage
Range ............................................... 12 to 576 V rms
Terminals.......................................... 45 (A-phase)
43 (B-phase)
41 (C-phase)
Output Contacts
Start, Run, and Prestart Relays
Rating ............................................... 5 A, 28 Vdc—general purpose, 1.2 A pilot duty, the load must be in
parallel with a diode rated at least 3 times the coil current and 3
times the coil voltage.
Terminals
START.............................................. 19, 20
RUN.................................................. 21, 22
PRE .................................................. 23, 24
Programmable Relays (4)

Rating ............................................... 2 A, 28 Vdc—general purpose, 1.2 A pilot duty, the load must be in
parallel with a diode rated at least 3 times the coil current and 3
times the coil voltage.
Terminals
Output 1............................................ 26, 25 (common)
Output 2............................................ 27, 25 (common)
Output 3............................................ 29, 28 (common)
Output 4............................................ 30, 28 (common)
The programmable relays share common terminals: terminal 25 is used for outputs 1 and 2, terminal 28 is
used for outputs 3 and 4.
Metering
Generator and Bus Voltage (rms)
Metering Range ................................ 0 to 576 Vac (direct measurement)
577 to 99,999 Vac (through VT using VT ratio setting)
VT Ratio Range ................................ 1:1 to 125:1 in primary increments of 1
Accuracy* ......................................... ±3.0% of programmed rated voltage or ±3 Vac
Display Resolution ........................... 1 Vac
* Voltage metering indicates 0 V when generator voltage is below 2% of the full-scale rating.
7-4 9469200994
Generator Current (rms)

Generator current is measured at the secondary windings of user-supplied 1 A or 5 A CTs.
Metering Range ................................ 0 to 5,000 Aac
CT Primary Range ........................... 1 to 5,000 Aac in primary increments of 1 Aac
Accuracy* ......................................... ±3.0% of programmed rated current or ±3 Aac
Display Resolution ........................... 1 Aac
* Current metering indicates 0 A when generator current is below 2% of the full-scale rating.
Generator and Bus Frequency

Frequency is sensed through the generator and bus voltage inputs (phases A and B).
Metering Range ................................ 10 to 72 Hz
Accuracy........................................... ±0.25% or 0.05 Hz
Display Resolution ........................... 0.1 Hz
Apparent Power
Indicates total kVA and individual line kVA (4-wire, line-to-neutral or 3-wire, line-to-line).
Measurement/Calculation Methods
Total ................................................. kVA = (VL-L × IL ×√3) ÷ 1000
4-Wire, Line-to-Neutral ..................... kVA calculated with respect to neutral
3-Wire, Line-to-Line .......................... A-phase kVA = VAB × IA ÷ 1000 ÷ √3
B-phase kVA = VBC × IB ÷ 1000 ÷ √3
C-phase kVA = VCA × IC ÷ 1000 ÷ √3
Accuracy........................................... ±5% of the full-scale indication or ±6 kVA ∗
∗ Applies when temperature is between −40°C to +70°C. KVA metering indicates 0 kVA when the
generator kVA is below 2% of the full-scale rating.
Power Factor
Metering Range ................................ 0.2 leading to 0.2 lagging
Calculation Method .......................... PF = cosine of the angle between phase AB voltage (Vab) and
phase A current (Ia) *
Accuracy........................................... ±0.02 †
* In single-phase AC-connected machines, it is the cosine of the angle between phase CA voltage
(Vca) and phase C current (Ic).
† Applies when temperature is between –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158°F).
Note
must be rotating in the same phase sequence as dictated by the
generator phase rotation setting.
Real Power
Indicates total kW and individual line kW (4-wire, line-to-neutral or 3-wire line-to-line)
Measurement/Calculation Methods
Total ................................................. PF × Total kVA
4-Wire, Line-to-Neutral ..................... kW calculated with respect to neutral
9469200994 7-5
3-Wire, Line-to-Line .......................... A-phase kW = VAB × IA × PF ÷ 1000 ÷ √3

B-phase kW = VBC × IB × PF ÷ 1000 ÷ √3
C-phase kW = VCA × IC × PF ÷ 1000 ÷ √3
Accuracy........................................... ±5% of the full-scale indication or ±4 kW ∗
∗ Applies when temperature is between –40°C to +70°C. KW metering indicates 0 kW when the
generator kW is below 2% of the full-scale rating.
Oil Pressure
Metering Range ................................ 0 to 150 psi, 0 to 10.3 bar, or 0 to 1,034 kPa
Accuracy........................................... ±3% of actual indication or ±2 psi, ±0.12 bar, or ±12 kPa (subject to
accuracy of sender)
Display Resolution ........................... 1 psi, 0.1 bar, or 1 kPa
Coolant Temperature
Metering Range ................................ 32 to 410°F or 0 to 204°C
Accuracy........................................... ±3% of actual indication or ±2° (subject to accuracy of sender)
Battery Voltage
Metering Range ................................ 6 to 32 Vdc
Accuracy........................................... ±3% of actual indication or ±0.2 Vdc
Display Resolution ........................... 0.1 Vdc
Engine RPM
Metering Range ................................ 0 to 4,500 rpm
Accuracy* ......................................... ±2% of actual indication or ±2 rpm
Display Resolution ........................... 2 rpm
* When engine speed is below 2% of full-scale, reported rpm is 0.
Engine Run Time

Engine run time is retained in nonvolatile memory.
Metering Range ................................ 0 to 99,999 hours
Update Interval ................................. 6 min
Accuracy........................................... ±1% of actual indication or ±12 min
Display Resolution ........................... 1 minute
Maintenance Timer
Maintenance timer indicates the time remaining until genset service is due. Value is retained in
nonvolatile memory.
Metering Range ................................ 0 to 5,000 hours
Update Interval ................................. 6 min
Accuracy........................................... ±1% or actual indication or ±12 min
Display Resolution ........................... 1 minute
Fuel Level
Metering Range ................................ 0 to 100%
Accuracy........................................... ±3% (subject to accuracy of sender)
Display Resolution ........................... 1.0%
7-6 9469200994
Generator Protection Functions

Overvoltage (59) and Undervoltage (27)
Pickup Range ................................... 70 to 1,000 Vac
Pickup Increment ............................. 1 Vac
Inhibit Frequency Range .................. 20 to 66 Hz (27 function only)
Activation Delay Range .................... 0 to 30 s
Activation Delay Increment .............. 0.1 s
Note
The maximum voltage that can be safely applied to the DGC-2020ES
is 576 V. The pickup range is higher so that when the low-line override
is used, and the scale factor is 0.5 or less, effective protection levels of
500 V can be reached with a scale factor of 0.5.
Underfrequency (81U) and Overfrequency (81O)

Pickup Range ................................... 45 to 66 Hz
Pickup Increment ............................. 0.1 Hz
Inhibit Voltage Range ....................... 70 to 576 Vac (81U function only)
Overcurrent (50)
Pickup Range ................................... 0.18 to 1.18 Aac (1 A current sensing)
0.9 to 7.75 Aac (5 A current sensing)
Time Dial Range .............................. 0 to 7,200 s (fixed time curve)
Time Dial Increment ......................... 0.1
Phase Imbalance (47)

Pickup Range ................................... 5 to 100 Vac
Pickup Increment ............................. 1 Vac
Logic Timers
Hours Setting Range ........................ 0 to 250
Hours Setting Increment .................. 1
Minutes Setting Range ..................... 0 to 250
Minutes Setting Increment ............... 1
Seconds Setting Range ................... 0 to 1,800
Seconds Setting Increment .............. 0.1
Accuracy........................................... ±15 ms
Communication Interface
USB
Specification Compatibility ............... USB 2.0
Data Transfer Speed ........................ 115,200 baud
Connector Type ................................ Mini-B jack
RDP-110
Minimum Wire Size .......................... 20 AWG
9469200994 7-7
Maximum Wire Length ..................... 4,000 feet (1,219 meters)

Terminals.......................................... 11 (RDP TxD+), 10 (RDP TxD–)
CAN
Differential Bus Voltage.................... 1.5 to 3 Vdc
Maximum Voltage ............................ –32 to +32 Vdc with respect to negative battery terminal
Communication Rate ........................ 250 kb/s
Terminals.......................................... 14 (low), 13 (high), and 15 (shield)
Notes
1. If the DGC-2020ES is providing one end of the J1939 bus, a 120 ohm, ½
watt terminating resistor should be installed across terminals 14 (CANL)
and 13 (CANH).
2. If the DGC-2020ES is not providing one end of the J1939 bus, the stub
connecting the DGC-2020ES to the bus should not exceed 914 mm (3 ft)
in length.
grounded elsewhere, do not connect the drain to the DGC-2020ES.
Real-Time Clock
Clock has leap year and selectable daylight saving time correction. Backup capacitor and backup battery
sustain timekeeping during losses of DGC-2020ES control power.
Resolution ........................................ 1 s
Accuracy........................................... ±1.73 s/d at 25°C
Clock Holdup
Capacitor Holdup Time .................... Up to 24 hours depending on conditions
Battery Holdup Time ........................ Approximately 10 years depending on conditions
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

Display ............................................ 128 by 64 dot pixels LCD with LED Backlight
Operating Temperature .................... –40 to +70°C (–40 to +158°F)
Storage Temperature ....................... –40 to +80°C (–40 to +176°F)
LCD Heater
The ambient temperature is monitored by a temperature sensor located near the LCD inside the DGC-
2020ES. The LCD heater turns on when the ambient temperature falls below 0°C (32°F). The heater turns
off when the ambient temperature rises above 5°C (41°F). This range of operation implements 5°C (9°F)
of hysteresis between when the heater turns on and turns off.
Type Tests
Shock and Vibration ......................... EN60068-2-6
Dielectric Strength ............................ IEC 255-5
Impulse ............................................ EN60664-1
Transients......................................... EN61000-4-4
Static Discharge ............................... EN61000-4-2
7-8 9469200994
Shock
Withstands 15 G in three perpendicular planes.
Vibration
Tested in three mutually perpendicular planes for 8 hours over the following ranges:
3 to 25 Hz at 0.063 inches (1.6 mm), peak amplitude
25 to 2,000 Hz at 5G
Radio Interference
Type tested using a 5 W, hand-held transceiver operating at random frequencies centered around 144
and 440 MHz with the antenna located within 150 mm (6”) of the device in both vertical and horizontal
planes.
HALT (Highly Accelerated Life Testing)

HALT is used by Basler Electric to prove that our products will provide the user with many years of
reliable service. HALT subjects the device to extremes in temperature, shock, and vibration to simulate
years of operation, but in a much shorter period span. HALT allows Basler Electric to evaluate all possible
design elements that will add to the life of this device. As an example of some of the extreme testing
conditions, the DGC-2020ES was subjected to temperature tests (tested over a temperature range of
–100°C to +130°C), vibration tests (of 5 to 50 G at +20°C), and temperature/vibration tests (tested at 50 G
over a temperature range of –95°C to +125°C). Combined temperature and vibration testing at these
extremes proves that the DGC-2020ES is expected to provide long-term operation in a rugged
environment. Note that the vibration and temperature extremes listed in this paragraph are specific to
HALT and do not reflect recommended operation levels.
Ignition System
Tested in close proximity to an unshielded, unsuppressed Altronic DISN 800 Ignition System.
Environment
Operating Temperature .................... –40 to +158°F (–40 to +70°C)
Storage Temperature ....................... –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C)
Humidity ........................................... IEC 68-2-38
Salt Spray ......................................... IEC 68-2-52
Ingress Protection ............................ IEC IP56 for front panel
UL Approval
The DGC-2020ES is a Recognized Component applicable to the Canadian and US safety standards and
requirements by UL. The product is covered under UL File (E97035 FTPM2/FTPM8) and evaluated to the
following standards through UL:
• UL6200
• CSA C22.2 No. 14
CSA Certification
The DGC-2020ES is Certificated under CSA report 1042505 (LR23131-138S) and evaluated to the
following standards through CSA:
• CSA C22.2 No. 0
• CSA C22.2 No. 14
9469200994 7-9
CE Compliance
This product has been evaluated and complies with the relevant essential requirements set forth in the
following EC Directives and by the EU legislation:
• Low Voltage Devices (LVD) - 2014/35/EU
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - 2014/30/EU
• Hazardous Substances (ROHS2) -2011/65/EU
Harmonized Standards used for evaluation:
• EN 50178 - Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations
• EN 61000-6-4 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards, Emission Standard for
Industrial Environments
• EN 61000-6-2 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards, Immunity for Industrial
Environments
• EN 50581 – Technical Documentation for the Assessment of Electrical and Electric Products with
Respect to the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (ROHS2)
NFPA Compliance
Designed to comply with NFPA Standard 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power.
EAC Mark (Eurasian Conformity)

• TC RUUS.HO03.B.00742
Physical
Weight .............................................. 1.9 lb (0.86 kg)
Dimensions....................................... See the Mounting chapter.
7-10 9469200994
9469200994 8-1
8 • Maintenance
Preventive maintenance consists of periodically checking that the connections between the DGC-2020ES
and the system are clean and tight. Periodically check that the mounting hardware is clean and fastened
with the proper amount of torque. DGC-2020ES units are manufactured using state-of-the-art, surface-
mount technology. These components are encased in potting material. As such, Basler Electric
recommends that no repair procedures be attempted by anyone other than Basler Electric personnel.
Storage
This device contains long-life aluminum electrolytic capacitors. For devices that are not in service (spares
in storage), the life of these capacitors can be maximized by energizing the device for 30 minutes once
per year.
DGC-2020ES Maintenance
8-2 9469200994
Maintenance DGC-2020ES
9469200994 9-1
Communications

the main bus.
Inputs and Outputs

Step 1. Verify that all wiring is properly connected. Refer to the Typical Connections chapter.

Metering/Display
9-2 9469200994

43, and 45).

36, 37, and 38.


rotation.

ground.
9469200994 9-3
overall system.

manual.
screen.
DETECTION screen.
9-4 9469200994
original diagram.

original diagram.

Step 5: Verify the wiring to the breaker from the 14BDGC-2020ES. If it seems OK, you can do a
manual close and open by modifying the programmable logic. Map some unused outputs to the
9469200994 9-5
OPEN and CLOSE outputs from the Gen Breaker Block in the programmable logic. Map a
virtual switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Map another
virtual switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Connect with
original diagram.

original diagram.

CEM DEBUG
and the DGC-2020ES.
etc.
9-6 9469200994
Fax: +1 618.654.2351 P.R. CHINA Tel: +65 68.44.6445
DGC-2020ES
Configuration Instruction Manual

Tel +1 618.654.2341 • Fax +1 618.654.2351 9469200995, Rev B
December 2019
9469200995 i
Preface
This instruction manual provides information about the configuration of the DGC-2020ES Digital Genset
• Device information and security settings
• Configuration via BESTCOMSPlus® and the front panel
• Communication settings
• Timekeeping
• Inputs and outputs
• Breaker management, synchronizer, bias control, and multiple generator management
• Alarm configuration
• Protection settings
• BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic
• Troubleshooting

Warning!

Caution
Note

9469200995 Configuration (this manual)
DGC-2020ES Preface
ii 9469200995

www.basler.com
info@basler.com
Tel: +1 618.654.2341
Fax: +1 618.654.2351

All rights reserved
Warning!
manual.
Preface DGC-2020ES
9469200995 iii
Revision History
histories.

Manual
Change
Revision and Date
B, Dec-19 • Removed Rev Letter from all pages.
• Removed standalone Revision History chapter. (Revision histories
for hardware, firmware, and software are now in separate documents
on www.basler.com.)
• Added support for firmware version 1.04.00 and BESTCOMSPlus
version 4.01.00.
A, Sep-18 • Added description of voltage sensing fail function in the Engine
Sender Inputs chapter
• Updated Revision History chapter
DGC-2020ES Revision History

iv 9469200995
Revision History DGC-2020ES

9469200995 v
Contents
Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Configuration through the Front Panel ....................................................................................................... 2-1
BESTCOMSPlus® ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Communication .......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Device Configuration .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Timekeeping ............................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Engine Sender Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 7-1
Contact Inputs ............................................................................................................................................ 8-1
Contact Outputs ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1
Breaker Management............................................................................................................................... 10-1
Alarm Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 11-1
Generator Protection ................................................................................................................................ 12-1
BESTlogic™Plus ...................................................................................................................................... 13-1
Exhaust Treatment ................................................................................................................................... 14-1
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................... 15-1
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool .................................................................................................... 16-1
DGC-2020ES Contents
vi 9469200995
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200995 1-1
1 • Security
Password protection guards against unauthorized changing of DGC-2020ES settings. Three levels of
password protection are available. Each level is described in the following paragraphs.
• OEM Access. This password level allows access to all settings. The default, OEM-access password
is OEM.
• Settings Access. This password level allows all except uploading of firmware and clearing of device
event log. The default, settings-access password is SET.
• Operator Access. The default, operator-access password is OP. This password level allows all
settings to be read and allows changes to be made to the following:
o LCD Contrast
o Sleep Mode
o Date/Time
o All Sender Fail Time Delays
o Metric Conversion
o Low Fuel Pre-Alarm Level
o Low Fuel Alarm Level
o Pre-Start Contact after Cranking
o Cooldown Time
o Pre-Crank Time Delay
o Reset of Maintenance Interval
o All controls on the Control screen available via the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus®
Changing Passwords
Passwords can be changed only after communication between the PC and DGC-2020ES is established.
Changes to passwords are made through the Device Security Setup screen. Use the Settings Explorer in
BESTCOMSPlus to open the General Settings, Device Security Setup screen.
The content of the Device Security Setup screen depends on the password level used when accessing
the screen. For example, someone logged in with a settings-access password will be able to change only
the settings-access and operator-access passwords - not the OEM-access password.
The BESTCOMSPlus Device Security Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 1-1. All three access levels are
shown.
A password is changed by clicking on the access level, entering the new password, and then clicking on
the Save Password button. DGC-2020ES passwords are case sensitive.
Saving Passwords in a DGC-2020ES Settings File

The passwords can be modified while BESTCOMSPlus is connected to a DGC-2020ES. The settings
from the BESTCOMSPlus session can then be saved into a settings file. The settings file will contain the
new passwords. Also, the passwords in a settings file can be modified off line, saved with the file, and
then later loaded into a DGC-2020ES.
Saving Passwords to a Settings File when On Line

The following procedure describes how to save passwords to a settings file when BESTCOMSPlus is
connected to a DGC-2020ES (on line):
1. When connected to a DGC-2020ES with BESTCOMSPlus, click on SETTINGS EXPLORER >
GENERAL SETTINGS > DEVICE SECURITY.
2. You will be prompted to enter a password.
DGC-2020ES Security
1-2 9469200995
3. Enter a password that is of a level as high as or higher than the password you wish to modify.
BESTCOMSPlus will display all passwords of a level equal to and below the level of the password
that was entered.
4. Click on the password you wish to modify. Type in the new password under the “Password” setting
that became active when the password to modify was clicked.
5. Click the “Save” button to save the new password into BESTCOMSPlus memory (it’s not in the DGC-
2020ES yet).
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all password levels you with to modify.
7. Once all password modifications are complete, in the main menu of BESTCOMSPlus, select Upload
Security from the Communications pull-down menu. This is the step where passwords are sent to the
DGC-2020ES. Failure to perform this step might cause all password modifications to be lost.
8. Close the Device Security tab in BESTCOMSPlus.
9. Re-open the Device Security tab in BESTCOMSPlus. This will read the passwords back out of the
DGC-2020ES.
10. Verify the passwords obtained from the DGC-2020ES are correct.
11. Once all desired settings have been loaded into the DGC-2020ES, save the settings file. The
resulting settings file has the passwords saved as part of the saved settings.
12. At this point, the password information has been successfully saved in the settings file. The process
of saving the passwords into the settings file is complete.
Saving Passwords to a Settings File when Off Line

The following procedure describes how to save passwords to a settings file when working off line:
1. When the settings file is open in BESTCOMSPlus, click on SETTINGS EXPLORER > GENERAL
SETTINGS > DEVICE SECURITY.
3. Enter a password that is of a level as high as or higher than the password you wish to modify.
BESTCOMSPlus will display all passwords of a level equal to and below the level of the password
that was entered.
4. Click on the password you wish to modify. Type in the new password under the “Password” setting
that became active when the password to modify was clicked.
5. Click the “Save” button to save the new password into BESTCOMSPlus memory.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all password levels you wish to modify.
7. Close the Device Security tab in BESTCOMSPlus.
8. Save the settings file.
9. Close the settings file by clicking on the X in the upper right-hand corner of the settings file, or close
BESTCOMSPlus.
10. Restart BESTCOMSPlus if you have shut it down.
11. Re-open the settings file that you have saved with the password information.
12. When the settings file is open in BESTCOMSPlus, click on SETTINGS EXPLORER > GENERAL
SETTINGS > DEVICE SECURITY.
14. Enter the password for the highest level of password modified; it should be the new modified
password.
15. When passwords are shown, verify they are correct.
Security DGC-2020ES
9469200995 1-3
16. At this point the password information has been successfully saved in the settings file. The process of
saving the passwords into the settings file is complete.
Loading Passwords from a Settings File into the DGC-2020ES

1. Connect to the DGC-2020ES with BESTCOMSPlus.
2. Once connected, click the “Open File” button that is used to load a settings file into the DGC-2020ES.
3. You will be prompted asking if you wish to load settings and logic into the DGC-2020ES. Select Yes if
you need to upload settings logic. Select No if all you need to do is update security. If you select No,
the settings file opens into BESTCOMSPlus memory.
4. Whether you have loaded settings and logic to the DGC-2020ES or not, the next step is to select
Upload Security from the Communications pull-down menu.
5. DO NOT try to view the passwords before performing step 4. This would download the existing
passwords from the DGC-2020ES and they will overwrite the new passwords that were loaded into
BESTCOMSPlus memory from opening the settings file.
6. If you are prompted for a password, enter a password of a level equal to that of the highest-level
password you wish to modify.
7. The passwords are uploaded to the DGC-2020ES.
8. After you have uploaded the new passwords, select GENERAL SETTINGS > DEVICE SECURITY
SETUP in the settings explorer of BESTCOMSPlus. Verify the passwords are correct.
9. This concludes loading passwords from a settings file into the DGC-2020ES.
Figure 1-1. Settings Explorer, General Settings, Device Security Setup Screen
DGC-2020ES Security
1-4 9469200995
Security DGC-2020ES
9469200995 2-1
2 • Configuration through the Front Panel

This chapter provides information on configuring DGC-2020ES settings through the front panel.
Display Setup
The DGC-2020ES LCD can be customized to fit the needs of your specific application. The options can
be adjusted using the front panel controls and through BESTCOMSPlus®. The display options are
described below.
The Front Panel HMI screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Explorer under the General
Settings category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > General Settings > Front Panel HMI.
Figure 2-1 shows the BESTCOMSPlus® Front Panel HMI settings screen.
1. LCD Contrast - Adjust this setting to reach the desired level of LCD contrast.
2. Front Panel Sleep Mode - Select Enable to send the DGC-2020ES into sleep mode. In sleep
mode, the LEDs and LCD backlight turn off after 15 minutes of inactivity on the front panel to
minimize battery drain.
3. One Line Diagram Display Enable - Select Enable to display one-line diagram.
4. Engine Hours Display – When Engine Hours Display is enabled, engine run-time hours are
displayed on the front-panel Overview screen.
5. Overview Screen Type – The Overview Screen Type can be set for Text or Symbolic. When set
to Symbolic, the parameters names are displayed as symbols.
6. Exhaust Display – When Exhaust Display is set to Inverted, the LCD background, where exhaust
status is displayed, is dark with light text. When set to Normal, the LCD background is light with
dark text.
7. Exhaust Status Display Screen – The Exhaust Status Display Screen setting defines where DEF
level and exhaust status display are shown. Select Overview Screen to show the DEF level and
exhaust status display on the Overview screen or select All Operating Screens to show the DEF
level and exhaust status display on all screens that automatically appear during normal operation.
8. Battery Charger Display – When Battery Charger Display is enabled, battery charger output
voltage and current are displayed on the front-panel Overview screen.
9. Display Fuel Level Below – Adjust this setting to display fuel level on the front-panel Overview
screen only when the fuel level is below the desired value. When fuel level is not displayed,
engine RPM is displayed in its place.
10. Language Selection - Select from Chinese, English, French, German, or Spanish.
11. Scrolling Screens - Specify the parameters which are to appear on the front-panel LCD display.
a. Configure the Configurable HMI Summary Settings.
b. Set the Scrolling Screen Enable to Enable.
c. Set the Scrolling Screen Scroll Delay parameter to the desired value.
12. Phase Toggle Delay - Set the phase toggle delay to a nonzero value if automatic scrolling
through the phase information in the standard overview screen on the front panel is desired. If it is
left at zero, scrolling through phase information is accomplished using the up and down arrow
buttons.
13. Initializing Message 1 - This parameter defines the first line of text that appears on the front panel
of the DGC-2020ES as it is going through its power up and initializing sequence.
14. Initializing Message 2 - This parameter defines the second line of text that appears on the front
panel of the DGC-2020ES as it is going through its power up and initializing sequence.
DGC-2020ES Configuration through the Front Panel

2-2 9469200995
Figure 2-1. Settings Explorer, General Settings, Front Panel HMI Screen
Settings Menu
The display structure of the Settings menu on the front panel is provided below. Refer to the Controls and
Indicators chapter in the Operation manual for a full description of DGC-2020ES controls and indicators.
GENERAL SETTINGS
● FRONT PANEL HMI
○ SUMMARY VIEW
○ SCROLL DELAY
○ PH TOG DELAY
○ LCD CONTRAST
○ SLEEP MODE
○ LANGUAGE
○ CONFIGURABLE METERING
■ ITEM X (X = 1 to 20)
○ ONE LINE DIAGRAM
○ ENG HRS DISPLAY
○ OVERVIEW
○ EXH DISPLAY
○ EXH DISPL SCRN
○ BATT CHG DISPLAY
○ FUEL LVL DISPLAY
Configuration through the Front Panel DGC-2020ES

9469200995 2-3
● CONFIGURE DATE/TIME
○ YEAR
○ MONTH
○ DAY
○ HOURS
○ MINUTES
○ SECONDS
○ UTC OFFSET
○ DST ENABLED
○ CLK NOT SET WRN
● VIEW DATE/TIME
● VERSION INFO
○ DGC-2020ES
■ FIRMWARE VERSION
■ BOOT CODE VERSION
■ SERIAL NUMBER
■ PART NUMBER
■ MODEL NUMBER
■ LANGUAGE VERSION
■ LANGUAGE PART NUM
■ FONT VERSION
■ FONT PART NUM
■ STYLE CODE
○ CEM-2020 (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
■ SERIAL NUMBER
■ PART NUMBER
■ MODEL NUMBER
■ BUILD DATE
COMMUNICATIONS∗
∗(Visible when the optional J1939 CAN bus is enabled, style code xCx.)
● CAN BUS SETUP
○ CAN BUS SETUP
■ CAN BUS ENABLE
■ DTC ENABLE (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ SPN CONV METHOD (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ CAN BUS ADDR (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENGINE ECU ADDRESS (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ECU OPT SLCT (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ECU PULSING (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENG SHTDN TM (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ PLS CYCL TM (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ECU SET TM (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ RESP TIMEOUT (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ COOL TEMP SRC (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ OIL PRESS SRC (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENGINE RUN TM SRC (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
○ ECU SETUP (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ECU CONF
■ CUMMINS ECU SETUP
□ CUMMINS GEN CONTROL
■ ISUZU ECU SETUP
□ CLEAR ECU MEMORY
□ ESCAPE MODE
■ YANMAR ECU SETUP
□ NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
■ GEN DATA TRANSMIT
■ ENGINE PARAM XMT
■ TRIP RESET (Visible when ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU ADEC,
GM/Doosan, Cummins, or MTU Smart Connect.)
■ START MODE

2-4 9469200995
■ DPF REGENRATE SETUP (Visible when ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU
ADEC, GM/Doosan, Cummins, or MTU Smart Connect.)
□ DPF MANUAL REGEN
□ DPF REGEN DISABLE
■ BATT CHARGER SETUP
□ CHARGER 1 TYPE
□ CHARGER 2 TYPE
■ BATT CHARGR PREALARMS
□ CH1 COMMS FAIL
□ CH1 BATTERY FAIL
□ CH1 CHARGER FAIL
□ CH1 AC OFF
□ CH2 COMMS FAIL
□ CH2 AC OFF
■ SENS CHARGR PREALARMS
□ CH1 THERMAL LIMIT (Visible when CHARGER 1 TYPE is set to SENS)
□ CH1 HI DC VOLTS (Visible when CHARGER 1 TYPE is set to SENS)
□ CH1 LOW DC VOLTS (Visible when CHARGER 1 TYPE is set to SENS)
□ CH1 LO CRANK V (Visible when CHARGER 1 TYPE is set to SENS)
□ CH1 INVLD SETTINGS (Visible when CHARGER 1 TYPE is set to SENS)
□ CH1 SNGL UNIT FL (Visible when CHARGER 1 TYPE is set to SENS)
■ SPEED SELECT (Visible when ECU is configured for Volvo Penta.)
■ ACCEL POSITION (Visible when ECU is configured for Volvo Penta.)
■ MODULE TYPE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ ALIVE MSG (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ SPEED SETUP
□ J1939 RPM ENABLE (Visible when ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta,
MTU ADEC, GM/Doosan, Cummins, or MTU Smart Connect.)
□ ENGINE RPM
□ SAVE RPM ADJUSTS
□ RPM BAND WIDTH
□ IDLE RPM
□ RPM CHECKSUM
□ SPEED UP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC 304, MTU
ECU7/ECU8, or MTU Smart Connect.)
□ SPEED DN (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC 304, MTU
□ TEST OVRSPEED (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC
304, MTU ECU7/ECU8, or MTU Smart Connect.)
□ SPD DMAND SRC (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC
□ IDLE REQUEST (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, MTU
□ INCREASE IDLE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
■ ECU SETUP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC 304, MTU
□ TRIP RESET (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ INT OIL PRIME
□ GOV PRM SW (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC or MTU Smart
Connect.)
□ ENG STRT PRIME (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ FAN OVERRIDE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)

9469200995 2-5
□ MODE SWITCH (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ GOV PARAM SET (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
□ CAN RATING SW 1 (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
□ DIS CYL CUT 1 (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ DIS CYL CUT 2 (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, MTU
ECU7/ECU8 or MTU Smart Connect.)
□ OPERATING MODE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU Smart Connect.)
SYSTEM PARAMS
● SYSTEM SETTINGS
○ GEN CONNECT
○ BUS CONNECT
○ RATED kW
○ RATED VOLTS
○ RATED FREQ
○ ALTRNATE FRQ
○ RATED RPM
○ RATED PF
○ ROTATION
○ EPS
■ EPS THRESHLD
■ LOW LINE SF (Visible when an input is selected for the Low Line Override programmable
function.)
○ FUEL LVL TYP
○ SYSTEM UNITS
○ PRESSURE UNITS (Visible when Metric is selected for System Units.)
○ BATTERY VOLT
○ FLYWHL TEETH
○ SPEED SOURCE
○ MAINT RESET
○ NFPA LEVEL
○ POWER UP DELAY
● REMOTE MODULE SETUP
○ CEM SETUP
■ ENABLE
■ OUTPUTS (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
■ CAN BUS ADDR (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
■ VERSION INFO (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
□ FIRMWARE VERSION
□ BOOT CODE VERSION
□ SERIAL NUMBER
□ PART NUMBER
□ MODEL NUMBER
□ BUILD DATE
■ CEM DEBUG MENU (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
□ DGC TO CEM BP
□ CEM TO DGC BP
● CRANK SETTINGS
○ DISCNCT LMIT
○ PRECRNK DELY
○ PRESTRT CNTCT
○ STYLE
○ # CYCLES (Visible when Cycle is selected for Cranking Style.)
○ CONT TIME (Visible when Continuous is selected for Cranking Style.)
○ CYCLE TIME
○ REST TIME
○ COOLDWN TIME
○ COOLDOWN CONFIG
○ RESTART DELAY
○ OFF MODE COOLDN

2-6 9469200995
○ PRESTART REST CONFIG

■ CONF
○ OIL PRS CRANK DISC
■ ENABLE
■ CRANK DISC PRS
● AUTOMATIC RESTART
○ ENABLE
○ ATTEMPTS
○ INTERVAL
● EXERCISE TIMER
○ MODE
○ RUN WITH LOAD
○ START HOUR
○ START MINUTE
○ RUN HOURS
○ RUN MINUTES
● SENSING TRANS
○ GEN PT PRI V
○ GEN PT SEC V
○ GEN CT PRI A
○ CT LOW LINE SF (Visible when an input is selected for the Low Line Override programmable function.)
○ BUS PT PRI V
○ BUS PT SEC V
● RELAY CONTROL
○ START
○ RUN
○ PRESTART
● AUTO CONFIG DETECT
○ ENABLE
○ LOW LINE THRESH
○ 1-PH THRESH
○ 1-PH GEN CONN
● ENGINE STATISTICS
○ START YEAR
○ START MONTH
○ START DAY
○ # STARTS
○ HRS TO MAINT
○ kW-HRS
○ TOTAL HRS
○ LOADED HRS
○ UNLOADED HRS
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
● CONFIGURABLE INPUTS
○ INPUT X (X = 1 to 7)
■ ALARM CONFIG
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ RECOGNITION
● PROG FUNCTIONS
○ EMERGENCY STOP
■ INPUT
○ AUTO XFER SWITCH
■ INPUT
■ RECOGNITION (Visible when an INPUT is selected.)
○ GRND DELTA O-RIDE
■ INPUT
○ BATTLE OVERRIDE
■ INPUT
○ LOW LINE OVERRIDE
■ INPUT

9469200995 2-7
○ 1 PHASE O-RIDE
■ INPUT
○ BATT CHRG FAIL
■ INPUT
■ ALARM CONFIG (Visible when an INPUT is selected.)
■ ACTIVATN DLY (Visible when an INPUT is selected.)
○ LOW COOL LEVEL
■ INPUT
○ LOW FUEL LEVEL
■ INPUT
○ FUEL LEAK DETECT
■ INPUT
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
● CONFIG ELEMENTS
○ CONFIG ELEMENT X (X = 1 to 8)
■ ALARM CONFIG
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ RECOGNITION
ALARM CONFIGURATION
● HORN CONFIGURATION
○ HORN
○ NOT IN AUTO HORN
● PRE-ALARMS
○ HIGH COOLANT TEMP
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ LOW COOLANT TEMP
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ LOW OIL PRESSURE
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ LOW FUEL LEVEL
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ HYSTERESIS
○ ENGINE OVERLOAD
■ ENG KW OVRLD-1
■ ENG KW OVRLD-2
■ ENG KW OVRLD-3
○ MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ BATTERY OVERVOLTAGE
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY

2-8 9469200995
○ WEAK BATTERY VOLTAGE

■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ HIGH FUEL LEVEL
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ HYSTERESIS
○ ACTIVE DTC (Visible when DTC is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
○ ECU COMMS FAIL (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
○ COOLANT LEVEL (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ CEM COMM FAIL (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
○ CHECKSUM FAIL
■ ENABLE
○ BRK CLOSE FAIL PALM
■ ENABLE
○ BRK OPEN FAIL PALM
■ ENABLE
○ REVERSE ROTATION
■ ENABLE
• ALARMS
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ARMING DELAY
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ARMING DELAY
○ LOW FUEL LEVEL
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ OVERSPEED
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ COOLANT LEVEL (Visible when CAN bus is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ CAN LOW COOL LEVEL
Note
The HIGH COOLANT TEMP and LOW OIL PRESSURE alarms have
an ARMING DLY setting that disables the alarm for the specified time
after engine startup.
● SENDER FAIL
○ COOL TEMP SENDR FAIL
■ CONFIG TYPE
■ RECOGNITION
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ MIN OHMS
■ MAX OHMS
■ SF DISPLAY
○ OIL PRESS SENDR FAIL
■ CONFIG TYPE
■ RECOGNITION

9469200995 2-9
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ MIN OHMS
■ MAX OHMS
■ SF DISPLAY
○ FUEL LEVL SENDR FAIL
■ CONFIG TYPE
■ RECOGNITION
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ MIN OHMS
■ MAX OHMS
■ SF DISPLAY
○ VOLTAGE SENSE FAIL
■ CONFIG TYPE
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ SPEED SENDR FAIL
■ TIME DELAY
GENERATOR PROTECTION
● 27 UNDERVOLTAGE
○ LOW LINE SF (Visible when an input is selected for the Low Line Override programmable function.)
○ 3 / 1 PHASE SETTINGS
■ PICKUP
■ HYSTERESIS
■ TIME DELAY
■ FREQ INHIBIT
■ ALARM CONFIG
● 59 OVERVOLTAGE
■ PICKUP
■ HYSTERESIS
■ TIME DELAY
■ ALARM CONFIG
● 47 PHASE IMBALANCE
○ PICKUP
○ HYSTERESIS
○ TIME DELAY
○ ALARM CONFIG
● 81 O/U FREQUENCY
○ UNDERFREQUENCY
■ INHIBIT VOLTS
■ PICKUP
■ HYSTERESIS
■ TIME DELAY
■ ALARM CONFIG
○ OVERFREQUENCY
■ PICKUP
■ HYSTERESIS
■ TIME DELAY
■ ALARM CONFIG
○ ALTRNT FRQ SCALE FCTR
■ ALT FREQ SF
● 50 OVERCURRENT
■ PICKUP
■ TIME DELAY
■ ALARM CONFIG

2-10 9469200995
BREAKER MANAGEMENT
● BREAKER HARDWARE
○ MAINS FAIL TRANSFER
■ ENABLE
■ RETURN DELAY
■ TRANSFER DELAY
■ MAX TRANSFER TIME
○ CLOSE WAIT TIME
■ TIME
○ GEN BREAKER
■ CONTINUOUS
■ CLOSING TIME
■ OPEN CMD
■ CLOSE CMD
○ MAINS BREAKER
■ CONFIGURED
■ CONTINUOUS (Visible when configured.)
■ CLOSING TIME (Visible when configured.)
■ OPEN CMD (Visible when configured.)
■ CLOSE CMD (Visible when configured.)
● BUS CONDITION DETECT
○ GEN DEAD
■ THRESHOLD
■ TIME DELAY
○ GEN STABLE
■ OV PICKUP
■ OV DROPOUT
■ UV PICKUP
■ UV DROPOUT
■ OF PICKUP
■ OF DROPOUT
■ UF PICKUP
■ UF DROPOUT
■ TIME DELAY
function.)
■ ALT FREQ SF
○ GEN FAILED
■ TIME DELAY
○ BUS DEAD
■ THRESHOLD
■ TIME DELAY
○ BUS STABLE
■ OV PICKUP
■ OV DROPOUT
■ UV PICKUP
■ UV DROPOUT
■ OF PICKUP
■ OF DROPOUT
■ UF PICKUP
■ UF DROPOUT
■ TIME DELAY
function.)
■ ALT FREQ SF
○ BUS FAILED
■ TIME DELAY

9469200995 2-11
LOGIC TIMERS
● TIMER X (X = 1 to 10)
○ HOURS
○ MINUTES
○ SECONDS
ENTER PASSWORD
LOGOUT (Visible when logged in through the front panel.)

2-12 9469200995

9469200995 3-1
3 • BESTCOMSPlus®
BESTCOMSPlus® is a Windows®-based, PC application that provides a user-friendly, graphical user
interface (GUI) for use with Basler Electric communicating products. The name BESTCOMSPlus is an
acronym that stands for Basler Electric Software Tool for Communications, Operations, Maintenance, and
Settings.
BESTCOMSPlus provides the user with a point-and-click means to set and monitor the DGC-2020ES.
The capabilities of BESTCOMSPlus make the configuration of one or several DGC-2020ES controllers
fast and efficient. A primary advantage of BESTCOMSPlus is that a settings scheme can be created,
saved as a file, and then uploaded to the DGC-2020ES at the user’s convenience.
BESTCOMSPlus uses plugins, allowing the user to manage several different Basler Electric products.
The DGC-2020ES plugin must be activated before use. The plugin can be activated automatically by
connecting to a DGC-2020ES, or manually by requesting an activation key from Basler Electric.
The DGC-2020ES plugin opens inside the BESTCOMSPlus main shell. The same default logic scheme
that is shipped with the DGC-2020ES is brought into BESTCOMSPlus by downloading settings and logic
from the DGC-2020ES. This gives the user the option of developing a custom setting file by modifying the
default logic scheme or by building a unique scheme from scratch.
BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic is used to program DGC-2020ES logic for protection elements,
inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. This is accomplished by drag-and-drop method. The user can drag elements,
components, inputs, and outputs onto the program grid and make connections between them to create
the desired logic scheme.
Figure 3-1 illustrates the typical user interface components of the DGC-2020ES plugin with
BESTCOMSPlus.
Figure 3-1. Typical User Interface Components
3-2 9469200995
System Recommendations
BESTCOMSPlus software is built on the Microsoft® .NET Framework. The setup utility that installs
BESTCOMSPlus on your PC also installs the DGC-2020ES plugin and the required version of .NET
Framework (if not already installed). BESTCOMSPlus operates with systems using Windows® 7 SP1,
Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 version 1607 (Anniversary Update). System recommendations for the
.NET Framework and BESTCOMSPlus are listed in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1. System Recommendations for BESTCOMSPlus and the .NET Framework
System Type Component Recommendation
32/64 bit Processor 2.0 GHz
32/64 bit RAM 1 GB (minimum), 2 GB (recommended)
32 bit Hard Drive 200 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC)
4.5 GB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC)
To install and run BESTCOMSPlus, a Windows user must have Administrator rights. A Windows user with
limited rights might not be permitted to save files in certain folders.
Installation
Note
Download BESTCOMSPlus
DGC-2020ES controllers are delivered with a CD-ROM that contains BESTCOMSPlus software and
instruction manuals. If a CD-ROM is not available, use the following procedure to download
BESTCOMSPlus from the Basler Electric website.
1. Navigate to https://www.basler.com/Downloads.
2. Select DGC-2020ES from the model drop down menu.
3. Under the Software heading, click the download link for BESTCOMSPlus.
4. Sign in or create an account to continue with the download.
Install BESTCOMSPlus from CD

Basler Electric folder in the Programs menu. The Basler Electric folder contains an icon that starts
BESTCOMSPlus when clicked.
Activation of the DGC-2020ES Plugin

The DGC-2020ES plugin is a module that runs inside the BESTCOMSPlus shell. The DGC-2020ES
plugin contains specific operational and logic settings for only the DGC-2020ES. Uploading settings to the
DGC-2020ES is possible only after activating the DGC-2020ES plugin.
9469200995 3-3
The DGC-2020ES plugin can be activated automatically or manually. Automatic activation is achieved by
using a USB cable to establish communication between the DGC-2020ES and BESTCOMSPlus. Manual
activation is initiated by contacting Basler Electric for an activation key and entering the key into
BESTCOMSPlus. Manual activation is useful if you want to create a settings file prior to receiving your
DGC-2020ES. Refer to Manual Activation of DGC-2020ES Plugin.
Connect a USB Cable

The USB driver was copied to your PC during BESTCOMSPlus installation and is installed automatically
after powering the DGC-2020ES. USB driver installation progress is shown in the Windows taskbar area.
Windows will notify you when installation is complete.
Connect a USB cable between the PC and your DGC-2020ES. Apply operating power to the DGC-
2020ES. Wait until the boot sequence is complete.
Start BESTCOMSPlus® and Activate the DGC-2020ES Plugin Automatically

To start BESTCOMSPlus, click the Windows Start button, point to Programs, Basler Electric, and then
click the BESTCOMSPlus icon. During initial startup, the BESTCOMSPlus Select Language screen is
displayed (Figure 3-2). You can choose to have this screen displayed each time BESTCOMSPlus is
started, or you can select a preferred language and this screen will be bypassed in the future. Click OK to
continue. This screen can be accessed later by selecting Tools and Select Language from the menu bar.
Figure 3-2. BESTCOMSPlus Language Selection Dialog

The BESTCOMSPlus platform window opens. Select New Connection from the Communication pull-down
menu and select DGC-2020ES. See Figure 3-3. The DGC-2020ES plugin is activated automatically after
connecting to a DGC-2020ES.
3-4 9469200995
Figure 3-3. Communication Pull-Down Menu

The DGC-2020ES Connection screen, shown in Figure 3-4, appears.
Figure 3-4. DGC-2020ES Connection Dialog

Select COM Port. The USB drivers are installed automatically during the BESTCOMSPlus installation
process. To select the correct COM Port, open the Windows Device Manager and expand the Ports
(COM & LPT) branch. Locate the device named CP2101 USB to UART Bridge Controller (COMx). The
COM Port number will be displayed in parenthesis (COMx). Be sure operating power is applied to the
DGC-2020ES and the USB cable is connected before opening the Device Manager. See Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5. Device Manager

The DGC-2020ES plugin opens indicating that activation was successful. You can now configure the
DGC-2020ES communication ports and other settings.
Installing the USB Driver if Automatic Installation Fails

To install the USB driver for the DGC-2020ES:
1. Apply operating power to the DGC-2020ES and wait for the boot sequence to complete.
2. Connect a USB cable between the PC and DGC-2020ES.
9469200995 3-5
3. The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.

4. Select “No, not this time” and select Next to continue.
5. Choose to “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)” and select Next to continue.
6. Insert the CD-ROM labeled BESTCOMSPlus into the PC CD-ROM drive.
7. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Basler Electric\BESTCOMSPlus\USBDeviceDrivers\ and select
Next to continue.
When installation of the driver is complete, you may be asked to restart your computer.
Manual Activation of the DGC-2020ES Plugin

Manual activation of the DGC-2020ES plugin is required only if your initial use of BESTCOMSPlus will be
on a PC that is not connected to a DGC-2020ES. Manual activation is described in the following
paragraphs.
Requesting an Activation Key

When initially running the DGC-2020ES plugin, the Activate Device Plugin pop-up appears. You must
contact Basler Electric for an activation key before you can activate the DGC-2020ES plugin. You can
request an activation key through email or the Basler Electric website. Click either the Website or Email
button. Click the Activate button when you are ready to enter the activation key you received from Basler
Electric. The Activate Device Plugin pop-up appears. Refer to Figure 3-6.
Entering an Activation Key

Select DGC-2020ES from the Device pull-down menu. Enter your Email Address and Activation Key
provided by Basler Electric. If you received an email containing the Activation Key, you can select all of
the text in the email and copy it to the Windows clipboard using normal Windows techniques. The Get
Data button will extract the Device, Email Address, and Activation Key from the Windows clipboard and
paste it into the appropriate fields. Click the Activate button to continue. The Activate Device Plugin
screen is also found by selecting Activate Device from the Tools pull-down menu of the BESTCOMSPlus
main screen.
Figure 3-6. Activate Device Plugin
Establishing Communication
Communication between BESTCOMSPlus and the DGC-2020ES is established by clicking on the
Connect button on the DGC-2020ES Connection screen (see Figure 3-4) or by clicking on the Connect
button on the lower menu bar of the main BESTCOMSPlus screen (Figure 3-1). Download all settings
and logic from the DGC-2020ES by selecting Download Settings and Logic from the Communication pull-
3-6 9469200995
down menu. BESTCOMSPlus will read all settings and logic from the DGC-2020ES and load them into
BESTCOMSPlus memory. See Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7. Processing, Please Wait…
Advanced Properties
Click the Advanced button on the Connection screen to display the Advanced Properties dialog. Default
settings are shown in Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-8. Advanced Properties Dialog
Menu Bars
The menu bars are located near the top of the BESTCOMSPlus window (see Figure 3-1). The upper
menu bar has five pull-down menus. With the upper menu bar, it is possible to manage settings files,
configure communication settings, upload and download settings/security files, and compare settings
files. The lower menu bar consists of clickable icons. The lower menu bar is used to change
BESTCOMSPlus views, save or load a BESTspace™ workspace, open a settings file,
connect/disconnect, preview metering printout, export metering, switch to live mode, and send settings to
the DGC-2020ES.
Upper Menu Bar (BESTCOMSPlus® Shell)

Upper menu bar functions are listed and described in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. Upper Menu Bar (BESTCOMSPlus Shell)
Menu Item Description
File
New Create a new settings file
Open Open an existing settings file
Open File As Text Generic file viewer for *.csv, *,txt, etc. files
Close Close settings file
9469200995 3-7
Menu Item Description

Save Save settings file
Save As Save settings file with a different name
Export To File Save settings as a *.csv file
Print Print, export, or send a settings file
Properties View properties of a settings file
History View history of a settings file
Recent Files Open a previously opened file
Exit Close BESTCOMSPlus program
Communication
New Connection Choose new device or DGC-2020ES
Close Connection Close communication between BESTCOMSPlus and DGC-2020ES
Download Settings and Logic from Download operational and logic settings from the device
Device
Upload Settings and Logic to Device Upload operational and logic settings to the device
Upload Settings to Device Upload operational settings to the device
Upload Logic to Device Upload logic settings to the device
Download Security from Device Download security settings from the device
Upload Security to Device Upload security settings to the device
Upload Device Files Upload firmware to the device
Tools
Select Language Select BESTCOMSPlus language
Activate Device Activate the DGC-2020ES plugin
Set File Password Password protect a settings file
Compare Settings Files Compare two settings files
Auto Export Metering Exports metering data on a user-defined interval
Event Log - View View the BESTCOMSPlus event log
Event Log - Clear Clear the BESTCOMSPlus event log
Event Log - Set New File Name Set a new file name for event log
Window
Cascade All Cascade all windows
Tile Tile horizontally or vertically
Maximize All Maximize all windows
Help
Check for Updates Check for BESTCOMSPlus updates via the internet
Check for Update Settings Enable or change automatic checking for updates
About View general, detailed build, and system information
Lower Menu Bar (DGC-2020ES Plugin)

The lower menu bar functions are listed and described in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3. Lower Menu Bar (DGC-2020ES Plugin)
Menu Button Description
Enables you to show/hide the Metering Panel, Settings Panel, or Settings Info
Panel.
3-8 9469200995
Opens and saves BESTspace™ workspaces. Customized workspaces make

switching between tasks easier and more efficient.
Opens a saved settings file.
Connect: Opens the DGC-2020ES Connection screen which enables you to

connect to the DGC-2020ES via USB or a modem. This button only appears
when a DGC-2020ES is not connected.
Disconnect: Used to disconnect a connected DGC-2020ES. This button only

appears when a DGC-2020ES is connected.
Displays the Print Preview screen where a preview of the Metering printout is
shown. Click on the printer button to send to a printer.
Enables all metering values to be exported into a *.csv file.
Displays a drop-down list entitled Live Mode Settings which enables Live mode
where settings are automatically sent to the device in real time as they are
changed.
Sends settings to the DGC-2020ES when BESTCOMSPlus is not operating in

Live Mode. Click this button after making a setting change to send the modified
setting to the DGC-2020ES.
Settings Explorer
The Settings Explorer is a convenient tool within BESTCOMSPlus used to navigate through the various
settings screens of the DGC-2020ES plugin.
These screens allow the user to edit general settings, communications, system parameters,
programmable inputs, programmable outputs, alarm configuration, generator protection, breaker
management, programmable senders, and BESTlogicPlus programmable logic.
Logic setup will be necessary after making certain setting changes. For more information, refer to the
BESTlogicPlus chapter.
Settings Entry
When entering settings in BESTCOMSPlus, each setting is validated against prescribed limits. Entered
settings that do not conform with the prescribed limits are accepted but flagged as noncompliant. Figure
3-9 illustrates an example of flagged, noncompliant settings (locator A) and the Setting Validation window
(locator B) used to diagnose faulty settings.
9469200995 3-9
Figure 3-9. Flagged, Noncompliant Settings and the Seting Validation Window
The Setting Validation window, viewed by selecting the Setting Validation tab (locator C), displays three
types of annunciations: errors, warnings, and messages. An error describes a problem such as a setting
that is out of range. A warning describes a condition where supporting settings are invalid, causing other
settings to be noncompliant with the prescribed limits. A message describes a minor setting issue that
was automatically resolved by BESTCOMSPlus. An example of a condition triggering a message is entry
of a settings value with a resolution that exceeds the limit imposed by BESTCOMSPlus. In this situation,
the value is automatically rounded and a message is triggered. Each annunciation lists a hyperlinked
name for the noncompliant setting and an error message describing the issue. Clicking the hyperlinked
setting name takes you to the setting screen with the offending setting. Right-clicking the hyperlinked
setting name will restore the setting to its default value.
Note
It is possible to save a DGC-2020ES settings file in BESTCOMSPlus
with noncompliant settings. However, it is not possible to upload
noncompliant settings to the DGC-2020ES.
Metering Explorer
The Metering Explorer is a convenient tool within BESTCOMSPlus used to navigate through the various
metering screens of the DGC-2020ES plugin.
These screens allow the user to view real-time system data including generator voltages and currents,
input/output status, alarms, reports, and other parameters. Refer to the Metering chapter in the Operation
manual for more information on the Metering Explorer.
3-10 9469200995
BESTspace™
BESTspace provides the ability to manage customized workspaces. A workspace consists of the position
and size of all open screens within BESTCOMSPlus. Pre-saved workspaces can be quickly loaded to fit
the specific task at hand. Any number of different workspaces can be saved including a default
workspace which loads when the DGC-2020ES plug-in is started. The Metering Explorer screens and the
Settings Explorer screens can be saved independently into the workspace file. A Comments box is
provided for writing a description or leaving notes for each saved workspace. To access BESTspace, click
View (on the lower menu bar) and hover over BESTspace. Figure 3-10 illustrates the BESTspace options
found under the View pull-down menu. Figure 3-11 illustrates the options included in the Load/Save
Workspace File screen.
Figure 3-10. View Menu, BESTspace™ Options
Figure 3-11. View Menu, BESTspace™, Save Workspace Screen
Settings File Management

A settings file contains all DGC-2020ES settings, including logic. A settings file assumes a file extension
of “∗.bstx”. It is possible to save the logic only as a separate logic library file on the BESTlogicPlus
Programmable Logic screen. This function is helpful when similar logic is required for several devices. A
logic library file assumes a file extension of “∗.bslx”. It is important to note that settings and logic can be
uploaded to the device together or separately, but are always downloaded together. For more information
on logic files, refer to the BESTlogicPlus chapter.
9469200995 3-11
Opening a Settings File

To open a DGC-2020ES settings file with BESTCOMSPlus, pull down the File menu and choose Open.
The Open dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to use normal Windows techniques to select
the file that you want to open. Select the file and choose Open. You can also open a file by clicking on the
Open File button on the lower menu bar. If connected to a device, you will be asked to upload the settings
and logic from the file to the current device. If you choose Yes, the settings displayed in BESTCOMSPlus
will be overwritten with the settings of the opened file.
Saving a Settings File

Select Save or Save As from the File pull-down menu. A dialog box appears allowing you to enter a
filename and location to save the file. Select the Save button to complete the save.
Upload Settings and/or Logic to Device

To upload a settings file to the DGC-2020ES, open the file through BESTCOMSPlus or create the file
using BESTCOMSPlus. Then pull down the Communication menu and select Upload Settings and Logic
to Device. If you want to upload operational settings without logic, select Upload Settings to Device. If you
want to upload logic without operational settings, select Upload Logic to Device. You are prompted to
enter the password. The default password is “OEM”. If the password is correct, the upload begins and the
progress bar is shown.
Download Settings and Logic from Device

To download settings and logic from the DGC-2020ES, pull down the Communication menu and select
Download Settings and Logic from Device. If the settings in BESTCOMSPlus have changed, a dialog box
will open asking if you want to save the current settings changes. You can choose Yes or No. After you
have taken the required action to save or discard the current settings, downloading begins.
BESTCOMSPlus will read all settings and logic from the DGC-2020ES and load them into
BESTCOMSPlus memory.
Print a Settings File

To view a preview of the settings printout, select Print Preview from the File pull-down menu. To print the
settings, select the printer icon in the upper left corner of the Print Preview screen.
You can skip the print preview and go directly to print by pulling down the File menu and selecting Print. A
dialog box opens containing the typical Windows options for setting the properties of the printer.
Configure these settings as necessary and then select Print.
Compare Settings Files

BESTCOMSPlus has the ability to compare two settings files. To compare files, pull down the Tools menu
and select Compare Settings Files. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Compare Setup dialog box appears
(Figure 3-12). Select the location of the first file under Left Settings Source and select the location of the
second file under Right Settings Source. If you are comparing a settings file located on your PC hard
drive or portable media, click the folder button and navigate to the file. If you want to compare settings
downloaded from a unit, click the Select Unit button to set up the communication port. Click the Compare
button to compare the selected settings files.
3-12 9469200995
Figure 3-12. Tools, Compare Settings Files Screen

A dialog box appears, displaying the results of the comparison. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Compare
dialog box (Figure 3-13) is displayed where you can view all settings (Show All Settings), view only the
differences (Show Settings Differences), view all logic (Show All Logic Paths), or view only logic
differences (Show Logic Path Differences). Select Close when finished.
Figure 3-13. Settings Comparison Results Screen
Firmware Updates
Future enhancements to the DGC-2020ES functionality will make a firmware update desirable. Because
default settings are loaded when DGC-2020ES firmware is updated, your settings should be saved in a
file prior to upgrading firmware.
9469200995 3-13
Note
The latest version of BESTCOMSPlus software should be downloaded
from the Basler Electric website and installed before performing a
firmware upgrade.
A device package contains firmware and a language module. Embedded firmware is the operating
program that controls the actions of the DGC-2020ES. The DGC-2020ES stores firmware in nonvolatile
flash memory that can be reprogrammed through the communication ports. It is not necessary to replace
EPROM chips when updating the firmware with a newer version.
The language of the front panel LCD can be changed by uploading a different language module into the
DGC-2020ES. The DGC-2020ES stores the language module in nonvolatile flash memory; the language
module contains all language translations for the DGC-2020ES. The language module can be
reprogrammed through the communications port. In general, any time a firmware upgrade is made to the
DGC-2020ES, the language module should be uploaded as well.
The DGC-2020ES can be used in conjunction with the Contact Expansion Module (CEM-2020) which
expands the DGC-2020ES capabilities. When upgrading the firmware in any component of this system,
the firmware in ALL of the components of the system should be upgraded to ensure compatibility of
communications between the components.
Caution
The order in which the components are upgraded is critical. Assuming
a system of a DGC-2020ES and expansion module is in a state where
the DGC-2020ES is communicating with the system expansion
module, the expansion module must be upgraded before the
DGC-2020ES. This is necessary because the DGC-2020ES must be
able to communicate with the expansion module before the DGC-
2020ES can send firmware to it. If the DGC-2020ES were upgraded
first, and the new firmware included a change to the expansion
module communication protocol, it is possible that the expansion
module could no longer communicate with the upgraded DGC-
2020ES. Without communications between the DGC-2020ES and the
expansion module, upgrading the expansion module is not possible.
Note
If power is lost or communication is interrupted during file transfer to
the DGC-2020ES, it will cease to operate and will not recover
automatically. If this occurs or if the front panel HMI becomes blank
and all LEDs are flashing at a two-second rate, the DGC-2020ES will
not have valid firmware installed and the firmware must be uploaded
again. To accomplish this, cycle power to the DGC-2020ES and
activate the DGC-2020ES plugin in BESTCOMSPlus. Select Upload
Device Files from the Communication pull-down menu and proceed
normally.
Upgrading Firmware in Expansion Modules

The following procedure is used to upgrade firmware in the DGC-2020ES expansion module. This must
be completed before upgrading firmware in the DGC-2020ES. If no expansion module is present, proceed
to Upgrading Firmware in the DGC-2020ES.
3-14 9469200995
1. Place the DGC-2020ES in OFF mode. This can be accomplished by clicking the Off button on the
Control screen inside the Metering Explorer or by pressing the Off button on the DGC-2020ES front
panel.
2. Enable the expansion module that is present in the system. If it has not already been enabled, enable
the expansion module on the SETTINGS > SYSTEM PARAMETERS > REMOTE MODULE SETUP
screen.
3. Verify that the DGC-2020ES and the associated expansion module are communicating. This can be
verified by examining the pre-alarm status using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus or from
the front panel by navigating to METERING > ALARMS-STATUS > PRE-ALARMS. There should be
no Loss of Comms pre-alarms in the pre-alarm status when communications are functioning properly.
4. Connect to the DGC-2020ES through the USB port if not already connected.
5. Select Upload Device Files from the Communication pull-down menu.
6. You will be asked to save the current settings file. Select Yes or No.
7. When the Basler Electric Device Package Uploader screen (Figure 3-14) appears, click on the Open
button to browse for the device package you have received from Basler Electric. The Package Files
along with File Details are listed. Place a check in the boxes next to the individual files you want to
upload.
Figure 3-14. Basler Electric Device Package Uploader

8. Click on the Upload button and the Proceed with Device Upload screen will appear. Select Yes or No.
9. After selecting Yes, the DGC-2020ES Selection screen will appear. Select the communication port to
begin upload. Refer to Figure 3-15.
10. After file(s) have been uploaded, click the Close button on the Basler Electric Device Package
Uploader screen and disconnect communication to the DGC-2020ES.
9469200995 3-15
Figure 3-15. DGC-2020ES Selection
Upgrading Firmware in the DGC-2020ES

Upgrade DGC-2020ES firmware and then load a saved settings file.
1. Upgrade the DGC-2020ES firmware and language module.
a. Connect to the DGC-2020ES with BESTCOMSPlus. Check the firmware Application
Version on the GENERAL SETTINGS > VERSION INFO > DGC-2020ES screen.
b. Select Upload Device Files from the Communication pull-down menu. You do not have to
be connected to the DGC-2020ES at this time. Save settings when prompted, if desired.
c. Open the desired device package file (∗∗∗∗DGC-2020ES-∗∗∗∗∗_xxyyzz.bef, where ∗∗∗∗
may be additional descriptive text of varying length, and xx.yy.zz is the version number of
the device package file.)
d. Check the boxes for DGC-2020ES Firmware and DGC-2020ES Language Module. Note
the version number of the DGC-2020ES firmware; this is the version that will be used to
set the Application Version in the settings file in a later step. This is NOT the same as the
version of the package file that is contained in the fields xx.yy.zz in the package file
name.
e. Click the Upload button and follow the instructions that appear to begin the upgrade
process.
f. After the upload is complete, disconnect communication to the DGC-2020ES.
2. Load the saved settings file into the DGC-2020ES.
a. Close all settings files.
b. From the File pull-down menu, select New, DGC-2020ES.
c. Connect to the DGC-2020ES.
d. Once all settings have been read from the DGC-2020ES, open the saved settings file by
selecting the file with File, Open File in the BESTCOMSPlus menu.
e. When BESTCOMSPlus asks if you wish to upload settings and logic to the device, click
Yes.
f. If you are receiving upload failures and indications that the logic is incompatible with the
firmware version, check that the DGC-2020ES style number in the saved file matches
that of the DGC-2020ES into which the file is being uploaded. The style number in the
settings file is found under GENERAL SETTINGS > STYLE NUMBER in
BESTCOMSPlus.
g. If the style number of the settings file does not match that of the DGC-2020ES into which
it is to be loaded, disconnect from the DGC-2020ES, then modify the style number in the
settings file. Then repeat the steps titled Load the Settings File into the DGC-2020ES.
3-16 9469200995
BESTCOMSPlus® Updates
Ongoing DGC-2020ES functionality enhancements may make future DGC-2020ES firmware updates
desirable. Enhancements to DGC-2020ES firmware typically coincide with enhancements to the DGC-
2020ES plugin for BESTCOMSPlus. When a DGC-2020ES is updated with the latest version of firmware,
the latest version of BESTCOMSPlus should also be obtained.
• If you obtained a CD-ROM containing a firmware update from Basler Electric, then that CD-ROM
will also contain the corresponding version of BESTCOMSPlus software.
• You can check for BESTCOMSPlus updates by visiting www.basler.com.
• You can use the manual “check for updates” function in BESTCOMSPlus to ensure that the latest
version is installed by selecting Check for Updates in the Help drop-down menu. (An internet
connection is required.)
9469200995 4-1
4 • Communication
DGC-2020ES communication ports include a mini-B USB port, CAN terminals, and provisions for an
optional Remote Display Panel. The following paragraphs describe the DGC-2020ES communication
ports in detail.
Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices.

Nonvolatile memory is used to store information (such as settings) that
needs to be preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise
restarted. Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a physical
limit on the number of times they can be erased and written. In this
product, the limit is 100,000 erase/write cycles. During product
application, consideration should be given to communications, logic, and
other factors that may cause frequent/repeated writes of settings or other
information that is retained by the product. Applications that result in such
frequent/repeated writes may reduce the useable product life and result in
loss of information and/or product inoperability.
USB
The rear-panel, mini-B USB port enables local communication with a PC running BESTCOMSPlus®
software. The DGC-2020ES is connected to a PC using a standard USB cable. BESTCOMSPlus is a
Windows®-based communication software package that is supplied with the DGC-2020ES. A detailed
description of BESTCOMSPlus is provided in the BESTCOMSPlus chapter.
CAN
A Controller Area Network (CAN) is a standard interface that enables communication between multiple
controllers on a common network using a standard message protocol. DGC-2020ES controllers have a
CAN interface that supports the SAE J1939 protocol and the MTU protocol.
Applications using an engine-driven generator set controlled by a DGC-2020ES may also have an Engine
Control Unit (ECU). The CAN interface allows the ECU and DGC-2020ES to communicate. The ECU
reports operating information to the DGC-2020ES through the CAN interface. Operating parameters and
diagnostic information, if supported by the ECU, are decoded and displayed for monitoring.
The primary use of the CAN interface is to obtain engine operating parameters for monitoring speed,
coolant temperature, oil pressure, coolant level, and engine hours without the need for direct connection
to individual senders. Table 4-1 lists the ECU parameters and Table 4-2 lists the engine configuration
parameters supported by the DGC-2020ES CAN interface. These parameters are transmitted via the
CAN interface at preset intervals. See the column labeled Update Rate in Table 4-1 for transmission
rates.
CAN interface connections are made at 13 (CAN H), 14 (CAN L), and 15 (SHIELD).
Table 4-1. ECU Parameters Obtained from CAN Interface
∗
ECU Parameter Metric Units English Units Update Rate
SPN
Actual Engine Percent Torque % % Engine Speed 513
Dependent
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Particulate Filter °C °F 500 ms 3242
Intake Temperature (DOC Inlet
Temperature)
DGC-2020ES Communication
4-2 9469200995
∗
SPN
Intermediate Temperature (DOC Outlet
Temperature)
Outlet Temperature
Air Filter Differential Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 107
Air Inlet Temperature kPa °F 1s 172
Alarm Reset Feedback Binary (0 or 1) 1s 2815
Ambient Air Temperature °C °F 1s 171
Auxiliary Pressure 1 kPa psi On Request 1387
Auxiliary Pressure 2 kPa psi On Request 1388
Barometric Pressure kPa psi 1s 108
Battery Charger 1 State 0 = Idle (not Connected to Battery) 1s 4990
1 = Charging
2 = Maintaining Battery Charge
3–12 = Reserved
13 = Battery Failure
14 = Charger Failure
15 = Not Available
Battery Charger 1 AC Line State 0 = Disconnected 1s 4991
1 = Connected
2 = Error
3 = N/A
Battery Charger 1 Output Voltage Vdc Vdc 1s 4992
Battery Charger 1 Output Current Adc Adc 1s 4993
Battery Charger 2 State 0 = Idle (not Connected to Battery) 1s 4994
1 = Charging
2 = Maintaining Battery Charge
3–12 = Reserved
13 = Battery Failure
14 = Charger Failure
15 = Not Available
Battery Charger 2 AC Line State 0 = Disconnected 1s 4995
1 = Connected
2 = Error
3 = N/A
Battery Charger 2 Output Voltage Vdc Vdc 1s 4996
Battery Charger 2 Output Current Adc Adc 1s 4997
Battery 1 Temperature °C °F 1s 1800
Battery 2 Temperature °C °F 1s 1801
Battery Voltage Vdc Vdc 1s 168
Boost Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 102
Charge Air Temperature °C °F 1s 2629
Coolant Level % % 500 ms 111
Coolant Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 109
DEF Inducement Level - Level of % % 1s 5246
Inducement Not to Run the Engine
DEF Severity Level - Severity of Tank % % 1s 5245
Low Level
DEF Tank 1 Level % % 1s 1761
Communication DGC-2020ES
9469200995 4-3
∗
SPN
DEF Tank 2 Level % % 1s 4367
DPF Ash Level % % % On Request 3720
DPF Soot Level % % % On Request 3719
ECU Temperature °C °F 1s 1136
Engine Coolant Preheated State Binary (0 or 1) 500 ms 3552
Engine Coolant Temperature °C °F 1s 110
Engine Desired Operating Speed rpm rpm 250 ms 515
Engine Intake Manifold #1 Absolute kPa psi 500 ms 3563
Pressure
Engine Intercooler Coolant Level % % 500 ms 3668
Engine Intercooler Temperature °C °F 1s 52
Engine Oil Level % % 500 ms 98
Engine Oil Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 100
Engine Oil Temperature °C °F 1s 175
Engine Speed rpm rpm Engine Speed 190
Dependent
Exhaust Gas Temperature °C °F 500 ms 173
Exhaust Temperature A °C °F 500 ms 2433
Exhaust Temperature B °C °F 500 ms 2434
Fuel Delivery Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 94
Fuel Leak Filter 1 Binary (0 or 1) 1s 1239
Fuel Leak Filter 2 Binary (0 or 1) 1s 1240
Fuel Rate liter/hr gal/hr 100 ms 183
Fuel Temperature °C °F 1s 174
High Exhaust System Temp (HEST) — — 500 ms 3698
Lamp/Indicator
Injection Control Pressure MPa psi 500 ms 164
Injector Metering Rail Pressure MPa psi 500 ms 157
Intake Manifold Temperature °C °F 500 ms 105
Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp/Indicator — — 500 ms 3697
Percent Load at Current rpm % % 50 ms 92
Rated Power watts watts On Request 166
Rated rpm rpm rpm On Request 189
Regeneration Disabled (Inhibit) — — 500 ms 3703
Lamp/Indicator
Shutdown from ECU Binary (0 or 1) 1s 1110
Switched Battery Voltage (at ECU) Vdc Vdc 1s 158
Throttle (Accelerator Pedal) Position % % 50 ms 91
Total Engine Hours hours hours Requested 1.5 s 247
Total Fuel Used liters gallons Requested 1.5 s 250
Transmission Oil Pressure kPa psi 1s 127
Transmission Oil Temperature °C °F 1s 177
Trip Average Fuel Rate liters gallons 500 ms 1029
4-4 9469200995
∗
SPN
Trip Fuel liters gallons Requested 1.5 s 182
Winding 1 Temperature °C °F 1s 1124
∗ SPN is suspect parameter number.
Table 4-2. Engine Configuration Parameters Obtained from CAN Interface
∗
SPN
Engine Speed at High Idle Point 6 rpm rpm 5s 532
Engine Speed at Idle Point 1 rpm rpm 5s 188
Engine Speed at Point 2 rpm rpm 5s 528
Gain (Kp) of End Speed Governor %/rpm %/rpm 5s 545
Maximum Momentary Engine Override Speed Point 7 rpm rpm 5s 533
Maximum Momentary Engine Override Time Limit seconds seconds 5s 534
Percent Torque at Idle Point 1 % % 5s 539
Percent Torque at Point 2 % % 5s 540
Reference Engine Torque N•m ft-lb 5s 544
Requested Speed Control Range Lower Limit rpm rpm 5s 535
Requested Speed Control Range Upper Limit rpm rpm 5s 536
Requested Torque Control Range Lower Limit % % 5s 537
Requested Torque Control Range Upper Limit % % 5s 538
∗ SPN is suspect parameter number.
Caution
When the CAN is enabled, the DGC-2020ES ignores the following
sender inputs: oil pressure, coolant temperature, and magnetic pickup.
Under certain circumstances, the following strings may be displayed on the front panel HMI and in the
Metering Explorer of BESTCOMSPlus:
• NC (Not Connected) - String displayed for a J1939 parameter when the engine ECU is not connected
to the DGC-2020ES.
• SF (Sender Fail) - String displayed for a J1939 parameter when the engine ECU sends a special
code indicating a measurement failure for the parameter. For example, if oil sender is determined to
be bad by the ECU, it sends a special code in place of the J1939 oil pressure data indicating a sender
fail condition.
• NS (Not Sent) - String displayed for a J1939 parameter when the J1939 parameter has not been sent
to the DGC-2020ES by the engine ECU.
9469200995 4-5
• NA (Not Applicable) - String displayed for a J1939 parameter when the engine ECU sends a special
code for the parameter indicating that the parameter is not implemented or not applicable in the ECU.
• UF (Unknown Failure) - String displayed when the J1939 parameter data received by the ECU is not
within the valid J1939 data range for the parameter but is not one of the special codes above.
Table 4-3 lists the J1939 data transmitted from the DGC-2020ES.
Table 4-3. J1939 Data Transmitted from the DGC-2020ES
∗
ECU Parameter Update Rate
SPN
Battle Override Switch 100 ms 1237
Speed Request 10 ms 898
Note: Requests from the DGC-2020 to the Engine ECU for various parameters are made by issuing the request.
Address Claim Request Once on power up, and any time a Global Request for NA
Address Claim (GRAC) PGN is received.
Currently Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes Whenever a refresh of Currently Active Diagnostic NA
Request Trouble Code Requests is received.
Previously Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes 2s NA
Request
Clear Currently Active Diagnostic Trouble Whenever a request to reset Currently Active Diagnostic NA
Codes Request Trouble Code Request is made.
Clear Previously Active Diagnostic Trouble Whenever a request to reset Previously Active Diagnostic NA
Codes Request Trouble Code Request is made.
Engine Hours/Revolutions Request 2s NA
Fuel Consumption Request 2s NA
Electronic Engine Controller #4 (Rated 2s NA
Speed and Power) Request
Auxiliary Analog Information 2s N/A
CAN Setup
The following paragraphs describe the settings found on the CAN Setup screen. This screen is found in
the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer, under the Communications, CAN Bus category. If using the front
panel, navigate to Settings > Communications > CAN Bus Setup > CAN Bus Setup. Figure 4-1 illustrates
the BESTCOMSPlus CAN Bus Setup screen.
Enable ECU Support

Set to Enabled for the DGC-2020ES to communicate with the ECU.
Enable DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Support

If the ECU is a J1939 ECU, enable DTC support. If the ECU does not support it, no diagnostic trouble
codes will be logged by the DGC-2020ES.
SPN Conversion Method

The most common SPN conversion method is 4 and is the default for the DGC-2020ES. Refer to ECU
manufacturer documentation to determine the correct SPN conversion method of the ECU and set the
SPN Conversion Method setting in the DGC-2020ES accordingly.
CAN bus Address

This parameter sets a unique address number for the DGC-2020ES operating on a CAN. The CAN
Address is set internally by the DGC-2020ES when certain types of ECUs are selected on the ECU Setup
screen, and in this case, the user-entered value does not apply. See Table 4-4.
4-6 9469200995
Table 4-4. CAN Bus Address per ECU Type

ECU Type CAN Bus Address
Cummins 220
Daimler CPC4 User-selectable
GM/Doosan User-selectable
Isuzu User-selectable
John Deere User-selectable
MTU ADEC 1
MTU ECU7/ECU8 6
MTU MDEC 6
MTU Smart Connect 234
Scania 39
Standard User-selectable
Volvo Penta 17
Yanmar User-selectable
Engine ECU Address

Set this parameter to the address claimed by the Engine ECU operating on the J1939 network. In certain
cases, there is more than one ECU transmitting data on the J1939 network. This setting specifies the
ECU on the network to which the DGC-2020ES should transmit data. For more information on J1939
address handling, see J1939 Addresses below. When GM/Doosan is selected as the ECU type, the value
of this setting is ignored and the Engine ECU Address value is always 0.
Coolant Temperature Source

With From ECU selected, the DGC-2020ES accepts coolant temperature data from the ECU on CAN 2
(ECU). With From DGC Input selected, the DGC-2020ES accepts coolant temperature data from the
coolant temperature engine sender input.
Oil Pressure Source

With From ECU selected, the DGC-2020ES accepts oil pressure data from the ECU on CAN 2 (ECU).
With From DGC Input selected, the DGC-2020ES accepts oil pressure data from the oil pressure engine
sender input.
Engine Run Time Source

With From ECU selected, the DGC-2020ES accepts Engine Run Time data from the ECU on CAN 2
(ECU). With From DGC Input selected, the DGC-2020ES uses its internally tracked Engine Run Time
data.
ECU Contact Control - Output Select

Select whether the RUN output relay or the PRE (Prestart) output relay closes to give the ECU its
“energize to run” signal. In some implementations, this relay may actually be providing ECU power.
ECU Contact Control - Pulsing Enable

Select if the ECU is not to be on line at all times. Often ECUs are allowed to go “off line” to conserve
battery drain when the engine is not running. The DGC-2020ES will “pulse” it periodically to force it to be
active to allow the DGC-2020ES to read data such as coolant temperature and coolant level. This is
required if the DGC-2020ES is to report low coolant temperature conditions (which may indicate a failure
of a block heater), or low coolant level conditions (if a leak occurs while the machine is not running).
Pulsing is also used to check the integrity of CAN communications when the machine is not running.
9469200995 4-7
ECU Related Time Values - Engine Shut Down

Set this parameter for a value longer than the duration required to stop the engine after being shut down.
The ECU is pulsed after this time expires. If the time is too short, the pulse may occur while the engine is
still turning which could cause a brief re-start and possibly damage the flywheel and starter system.
ECU Related Time Values - Pulse Cycle Time

Set this parameter for the desired time between ECU pulse cycles.
ECU Related Time Values - Settling Time

This parameter is the duration of the “on line” time of the pulse cycle during which the DGC-2020ES
reads data from the ECU. The settling time should be set long enough so that any ECU parameters that
require time to “settle down” after the ECU is on line can do so. Since the DGC-2020ES may use some of
the ECU data for alarm or pre-alarm annunciation, it is important that the data have time to settle.
ECU Related Time Values - Response Timeout

This setting defines the amount of time that the DGC-2020ES will wait to receive data from the ECU
during a pulse cycle or start attempt. If no data is received during this time in a pulse cycle, a LOSS OF
ECU COMMS pre-alarm is annunciated. If no data is received in this time during an engine starting
attempt, a LOSS OF ECU COMMS alarm is annunciated.
Figure 4-1. Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, CAN Bus Setup
ECU Setup
The following paragraphs describe the settings on the ECU Setup screen. This screen is found in the
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer, under the Communications, CAN Bus category. If using the front
panel, navigate to Settings > Communications > CAN Bus Setup > ECU Setup. Refer to Figure 4-2.
ECU Type
The DGC-2020ES can be configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU MDEC, MTU ADEC, MTU
ECU7/ECU8, GM/Doosan, Cummins, MTU Smart Connect, Scania, or John Deere.
4-8 9469200995
Generator Parameter Transmit

When the Generator Parameter Transmit setting is enabled, the DGC-2020ES broadcasts generator
metered parameters over CAN as listed in Table 4-5. The Generator Parameter Transmit setting is not
used when ECU Type is set for MTU MDEC, MTU ECU7/ECU8, or MTU Smart Connect.
Engine Parameter Transmit

When the Engine Parameter Transmit setting is enabled, the DGC-2020ES broadcasts engine metered
parameters over CAN. When the Engine Parameter Transmit setting is disabled, transmission of J1939
commands from the DGC-2020ES to the engine are disabled, but commands from the engine to the
DGC-2020ES are allowed.
Table 4-5. Generator Parameter Transmit
Bytes
PGN Name PGN Hex SPN Parameter Within PGN
Data
Generator Total 2468 Generator Total kW Hours Export 1 to 4
65018 FDFA
AC Energy 2469 Generator Total kW Hours Import 5 to 8
2456 Generator Total Reactive Power 1 to 4
Generator Total
AC Reactive 65028 FE04 2464 Generator Overall Power Factor 5 to 6
Power
2518 Generator Overall Power Factor Lagging 7, bits 1 & 2
Generator Total 2452 Generator Total Real Power 1 to 4

65029 FE05
AC Power 2460 Generator Total Apparent Power 5 to 8
2440 Generator Average L-L AC RMS Voltage 1 to 2
Generator 2444 Generator Average L-N AC RMS Voltage 3 to 4
Average Basic AC 65030 FE06
Quantities 2436 Generator Average AC Frequency 5 to 6
2448 Generator Average AC RMS Current 7 to 8
Engine Engine Coolant Temperature (Not sent
65262 FEEE 110 1
Temperature when CAN is enabled.)
Engine Fluid Engine Oil Pressure (Not sent when CAN
65263 FEEF 100 4
Level/Pressure is enabled.
Dash Display 65276 FEFC 96 Fuel Level 2
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

The diesel particulate filter settings are used when the ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU
ADEC, GM/Doosan, Cummins, or MTU Smart Connect. The DGC-2020ES supports the CAN parameters
that are related to the diesel particulate filter implemented on certain engines to meet Tier 4 emission
requirements.
Two parameters are provided to initiate or disable DPF regeneration. The first, Manual Regeneration, is
transmitted to the engine via CAN to initiate DPF regeneration. The second, Disable Regeneration, is
transmitted to the engine via CAN to disable DPF regeneration. Extended operation with regeneration
disabled is not recommended.
Speed Setup
Speed control over J1939 and ECU7/ECU8 is implemented over CAN when the CAN bus RPM Request
setting is enabled. This is implemented for all ECUs.
Engine RPM: The Engine RPM setting defines the nominal requested engine rpm.
Idle RPM: The Idle RPM setting is the requested rpm when the IDLE REQUEST logic element is true.
Remember Speed Adjustments: A Remember Speed Adjustments setting is provided to establish how
RPM adjustments by raise/lower commands are saved. When Yes is selected, adjustments to RPM by
raise/lower commands are saved to memory and used for all subsequent run sessions. This is true even
9469200995 4-9
when power is cycled to the DGC- 2020ES. When No is selected, adjustments to rpm by raise/lower
commands are retained for the duration of only the current run session. The adjustments are discarded
the next time the engine is run or the DGC-2020ES is power cycled.
RPM Bandwidth: The RPM Bandwidth setting defines the speed adjustment range. For example, if the
Engine RPM setting is 1800 and the RPM Bandwidth is set to 100, the rpm can be adjusted from 1750 to
1850 rpm.
RPM Checksum: Some newer engine ECUs will not respond to TSC1 speed request when the speed is
a constant value unless a Message Counter and Checksum are implemented. This setting enables or
disables the Message Counter and RPM Checksum.
Start Mode
The Start mode specifies whether the engine should start normally or as rapidly as possible. When
Normal mode is selected, the engine will go through a normal start sequence when started. When Rapid
mode is selected, the engine will go through a rapid start sequence if the engine ECU is programmed for
a rapid start. A normal start could be employed when starting the generator is not time critical. However, if
there was a power outage, a rapid start could be employed to restore power as soon as possible.
Volvo Penta
Configuring the DGC-2020ES for Volvo Penta* necessitates the configuration of two additional settings:
Speed Select and Accelerator Position. The Speed Select setting configures the Volvo Penta ECU to
operate the engine at the primary or secondary base speed. If the engine is configured by Volvo for 60 Hz
applications, the primary base speed is 1,800 rpm and the secondary base speed is 1,500 rpm. If the
engine is configured by Volvo for 50 Hz applications, the primary base speed is 1,500 rpm and the
secondary base speed is 1,800 rpm. The Accelerator Position setting is expressed as a percentage and
tells the Volvo Penta ECU where to set the engine speed (trim) relative to the base speed. The range of
the setting is the base speed ±120 rpm. A setting of 0% will cause the engine to run at 120 rpm below the
base speed, a setting of 50% will cause the engine to run at the base speed, and a setting of 100% will
cause the engine to run at 120 rpm above the base speed. The Accelerator Position setting is linear with
a gain of 2.4 rpm/percentage. This setting is not saved in nonvolatile memory and defaults back to 50%
after DGC-2020ES control power is cycled.
The DGC-2020ES sends the following parameters to a Volvo Penta ECU through Volvo Proprietary
J1939 communications:
• Start Request - sent when starting the engine.
• Stop Request - sent when shutting down the engine.
• Idle Request - sent when the Idle Request logic element is true in BESTlogicPlus.
• Preheat Request - sent anytime the DGC-2020ES would normally have its PRE relay closed for
engines requiring a preheat contact.
• Accelerator Pedal Position - sent based on the Accelerator Position setting. If the Accelerator Pedal
Position setting is left at the default 50%, this is calculated and sent based on the programmable
Engine RPM setting to achieve the desired engine RPM.
• Primary/Secondary Engine Speed - sent based on the Speed Select setting and the state of the
Alternate Frequency Override element in BESTlogicPlus. Primary speed is sent when the Speed
Select setting is set for Primary and Secondary speed is sent when the Speed Select setting is set
for Secondary. However, these are reversed if the Alternate Frequency Override is true. A setting
of Primary results in Secondary being sent and a setting of Secondary results in Primary being sent
when the Alternate Frequency Override is true.
∗ The Volvo Penta ECU configuration is applicable only to the EDC3 and EMS2 models of Volvo Penta
engine controllers.
Cummins
When Cummins is selected as the ECU type, the following parameters are sent to the engine via
Cummins Proprietary J1939 communications:
• Start Request - sent when starting or running the engine.
• Stop Request - sent when stopping the engine.
• Idle Request - sent when the Idle Request logic element is true in BESTlogicPlus.
4-10 9469200995
• Rated Speed (50 or 60 Hz) - sent based on the Rated Speed setting of the DGC-2020ES. However,
these are reversed if the Alternate Frequency Override is true. A setting of 60 Hz Rated Speed
results in 50 Hz being sent and a setting of 50 Hz Rated Speed results in 60 Hz being sent when
the Alternate Frequency Override is true.
Generator Control Communications Configuration: A parameter is provided to configure generator
control communications. If the standard PGNs for Generator Control One and Generator Control Two are
broadcast by the generator controller, the Cummins ECU will use those. If they are not broadcast, the
ECU will expect the Cummins Engine Governing PGN (0xFF69) and Cummins Generator Control PGN
(0xFF73). If the user selects Standard for the Generator Control Communications setting, the DGC-
2020ES will not broadcast 0xFF69 and 0xFF73 in order to minimize loading on the CAN Bus.
MTU
If the engine is configured as MTU MDEC, the configuration of the following settings is necessary:
• MDEC Module Type - Specifies the type of MDEC module.
• Speed Demand Switch - Specifies speed demand source for the MTU engine ECU.
• NMT Alive Transmit Rate - Specifies the rate at which messages are transmitted to the MTU engine.
If the engine is configured as MTU ADEC, the configuration of the following settings is necessary:
• Overspeed Test - Temporarily drives an MTU ECU into overspeed for testing overspeed.
• Governor Param Switch Over - Specifies which governor parameters an MTU ECU should use.
• Trip Reset - Resets trip information such as trip fuel used, trip hours, trip idle time, etc.
• Int Oil Prime - Causes an MTU ECU engine to perform an internal lubrication cycle.
If the engine is configured as MTU ECU7/ECU8, the configuration of the following settings is necessary:
• Speed Up - Increases speed of the MTU ECU.
• Speed Down - Decreases speed of the MTU ECU.
• Idle Request - Turns the idle request on or off.
• Increased Idle - Sets the MTU ECU idle.
• MTU 50 Hz 60 Hz Switch Setting - Set automatically based on rated frequency of the DGC-2020ES
and the state of the alternate frequency override.
• Engine Start Prime - Turns the engine start prime on or off.
• Fan Override - Turns the fan override on or off.
• Mode Switch - Turns the mode switch on or off.
• Governor Param Set Select - Sets the governor parameter set select.
• CAN Rating Switch 1 & 2 - Turns the CAN rating switch 1 & 2 on or off.
• Cylinder Cutout Disable 1 & 2 - Turns the cylinder cutout disable 1 & 2 on or off.
• MTU ECU7/ECU8 Module Type - Specifies ECU7/ECU8 Module type.
• NMT Alive Transmit Rate - Specifies the rate at which messages are transmitted to the MTU engine.
If the engine is configured as MTU Smart Connect, the configuration of the following settings is
necessary:
• Speed Up - Increases speed of the MTU ECU.
• Speed Down - Decreases speed of the MTU ECU.
• Idle Request - Turns the idle request on or off.
• Governor Param Switch Over - Specifies which governor parameters an MTU ECU should use.
• Cylinder Cutout Disable 2 - Turns the cylinder cutout disable 2 on or off.
• Engine Operating Mode - Selects engine operating mode 1 or 2.
9469200995 4-11
Scania
The majority of CAN Bus parameters are sent from Scania Engine ECUs via standard J1939
communications. However, some additional proprietary parameters are sent via Scania proprietary J1939
communications. Proprietary Start, Stop, and Emergency Stop commands are sent from the
DGC-2020ES to the Scania ECU. The ECU communicates Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Levels, as well as
DEF Fluid Low, DEF Low Severe, DEF Inducement, and DEF Severe Inducement Pre-Alarms to the
DGC-2020ES through Proprietary Scania parameters. Additional information on DEF related parameters
can be found in the Exhaust Treatment chapter.
John Deere
The Regeneration Interlock setting enables John Deere proprietary parameters to be broadcast over the
J1939 CAN Bus.
The Regeneration Interlock parameter is sent via the Stationary Regeneration/Cleaning CAN Lockout
Message PGN, which is PGN 61194. When the DGC Regeneration Interlock value is set to Enabled, the
DGC-2020ES sends a value of 01 (binary) for the two bit “Allowed” configuration which allows
regeneration to occur. When the DGC-2020ES Regeneration Interlock value is set to Disabled, the DGC-
2020ES sends a value of 00 (binary) for the two bit “Not Allowed” configuration which inhibits
regeneration.
The DGC-2020ES sends starter engagement requests to the ECU via the SAE J1939 Engine Start
Control PGN. When the DGC-2020ES requests the starter to be engaged it sends a value of 01 (binary)
for the two-bit starter engagement parameter. Otherwise the DGC-2020ES sends a value of 00 (binary)
for the two-bit starter engagement parameter.
Isuzu
When the ECU type is set for Isuzu, the Clear ECU Memory and Escape Mode Request buttons are
operational. When the Clear ECU Memory button is clicked, it will remain on for five seconds and then
turn off, sending a five-second long memory clear request to the engine ECU. When the Escape Mode
Request button is clicked, a temporary override of inducement to not operate the engine is sent to the
ECU.
Daimler CPC4
When the ECU type is set for Daimler CPC4, the DGC-2020ES monitors the Torque Limit (LIM) Lamp
Status broadcast via proprietary J1939 communications from the Daimler engine ECU to the
DGC-2020ES. When the monitored LIM Lamp status indicates the lamp is on solid, the DGC-2020
annunciates a pre-alarm displaying the LIM symbol and text “Torque Limit”. When the monitored LIM
Lamp status indicates the lamp is flashing, the DGC-2020ES annunciates a pre-alarm displaying the LIM
symbol and text “Torque Limit Severe”. The DGC-2020ES also displays the LIM symbol in the exhaust
status display portion of the front panel display.
Yanmar
Some DTC-FMI combinations report different Yanmar P Codes depending on whether the engine has
three or four cylinders. The Number of Cylinders setting specifies how many cylinders exist in the engine.
4-12 9469200995
Figure 4-2. Settings Explorer, CAN Bus, ECU Setup
Remote Display Panel (optional)

Applications that require remote annunciation can use Basler Electric’s Remote Display Panel. This
device provides remote indication of many pre-alarm and alarm conditions.
Remote Display Panel connections are made at 10 (RDP TxD–), 11 (RDP TxD+), 17 (BATT–), and 18
(BATT+).
The following pre-alarm conditions are indicated by LEDs on the Remote Display Panel:
• High coolant temperature
• Low coolant temperature
• Low oil pressure
• Low fuel level∗
• Weak battery
• Battery overvoltage†
• Battery charger failure∗†
The following alarm conditions are indicated by LEDs and an audible alarm on the Remote Display Panel:
• Low coolant level∗
• High coolant temperature
• Low oil pressure
• Overcrank
• Overspeed
• Emergency stop activated
• Fuel leak/Sender failure∗†
• Sender failure†
∗ This can be configured in the DGC-2020ES as None, Alarm, or Pre-alarm. See the Contact Inputs
chapter for more information. The LED on the Remote Display Panel illuminates when the input that is
9469200995 4-13
assigned to the programmable function is closed, whether the function is configured as None, Alarm, or
Pre-alarm.
† This LED can be reprogrammed in the DGC-2020ES to suit the needs of a particular application. The
condition listed above is annunciated by default.
Additionally, the Remote Display Panel indicates when the DGC-2020ES is not operating in Auto mode
and when the generator is supplying load or when the DGC-2020ES is in an alarm state not listed above.
Refer to Basler Publication 9318100990 for more information on the Remote Display Panel.
See the Terminals and Connectors chapter in the Installation manual for more information on connecting
the Remote Display Panel to the DGC-2020ES.
4-14 9469200995
9469200995 5-1
5 • Device Configuration
System parameters configure the DGC-2020ES for operation with a specific application. This chapter lists
items to consider when configuring the DGC-2020ES. These items consist of system settings and rated
data, remote module setup, crank settings, automatic restart settings, exercise timer settings, sensing
transformer ratings, relay control settings, and system configuration detection settings.
System Settings
The System Settings parameters consist of number of fly wheel teeth, speed signal source, power-up
delay, fuel level function, NFPA compliance level, EPS supplying load, system units, and metric pressure
units. The System Settings screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > System
Settings.
Number Flywheel Teeth

The Number Fly Wheel Teeth setting accepts a value from 1 to 500, in increments of 0.1. This value is
used when calculating engine rpm.
Speed Signal Source

The DGC-2020ES can be configured to detect engine speed from a magnetic pickup (MPU), the genset
frequency, or both the MPU and genset frequency. On engines with CAN ECUs, if MPU or MPU Freq is
selected as the Speed Signal Source, the DGC-2020ES uses CAN as the speed source when CAN is
enabled. If Gen Freq is set as the Speed Signal Source, the DGC-2020ES uses the generator frequency.
When engine speed is obtained from the genset frequency, the DGC-2020ES uses the rated (nominal)
genset frequency and nominal rpm rating when calculating engine rpm.
When engine speed is obtained from an MPU, the DGC-2020ES uses the nominal rpm rating and the
number of flywheel teeth when calculating engine rpm.
The speed signal from the MPU takes priority when both the genset frequency and MPU are selected as
the engine speed source. If both MPU and genset frequency are selected and the MPU fails, the DGC-
2020ES automatically switches to the genset frequency as the engine speed source.
Power Up Delay
In some cases, the ECU takes longer than the DGC-2020ES to power up. The power up delay setting is
used to delay the initial pulsing of the ECU for data on DGC-2020ES power up. This setting ranges from 0
to 60 seconds in 1 second increments.
Fuel Level Function

This setting determines whether the fuel level indications and the related alarm and pre-alarm are
enabled or disabled. Setting selections include, Fuel Lvl (Fuel Level), Natural Gas, Liquid Propane, or
Disabled. Selecting a fuel type other than Fuel Lvl disables any fuel level indication, alarm, or pre-alarm.
This includes the Fuel Level value on the Metering Explorer, Engine screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
NFPA Compliance Level

The DGC-2020ES can be used in an application requiring compliance with NFPA Standard 110. Levels 1
and 2 of Standard 110 are supported. Selecting level 1 or 2 affects DGC-2020ES operation in the
following ways:
• The number of crank cycles is fixed at 3
• Crank cycle time is fixed at 15 seconds
• Continuous crank time is fixed at 45 seconds
• The low coolant temperature pre-alarm setting is fixed at 70°F
DGC-2020ES Device Configuration

5-2 9469200995
EPS Supplying Load

EPS Supplying Load settings consist of Low Line Scale Factor and EPS Threshold. These settings are
described in the following paragraphs.
Low Line Scale Factor

Low Line Scale Factor automatically adjusts the EPS threshold setting in applications utilizing more than
one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is implemented when the DGC-2020ES senses a
contact closure at a contact input programmed to activate scaling of the settings. The value of the scale
factor setting serves as a multiplier for the threshold setting. For example, if a scale factor contact input is
received by the DGC-2020ES and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the threshold setting is doubled (2.000
x Threshold setting).
EPS Threshold
Indication that the emergency power system is supplying load is determined by a user-adjustable
threshold setting. This setting is expressed as a percentage of the genset CT (nominal) primary rating.
This setting accepts values from 3 to 10, in increments of 1%.
System Units
Engine oil pressure and coolant temperature can be displayed in English or metric units of measure.
Metric Pressure Units

This setting allows engine oil pressure to be displayed in bar or kPa/MPa.
Figure 5-1. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, System Settings Screen
Rated Data
Rated Data parameters consist of sensing transformer ratings, voltage, power factor, kW, engine RPM,
frequency, battery volts, generator and bus connection types, and phase rotation. The Rated Data screen
is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the System Parameters category. If using the
front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > System Settings.
Click the Edit button on the BESTCOMSPlus Rated Data settings screen to adjust values. Click OK to
accept the changes, and Cancel to discard them.
Sensing Transformers
For information on sensing transformers settings, see Sensing Transformers, below.
Rated Data
Genset nameplate data used by the DGC-2020ES includes the rated voltage, power factor, kW, and
engine RPM.
Device Configuration DGC-2020ES

9469200995 5-3
Rated Volts (V L-L)

This setting accepts values from 1 to 99,999, in increments of 1.
Rated Power Factor (PF)

This setting accepts values from -1 to 1, in increments of 0.001.
Genset kW Rating
Rated Engine RPM

Calculated Rated Data

Rated Secondary Volts, Rated Phase Amps, Rated Secondary Phase Amps, Rated kVA, and Rated kvar
are calculated automatically. The equations used for these calculations are listed below.
 Gen PT Secondary Volts 
Rated Secondary Volts = Rated Volts  
 Gen PT Primary Volts 
Rated kVA
Rated Phase Amps (3 − phase machine) =
Rated L − L Volts 3
Rated kVA
Rated Phase Amps (1 − phase machine) =
Rated L − L Volts
 CT Secondary Amps 
Rated Secondary Phase Amps = Rated Phase Amps  
 CT Primary Amps 
Rated kW
Rated kVA =
Rated PF
Rated kvar = Rated kVA 1 − Rated PF 2
Frequency
The frequency settings allow selection of the rated frequency of the generator and an alternate frequency.
Rated Frequency of the Unit

Rated frequency settings consist of 50 and 60 Hz.
Alternate Frequency
This setting accepts values from 10 to 450, in increments of 0.01.
Battery Volts
The nominal voltage of the starter battery is used by the DGC-2020ES to detect and annunciate battery
overvoltage and low or weak battery voltage. The Battery Volts settings consist of 12 V and 24 V.
Generator Connection
Genset connection types accommodated by the DGC-2020ES include three, three-phase connections
(delta, wye, and grounded delta) and a single-phase configuration (sensing across phases A and B.)
Bus Connection
Bus connection types consist of single- and three-phase. Single-phase bus voltage is sensed across
phases A and B.
5-4 9469200995
Phase Rotation
The Phase Rotation setting allows selection of ABC or CBA rotation according to the phase rotation
connection of the machine. The DGC-2020ES calculates the power angle as the angle between the
Phase AB voltage and phase B current. An angle compensation factor, determined by the phase rotation
setting, is then applied. If the actual phase rotation connection of the machine does not match the phase
rotation setting, calculation of the power angle will be incorrect, which may result in a miscalculation of
kW, kvar, and power factor.
Figure 5-2. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Rated Data Screen
Remote Module Setup

When the optional CEM-2020 is enabled, a J1939 address must be entered. Select the appropriate
number of outputs available on the CEM-2020. The low current module (CEM-2020) provides 24 contact
outputs and the high current module (CEM-2020H) provides 18 contact outputs.
The Remote Module Setup screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > Remote
Module Setup.
The BESTCOMSPlus Remote Module Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 5-3.

9469200995 5-5
Figure 5-3. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Remote Module Setup Screen
Crank Settings
The Crank Settings consist of pre-start, restart, cranking, crank disconnect, and cooldown. These settings
are described in the paragraphs below.
The Crank Settings screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > Crank
Settings.
The BESTCOMSPlus Crank Settings screen is illustrated in Figure 5-4.
Pre-Start
If desired, cycle or continuous cranking can be delayed after initiating engine startup. During this delay,
the Pre-Start output closes to energize glow plugs or pre-start the lubrication pump. The Pre-crank Delay
setting accepts values from 0 to 30, in increments of 1 second.
The Pre-Start output can be configured to open upon the conclusion of engine cranking or remain closed
as long as the engine is running.
The Pre-Start output can be configured during the resting state. If Preheat Before Crank is selected, the
Pre-Start output is closed for the duration of the Pre-crank Delay time prior to re-entering the cranking
state. If the Pre-crank delay setting is longer than the rest interval, the Pre-Start output is closed for the
entire duration of the rest time.
Restart
Attempting to start an engine after a normal shutdown but before the engine RPM has settled to zero can
stress an engine in certain situations. The Restart Delay inhibits attempts to start the engine immediately
after a normal shutdown for the duration of the Restart Delay timer. This delay should allow an engine to
properly spin down before attempting to restart. This setting accepts values from 0 to 120, in increments
of 1 second.
Cranking
The DGC-2020ES can be programmed for either cycle or continuous cranking.
Cycle cranking provides multiple engine starting attempts. Each starting attempt consists of a fixed
interval of engine cranking followed by a rest interval. The Number of Crank Cycles setting accepts
values from 1 to 7, in increments of 1. The Cycle Crank Time setting accepts values from 5 to 15, in
increments of 1 second.
Continuous cranking provides a single, extended engine-starting attempt. The Continuous Crank Time
setting accepts values from 5 to 60, in increments of 1 second.

5-6 9469200995
Crank Disconnect
Under normal operation, engine rpm is used to determine crank disconnect. The Crank Disconnect Limit
setting establishes the engine rpm percentage at which the starter is disconnected. This setting accepts
values from 10 to 100, in increments of 1 percent.
The Oil Pressure Crank Disconnect provides a secondary indication that the engine is running. This
ensures that the starter is disconnected, even if no engine rpm sources are functioning. When enabled,
oil pressure is used to determine if the engine is running. If the engine oil pressure is above the threshold,
the starter is disconnected from the engine. The Crank Disconnect Pressure threshold setting accepts
values from 2.9 to 150 psi, 0.2 to 10.3 bar, and 20 to 1,034.5 kPa, in increments of 0.1.
Cool Down
After the load is removed from a genset, the DGC-2020ES implements a smart cooldown function. This
function ensures that the engine and turbocharger properly cool down by maintaining engine operation for
a user-defined duration.
This cooldown function is initiated for any one of the following conditions:
• Genset load is removed and engine shutdown is permitted while in AUTO mode
• Auto Transfer switch (ATS) opens while operating in AUTO mode
• Remote shutdown is initiated while in AUTO mode
• Off Mode Cooldown is initiated
• The Cooldown Request logic element is initiated
• The Cool and Stop Request logic element is initiated
Settings
Off Mode Cool Down: Upon receiving a cool down request with this setting enabled, the unit will enter a
cool down cycle when in Off mode.
Cool Down Configuration: Upon receiving a cool down request with Only When Loaded selected, the
unit will enter a cool down cycle only if a load is currently applied. With Always selected, the unit will enter
a cool down cycle upon request with or without a load applied.
No Load Cool Down Time: This setting establishes the duration of the cool down cycle when no load is
applied.
Smart Cooldown Function

The smart cooldown function reduces unnecessary fuel expenditure by considering overall cooldown time
through multiple requests. For example, a new cooldown request is initiated after a previous cooldown
sequence has already started. The cooldown timer is not simply reset with each new request. Instead, the
amount of time that the engine has spent cooling down is factored into the new request. This saves time
and fuel by running the engine no longer than necessary to achieve proper cooldown.

9469200995 5-7
Figure 5-4. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Crank Settings Screen
Automatic Restart
When enabled, the Automatic Restart clears all alarms automatically if the DGC-2020ES shuts down due
to an alarm condition. An attempt to restart the engine is made, after a predetermined time delay, if the
ATS contact input is closed. If an ATS contact is not present, the unit remains in the READY state with
alarms cleared. A restart is not attempted if a low fuel alarm or emergency stop is present. The number of
restart attempts is programmable. Automatic restart attempts are recorded in the event log.
The Auto Restart Interval setting accepts values from 0.5 to 30, in increments of 0.5 minutes. The Auto
Restart Attempts setting accepts values from 1 to 10, in increments of 1.
The Automatic Restart screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > Automatic
Restart.
The BESTCOMSPlus Automatic Restart screen is illustrated in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Automatic Restart Screen
Exercise Timer
The exercise timer function starts and runs the genset at specified intervals. Exercise timer settings are

5-8 9469200995
Modes
The Mode setting determines how often the generator is exercised. Each mode has supporting settings
that establish the start time, date, and duration of each session. When a mode is selected, only the
appropriate supporting settings for that mode are available while other settings are grayed out. Start
Hour, Start Minute, Run Period Hours, Run Period Minutes, and Run with Load settings are available for
all modes. The exercise timer modes are described below.
Daily: The generator will run every day.
Monthly: The generator will run on the same day every month using the numeric date. For example, the
fifth of every month. See Start Day of Month under Supporting Settings below.
N Week Intervals: On or after the specified start date, the generator will run on the same day every N
weeks, where N is a value from 1 through 52. For example, every two weeks on Sundays, starting on
January 1, 2020. See Start Day of Week, Week Interval, and Begin Date (Month, Day, Year) under
Supporting Settings below.
Weekday of Month: The generator will run on the same day of the week every month. For example, the
third Tuesday of every month. See Start Day of Week and Week of Month under Supporting Settings
below.
Weekly: The generator will run on the same day every week. See Start Day of Week under Supporting
Settings below.
Supporting Settings
Begin Date (Month, Day, Year): These three settings establish the date on which the exercise timer will
start when Mode is set to N Week Intervals.
Start Day of Month: Accepts values 1 through 31. Enabled when Mode is set to Monthly.
Start Day of Week: Select Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, or Saturday.
Enabled when Mode is set to Weekly, Weekday of Month, or N Week Intervals.
Start Time and Run Period: The generator will start at the time established by the Start Hour and Start
Minute settings and will run for the duration established by the Run Period Hours and Run Period Minutes
settings. These settings are available for all modes.
Run with Load: When enabled, the DGC-2020ES closes the generator breaker during the run time.
Week Interval: Accepts values 1 through 52. Enabled when Mode is set to N Week Intervals.
Week of Month: Select First, Second, Third, Fourth, or Last. Enabled when Mode is set to Weekday of
Month.
Contact inputs and outputs can be assigned to this function. Refer to the BESTlogicPlus chapter for more
information.
The Exercise Timer screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > Exercise
Timer.
The BESTCOMSPlus Exercise Timer screen is illustrated in Figure 5-6.

9469200995 5-9
Figure 5-6. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Exercise Timer Screen
Sensing Transformers
Three sets of transformer settings configure the DGC-2020ES for operation with a specific system. These
settings, along with the generator voltage, generator current, and bus voltage detected by the DGC-
2020ES, enable it to accurately meter system values and offer generator protection.
The Sensing Transformers screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > Sensing
Transformers.
When adjusting these settings using BESTCOMSPlus, click the Rated Data button. See Rated Data,
above, for more information.
Generator PT
The generator PT settings establish the nominal primary (generator side) and secondary (DGC-2020ES
side) voltage levels at the generator voltage-sensing transformer. The Generator PT Primary setting
accepts values from 1 to 999,999, in increments of 1. The Generator PT Secondary setting accepts
values from 1 to 480, in increments of 1.
Bus PT
Primary and secondary bus transformer ratings are used by the optional automatic transfer switch
function. This function monitors a three-phase bus input to detect mains failure. The primary setting
establishes the nominal voltage present at phases A, B, and, C of the bus. This setting accepts values
from 1 to 99,999, in increments of 1. The secondary setting establishes the nominal voltage detected at
the bus voltage input of the DGC-2020ES. This setting accepts values from 1 to 480, in increments of 1.
Generator CT
The generator CT setting establishes the nominal, primary (generator side) current level at the generator
current sensing transformer. This setting accepts values from 1 to 9,999, in increments of 1. The
secondary value of the generator CT is dictated by the style number of the controller. A DGC-2020ES
with a style number of 1xx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 1 Aac. A DGC-2020ES with a style
number of 5xx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 5 Aac.

5-10 9469200995
The Gen CT Low Line Scale Factor setting is used to automatically adjust the Gen CT Primary Amps
setting in applications that may utilize more than one type of genset connection. This setting accepts a
value from 0.001 to 3, in increments of 0.001. The scale factor setting is implemented when the DGC-
2020ES senses a contact closure at a contact input programmed to activate scaling of the settings. The
value of the scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the Gen CT Primary Amps setting. For example,
if a scale factor contact input is received by the DGC-2020ES and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the
Gen CT Primary Amps setting is doubled (2.000 x Gen CT Primary Amps).
Relay Control
The default operational setting for the Start, Run, and Pre-start relays is Predefined or standard. Any of
these relays can be logic driven by selecting the Programmable setting. Logic driven (programmable
relays must be set up using BESTlogicPlus.
The Relay Control screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > Relay Control.
The BESTCOMSPlus Relay Control screen is illustrated in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Relay Control Screen
System Configuration Detection

When enabled, this feature allows the DGC-2020ES to automatically detect its sensing configuration in
relation to the generator. Upon starting the genset, the configuration of the generator is automatically
detected. The Single Phase Override and Low Line Override programmable function settings are then
adjusted accordingly.
There is a one-second delay in the detection to prevent the DGC-2020ES from alternating between
detected configurations. When the DGC-2020ES is in the Off mode or the engine is not running, the
Automatic Configuration Detection function is disabled. The DGC-2020ES is assumed to be in the last
valid automatically detected configuration.
It is recommended that the Single Phase Override and Low Line Override programmable functions are
not assigned to contact inputs when Automatic Configuration Detection is enabled.
Single Phase Detect Threshold

If the difference between the maximum and minimum line-to-line voltage exceeds this threshold, the unit
is determined to be in single-phase configuration. If determined to be in single-phase configuration, the
Single Phase Override programmable function forces the DGC-2020ES into single-phase mode. The
single-phase mode connection is determined by the Single Phase Detect Generator Connection, below.
If the Single Phase Override function is assigned to a contact output, the state of the contact output and
the detected configuration are ORed. This means, if one or both are true, then the system is determined
to be configured for single phase.
Low Line Detect Threshold

If the average of the valid line-to-line voltages for the detected configuration is above this threshold, the
unit is determined to be in a high-line configuration. If the average is below this threshold, it is determined
9469200995 5-11
to be in a low-line configuration. If determined to be in low-line configuration, the Low-Line Override

function forces the DGC-2020ES into the low-line configuration.
If the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact output, the state of the contact output and the
detected configuration are ORed. This means, if one or both are true, then the system is determined to be
configured for low-line.
Single Phase Detect Generator Connection

This setting specifies which single-phase connection to use when the system is determined to be single-
phase. Single-phase AB or Single-phase AC can be selected.
The Auto Config Detection screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > Auto Config
Detect. The BESTCOMSPlus Auto Config Detection screen is illustrated in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Auto Config Detection Screen

5-12 9469200995

9469200995 6-1
6 • Timekeeping
The DGC-2020ES provides a real-time clock with capacitor backup that is capable of operating the clock
for up to 24 hours after power is removed from the controller. As the capacitor nears depletion, an internal
backup battery takes over and maintains timekeeping. The battery will maintain the clock for
approximately ten years depending on conditions. The battery is not replaceable.
The clock is used by the events recorder function to time-stamp events and the exercise timer to start and
stop the genset when the exercise feature is utilized.
Clock Setup
Clock settings are made through the communication ports using BESTCOMSPlus® or through the front-
panel interface. Write access to ports is required to program the clock. An alarm is provided to detect
when the DGC-2020ES has powered up and the clock has not been set.
The clock settings are made through BESTCOMSPlus by selecting Clock Setup under General Settings.
If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > General Settings > Configure Date/Time.
The BESTCOMSPlus Clock Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 6-1. Settings are listed in Table 6-1.
The local time zone is configured on this screen. The Time Zone Offset is the local offset to UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time). The Time Zone Offset is required when the Start/End Time Reference is
set to UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). The Start/End Time Reference is set to UTC time if required by
local daylight savings time rules. The Start/End Hour/Minute settings determine the time when the DST
will go into effect. The Bias setting is the amount of time that the clock moves forward or backward. The
user is notified when the clock is not set when the Clock Not Set Warning is enabled.
Figure 6-1. Settings Explorer, General Settings, Clock Setup Screen
DGC-2020ES Timekeeping
6-2 9469200995
Table 6-1. Settings for Clock

Setting Range Increment Unit Default
UTC Offset –1,440 to 1,440 1 minutes –6
DST Configuration Floating Dates or Fixed Dates n/a n/a Disabled
Start/End Time Respective to Local Time or Respective to
n/a n/a
Reference Respective to UTC Time Local Time
Bias Setup (Hour) –12 to 12 1 hours Disabled
Bias Setup (Minute) –59 to 59 1 minutes 0
Clock Not Set
Disable or Enable n/a n/a Disable
Warning
Setting the Time and Date

Time and date settings are made through BESTCOMSPlus on the Real Time Clock screen (Figure 6-2) of
the Metering Explorer. Settings can also be made through the front panel.
Figure 6-2. Metering Explorer, Real Time Clock Screen
Timekeeping DGC-2020ES
9469200995 7-1
7 • Engine Sender Inputs

The DGC-2020ES has sender inputs dedicated to monitoring the engine fuel level, oil pressure, and
coolant temperature. These inputs are programmable to give the user flexibility in selecting the sender to
be used in an application. Information about programming sender inputs is provided later in this chapter.
Compatible Senders
Oil pressure senders that are compatible with the DGC-2020ES include Datcon model 02505-00, Isspro
model R8919, Stewart-Warner models 279BF, 279C, 411K and 411M, and VDO models 360025 and
360811. Compatible Fuel Level senders include the Isspro model R8925. Compatible Coolant
Temperature senders include Datcon model 02019-00, Faria model TS4042, Isspro model, R8959, and
Stewart-Warner model 334P. Other senders may also be used.
Operation
A current is provided to each sender. The developed voltage is measured and scaled for use by the
internal circuitry. An open circuit or short circuit across the sender terminals will cause the DGC-2020ES
to indicate a failed sender.
Sender Programmability
BESTCOMSPlus® software allows for the programming of sender characteristics. See Sender
Characteristic Curves for more information.
Sender Characteristic Curves

The sender inputs of the DGC-2020ES can be customized to obtain maximum accuracy from the coolant
temperature, oil pressure, and fuel level senders.
The characteristic curve of each sender input can be configured with up to 11 points. Each point can be
assigned a resistance input value and a corresponding temperature (coolant temperature sender),
pressure (oil pressure sender), or percentage (fuel level sender) value. A sender slope setting
automatically orders the values in the resistance column according to whether the sender requires a
negative or positive slope. Sender curve points are automatically plotted on a curve in BESTCOMSPlus,
which can be printed.
Sender curve points configured in BESTCOMSPlus can be saved in the configuration file. The data for all
three senders is automatically saved with the DGC-2020ES configuration file.
Any changes made in BESTCOMSPlus to the sender points, can be reverted to the factory-default
values. A new settings file can also be created.
Curve Configuration
If the DGC-2020ES receives engine information from an ECU, the programmable sender parameters for
coolant temperature and oil pressure do not require configuration because they have no effect.
Configuration of sender parameters is appropriate for resistive senders only.
Fuel Level
Figure 7-1 illustrates the Fuel Level screen found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the
Programmable Senders category. To program the fuel level sender, perform the following procedure:
1. The percent fuel level sender is configured by selecting one of the sender types that come as a part
of the BESTCOMSPlus sender library. Click on Load Fuel Settings File and select the appropriate
sender.
DGC-2020ES Engine Sender Inputs

7-2 9469200995
2. If no sender file matches the sender being used, the individual points that map resistance points to
fuel level may be modified by setting numeric values in the table, or dragging the points of the graph
to the desired characteristic. Information on sender characteristics should be obtained from the
sender manufacturer.
3. Select Positive or Negative sender slope as required for the desired sender graph.
4. Click Save Fuel Data to save the data in the current settings file.
5. If you want to save newly entered sender data as a sender library file, click Create Fuel Settings File
and enter a file name and location to save the file.
6. Click the Send Settings button in BESTCOMSPlus to send the sender settings to the DGC-2020ES.
Figure 7-1. Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Fuel Level Screen
Oil Pressure
Figure 7-2 illustrates the Oil Pressure screen found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the
Programmable Senders category. To program the oil pressure sender, perform the following procedure:
1. The oil pressure sender can be configured by selecting one of the sender types that come as a part of
the BESTCOMSPlus sender library. Click on Load Oil Settings File and select the appropriate sender.
2. If no sender file matches the sender being used, the individual points that map resistance points to oil
pressure may be modified by setting numeric values in the table, or dragging the points of the graph
to the desired characteristic. Information on sender characteristics should be obtained from the
sender manufacturer.
4. Click Save Oil Data to save the data in the current settings file.
Engine Sender Inputs DGC-2020ES

9469200995 7-3
5. If you want to save newly entered sender data as a sender library file, click Create Oil Settings File
Figure 7-2. Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Oil Pressure Screen
Coolant Temperature
Figure 7-3 illustrates the Coolant Temperature screen found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer
under the Programmable Senders category. To program the fuel level sender, perform the following
procedure:
1. The coolant temperature sender can be configured by selecting one of the sender types that come as
a part of the BESTCOMSPlus sender library. Click on Load Cool Settings File and select the
appropriate sender.
2. If no sender file matches the sender being used, the individual points that map resistance points to
coolant temperature may be modified by setting numeric values in the table, or by dragging the points
of the graph to the desired characteristic. Information on sender characteristics should be obtained
from the sender manufacturer.
4. Click Save Cool Data to save the data in the current settings file.
5. If you want to save newly entered sender data as a sender library file, click Create Cool Settings File

7-4 9469200995
Figure 7-3. Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Coolant Temperature Screen
Sender Failure Detection

The DGC-2020ES can be configured to annunciate a pre-alarm or alarm when a loss of signal is detected
at the coolant temperature, oil pressure, or fuel level sender input. Contact recognition can be set to
Always or While Engine Running Only. Minimum and Maximum resistance values can be set. When the
SF Display setting is set to Enable, “SF” is displayed instead of the measured parameter when the
resistance value is outside the range specified by the Minimum and Maximum Resistance values. A loss
of generator sensing voltage (when the DGC-2020ES is operating in Run or Auto mode with the ATS
closed) can also be configured to trigger a pre-alarm or alarm. The speed sender fail alarm is always
enabled. A user-adjustable time delay is provided for each sender/sensing alarm/pre-alarm.
Alarm and pre-alarm annunciations for loss of engine speed signals are not user-programmable and
operate as follows. If the MPU (magnetic pickup) or generator frequency is programmed as the sole
engine speed source and that signal source fails, an alarm (and shutdown) is triggered. If the engine
speed source is configured as MPU and generator frequency and a loss of one of the signal sources
occurs, a pre-alarm is annunciated. An alarm (and shutdown) is triggered if both speed signals are lost.
The BESTCOMSPlus Sender Fail screen is illustrated in Figure 7-4 and is found in the Settings Explorer
under Alarm Configuration. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > Alarm Configuration > Sender
Fail.
Voltage Sensing Fail

The voltage sensing fail function monitors the generator line-to-neutral voltages. If any of the line-to-
neutral voltages decreases below 2% of the CT secondary voltage for the duration of the Activation
Delay, the DGC-2020ES detects a Voltage Sensing Fail condition and annunciates an alarm based on
the Alarm Configuration setting.

9469200995 7-5
In a Grounded Delta configuration where one phase (A, B, or C) of the delta connection is grounded, it is
likely a Voltage Sensing Fail condition will occur.
In Delta connected systems where the DGC-2020ES neutral input is not connected, it is uncertain which
line-to-neutral voltages will be monitored by the DGC-2020ES. Spurious Voltage Sensing Fail
annunciations could occur.
It is recommended that Phase Imbalance detection be used to detect sensing issues in Delta and
Grounded Delta configurations.
Figure 7-4. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Sender Fail Screen

7-6 9469200995

9469200995 8-1
8 • Contact Inputs
Contact inputs are available to initiate DGC-2020ES actions. The DGC-2020ES has seven programmable
contact sensing inputs. Additional contact inputs can be accommodated with an optional CEM-2020
(Contact Expansion Module). Contact Basler Electric for availability and ordering information.
Each programmable input (Input 1 through Input 7) can be independently configured to perform the
following functions. By default, each programmable input is disabled.
• Auto Transfer Switch
• Battery Charger Fail
• Battle Override
• Emergency Stop
• Fuel Leak Detect
• Grounded Delta Override
• Low Coolant Level
• Low Fuel Level
• Low Line Override
• Single-Phase Override
The programmable inputs accept dry contacts. A contact is connected between a programmable input
and the negative side of the battery. Through BESTCOMSPlus®, each programmable contact input can
be assigned a name (16 alphanumeric characters, maximum) and configured as an alarm input, a pre-
alarm input, or none. The default names for the inputs are INPUT_x (where x = 1 to 7). When a
programmable contact input is closed, the front panel display shows the name of the closed input if it was
programmed as an alarm or pre-alarm input. Alarm inputs are annunciated through the Normal display
mode screens of the front panel. Pre-alarm inputs are annunciated through the pre-alarm metering screen
of the front panel. If neither alarm nor pre-alarm is programmed, no indication is given. Programming an
input as None is useful when a programmable input is used as an input to programmable logic.
Connections for the programmable inputs are provided at terminals 3 (Input 1) through 9 (Input 7). The
negative side of the battery voltage (terminal 17) serves as the return connection for the programmable
inputs.
Contact Input Configuration

Figure 8-1 illustrates the Contact Inputs screen found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the
Programmable Inputs category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > Programmable Inputs >
Configurable Inputs.
For each contact input, configure the following parameters:
1. Alarm Configuration - Select None, Alarm, or Pre-Alarm. When an alarm occurs, the horn output
closes and the engine shuts down. When a pre-alarm occurs, the horn output toggles between open
and closed while the engine remains running. If None is selected, the input is status only. The status
is available to BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic regardless of Alarm Configuration setting.
2. Activation Delay - This parameter defines the duration that the input remains on before any
annunciation occurs.
3. Label Text - Enter descriptive text that signifies the use of the input. This text appears next to the
input in BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic and in the event log if the input is configured as an
alarm or pre-alarm.
4. Contact Recognition - Select whether the contact input should be recognized always, or only while
the engine is running. For example, a switch closes when oil pressure is low. Such a switch would be
closed when the engine is not running but a low oil pressure alarm or pre-alarm should not be
annunciated unless the switch is closed while the engine is running. A selection of While Engine
Running Only prevents spurious annunciation when the engine is not running.
DGC-2020ES Contact Inputs

8-2 9469200995
Figure 8-1. Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Contact Inputs Screen
Programmable Functions
Any of the seven contact inputs can be programmed to recognize any one of 10 function types:
• Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) - Start and run the generator while the ATS input is true and the
DGC-2020ES is in Auto mode.
• Grounded Delta Override - Uses Grounded Delta sensing if the generator connection is set for
Delta.
• Battle Override - The alarms programmed to shut down the unit will be overridden and ignored.
When a Battle Override condition is true the DGC annunciates a Battle Override Pre-alarm that is
recorded in the event log. If an alarm occurs while a Battle Override condition is true, the alarm
annunciates on the DGC front panel and is recorded in the event log, but the engine will not stop.
• The DGC monitors engine RPM during battle override. If the engine RPM drops to zero while an
alarm is active during a Battle Override condition, the DGC will proceed to issue a normal
shutdown to prevent fuel flow while the engine is not running.
• Low-Line Override - The 51, 27, and 59 settings are scaled by the low-line scale factor setting.
• Single-Phase Override - The unit switches to single-phase sensing configuration and uses the 1
Phase Override Sensing setting (A-B or A-C).
• Emergency Stop – When an input is assigned to the Emergency Stop Programmable Function,
the input functions in a normally-closed manner. When the input is closed, no alarm is
annunciated. When the input is open, the DGC-2020ES will open the Start, Run, and Prestart
relays and annunciate an Emergency Stop Alarm.
Once an input is assigned to this programmable input, navigate to Settings Explorer >
Programmable Inputs > Contact Inputs and configure the following settings:
° Alarm Configuration: Status Only
° Activation Delay: 0
° Label Text: Any text is acceptable.
° Contact Recognition: Always
Contact Inputs DGC-2020ES

9469200995 8-3
• Battery Charger Fail - When the selected input is invoked, a user selectable pre-alarm or alarm is
annunciated after the activation delay.
• Low Coolant Level - When the selected input is invoked, a Low Coolant Level pre-alarm or alarm
is annunciated after the activation delay.
• Low Fuel Level - When the selected input is invoked, a Low Fuel Level pre-alarm or alarm is
• Fuel Leak Detect - When the selected input is invoked, a Fuel Leak pre-alarm or alarm is
An Alarm Configuration setting of “None” prevents a function from being triggered by a contact input.
Programmable function status is available in BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic when the “None”
alarm configuration setting is selected.
The Programmable Functions screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the
Programmable Functions.
The BESTCOMSPlus Programmable Functions screen is illustrated in Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2. Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Programmable Functions
DGC-2020ES Contact Inputs

8-4 9469200995
Contact Inputs DGC-2020ES

9469200995 9-1
9 • Contact Outputs
Output contact operation is controlled by the operating mode of the DGC-2020ES. The state of the
Emergency Stop contact input also affects output contact operation. When the Emergency Stop contact
input is open (emergency stop condition), the PRESTART, START, and RUN outputs open and an
emergency stop alarm is annunciated. When the Emergency Stop input is closed, all output contacts
operate normally.
DGC-2020ES output contacts include PRESTART, START, RUN, and four programmable outputs.
Additional output contacts can be accommodated with an optional CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion
Module).
Prestart
This output closes to energize the engine glow plugs or run pre-lubrication pumps. The PRESTART
output can be programmed to close up to 30 seconds prior to engine cranking. The PRESTART output
can also be programmed to open upon engine startup or remain closed as long as the engine is
operating.
During the resting state, the PRESTART output can be set to Off, On, or Preheat Before Crank. If Preheat
Before Crank is selected, the PRESTART output will be closed for a time equal to the Pre-crank delay
time prior to re-entering the cranking state. If the Pre-crank delay setting is longer than the rest interval,
the PRESTART output will be closed for the entire rest time.
PRESTART output connections are made through terminals located on the PRESTART relay.
Start
This output closes when engine cranking is initiated by the DGC-2020ES and opens when the magnetic
pickup (MPU) or generator frequency indicates that the engine has started. Prior to engine starting, the
duration of cranking is determined by the cranking style (cycle or continuous) selected. Cycle cranking
permits up to seven crank cycles with crank cycle duration of 5 to 15 seconds. The continuous crank time
is adjustable from 5 to 60 seconds.
START output connections are made through terminals located on the START relay.
Run
This output closes when engine cranking is initiated by the DGC-2020ES. The RUN output remains
closed until it receives a command to stop the engine.
RUN output connections are made through terminals located on the RUN relay.
Relay Control
In some applications, it may be beneficial to modify the standard operation of the DGC-2020ES Run, Pre-
Start, or Start relays. If desired, these relays can be configured to operate outside their predefined
functionality. For example, if your genset does not require starting assistance from glow plugs, the Pre-
Start relay may be assigned for another purpose. Configuring these relays as programmable makes them
available in BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic to be used in the same manner as the other
programmable relay outputs. Predefined or programmable operation of the Run, Pre-Start, and Start
relays is selected on the Relay Control screen (Figure 9-1). See the BESTlogicPlus chapter for more
information about DGC-2020ES programmable logic.
The Relay Control screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Explorer under the System
Parameters category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > System Parameters > Relay Control.
DGC-2020ES Contact Outputs

9-2 9469200995
Figure 9-1. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Relay Control Screen

For each relay (Start, Run, and Pre-Start), select whether it should use its predefined functionality or be
made programmable.
When Programmable is selected for a relay, it becomes available to BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic
as a logic element. The elements are titled Start Output, Prestart Out, and Run Output. The predefined
functionality is available as an input to the logic. If Programmable is selected as the relay control mode,
connecting the corresponding predefined input function to the relay causes it to function as if Predefined
were selected as its relay control type. However, other logic can be combined with it to create operation
that is more versatile. If Programmable is selected for a relay, but it is not used in the logic, that relay will
never close.
An example logic scheme connecting the predefined inputs directly to the “programmable” relay outputs
for all three relays is shown in Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2. Example Logic Scheme of Programmable Relays
Programmable
DGC-2020ES controllers have four programmable output contacts (OUT 1 through 4). An additional 24
contact outputs are provided with an optional CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module). An optional CEM-
2020H (Contact Expansion Module - High Current) provides 18 contact outputs.
Programmable Output Configuration

Figure 9-3 illustrates the Contact Outputs screen found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under
the Programmable Outputs category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > Programmable
Outputs > Contact Outputs.
Each output can be programmed with a text label describing its use. This label appears in BESTlogicPlus
Programmable Logic where the output is used to aid in program clarity and ease of programming.
Contact Outputs DGC-2020ES

9469200995 9-3
Figure 9-3. Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Contact Outputs
Configurable elements are connected to the logic scheme as outputs. The configurable elements are
incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by selecting them from the Elements
group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus chapter. Each of the eight elements
can be independently configured to annunciate an alarm or pre-alarm. A user-adjustable time delay can
be set to delay recognition of an element. By default, all elements are configured so that they do not
trigger an alarm or pre-alarm. To make identifying an element easier, each of the elements can be given
a user-assigned name. If used for an alarm or pre-alarm, the user-assigned name appears in the alarm or
pre-alarm annunciation and in the DGC-2020ES event log. Elements can be recognized always or only
while the engine is running. A user-adjustable arming delay disables the configurable element during
engine startup. If the arming delay is set to zero, the configurable element is active at all times, including
when the engine is not running. If the arming delay is set to a non-zero value, the configurable element is
inactive when the engine is not running, and does not become active until after the engine is started and
the arming delay has elapsed. Configurable element status is available in BESTlogicPlus Programmable
Logic when “None” is selected for Alarm Configuration. Configurable element status can be used as logic
inputs to drive other logic in the program, similar to logic control relays.
The BESTCOMSPlus Configurable Elements screen is illustrated in Figure 9-4 and found in the Settings
Explorer under the Programmable Outputs category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings >
Programmable Outputs > Configurable Elements.
DGC-2020ES Contact Outputs

9-4 9469200995
Figure 9-4. Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Configurable Elements
Contact Outputs DGC-2020ES

9469200995 10-1
10 • Breaker Management
The DGC-2020ES is capable of controlling the generator breaker and the mains breaker. Once it is
determined that a valid breaker request is available, the DGC-2020ES will attempt to operate the breaker
if possible. The user can choose to control only the generator breaker, the generator and mains breakers,
or none. BESTCOMSPlus® is used to configure breaker management. Refer to the BESTCOMSPlus
chapter for setting information.
Breaker Status
The status of the breakers is determined by using BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic and sent to the
GENBRK and MAINSBRK logic blocks. These logic blocks have outputs that can be configured to
energize an output contact and control a breaker as well as inputs for breaker control and status. See
Breaker Configuration, below, for details on configuring the logic.
Breaker Operation
The DGC-2020ES will attempt to close a breaker only after verifying that it can be closed. If the breaker
cannot be closed, the close request will be ignored. Only one breaker can be closed at a time. Closure to
a dead bus can be performed after meeting dead bus threshold and timing requirements set by the user.
Breaker Operation Requests

Types of breaker operation requests include:
• Local Request - initiated by internal functions and based on operating modes.
• Com Request - initiated through a communication port using BESTCOMSPlus or the front panel.
• Logic Request - initiated from BESTlogicPlus.
The type of response given for a local request depends on the operating mode of the DGC-2020ES.
RUN Mode
When in RUN mode, the generator and mains breakers can be closed manually using contact inputs or
the breaker operation settings on the BESTCOMSPlus Control screen.
OFF or AUTO Mode (Not Running)

If operating in the OFF mode or AUTO and not running, the generator breaker can be closed if the bus is
determined to be dead.
AUTO Mode (Running)

When in AUTO mode and running, the mains fail transfer feature will automatically control the mains
breaker and the generator breaker. Or, the external ATS (automatic transfer switch) will start the
generator and control the breakers itself. In addition, the generator breaker can be automatically
controlled by the exercise timer function or a RUNWLOAD (run with load) start through BESTlogicPlus.
The generator breaker can be manually controlled using contact inputs and outputs or the breaker
operation settings on the BESTCOMSPlus Control screen.
Breaker Closure Conditions

The conditions under which the DGC-2020ES will close a breaker are described in the following
paragraphs.
Breaker Status and Voltage Stability

Before the generator breaker can be closed, it must be configured in BESTCOMSPlus. If only the
generator breaker is configured (mains breaker not configured) the DGC-2020ES reads user settings to
determine if the generator side of the breaker is stable or dead and the bus side is dead. If both the
generator and the mains breakers are configured and open, the DGC-2020ES closes the generator
DGC-2020ES Breaker Management
10-2 9469200995
breaker if the generator side of the breaker is stable or dead. If both breakers are configured and the
mains breaker is closed, the DGC-2020ES will not close the generator breaker.
Before the mains breaker can be closed, it must be configured in BESTCOMSPlus. If both the mains and
the generator breakers are configured and open, the DGC-2020ES will close the mains breaker if the
mains side of the breaker is stable. If both breakers are configured and the generator breaker is closed,
the DGC-2020ES will not close the mains breaker.
Command Agreement
A breaker will not change state if it receives conflicting commands. In other words, if an input is indicating
an open command at the same time another input is indicating a close command, the breaker will not
change state.
Breaker Configuration
The following paragraphs describe how to properly configure a DGC-2020ES for generator breaker
control.
Initial System Setup

Connect the DGC-2020ES according to the appropriate figure in the Typical Connections chapter in the
Installation manual for the type of generator connection desired (wye, delta, etc.). Set up the basic system
parameters that will govern engine operation and alarm and pre-alarm annunciation. Details can be found
in the Device Configuration and Alarm Configuration chapters.
Breaker Hardware
Configure the generator breaker parameters on the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer, Breaker
Management, Breaker Hardware screen. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > Breaker
Management > Breaker Hardware. Figure 10-1 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Breaker Hardware screen.
1. Mains Fail: When two breakers are configured (enabled), the DGC-2020ES can be enabled to
automatically transfer load power from the mains to the genset during a mains failure. This feature
also enables the DGC-2020ES to transfer the load back to the mains once mains power is restored.
Settings include a transfer delay, return delay, max transfer time, and max return time.
a. When enabled, Reverse Rotation Inhibit prevents automatic load transfer due to a mains
failure when the machine is determined to have reverse phase rotation.
b. If the in-phase monitor is enabled and the Mains Fail Return Delay time has expired, the
generator waits until it detects that the phases are aligned between the generator and the
mains before performing the open transition from the generator back to the utility.
2. Breaker Close Wait Time: This is a time interval in which it is expected that the breaker will transition
from open to closed or closed to open. If the generator breaker does not change state within that
time, either a Gen Breaker Close Fail alarm or Gen Breaker Open Fail alarm is annunciated. If the
mains breaker does not change state within that time, either a Mains Breaker Close Fail alarm or
Mains Breaker Open Fail alarm is annunciated.
3. Generator Breaker
a. Set the Contact Type and Open/Close Pulse Times if pulsed contacts are used.
b. Set the Breaker Closing Time.
4. Mains Breaker
a. Set the Mains Breaker as Configured if it is used, otherwise do not configure these settings.
b. If the mains breaker is configured, set the contact type and pulse times if pulsed contacts are
used.
c. If the mains breaker is configured, set the breaker close time.
Breaker Management DGC-2020ES

9469200995 10-3
Figure 10-1. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware Screen
Breaker Setup in BESTlogic™Plus

Set up the Gen Breaker in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic under the BESTCOMSPlus Settings
Explorer, BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic screen. BESTlogicPlus is not available through the front
panel interface. Figure 10-2 illustrates the Gen breaker logic scheme in BESTlogicPlus.

10-4 9469200995

1. Generator Breaker
a. Drag the Gen Breaker element into the logic diagram.
b. Connect the breaker element open and close outputs to the contact outputs that will drive the
breaker.
c. Connect the physical input or remote input that has the breaker status (closed if breaker is
closed, open when the breaker is open) to the Status input of the breaker element. This is the
only way to indicate breaker status to the DGC-2020ES.
d. If it is desired to have physical inputs that can request breaker open and close commands,
connect the desired inputs to the open and close command inputs of the breaker element.
These inputs should be pulsed. If both inputs close at the same time, the breaker will not
change state. If it is not desired to have inputs for breaker commands, connect a “Logic 0”
input object to the open and close command inputs of the breaker block.
2. Mains Breaker (if configured)
a. Drag the Mains Breaker element into the logic diagram.
b. Connect the breaker element open and close outputs to the contact outputs that will drive the
breaker.
c. Connect the physical input or remote input that has the breaker status (closed if breaker is
closed, open if the breaker is open) to the Status input of the breaker element. This is the
only way to indicate breaker status to the DGC-2020ES.
d. If it is desired to have physical inputs that can request breaker open and close commands,
connect the desired inputs to the open and close command inputs of the breaker element.
These inputs should be pulsed. If both inputs close at the same time, the breaker will not
change state. If it is not desired to have inputs for breaker commands, connect a “Logic 0”
input object to the open and close command inputs of the breaker block.
3. Click the Save button when the logic setup is complete.
4. From the Communication pull-down menu, select Upload Logic to Device to load the logic into the
DGC-2020ES if connected, or save the settings file if working off line.

9469200995 10-5
Bus Condition Detection

(These thresholds determine when the generator and bus are considered to be stable or dead.)
Set the parameters for detecting stable and failed bus and generator under the BESTCOMSPlus Settings
Explorer, Breaker Management, Bus Condition Detection. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings >
Breaker Management > Bus Condition Detection.
Figure 10-3 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Bus Condition Detection screen.
1. Generator Sensing
a. Dead Bus Voltage Threshold and Activation Delay. When the generator voltage is below
this threshold for the duration of the activation delay, the generator is deemed “Dead”.
b. Gen Stable Overvoltage and Undervoltage thresholds and Overfrequency and
Underfrequency thresholds and the Bus Stable and Bus Failed Activation Delay times.
When the generator voltage frequency is within the specified range for the duration of the
Bus Stable Activation Delay, the generator is deemed “Stable”. Otherwise, it is deemed
“Failed”.
2. Bus Sensing
a. Dead Bus Voltage Threshold and Activation Delay. When the voltage of the bus is below
this threshold for the duration of the activation delay, the bus is deemed “Dead”.
b. Bus Stable Overvoltage and Undervoltage thresholds and Overfrequency and
Underfrequency thresholds and the Bus Stable and Bus Failed Activation Delay times.
When the bus voltage and frequencies are within the specified ranges for the duration of
the Bus Stable Activation Delay, the bus is deemed “Stable”. Otherwise, it is deemed
“Failed”.
Caution
The bus condition parameters are critical because they determine

when a breaker can be closed. The generator breaker can be closed
when any one of the following is true:
• The generator is stable, the bus is dead, and both breakers are
open.
• The generator is dead, the bus is dead, and both breakers are
open.
The mains breaker can be closed only when the bus is stable and both
breakers are open.
Place the unit in AUTO. The unit is now configured for generator breaker control. It can be tested by
driving the RUN WITH LOAD logic element true, setting up the exercise timer for a loaded test, or by
starting the unit in RUN or AUTO mode and giving it CLOSE and OPEN commands from the physical
inputs if they are available for breaker control.
Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter if the breaker does not seem to operate properly.

10-6 9469200995
Figure 10-3. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Bus Condition Detection

9469200995 11-1
11 • Alarm Configuration
Configuration of DGC-2020ES alarms, pre-alarms, sender failure alarms, and the audible horn is
Alarms
To configure alarms using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Alarm screen (Figure 11-1). This screen is found in
the Settings Explorer under the Alarm Configuration category. If using the front panel, navigate to
Settings > Alarm Configuration > Alarms.
Figure 11-1. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Alarms Screen

The alarm settings are described below.
High Coolant Temp

High coolant temperature alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an
arming delay. If enabled, a high coolant temperature alarm is triggered after a four second delay when the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the threshold setting. The arming delay disables the high coolant
temperature alarm function for a user-adjustable period after engine startup. System units are configured
on the System Settings screen.
Low Oil Pressure

Low oil pressure alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an arming
delay. If enabled, a low oil pressure alarm is triggered after a two second delay when the engine oil
pressure decreases below the threshold setting. The arming delay disables the low oil pressure alarm
function for a user-adjustable period after engine startup. System units and metric pressure units are
configured on the System Settings screen.
DGC-2020ES Alarm Configuration

11-2 9469200995
Overspeed
Overspeed alarm settings include an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an activation delay.
If enabled, an overspeed alarm occurs when the engine speed (in rpm) exceeds the threshold setting for
the duration of the activation time delay.
Low Fuel Level

Low fuel level alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, an activation delay
setting, and a hysteresis setting. If enabled, a low fuel level alarm is triggered when the metered fuel level
drops below the threshold setting for the duration of the activation time delay. The hysteresis setting
functions as an alarm dropout by preventing rapid switching of the alarm annunciation. Once the Low
Fuel Level alarm has activated, it will not turn off until the fuel is increased to a level equal to the
threshold plus the hysteresis setting.
Low Coolant Level

Low coolant level alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If enabled, a
low coolant level alarm is triggered when the metered coolant level drops below the threshold setting.
ECU Support must be enabled on the Communications, CAN Bus, CAN Bus Setup screen before this
alarm can be configured.
CAN Bus Low Coolant Level

When enabled, any Low Coolant Level indication received over the J1939 CAN Bus it treated as an
alarm. When disabled, Low Coolant Level indications received over the J1939 CAN Bus are treated as
pre-alarms.
Pre-alarms
To configure pre-alarms using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Pre-Alarms screen (Figure 11-2). This screen
is found in the Settings Explorer under the Alarm Configuration category. If using the front panel, navigate
to Settings > Alarm Configuration > Pre-alarms.
The pre-alarm settings are described below.
High Fuel Level

High fuel level pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, an activation
delay setting, and a hysteresis setting. If enabled, a high fuel level pre-alarm is triggered when the
metered fuel level increases above the threshold setting for the duration of the activation delay. The
hysteresis setting functions as a pre-alarm dropout by preventing rapid switching of the alarm
annunciation. Once the High Fuel Level pre-alarm has activated, it will not turn off until the fuel is
decreased to a level equal to the threshold minus the hysteresis setting.
Low Fuel Level

Low fuel level pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and a hysteresis
setting. If enabled, a low fuel level pre-alarm is triggered when the metered fuel level decreases below the
threshold setting. The hysteresis setting functions as a pre-alarm dropout by preventing rapid switching of
the alarm annunciation. Once the Low Fuel Level pre-alarm has activated, it will not turn off until the fuel
is increased to a level equal to the threshold plus the hysteresis setting.
Low Battery Voltage

Low battery voltage pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an
activation delay. If enabled, a low battery voltage pre-alarm is triggered when the battery voltage
decreases below the threshold setting for the duration of the activation time delay. The threshold can be
entered in actual volts or a per-unit value. The per-unit threshold value is based on the nominal battery
voltage setting found on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen.
Alarm Configuration DGC-2020ES

9469200995 11-3
High Coolant Temp

High coolant temperature pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting.
If enabled, a high coolant temperature pre-alarm is annunciated when the engine coolant temperature
exceeds the threshold setting for a fixed duration of four seconds. The arming delay disables the High
Coolant Temp pre-alarm function for a user-adjustable time during engine startup. Delay duration is
determined by the High Coolant Temp Alarm Arming Delay setting. System units are configured on the
System Settings screen.
Weak Battery Voltage

Weak battery voltage pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an
activation time delay. If enabled, a weak battery voltage pre-alarm latches during engine cranking when
the battery voltage decreases below the threshold setting for the duration of the activation delay. The
threshold can be entered in actual volts or a per-unit value. The per-unit threshold value is based on the
nominal battery voltage setting found on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen.
Low Coolant Temp

Low coolant temperature pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a low coolant temperature pre-alarm occurs when the engine coolant temperature decreases
below the threshold setting. System units are configured on the System Settings screen.
Battery Overvoltage
Battery overvoltage pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a battery overvoltage pre-alarm occurs when the battery voltage increases above the threshold
setting. The threshold can be entered in actual volts or a per-unit value. The per-unit threshold value is
based on the nominal battery voltage setting found on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen.
ECU Coms Fail

ECU communication failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, this
pre-alarm is triggered when the DGC-2020ES detects a problem in its J1939 CAN connection to the ECU.
Coolant Level
Low coolant level pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a low coolant level pre-alarm is triggered when the metered coolant level decreases below the
threshold setting.
Maintenance Interval
Maintenance interval pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a maintenance interval pre-alarm is annunciated when the DGC-2020ES maintenance timer
counts down to zero from the threshold time setting.
Active DTC
Active DTC (diagnostic trouble code) pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If
J1939 CAN and DTC support are both enabled, an “active DTC” pre-alarm can be enabled. This pre-
alarm is triggered when a DTC is sent from the ECU to the DGC-2020ES.
Low Oil Pressure

Low oil pressure pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a low oil pressure pre-alarm is triggered after a two second delay when the engine oil pressure
decreases below the threshold setting. The arming delay disables the low oil pressure pre-alarm function
for a user-adjustable time during engine startup. Delay duration is determined by the Low Oil Pressure
Alarm Arming Delay setting. System units and metric pressure units are configured on the System
Settings screen.

11-4 9469200995
CEM Comm Failure

CEM-2020 communication failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled,
this pre-alarm is triggered when communication between the optional CEM-2020 and DGC-2020ES is
lost.
Checksum Failure
When one of the internal checksum calculations, used for data integrity purposes, has failed, the
checksum failure pre-alarm is triggered. This indicates that some of the user settings or firmware code
has been corrupted.
After upgrading firmware through BESTCOMSPlus, the checksum failure pre-alarm may trigger. This pre-
alarm is not indicative of an error in this case. It can be cleared by cycling power to the DGC-2020ES. If
the pre-alarm reoccurs, then it is indicative of an error and corrective action should be taken. See
Resetting Alarms, Checksum Failure, below, for more information.
Breaker Close Failure

If enabled, this pre-alarm is triggered when the DGC-2020ES has issued a "breaker close" output and has
not received "breaker closed" feedback from the breaker within the allowed closing time. The Monitor
setting determines whether this condition is monitored only during transitions or always.
Breaker Open Failure

If enabled, this pre-alarm is triggered when the DGC-2020ES has issued a "breaker open" output and has
not received "breaker opened" feedback from the breaker within the allowed closing time. The Monitor
setting determines whether this condition is monitored only during transitions or always.
Reverse Rotation
If enabled, this pre-alarm is triggered when the Generator or Bus rotation is opposite of the Phase
Rotation setting defined on the Rated Data screen.
Engine kW Overload
By comparing the genset power output with the rated genset output, the level of engine loading can be
determined. Three engine overload pre-alarms are available that monitor three-phase real power when
three-phase sensing is active or single-phase real power if single-phase sensing is active. Settings for
each pre-alarm consist of an enable/disable setting, three-phase threshold setting, three-phase hysteresis
setting, single-phase threshold setting, single-phase hysteresis setting, and low-line scale factor setting. If
enabled, an engine overload pre-alarm occurs when the metered power level exceeds the threshold
setting. The threshold setting is expressed as a percentage of the genset kW rating on the
BESTCOMSPlus Rated Data screen (DGC-2020ES, System Parameters, Rated Data). The hysteresis
setting functions as a pre-alarm dropout by preventing rapid switching of the alarm annunciation. When
the low-line override is active, the thresholds for three-phase and single-phase detection are multiplied by
the low-line scale factor. The effect is that low-line threshold = three-phase or single-phase threshold
setting x low-line scale factor.

9469200995 11-5
Figure 11-2. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Pre-Alarms Screen
Horn Configuration
To configure the audible horn using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Horn Configuration screen (Figure 11-3).
This screen is found in the Settings Explorer under the Alarm Configuration category. If using the front
panel, navigate to Settings > Alarm Configuration > Horn Configuration.
An output contact is configured through programmable logic to energize an audible horn when an alarm
or pre-alarm condition exists. The horn settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a Not in Auto
enable/disable setting. If enabled, the contact output is closed when an alarm condition exists. The
contact output is toggled between open and closed when a pre-alarm condition exists. If the Not in Auto
setting is enabled, the horn is disabled when the DGC-2020ES is not operating in Auto mode.

11-6 9469200995
Figure 11-3. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Horn Configuration Screen
Sender Failure
To configure sender failure alarms using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Sender Fail screen (Figure 11-4).
This screen is found in the Settings Explorer under the Alarm Configuration category. If using the front
panel, navigate to Settings > Alarm Configuration > Sender Fail.
Coolant temperature, oil pressure, fuel level, and voltage sensing sender failure settings consist of an
alarm configuration setting and an activation delay. The alarm configuration setting allows selection of the
type of alarm to be annunciated when a sender fail condition exists. None, Alarm, and Pre-alarm can be
selected. The selected alarm type is triggered when a sender failure exists for the duration of the
activation time delay.
Speed sender failure settings consist of a single activation delay. An alarm is triggered when a speed
sender failure exists for the duration of the activation time delay.
Figure 11-4. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Sender Fail Screen

9469200995 12-1
12 • Generator Protection
DGC-2020ES controllers offer standard protection consisting of undervoltage (27), overvoltage (59),
overcurrent (50), overfrequency (81O), underfrequency (81U), and phase-imbalance voltage (47)
elements.
The description of generator protection is organized as follows:
• Voltage (27, 59, 47)
• Frequency (81)
• Overcurrent (50)
Voltage
Voltage protection consists of an undervoltage element, an overvoltage element, and a phase-sequence
voltage element.
Undervoltage (27)
Two sets of undervoltage settings are provided for this element: one for three-phase generator
connections and one for single-phase generator connections. The pickup setting entered is based on the
PT secondary side. When a single-phase override contact input is received, the DGC-2020ES
automatically switches from the three-phase undervoltage settings to the single-phase undervoltage
settings.
An undervoltage condition is annunciated when the average of the three-phase (three-phase mode) or
the line-to-line voltage (single-phase mode) decreases below the corresponding 27 pickup setting for the
duration of the corresponding 27 activation delay. An undervoltage annunciation can be user-selected to
trigger a pre-alarm (warning) or alarm (shutdown). An undervoltage annunciation can also be user-
configured to close a programmable output.
The hysteresis setting functions as an undervoltage dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup
output.
A frequency-based inhibit setting prevents a 27 trip from occurring during an undervoltage condition
associated with system startup.
A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that may utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020ES senses a contact closure at a contact input programmed to activate
low-line override. This triggers scaling of the protection settings. The value of the scale factor setting
serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if a scale factor contact input is received by the
DGC-2020ES and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be doubled (2.000 × PU).
The element is disabled when Alarm Configuration is set to “None”. Element status is available in
BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic when “Status Only” is selected.
Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either actual units of voltage or in per unit
values. When a native unit is edited, BESTCOMSPlus® automatically recalculates the per unit value
based on the native unit setting and the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data
screen) associated with it. When a per unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates
the native value based on the per unit setting and the rated data parameter associated with it.
Once all per unit values are assigned, if the rated data parameters are changed, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all native unit settings based on the modified rated data parameters.
The following settings have native units of Secondary Volts, and the rated data associated with them is
Rated Secondary Volts (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Undervoltage 27 Three-Phase Pickup
• Undervoltage 27 Single-Phase Pickup
DGC-2020ES Generator Protection

12-2 9469200995
The Undervoltage screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the Generator
Protection, Voltage category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > Generator Protection > 27
Undervoltage. The BESTCOMSPlus Undervoltage screen is illustrated in Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1. Settings Explorer, Generator Protection, Voltage, Undervoltage (27) Screen
Overvoltage (59)
Two sets of overvoltage settings are provided for this element: one for three-phase generator connections
and one for single-phase generator connections. The pickup setting entered is based on the PT
secondary side (DGC-2020ES). When a single-phase override contact input is received, the DGC-
2020ES automatically switches from the three-phase overvoltage settings to the single-phase overvoltage
settings.
An overvoltage condition is annunciated when the average of the three-phase (three-phase mode) or the
line-to-line voltage (single-phase mode) increases above the corresponding 59 pickup setting for the
duration of the corresponding 59 activation delay. An overvoltage annunciation can be user-selected to
trigger a pre-alarm (warning) or alarm (shutdown). An overvoltage annunciation can also be user-
The hysteresis setting functions as an undervoltage dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup
output.
A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the overvoltage pickup settings in
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic when “Status Only” is selected.
values. When a native unit is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the per unit value based
on the native unit setting and the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen)
associated with it. When a per unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the native
value based on the per unit setting and the rated data parameter associated with it.
The following settings have native units of Secondary Volts, and the rated data associated with them is
Rated Secondary Volts (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Overvoltage 59 Three-Phase Pickup
Generator Protection DGC-2020ES
9469200995 12-3
• Overvoltage 59 Single-Phase Pickup

The Overvoltage screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the Generator
Overvoltage. The BESTCOMSPlus Overvoltage screen is illustrated in Figure 12-2.
Figure 12-2. Settings Explorer, Generator Protection, Voltage, Overvoltage (59) Screen
Phase Imbalance (47)

DGC-2020ES controllers are capable of protecting against voltage imbalances between any of the three
phases. The pickup setting entered is based on the PT secondary side. A phase imbalance condition is
annunciated when the difference between any of the three phases of generator voltage increases above
the 47 pickup setting for the duration of the 47 activation delay setting. A phase imbalance annunciation
can be user-selected to trigger a pre-alarm (warning) or alarm (shutdown). A phase imbalance
annunciation can also be user-configured to close a programmable output.
The hysteresis setting functions as a phase imbalance dropout by preventing rapid switching of the
pickup output.
A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the phase imbalance pickup setting in
the low-line override. This triggers scaling of the protection settings. The value of the scale factor setting
serves as a multiplier for the pickup setting. For example, if a scale factor contact input is received by the
The following setting has native units of Secondary Volts, and the rated data associated with it is Rated
Secondary Volts (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Phase Imbalance 47 Pickup
The Phase Imbalance screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the Generator
Phase Imbalance. The BESTCOMSPlus Phase Imbalance screen is illustrated in Figure 12-3.

12-4 9469200995
Figure 12-3. Settings Explorer, Generator Protection, Voltage, Phase Imbalance (47) Screen
Frequency
Two sets of frequency protection settings are provided: one for underfrequency (81U) and one for
overfrequency (81O).
Underfrequency (81U)
An underfrequency condition is annunciated when the generator frequency decreases below the 81U
pickup setting for the duration of the 81U activation delay setting. An underfrequency annunciation can be
user-selected to trigger a pre-alarm (warning) or alarm (shutdown). An underfrequency annunciation can
also be user-configured to close a programmable output.
A voltage-based inhibit setting prevents an 81U trip from occurring during an underfrequency condition
associated with system startup.
The hysteresis setting functions as an underfrequency dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup
output.
Overfrequency (81O)
When the generator frequency increases above the 81O pickup setting for the duration of the 81O
activation delay setting, an overfrequency condition is annunciated. An overfrequency annunciation can
be user-selected to trigger a pre-alarm (warning) or alarm (shutdown). An overfrequency condition can
also be user configured to close a programmable output.
The hysteresis setting functions as an overfrequency dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup
output.
Alternate Frequency Scale Factor

An alternate frequency scale factor setting is used for automatic adjustment of the frequency pickup
settings in applications that may utilize more than one operating frequency. For example, a machine that
is configurable between 50 or 60 Hz operation. The scale factor setting is implemented when the DGC-
2020ES senses a contact closure at a contact input that is connected to the Alternate Frequency Override
logic element in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic. When the Alternate Frequency Override is true, the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if an alternate frequency
scale factor contact input is received by the DGC-2020ES and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup
setting is doubled (2.000 x PU).

9469200995 12-5
Per Unit
Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either actual units of hertz or in per unit
values. Per unit settings are available for Pickup (81O/81U) and Inhibit Volts (81U). When a native unit is
edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the per unit value based on the native unit setting and
the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen) associated with it. When a per
unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the native value based on the per unit
setting and the rated data parameter associated with it.
The following settings have native units of Frequency in Hz, and the rated data associated with them is
Rated Frequency (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• 81 U Pickup
• 81 O Pickup
The following setting has native units of Secondary Volts, and the rated data associated with it is Rated
Secondary Volts (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• 81 U Inhibit Voltage
The Frequency screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the Generator Protection,
Frequency category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > Generator Protection > 81 O/U
Frequency. The BESTCOMSPlus Frequency screen is illustrated in Figure 12-4.
Figure 12-4. Settings Explorer, Generator Protection, Frequency, Frequency (81) Screen
Overcurrent
Two sets of overcurrent settings are provided for this element: one for three-phase generator connections
and one for single-phase generator connections. The pickup setting entered is based on the CT
secondary side. When a single-phase override contact input is received by the DGC-2020ES, the
overcurrent protection settings automatically switch from the three-phase settings to the single-phase
overcurrent protection settings.
When any of the phase currents increase above the pickup setting for the duration of the overcurrent time
delay, an overcurrent condition is annunciated. An overcurrent annunciation can be user-selected to
trigger a pre-alarm (warning) or alarm (shutdown). An overcurrent annunciation can also be user-
A low-line scale factor setting is used for automatic adjustment of the overcurrent pickup settings in

12-6 9469200995
Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either actual units of current or in per unit
The following settings have native units of Secondary Amps, and the rated data associated with them is
Rated Secondary Phase Amps (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Overcurrent 50 Three-Phase Pickup
• Overcurrent 50 Single-Phase Pickup
The Overcurrent screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the Generator
Protection, Current category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > Generator Protection > 50
Overcurrent. The BESTCOMSPlus Overcurrent screen is illustrated in Figure 12-5.
Figure 12-5. Settings Explorer, Generator Protection, Current, Overcurrent

9469200995 13-1
13 • BESTlogic™Plus
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic is a programming method used for managing the input, output,
protection, control, monitoring, and reporting capabilities of Basler Electric's DGC-2020ES Digital Genset
Controller. Each DGC-2020ES has multiple, self-contained logic blocks that have all of the inputs and
outputs of its discrete component counterpart. Each independent logic block interacts with control inputs
and hardware outputs based on logic variables defined in equation form with BESTlogicPlus.
BESTlogicPlus equations entered and saved in the DGC-2020ES system's nonvolatile memory integrate
(electronically wire) the selected or enabled protection and control blocks with control inputs and
hardware outputs. A group of logic equations defining the logic of the DGC-2020ES is called a logic
scheme.
One default active logic scheme is preloaded into the DGC-2020ES. This scheme is configured for a
typical protection and control application and virtually eliminates the need for "start-from-scratch"
programming. BESTCOMSPlus® can be used to open a logic scheme that was previously saved as a file
and upload it to the DGC-2020ES. The default logic scheme can also be customized to suit your
application. Detailed information about logic schemes is provided later in this section.
BESTlogicPlus is not used to define the operating settings (modes, pickup thresholds, and time delays) of
the individual protection and control functions. Operating settings and logic settings are interdependent
but separately programmed functions. Changing logic settings is similar to rewiring a panel and is
separate and distinct from making the operating settings that control the pickup thresholds and time
delays of a DGC-2020ES. Detailed information about operating settings is provided in the
BESTCOMSPlus chapter.
Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices.

Nonvolatile memory is used to store information (such as settings) that
needs to be preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise
restarted. Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a
physical limit on the number of times they can be erased and written.
In this product, the limit is 100,000 erase/write cycles. During product
application, consideration should be given to communications, logic,
and other factors that may cause frequent/repeated writes of settings
or other information that is retained by the product. Applications that
result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce the useable
product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.
Overview of BESTlogic™Plus
Use BESTCOMSPlus to change BESTlogicPlus settings. Use the Settings Explorer to open the
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic tree branch as shown in Figure 13-1.
The BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic screen contains a logic library for opening and saving logic files,
tools for creating and editing logic documents, and protection settings.
13-2 9469200995
BESTlogic™Plus Composition
There are three main groups of objects used for programming BESTlogicPlus. These groups are I/O,
Components, and Elements. For details on how these objects are used to program BESTlogicPlus, see
the paragraphs on Programming BESTlogicPlus, later in this chapter.
I/O
This group contains Input Objects, Output Objects, Alarms, Pre-Alarms, Senders, and Logic Control
Relays. Table 13-1 lists the names and descriptions of the objects in the I/O group.
Table 13-1. I/O Group, Names and Descriptions
Name Description Symbol
Input Objects
Logic 0 Always false (Low).
Logic 1 Always true (High).
Physical Inputs True when Physical Input x is active.

IN1 – IN7
Remote Inputs True when Remote Input x is active. (Available when

IN8 – IN17 an optional CEM-2020 is connected.)
Virtual Inputs True when Virtual Input x is active.

VIN1 – VIN4
Status Input True when Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present.

Active DTC’s
Present
9469200995 13-3

Status Input True when the Alarm Silence logic element is true or
Alarm Silence the Alarm Silence button is pressed on the front
panel.
Status Input True when the Alternate Frequency Override logic
Alternate element is true.
Frequency
Override
Status Input True when the ATS (Auto Transfer Switch) input is
ATS Input true or the ATS logic element is true.
Status Input True when the Audible Horn is active.

Audible Horn
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in Auto Mode or the

Auto Mode Auto Mode logic element is true.
Status Input True when the Automatic Restart function is active.

Auto Restart
Status Input True when the ac power to the battery charger is off.
Battery Charger (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
AC Off
Status Input True when the battery charger has detected that the
Battery Charger battery has failed. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Battery Failure
Status Input True when the battery charger has detected a J1939
Battery Charger communications failure. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Comms Fail
Status Input True when the battery charger has failed. (Battery
Battery Charger Charger 1 shown.)
Fail
Status Input True when the battery charger output voltage is too
Battery Charger high. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
High Output
Volts
Status Input True when the battery charger has detected settings
Battery Charger that are not valid. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Invalid Settings
Status Input True when the battery charger has detected that the
Battery Charger voltage while the engine is cranking has dipped too
low. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Low Cranking
Volts
Status Input True when the battery charger output voltage is too
Battery Charger low. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Low Output
Volts
Status Input True when the battery charger has detected one or
Battery Charger more charging output stages in a charger with
multiple charging output stages has failed. (Battery
Single Unit Fail
Charger 1 shown.)
13-4 9469200995

Status Input True when the battery charger temperature is
Battery Charger beyond the thermal limit. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Thermal Limit
Status Input True when the Battery Charger Fail input is true.
Battery Charger
Fail
Status Input True when the Battle Override input is true.
Battle Override
Status Input True when the Bus Dead condition settings have
Bus Dead been exceeded.
Status Input True when the Bus Fail condition settings have been
Bus Fail exceeded.
Status Input True when the bus rotation matches the Phase
Bus Forward Rotation setting.
Rotation
Status Input True when the bus rotation is opposite of the Phase
Bus Reverse Rotation setting.
Rotation
Status Input True when the Bus Stable condition settings have
Bus Stable been exceeded.
Status Input True when the CAN Bus - bus is off.

CAN Bus - Bus
Off
Status Input True when a passive error is annunciated by the
CAN Bus Error CAN Bus.
Passive
Status Input True when the Configurable Element x logic element
Configurable is true.
Elements 1-8
Status Input Contact Expansion Module Connected. True when
Contact an optional CEM-2020 is connected to the DGC-
Expansion 2020ES.
Module
Status Input True when the Cool Down Timer is timing out. The
Cool Down Cool Down Timer is true under two circumstances:
Timer Active 1. The unit is in auto and ATS is removed, causing
the DGC-2020ES to go into a cooldown state.
2. The engine is running (in RUN or AUTO mode
with ATS applied) and the load has been
removed (i.e. the EPSSUPLOAD status input is
false due to small load). If the load is reapplied,
the Cool Down Timer stops and resets, and it
will restart when the load is removed the next
time.
Status Input True when DPF lamp is lit. This status input mimics
DPF Lamp the state of the DPF lamp. It remains true when the
Command DPF lamp is constantly lit and toggles true and false
at a rate of 1 Hz when DPF lamp is blinking.
Status Input True when a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) manual
DPF Manual regen request has been initiated through the front
Regen Request panel, BESTCOMSPlus, or the Manual Regen
Request logic element.
9469200995 13-5

Status Input True when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
DPF Regen regeneration inhibit setting is turned on through the
Inhibit Request front panel, BESTCOMSPlus, or logic.
Status Input True when the engine ECU sends ECU Amber
ECU Amber Lamp (Warning Lamp) status as part of J1939
Lamp Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) communications. It
may be off, on, or flashing. If the installation requires
annunciation of engine warning and fault lamps, this
may be connected to an output in logic to drive an
amber lamp.
Status Input True when the engine ECU sends ECU Red Lamp
ECU Red Lamp (Fault Lamp) status as part of J1939 Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) communications. It may be off,
on, or flashing. If the installation requires
annunciation of engine warning and fault lamps, this
may be connected to an output in logic to drive a red
lamp.
Status Input True when the Emergency Stop button has been
Emergency pressed.
Stop
Status Input True while the Engine is Running.
Engine Running
Status Input True when the engine is presently running and has
Engine Running been running 15 minutes or more since the most
15 Minutes recent start.
Status Input True while the EPS is supplying load.

EPS Supplying
Load
Status Input True while the Auto front panel button is pressed.
Front Panel
Buttons
Status Input True while the Back front panel button is pressed.
Front Panel
Buttons
Status Input True while the Down front panel button is pressed.
Front Panel
Buttons
Status Input True while the Edit front panel button is pressed.
Front Panel
Buttons
Status Input True while the Up and Down front panel buttons are
Front Panel simultaneously pressed.
Buttons
Status Input True while the Off front panel button is pressed.
Front Panel
Buttons
Status Input True when the restart delay is currently active.
Restart Delay
Active
Status Input True while the Run front panel button is pressed.
Front Panel
Buttons
13-6 9469200995

Status Input True while the Back and Edit front panel buttons are
Front Panel simultaneously pressed.
Buttons
Status Input True while the Up front panel button is pressed.
Front Panel
Buttons
Status Input True when the Fuel Leak Detect input is true.
Fuel Leak
Status Input True when the generator breaker is closed.

Generator
Breaker Status
Status Input True when the Gen Dead condition settings have
Generator Dead been exceeded.
Status Input True when the Gen Fail condition settings have
Generator Fail been exceeded.
Status Input True when the generator rotation matches the

Generator Phase Rotation setting.
Forward
Rotation
Status Input True when the 27 element is tripped.
Generator
Protection
Generator
Protection
Generator
Protection
Generator
Protection
Status Input True when the 81 Over element is tripped.
Generator
Protection
Status Input True when the 81 Under element is tripped.
Generator
Protection
Status Input True when the generator rotation is opposite of the
Generator Phase Rotation setting.
Reverse
Rotation
Status Input True when the Gen Stable condition settings have
Generator been exceeded.
Stable
Status Input True when the Exercise Timer has started the
Generator Test generator and run with load is selected.
Loaded
Status Input True when the Exercise Timer has started the
Generator Test generator.
9469200995 13-7

Status Input True when the Low Coolant Level input is true.
Global Low
Coolant Level
Status Input True when the Grounded Delta Override input is
Ground Delta true.
Override
Status Input True when the Idle Request logic element is true.
Idle Request
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the alarm state.

In Alarm State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the connecting

In Connecting state.
State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the cooling state.
In Cooling State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the cranking state.

In Cranking
State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the disconnect
In Disconnect state.
State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the pre-start state.
In Prestart State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the pulsing state.

In Pulsing State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the ready state.

In Ready State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the resting state.

In Resting State
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in the running state.

In Running
State
Status Input True when the Lamp Test logic element is true or
Lamp Test the Lamp Test button is pressed on the front panel.
Status Input True when the Load Take Over logic element is true.
Load Take Over
Status Input True when the Low Line Override input is true.
Low Line
Override
Status Input True when the mains breaker is closed.
Mains Breaker
Status
Status Input True when the Mains Fail Test logic element is true.
Mains Fail Test
13-8 9469200995

Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is configured for mains
Mains Fail fail transfers and has successfully transferred to the
Transfer generator from the utility. It remains true until the
Complete utility power is deemed good and the DGC-2020ES
transfers the load back to utility power.
Status Input True when the Mains Fail Transfer Functionality is
Mains Fail not enabled or when the DGC-2020ES is operating
Transfer in the Off or Run modes or in the alarm state.
Disabled
Status Input True when mains fail transfer function detects the
Mains Fail load is powered from the generator bus.
Transfer
Power from
Gens
Status Input True when mains fail transfer function detects the
Mains Fail load is powered from the mains bus.
Transfer
Power from
Mains
Status Input True when mains fail transfer return delay timer is
Mains Fail actively counting.
Transfer
Return Timer
Active
Status Input True when the mains fail transfer delay timer is
Mains Fail actively counting.
Transfer
Transfer Timer
Active
Status Input True when mains fail transfer is transferring load to
Mains Fail the generator bus.
Transfer
Transferring to
Gens
Status Input True when mains fail transfer is transferring load to
Mains Fail the mains bus.
Transfer
Transferring to
Mains
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in Off Mode or the
Off Mode Off Mode logic element is true.
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in Off Mode and

Off Mode cooling down.
Cooldown
Status Input True when the open transition delay is actively
Open Transition counting.
Delay
Status Input True while in the Pre Start state.
Pre Start
Condition in
Effect
9469200995 13-9

Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is indicating that the
Pre Start Input Pre Start relay should be closed.
Status Input True for 30 seconds after a Yanmar ECU goes back
Regen into passive mode when the status of the DPF
Completed Active Regeneration Forced Status is “Regen
Successful”.
Status Input True after a manual exhaust regeneration has been
Regen requested on a Yanmar ECU. Once in this state,
Confirmation another regen request must be issued to confirm
Requested manual regeneration.
Status Input True when John Deere proprietary parameters are
Regen Interlock broadcast over the J1939 CAN Bus.
from ECU
Status Input True for 30 seconds after a Yanmar ECU goes back
Regen Stopped into passive mode when the status of the DPF
Active Regeneration Forced Status is “Regen Not
Successful”.
Status Input True when the Reset logic element is true or when
Reset Active the Reset key on the front panel is pressed.
Status Input True when the Restart Delay timer is timing out.
Restart Delay
Active
Run Input Run relay should be closed.
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is in Run Mode or the

Run Mode Run Mode logic element is true.
Status Input True when the Single Phase Override input is true.
Single Phase
Connection
Override
Status Input True when the DGC-2020ES is not in Auto Mode.
Switch not in
Auto
Start Input Start relay should be closed to start the engine.
Output Objects
Physical Physical Outputs 1 through 4.
Outputs
OUT1 – OUT4
Remote Remote Outputs 5 through 28.
Outputs (Available when an optional CEM-2020 is
OUT5 – OUT28 connected.)
Alarms
Auto Restart True after the Automatic Restart function fails to
Fail restart the generator.
Battery Charger True when the Battery Charger Fail function is

Fail configured as an alarm and the activation delay has
expired.
13-10 9469200995
Coolant Level True when a low coolant level error status code is
Sender Fail received from the ECU. CAN Bus must be enabled.
True when the Coolant Temp Sender Fail is

Coolant Temp
configured as an alarm and the activation delay has
Sender Fail
expired.
DEF Severe This alarm indicates the highest level of inducement
Inducement not to operate the engine due to low or poor quality
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), or a malfunction in the
Exhaust After Treatment System (EATS). The
engine may operate in a reduced power mode, or for
a limited time, or may be prevented from starting by
the ECU until the problem is corrected. A service
tool may be required to restart the engine.
Diagnostic True when a Diagnostic Trouble Code alarm exists.

Trouble Code
ECU Comm True when communication to ECU has been lost.

Loss
ECU Shutdown True when ECU has shut down the engine.
Emergency True when the Emergency Stop button has been

Stop pressed.
Exhaust System This alarm annunciates when the DEF Inducement

Error Level is greater than or equal to 3, the Isuzu
Exhaust System lamp is on, and the Isuzu No Power
lamp is on. The Exhaust System Error alarm
appears in conjunction with a DEF Severe
Inducement alarm to indicate why the machine has
entered the severe inducement state due to SCR
system malfunction.
Fuel Leak True when the Fuel Leak Detect function is
configured as an alarm and the activation delay has
expired.
Fuel Level True when the Fuel Level Sender Fail is configured
Sender Fail as an alarm and the activation delay has expired.
Generator True when the 27 element is configured as an alarm

Protection and has tripped.
27
59
47
50
Generator True when the 81 Over element is configured as an
Protection alarm and has tripped.
81 Over
9469200995 13-11

Generator True when the 81 Under element is configured as an
81 Under
Global Alarm True when one or more alarms are set.
Global Sender True when one or more of the Sender Fails are
Fail configured as alarms and are true.
Hi Coolant True when the High Coolant Temp Alarm settings

Temp have been exceeded.
Isuzu DEF Low True when an Isuzu engine ECU has detected low
Refill DEF DEF level and indicated the DEF symbol should be
displayed, and the Isuzu No Power Lamp is active
indicating that the engine has been shut down.
Low Coolant True when the Low Coolant Level function is
Level configured as an alarm and the activation delay has
expired. In addition, true when CAN Bus is enabled
and the Low Coolant Level Alarm threshold has
been exceeded.
Low Fuel Level True when the Low Fuel Level Alarm settings have
been exceeded.
Low Oil True when the Low Oil Pressure Alarm settings
Pressure have been exceeded.
Mains Fail True when a mains fail transfer fail pre-alarm

Transfer Failed occurs. The pre-alarm occurs when the DGC-
2020ES is configured for mains fail transfers, but
has not transferred to the generator from the utility
before the Mains Fail Max Transfer Time has
expired. It remains true until the pre-alarm is cleared
by pressing the Reset button on the front panel.
MTU Combined This is an indication from the MTU Engine ECU that
Red a Red Alarm has occurred. If any Red Alarm occurs,
a Combined Red Alarm occurs.
Oil Pressure True when the Oil Pressure Sender Fail is
Sender Fail configured as an alarm and the activation delay has
expired.
Overcrank True when an Overcrank condition exists.
Overspeed True when the Overspeed Alarm settings have been

exceeded.
Speed Sender True when the Speed Sender Fail activation delay
Fail has expired.
Unexpected True when the metered engine speed (RPM)

Shutdown unexpectedly drops to 0 while the engine is running.
Alarm
Voltage True when the Voltage Sensing Fail is configured as
Sensing Fail an alarm and the activation delay has expired.
13-12 9469200995

Pre-Alarms
Battery Charger True when the Battery Charger Fail function is
Fail configured as a pre-alarm and the activation delay
has expired.
Battery Charger True when the ac power to the battery charger is off.
AC Off (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Battery Charger True when the battery charger has detected that the
Battery Failure battery has failed. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Battery Charger True when the battery charger has detected a J1939
Comms Fail communications failure. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Battery Charger True when the battery charger has failed. (Battery
Fail Charger 1 shown.)
Battery Charger True when the battery charger output voltage is too
High Output high. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Volts
Battery Charger True when the battery charger has detected invalid
Invalid Settings settings. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Battery Charger True when the battery charger has detected that the
Low Cranking voltage while the engine is cranking has dipped too
Volts low. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Battery Charger True when the battery charger output voltage is too
Low Output low. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Volts
Battery Charger True when the battery charger has detected one or
Single Unit Fail more charging output stages in a charger with
multiple charging output stages has failed. (Battery
Charger 1 shown.)
Battery Charger True when the battery charger temperature is
Thermal Limit beyond the thermal limit. (Battery Charger 1 shown.)
Battery True when the Battery Overvoltage pre-alarm

Overvoltage threshold has been exceeded.
Cannot Regen - True when the regeneration interlock has failed on a

Interlock Fail Yanmar ECU. Manual regeneration is blocked.
Cannot Regen - True when the coolant temp is low on a Yanmar

Low Coolant ECU. Manual regeneration is blocked.
Temp
Cannot Regen - True when 50 hours has not elapsed since last
Not 50 Hours regeneration on a Yanmar ECU. Manual
Since Last regeneration is blocked.
Regen
Checksum True when some of the user settings or firmware
Failure code has been corrupted. Refer to the Reporting
and Alarms chapter for more details.
9469200995 13-13

Contact True when more than one CEM-2020 is connected.
Expansion
Module
Multiple Contact
Expansion
Modules
Connected
Contact True when communication from the CEM-2020 to
Expansion the DGC-2020ES has been lost.
Module
Contact
Expansion
Module Comm
Fail
Contact True when the connected CEM-2020 does not have
Expansion the same number of outputs as defined on the
Module System Parameters, Remote Module Setup screen
Contact in BESTCOMSPlus.
Expansion
Modules
Hardware
Mismatch
Coolant Temp True when the Coolant Temp Sender Fail is
Sender Fail configured as a pre-alarm and the activation delay
has expired.
DEF True when the engine ECU reports via CAN bus that
Consumption a DEF Consumption Error has occurred.
Incorrect
DEF This is the lowest level of inducement not to operate
Inducement the engine when Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is low
or of poor quality or there is a problem with the
engine is operating in a reduced power mode.
Eventually the level of inducement will be increased
unless the problem with the DEF or malfunction in
the EATS is corrected.
DEF Low True when the engine ECU reports via CAN Bus
Severe that Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is at a level below
8%.
DEF Fluid Low True when the engine ECU reports via CAN Bus
that the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is at a level
between 8 and 23%.
DEF This pre-alarm indicates a temporary override of
Inducement inducement not to operate the engine. This is set by
Override the ECU and is not a user setting.
DEF Pre-severe This pre-alarm indicates a high level of inducement
Inducement not to operate the engine due to low or poor quality
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), or a malfunction in the
engine may operate in a reduced power mode, or for
a limited time, after which it will enter a state of
severe inducement unless the problem with the DEF
or malfunction in the EATS is corrected.
DEF Quality True when the engine ECU reports “DEF Quality
Poor Poor” via CAN Bus.
13-14 9469200995

DEF Severe This pre-alarm indicates the highest level of
Inducement inducement not to operate the engine due to low or
poor quality Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), or a
malfunction in the Exhaust After Treatment System
(EATS). The engine may operate in a reduced
power mode, or for a limited time, or may be
prevented from starting by the ECU until the
problem is corrected. A service tool may be required
to restart the engine.
DEF Tampering True when the engine ECU reports “DEF
Tampering” via CAN Bus.
DEF Warning This pre-alarm indicates the first level of warning

when EATS is not functioning properly or DEF
quality or level is not sufficient for proper operation.
DEF Warning This pre-alarm indicates the second level of warning
Level 2 when EATS is not functioning properly or DEF
quality or level is not sufficient for proper operation.
Diag Trouble True when a Diagnostic Trouble Code exists.
Code
DPF True when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp

Regenerate status broadcast over CAN Bus indicates that DPF
Disabled regeneration is inhibited.
DPF True when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp
Regenerate status broadcast over CAN Bus indicates that DPF
Required regeneration is required.
DPF Soot Level True when the engine ECU reports via CAN Bus
High that Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) soot level is high.
DPF Soot Level True when Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp
Moderately status (yellow warning) broadcast over CAN Bus
High indicates that the soot level is moderately high.
DPF Soot Level True when Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp
Severely High status (red warning) broadcast over CAN Bus
indicates that the soot level is severely high.
ECU Comm True when communication to ECU has been lost.
Loss
EGR True when an issue has been detected in the

Inducement Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. This is
Level Low the second level of inducement to correct the issue.
There should also be Diagnostic Trouble Codes
providing additional information about the issue.
Severe the third level of inducement to correct the issue. If
not corrected, engine power derating or shutdown
may occur. There should also be Diagnostic Trouble
Codes providing additional information about the
issue.
Warning the first level of inducement to correct the issue.
There should also be Diagnostic Trouble Codes
providing additional information about the issue.
9469200995 13-15

Engine kW Over True when the Engine kW Overload 1 Pre-Alarm
Load 1 settings have been exceeded.


Escape Mode This pre-alarm indicates a temporary override of

inducement not to operate the engine. This is set by
the ECU and is not a user setting.
Exhaust System Pre-alarm indicating an Exhaust System Error has
Error been detected. A number of conditions cause this;
examples include DEF Tank Low indication, Purge
in Progress, Exhaust System Error, Exhaust System
Inducement Indications, etc. This is derived based
on ECU Lamp conditions communicated from the
Engine ECU to the DGC-2020ES via J1939 CAN
Bus communications.
Fuel Leak True when the Fuel Leak Detect function is
configured as a pre-alarm and the activation delay
has expired.
Sender Fail as a pre-alarm and the activation delay has expired.
Generator True when a generator breaker close fail pre-alarm

Breaker Close occurs. The pre-alarm occurs when the DGC-
Fail 2020ES has issued a generator breaker close
output but does not receive a generator breaker
status input that indicates the breaker has closed
before the breaker close wait time has expired.
Generator True when a generator breaker open fail pre-alarm
Breaker Open occurs. The pre-alarm occurs when the DGC-
Fail 2020ES has issued a generator breaker open output
but does not receive a generator breaker status
input that indicates the breaker has opened before
the breaker close wait time has expired.
Fuel Filter 1 This logic status input indicates that the engine ECU
Leak has detected a leak in fuel filter 1, and has
communicated this to the DGC-2020ES over CAN
Bus.
Fuel Filter 2 This logic status input indicates that the engine ECU
Leak has detected a leak in fuel filter 2, and has
communicated this to the DGC-2020ES over CAN
Bus.
Generator True when the 27 element is configured as a pre-
27
59
47
13-16 9469200995

50
Generator True when the 81 Over element is configured as a
Protection pre-alarm and has tripped.
81 Over
Generator True when the 81 Under element is configured as a
Protection pre-alarm and has tripped.
81 Under
Global Pre- True when one or more pre-alarms are set.
Alarm
Heating for A manual or automatic exhaust regeneration request

Exhaust Regen has occurred, but the exhaust system is not hot
enough for regeneration to occur. The ECU feeds
fuel into the exhaust stream to increase the
temperature to accomplish regeneration.
Hi Coolant True when the High Coolant Temp Pre-Alarm
Temp threshold has been exceeded.
High Exhaust True when Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp

Temperature status broadcast over CAN Bus indicates high
exhaust temperature.
High Fuel Level True when the High Fuel Level Pre-Alarm settings
have been exceeded.
Inter Generator True when the DGC-2020ES detects that an

Comm Fail individual generator previously connected to a
generator network has lost connection.
Isuzu DEF Low True when an Isuzu engine ECU has detected low
Refill DEF DEF level and has indicated the DEF symbol should
be displayed.
Isuzu Forced True when a forced purge has been requested by
Purge Request momentarily pressing the Manual Regeneration
button or setting the DPF Regen setting on the front
panel, or setting the DPF Manual Regenerate button
in BESTCOMSPlus.
Isuzu SCR True when a forced purge is in progress after having
Forced Purge been requested.
Isuzu SCR True when a normal SCR Purge is in progress.

Purge Normal purges occur during normal operation if the
engine load is sufficient to allow purge to occur.
Isuzu Service True when a forced purge has been requested
Tool Forced through the Isuzu Service Tool. This will remain true
Purge Request until the forced purge cycle begins.
Low Battery True when the Low Battery Voltage Pre-Alarm
Voltage settings have been exceeded.
Low Coolant True when the Low Coolant Level function is

Level configured as a pre-alarm and the activation delay
has expired. In addition, true when CAN Bus is
enabled and the Low Coolant Level Pre-Alarm
threshold has been exceeded.
9469200995 13-17

Low Coolant True when the Low Coolant Temp Pre-Alarm
Temp threshold has been exceeded.
Low DPF Temp True when a Yanmar engine ECU has received a
Add Load regeneration request, but has detected that DPF
temperature is too low to perform regeneration.
Adding load to engine is recommended to increase
temperature.
Low Fuel Level True when the Low Fuel Level Pre-Alarm threshold
has been exceeded.
Low Oil True when the Low Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm

Pressure threshold has been exceeded.
Mains Breaker True when a mains breaker close fail pre-alarm

Close Fail occurs. The pre-alarm occurs when the DGC-
2020ES has issued a mains breaker close output
but does not receive a mains breaker status input
that indicates the breaker has closed before the
breaker close wait time has expired.
Mains Breaker True when a mains breaker open fail pre-alarm
Open Fail occurs. The pre-alarm occurs when the DGC-
2020ES has issued a mains breaker open output but
does not receive a mains breaker status input that
indicates the breaker has opened before the breaker
close wait time has expired.
Mains Fail True when a mains fail return fail pre-alarm has
Return Failed occurred. The pre-alarm occurs when the DGC-
2020 is attempting to transfer from generator power
to mains power after mains returns, but has not
returned to the mains from the generator before the
Mains Fail Return Delay has expired.
Maintenance True when the Maintenance Interval Pre-Alarm
Interval threshold has been exceeded.
MPU Fail True when the MPU has failed.

Sender Fail configured as a pre-alarm and the activation delay
has expired.
Regenerate True when an exhaust system regeneration is in
Active progress.
Serial Flash When the DGC-2020ES reads data from the serial
Read Fail flash, the data is read twice and then compared to
verify that the data matches. If it does not match, the
read cycle is repeated. After the second attempt, if
the data does not match, the DGC-2020ES
annunciates a serial flash read failure pre-alarm.
This status input to logic indicates that the DGC-
2020ES has detected a serial flash read failure.
13-18 9469200995

Service Tool A manual or forced regeneration is in progress and
Forced was initiated from a manufacturer’s service tool. This
Regenerate indication is received from the engine ECU over
J1939 CAN Bus as SPN 4175 Diesel Particulate
Filter Active Regeneration Forced Status or SPN
6934 SCR System Cleaning Forced Status. When
the value is 2, a Service Tool Forced Regenerate
pre-alarm is annunciated.
Switch Forced A manual or forced regeneration is in progress and
Regenerate was initiated from a manual regeneration switch.
This indication is received from the engine ECU over
J1939 CAN Bus as SPN 4175 Diesel Particulate
Filter Active Regeneration Forced Status or SPN
6934 SCR System Cleaning Forced Status. When
the value is 1, a Switch Forced Regenerate pre-
alarm is annunciated.
Torque Limit True while the engine is running in a reduced torque
mode due to exhaust system issues such as Low
DEF, Purge Required, Exhaust System Error, etc.
This reflects the status of the exhaust system
Torque Limit lamp, which is communicated from the
Engine ECU to the DGC-2020ES via J1939 CAN
Bus communications.
Torque Limit True while the engine is running in a severely
Severe reduced torque mode due to exhaust system issues
such as Low DEF, Purge Required, Exhaust System
Error, etc. This reflects the status of the exhaust
system Torque Limit lamp, which is communicated
from the Engine ECU to the DGC-2020ES via J1939
CAN Bus communications.
Sensing Fail a pre-alarm and the activation delay has expired.
Weak Battery True when the Weak Battery Voltage Pre-Alarm

settings have been exceeded.
Senders
Coolant Temp True when the Coolant Temp Sender Fail is
Sender Fail configured as either a pre-alarm or alarm and the
activation delay has expired.
Sender Fail as either a pre-alarm or alarm and the activation
delay has expired.
Sender Fail configured as either a pre-alarm or alarm and the
activation delay has expired.
Speed Sender True when the Speed Sender Fail activation delay
Fail has expired.

Sensing Fail either a pre-alarm or alarm and the activation delay
has expired.
9469200995 13-19

Logic Control Relays
The logic control relays (LCR) consist of LCR outputs and LCR inputs. The output can be used to terminate the
“output” end of a logic network, and then use the corresponding input as an input to logic elsewhere in the logic
scheme. When a given LCR output is true the corresponding LCR input is true. In other words, when LCR Output
N (N being a number from 1 to 16) becomes true, then LCR Input N is true also.
If you get a “too many logic levels” error while building a logic network, LCR outputs and inputs can be used as a
solution to this problem. Place an LCR output on the end of the partial logic network and then use the
corresponding LCR input to build more logic than was previously possible.
Inputs See description above.
Input 1-16
Outputs See description above.

Output 1-16
Components
This group contains Logic Gates, Pickup and Dropout Timers, Latches, and Comment Blocks. Table 13-2
lists the names and descriptions of the objects in the Components group.
Table 13-2. Components Group, Names and Descriptions
Logic Gates
AND Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
NAND Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
OR Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
NOR Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
XOR Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
When an XOR gate has more than two inputs, the output is true
whenever an odd number of inputs are true.
13-20 9469200995

XNOR Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
When an XNOR gate has more than two inputs, the output is true
whenever an even number of inputs are true. The output is also true if
no inputs are true.
NOT Input Output
(INVERTER) 0 1
1 0
Pickup and Dropout Timers
Drop Out Used to set a delay in the logic.
Timer For more information, refer to Programming BESTlogicPlus, Pickup
and Dropout Timers, later in this section.
Pickup Up Used to set a delay in the logic.

Timer For more information, refer to Programming BESTlogicPlus, Pickup
and Dropout Timers, later in this section.
Latches
Reset Priority When the Set input is on and the Reset input is off, the latch will go to
Latch the SET (ON) state. When the Reset input is on and the Set input is
off, the latch will go to the RESET (OFF) state. If both the Set and
Reset inputs are on at the same time, a reset priority latch will go to the
RESET (OFF) state.
Set Priority When the Set input is on and the Reset input is off, the latch will go to
Latch the SET (ON) state. When the Reset input is on and the Set input is
off, the latch will go to the RESET (OFF) state. If both the Set and
Reset inputs are on at the same time, a set priority latch will go to the
SET (ON) state.
Other
Comment Enter user comments.
Block
Elements
This group contains elements for the 27, 47, 50, 59, and 81. It also contains elements for Generator
Breaker, Mains Breaker, Logic Alarm, Logic Pre-Alarm, Configurable Elements, AUTO Mode, OFF Mode,
RUN Mode, Run with Load, Engine Run, ATS, Run Inhibit, Test Inhibit, Pre-Start Output, Start Output,
Run Output, Cool Stop Request, Cool Down Request, External Start Delay, Start Delay Bypass, Alternate
Frequency Override, Mains Fail Test, Load Take Over, EPS Supplying Load, MTU Speed Demand
Switch, Reset, Alarm Silence, Lamp Test, Idle Request, Low Fuel Pre-Alarm, Diesel Particulate Filter
Manual Regeneration, Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Inhibit, Emergency Stop, Speed Raise,
Speed Lower, MTU Cylinder Cutout Disable, and Automatic Breaker Operation Inhibit from PLC.
9469200995 13-21
Table 13-3 lists the names and descriptions of the elements in the Elements group.
Table 13-3. Elements Group, Names and Descriptions
Protection
27TRIP True when the 27-1 undervoltage is in a TRIP condition.
Connect to another logic block input.
47TRIP True when the 47 phase imbalance is in a TRIP

condition. Connect to another logic block input.
50TRIP True when the 50 overcurrent is in a TRIP condition.

59TRIP True when the 59-1 overvoltage is in a TRIP condition.

81TRIP True when the 81 frequency is in a TRIP condition.

Other
ALARMSILENCE The alarm will be silenced when this element is true. The
alarm can also be silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence
button on the front panel of the DGC-2020ES.
ALTFREQOVER When this logic element is true, protection and bus

condition detection is forced to operate at the Alternate
Frequency instead of the Rated Frequency.
ATS When this logic element is true, and the DGC-2020ES is

in AUTO mode, the generator will run. This can be used
in place of the ATS programmable function if it is desired
to generate the ATS signal as a combination of
programmable logic rather than a simple contact input. If
either the ATS logic element is true or the contact
mapped to the ATS programmable function is true, and
the DGC-2020ES is in AUTO mode, the generator will
run. If both the ATS logic element and the ATS
programmable function are false, and the DGC-2020ES
is in AUTO mode, the generator will cool down and stop.
AUTOMODE When this input is true, and the DGC-2020ES is in OFF
mode, the DGC-2020ES will switch to AUTO mode. This
is a pulsed input. It does not need to be held after the
desired mode switch has occurred.
13-22 9469200995

AUTOBRKOP- Automatic breaker operation is inhibited when the Set
INHIBIT input is true.
CONFELMNTX Configurable elements (CONFELMNT1-8) are connected

(X = 1 to 8) to the logic scheme as outputs. These elements are
configurable in BESTCOMSPlus under Programmable
Outputs, Configurable Elements. The user can assign a
string of up to 16 characters, configure whether the
element should generate an alarm or pre-alarm. If used
for alarm or pre-alarm, the user's text is what will appear
in the alarm or pre-alarm annunciation and in the DGC-
2020ES event log.
COOLSTOPREQ RUN Mode
If the unit is in RUN mode when the Cool Stop Request is
received, the unit will unload, open its breaker, and go
into a cooldown cycle. While in the cooldown cycle, the
unit will display “COOL & STOP REQ” in addition to
displaying the cooldown timer. After the cooldown timer
expires, the unit will go to OFF mode. The Cool Stop
Request must be removed before the unit can be run
again.
If the Cool Stop Request is removed during the cooldown
process, the unit will remain running. Furthermore, if a
condition occurs that normally causes the unit to close its
breaker in RUN mode, the unit will close its breaker and
reload.
AUTO Mode
If the unit is in AUTO mode when the Cool Stop Request
is received, all conditions that would normally cause the
unit to run in AUTO mode are cleared. Since all
conditions that cause the unit to run have been removed,
the unit goes into a cooldown cycle. While in the
cooldown cycle, the unit will display “COOL & STOP
REQ” in addition to displaying the cooldown timer. After
the cooldown timer expires, the unit will shut down,
remaining in AUTO. The Cool Stop Request must be
removed before the unit can be run again.
If the Cool Stop Request is removed during the cooldown
process and some condition that would normally cause
the unit to run in AUTO mode is true, the unit will remain
running. Furthermore, if a condition occurs that normally
causes the unit to close its breaker, the unit will close its
breaker and reload.
9469200995 13-23

COOLDOWNREQ RUN Mode
If the unit is in RUN mode when the Cool Down Request
is received, the unit is forced to unload and open its
breaker and then go into a cooldown cycle. While in the
cool down cycle, the unit will display “COOLDOWN REQ”
in addition to displaying the cooldown timer. After the
cooldown timer expires, the unit will remain running in
RUN mode. The Cool Down Request must be removed
before the breaker can be closed again; this element
blocks breaker closures.
If the Cool Down Request is removed during the cool
down process, the unit will remain running in RUN mode.
Furthermore, if a condition occurs that normally causes
the unit to close its breaker in RUN mode, the unit will
close its breaker and reload.
AUTO Mode
If the unit is in AUTO mode and the Cool Down Request
is received, the unit is forced to unload and open its
breaker and go into a cooldown cycle. While in the
cooldown cycle, the unit will display “COOLDOWN REQ”
in addition to displaying the cooldown timer. After the cool
down timer expires, the unit will remain running in AUTO
mode, unless there are no conditions that cause the unit
to run in AUTO mode, in which case it will shut down and
remain in AUTO mode. The Cool Down Request must be
removed before the breaker can be closed again; this
element blocks breaker closures.
If the Cool Down Request is removed during the cool
down process and some condition that would normally
cause the unit to run in AUTO mode is true, the unit will
remain running in AUTO mode. Furthermore, if a
condition occurs that normally causes the unit to close its
breaker, the unit will close its breaker and reload.
CYLCUTOUTENABLE When true, cylinder cutout is enabled. When false,
(Cutout Enable cylinder cutout is disabled when any of the following are
Override) true:
• Synchronization is in progress.
• The machine is operating with the generator
breaker closed.
• The Cylinder Cutout Disable setting is true.
• The Cylinder Cutout Disable logic element is
true.
DPFMANREGEN Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration is forced manually
when the Set input is true.
DPFREGENINHIBIT Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration is inhibited when

the Set input is true.
ECU Connect When true, a Key On signal is applied to the ECU and
Override CAN Bus data is updated any time except during the
Disconnecting state.
13-24 9469200995

ENGINERUN The Start input starts the generator. No load is applied.
The breaker remains open. The Stop input stops the
generator. The DGC-2020ES only responds to this logic
element when in AUTO mode.
EPSSUPPLYINGLD When true, the Set input forces a supplying load

indication. This is useful when it is necessary for the
supplying load indication to be true during test runs, but
the system load is not enough to light the supplying load
indication.
A supplying load indication is true when the supplying
load logic element is true and the generator is stable
(voltage and frequency are within the limits programmed
on the Gen Condition Detection screen under Breaker
Management, Bus Condition Detection in the
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer). This is OR’ed with
the traditional supplying load criteria that supplying load
is true when the generator current is above a percentage
of CT primary current (typically 3% minimum).
When the supplying load indication has been driven from
logic or from generator current levels, the DGC-2020ES
will go through a cool down cycle when it is in AUTO
mode and the ATS contact has been removed.
ESTOP When this element is true, an Emergency Shutdown
alarm is annunciated and the Emergency Stop LED on
the RDP-110 is illuminated.
EXTSTARTDEL If the Set input is true while the DGC-2020ES is in the

Pre Start state, the DGC-2020ES will remain in the Pre
Start state until the Set input is false.
9469200995 13-25

GENBRK This element is used to connect the breaker open and
close output signals from the DGC-2020ES to physical
output contacts to open and close the generator breaker,
and map breaker status feedback to a contact input. In
addition, contact inputs can be mapped to allow switches
to be implemented to manually initiate breaker open and
close requests.
Inputs
Status: This input allows a contact input to be mapped
that will provide breaker status feedback to the DGC-
2020ES. When the contact input is closed, the breaker is
indicated to be closed. When the contact input is open,
the breaker is indicated to be open.
Open: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that
can be used to initiate a manual breaker open request.
When this input is pulsed closed while the DGC-2020ES
is in RUN or AUTO mode, the breaker will open.
Close: This input allows a contact input to be mapped
that can be used to initiate a manual breaker close
request. When this input is pulsed and the DGC-2020ES
is in AUTO or RUN mode, and the generator is stable, a
close request will be initiated. If bus is dead, the breaker
will close; if the bus is not dead the generator breaker will
not be closed.
Outputs
The outputs must be mapped to the contact outputs of
the DGC-2020ES that will be used to drive the breaker.
Open: This output is pulsed true (closes the output
contact it is mapped to) when the DGC-2020ES is
providing a signal to the breaker to open. It will be a pulse
if the Breaker Output Contact Type is set to Pulse on the
Breaker Hardware screen under Breaker Management in
the Settings Explorer, and the length is determined by the
Open Pulse Time. It will be a constant output if the
Generator Breaker Hardware Contact Type is set to
continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough
for the breaker to actually open before the pulse is
removed.
Close: This output is pulsed true (closes the output
providing a signal to the breaker to close. It will be a
pulse if the Breaker Output Contact Type is set to Pulse
on the Breaker Hardware screen under Breaker
Management in the Settings Explorer, and the length is
determined by the Open Pulse Time. It will be a constant
output if the Generator Breaker Hardware Contact Type
is set to continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long
enough for the breaker to actually open before the pulse
is removed.
IDLEREQUEST When this element is true, the DGC-2020ES sends an
idle request to the ECU on J1939 engines that are
equipped to receive such a request. The request consists
of an enable bit command and an idle RPM setting. At
this time, only Volvo and Cummins are implemented.
ECUs that accept the idle RPM setting set the engine to
the requested RPM. ECUs that accept only the enable bit
command, set the engine to their internal idle speed
setting, ignoring the requested idle RPM from the DGC-
2020ES.
13-26 9469200995

LAMPTEST The lamp test will be performed when this element is
true. The lamp test can also be accomplished by
simultaneously pressing the Up and Down buttons on the
front panel of the DGC-2020ES.
LOADTAKEOVER When this logic element is true, the generator is forced to

start, assume load, and disconnect from the mains, in an
open transition.
LOGICALM When this input is true, the DGC-2020ES goes into an

alarm condition.
LOGICPALM When this input is true, the DGC-2020ES goes into a

Pre-alarm condition.
LOWFUELPALM When this element is true, a Low Fuel Pre-Alarm is

annunciated and the Low Fuel Level LED on the RDP-
110 is illuminated.
MAINSFAILTEST When this element is true, the DGC-2020ES will exercise

its mains fail transfer function exactly as it would if the
mains were to fail on a mains fail machine. This can be
used as a test of the mains fail transfer capability of the
unit without having to cause a true mains failure.
MAINSFLTRINHIBIT The mains fail transfer function is inhibited when the Set
input is true.
9469200995 13-27

MAINSBRK This element is used to connect the breaker open and
close output signals from the DGC-2020ES to physical
output contacts to open and close the mains breaker and
map breaker status feedback to a contact input. In
addition, contact inputs can be mapped to allow switches
to be implemented to manually initiate breaker open and
close requests.
This element is only available when the Mains Breaker
Hardware in configured on the Breaker Hardware screen
via the Breaker Management tree branch.
Inputs
Status: This input allows a contact input to be mapped
that will provide breaker status feedback to the DGC-
2020ES. When the contact input is closed, the breaker is
indicated to be closed. When the contact input is open,
the breaker is indicated to be open.
Open: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that
can be used to initiate a manual breaker open request.
When this input is pulsed closed while the DGC-2020ES
is in RUN or AUTO mode, the breaker will open.
Close: This input allows a contact input to be mapped
that can be used to initiate a manual breaker close
request. When this input is pulsed, the mains is stable,
and both breakers are open, a close request will be
initiated.
Outputs
The outputs must be mapped to the contact outputs of
the DGC-2020ES that will be used to drive the breaker.
Open: This output is pulsed true (closes the output
providing a signal to the breaker to open. It will be a pulse
if the Breaker Output Contact Type is set to Pulse on the
Breaker Hardware screen under Breaker Management in
the Settings Explorer, and the length is determined by the
Open Pulse Time. It will be a constant output if the Mains
Breaker Hardware Contact Type is set to continuous.
Note the pulse time must be set long enough for the
breaker to actually open before the pulse is removed.
Close: This output is pulsed true (closes the output
providing a signal to the breaker to close. It will be a
pulse if the Breaker Output Contact Type is set to Pulse
on the Breaker Hardware screen under Breaker
Management in the Settings Explorer, and the length is
determined by the Open Pulse Time. It will be a constant
output if the Mains Breaker Hardware Contact Type is set
to continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long
enough for the breaker to actually open before the pulse
is removed.
MTUCYLCUTOUT- When this logic element is true, Cylinder Cutout Disable 1
DISABLE and Cylinder Cutout Disable 2 are both sent to the engine
(MTU Cylinder Cutout ECU with true status. When this logic element is false,
Disable) Cylinder Cutout Disable 1 and Cylinder Cutout Disable 2
are sent to the engine ECU with states set by the values
programmed for the Cylinder Cutout Disable 1 and
Cylinder Cutout Disable 2 DGC-2020ES settings which
are configured on the ECU Setup screen in
BESTCOMSPlus.
13-28 9469200995

MTUSPDDMDSW This logic element can be used to specify the Speed
Demand Source parameter value that is sent to an MTU
Engine ECU. When no input is true, the value sent to the
engine ECU is the value specified in the Speed Demand
Source setting in the ECU configuration setting. If an
input on this logic element is true, the selected Speed
Demand Source will be sent rather than the value
specified by the Speed Demand Source setting.
If multiple inputs are true at the same time, the input that
is closest to the top of the logic element symbol will
specify the Speed Demand Source parameter value that
is sent to the ECU.
Analog CAN: This input configures the MTU ECU to
accept speed bias requests over J1939 CAN Bus from
the DGC-2020ES.
Up Down ECU: This input configures the MTU ECU to
accept speed raise/lower commands via contact inputs
on the ECU.
Up Down CAN: This input configures the MTU ECU to
accept speed raise/lower commands via communications
over J1939 CAN Bus.
Analog ECU: This input configures the MTU ECU to
accept speed bias via bias voltage input connections on
the ECU.
Frequency: This configures the MTU ECU to accept
speed commands via a frequency signal input on the
ECU. The mapping of input signal frequency to machine
speed is configured in a curve within the engine ECU.
No CAN Demand: This input configures the MTU ECU to
disregard all speed requests or speed raise/lower
requests from J1939 CAN Bus.
OFFMODE When this input is true, the DGC-2020ES will switch to
OFF mode. This is a pulsed input. It does not need to be
held after the desired mode switch has occurred.
PRESTARTOUT This element is used to drive the prestart output relay

from logic when the Prestart Output Relay configuration
is set to “Programmable”. When the Prestart Output
Relay configuration is set to “Programmable”, the prestart
relay will not close unless logic is used to drive this
element. When the Prestart Output Relay configuration is
set to “Predefined”, the prestart relay is closed according
to the predefined prestart functionality of the DGC-
2020ES. When the “Predefined” functionality is selected,
the relay will not respond to this element.
Rapid Start Override When true, this element sets the Start mode to Rapid
regardless of the Start mode setting.
RDPPROGALM1 When true, this element illuminates the Fuel Leak/Sender

Failure LED on the Remote Display Panel RDP-110.
When this element is connected in logic, it overrides all
other commands to the LED. Otherwise, the LED
operates as normal.
9469200995 13-29

RDPPROGALM2 When true, this element illuminates the Sender Failure
LED on the Remote Display Panel RDP-110. When this
element is connected in logic, it overrides all other
commands to the LED. Otherwise, the LED operates as
normal.
RDPPROGPREALM1 When true, this element illuminates the Battery
Overvoltage LED on the Remote Display Panel RDP-110.
operates as normal.
RDPPROGPREALM2 When true, this element illuminates the Battery Charger
Failure LED on the Remote Display Panel RDP-110.
operates as normal.
RESET Reset will be active when this element is true. Reset can
also be accomplished by pressing the Reset button on
the front panel of the DGC-2020ES.
RUNINHIBIT When this logic element is true, the DGC-2020ES is

prevented from starting and running the generator,
regardless of any condition that would normally cause the
generator to run. If this element is false and there is any
condition in effect which will cause the generator to run,
the DGC-2020ES will start and run the generator.
RUNMODE When this input is true, and the DGC-2020ES is in OFF
mode, the DGC-2020ES will switch to RUN mode. This is
a pulsed input. It does not need to be held after the
desired mode switch has occurred.
RUNOUTPUT This element is used to drive the run output relay from
logic when the Run Output Relay configuration is set to
“Programmable”. When the Run Output Relay
configuration is set to “Programmable”, the run relay will
not close unless logic is used to drive this element. When
the Run Output Relay configuration is set to “Predefined”,
the run relay is closed according to the predefined run
functionality of the DGC-2020ES. When the “Predefined”
functionality is selected, the relay will not respond to this
element.
RUNWLOAD The Start input starts the generator and closes the Gen
breaker. The Stop input stops the generator and opens
the Gen breaker. The DGC-2020ES only responds to this
logic element when in AUTO mode.
SPEEDLOWER This element lowers the speed setting of the DGC-

2020ES by up to 2 rpm per second. After the speed has
not been lowered for 30 seconds, the modified speed is
saved to nonvolatile memory.
SPEEDRAISE This element raises the speed setting of the DGC-

2020ES by up to 2 rpm per second. After the speed has
not been raised for 30 seconds, the modified speed is
saved to nonvolatile memory.
13-30 9469200995

STARTDELBYP This element allows the Pre Start state to be skipped
based on logic. For example, a start delay may not be
necessary when the engine is warm. This also allows an
external device, such as an ECU, to control the pre start
interval.
STARTOUTPUT This element is used to drive the start output relay from
logic when the Start Output Relay configuration is set to
“Programmable”. When the Start Output Relay
configuration is set to “Programmable”, the start relay will
not close unless logic is used to drive this element. When
the Start Output Relay configuration is set to
“Predefined”, the start relay is closed according to the
predefined start functionality of the DGC-2020ES. When
the “Predefined” functionality is selected, the relay will not
respond to this element.
TESTINHIBIT When this logic element is true, the generator exercise
timer cannot start the generator. If the TESTINHIBIT logic
function is false during an exercise period, or transitions
from true to false at any time during an exercise period,
the DGC-2020ES will start and run the generator for the
duration of the exercise period.
Logic Schemes
A logic scheme is a group of logic variables written in equation form that defines the operation of a DGC-
2020ES Digital Genset Controller. Each logic scheme is given a unique name. This gives you the ability
to select a specific scheme and be confident that the selected scheme is in operation. One logic scheme
is configured for typical control applications and is the default active logic scheme. Only one logic scheme
can be active at a given time. In most applications, preprogrammed logic schemes eliminate the need for
custom programming. Preprogrammed logic schemes may provide more inputs, outputs, or features than
are needed for a particular application. This is because a preprogrammed scheme is designed for a large
number of applications with no special programming required. Unneeded logic block outputs may be left
open to disable a function or a function block can be disabled through operating settings.
When a custom logic scheme is required, programming time is reduced by modifying the default logic
scheme.
The Active Logic Scheme

Digital Genset Controllers must have an active logic scheme in order to function. All Basler Electric DGC-
2020ES units are delivered with a default, active logic scheme pre-loaded in memory. If the function block
configuration and output logic of the default logic scheme meets the requirements of your application,
then only the operating settings (power system parameters and threshold settings) need to be adjusted
before placing the DGC-2020ES in service.
Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes

Copying a saved logic scheme to the active logic and assigning a unique name is accomplished by
loading the saved logic scheme into BESTCOMSPlus and then typing over the logic scheme's name.
Changes are not activated until the new settings have been saved and uploaded to the device.
Sending and Retrieving Logic Schemes

To retrieve settings from the DGC-2020ES, it must be connected to a computer through a
communications port. Once the necessary connections are made, settings can be downloaded from the
DGC-2020ES by selecting Download Settings and Logic on the Communication pull-down menu.
9469200995 13-31
To send settings to the DGC-2020ES, it must be connected to a computer through a communications

port. Once the necessary connections are made, settings can be uploaded to the DGC-2020ES by
selecting Upload Settings and Logic on the Communication pull-down menu.
Caution
Always remove the DGC-2020ES from service prior to changing or
modifying the active logic scheme. Attempting to modify a logic
scheme while the DGC-2020ES is in service could generate
unexpected or unwanted outputs.
Modifying a logic scheme in BESTCOMSPlus does not automatically
make that scheme active in the DGC-2020ES. The modified scheme
must be uploaded into the DGC-2020ES.
Programming BESTlogic™Plus
Use BESTCOMSPlus to program BESTlogicPlus. Using BESTCOMSPlus is analogous to physically
attaching wire between discrete DGC-2020ES terminals. To program BESTlogicPlus, use the Settings
Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus to open the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic tree branch as shown
in Figure 13-1.
The drag and drop method is used to connect a variable or series of variables to the logic inputs, outputs,
components, and elements. To draw a wire/link from port to port (triangles), click the left mouse button on
a port, pull the wire onto another port, and release the left mouse button. A red port indicates that a
connection to the port is required or missing. A black port indicates that a connection to the port is not
required. Drawing wires/links from input to input or output to output is not allowed. Only one wire/link can
be connected to any one output. If the proximity of the endpoint of the wire/link is not exact, it may attach
to an unintended port.
If an object or element is disabled, it will have a yellow X on it. To enable the element, navigate to the
settings page for that element. A red X indicates that an object or element is not available per the style
number of the DGC-2020ES.
The view of the Main Logic, Physical Outputs, Remote Outputs, and LCR Outputs can be automatically
arranged by clicking the right mouse button on the window and selecting Auto-Layout.
The following must be met before BESTCOMSPlus will allow logic to be uploaded to the DGC-2020ES:
• A minimum of two inputs and a maximum of four inputs on any multi-port (AND, OR, NAND,
NOR, XOR, and XNOR) gate.
• A maximum of five logic levels for any particular path. A path being an input block or an output
side of an element block through gates to an output block or an input side of an element block.
This is to include any OR gates on the Physical Output or Remote Output tab/pages, but not the
matched pairs of Physical Output blocks or Remote Output blocks.
• Only 20 gates per logic level. All output blocks and input sides of element blocks are at the
maximum logic level of the diagram. All gates are pushed forward/upwards in logic levels and
buffered to reach the final output block or element block if needed. A maximum of 50 gates
allowed per diagram.
• At all levels there can only be 64 used link/wired or endpoints. Endpoints being inputs, outputs,
both sides of element blocks.
Three status indicators are located in the lower right corner of the BESTlogicPlus window. These
indicators show the Logic Save Status, Logic Diagram Status, and Logic Layer Status. Table 13-4 defines
the colors for each indicator.
13-32 9469200995
Table 13-4. Status Indicators

Indicator Color Definition
Logic Save Status Amber Logic has changed since last save.
(Left Indicator) Green Logic has NOT changed since last save.
Logic Diagram Status Red Requirements NOT met as listed above.
(Center Indicator) Green Requirements met as listed above.
Logic Layer Status Red Requirements NOT met as listed above.
(Right Indicator) Green Requirements met as listed above.
Pickup and Dropout Timers

A pickup timer produces a true output when the elapsed time is greater than or equal to the Pickup Time
setting after a false to true transition occurs on the Initiate input from the connected logic. Whenever the
Initiate input status transitions to false, the output transitions to false immediately.
A drop out timer produces a true output when the elapsed time is greater than or equal to the Dropout
Time setting after a true to false transition occurs on the Initiate input from the connected logic. Whenever
the Initiate input transitions to true, the output transitions to false immediately. Refer to Figure 13-2.
To program logic timer settings, use the Settings Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus to open the
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic/Logic Timers tree branch. Enter a Name label that you want to
appear on the timer logic block. The Time Delay value range is 0 to 250 hours in 1 hour increments, 0 to
250 minutes in 1 minute increments, or 0 to 1,800 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Next, open the Components tab inside the BESTlogicPlus window and drag a timer onto the program
grid. Right click on the timer to select the timer you want to use that was previously set on the Logic
Timers tree branch. The Logic Timer Properties Dialog Box will appear. Select the timer you want to use.
Timing accuracy is ±15 milliseconds.
Initiate
Initiate Pickup Output
Timer Pickup Time
Output
P0048-03
Initiate
Initiate Dropout Output
Timer Dropout Time
Output
Figure 13-2. Pickup and Dropout Timer Logic Blocks
Offline Logic Simulator

The offline logic simulator allows you to change the state of various logic elements to illustrate how that
state travels through the system. Before running the logic simulator, you must click the Save button on
the BESTlogicPlus toolbar to save the logic to memory. Changes to the logic (other than changing the
state) are disabled when the simulator is enabled. Colors are selected by clicking the Options button on
the BESTlogicPlus toolbar. By default, Logic 0 is red and Logic 1 is green. Using your mouse, double-
click on a logic element to change its state.
An example of the offline logic simulator is shown in Figure 13-3. Output 1 is Logic 0 (red) when Virtual
Switch 1 is Logic 0 (red) and Fixed 1 is Logic 1 (green).
9469200995 13-33
Figure 13-3. Offline Logic Simulator Example
BESTlogic™Plus File Management

To manage BESTlogicPlus files, use the Settings Explorer to open the BESTlogicPlus Programmable
Logic tree branch. Use the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic toolbar to manage BESTlogicPlus files.
Refer to Figure 13-4. For information on Settings Files management, refer to the BESTCOMSPlus
chapter.
Figure 13-4. BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic Toolbar
Saving a BESTlogicPlus File

After programming BESTlogicPlus settings, click on the Save button to save the settings to memory.
Before the new BESTlogicPlus settings can be uploaded to the DGC-2020ES, you must select Save from
the File pull-down menu located at the top of the BESTCOMSPlus main shell. This step will save both the
BESTlogicPlus settings and the operating settings to a file.
The user also has the option to save the BESTlogicPlus settings to a unique file that contains only
BESTlogicPlus settings. Click on the Logic Library drop-down button and select Save Logic Library File.
Use normal Windows® techniques to browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a
filename.
Opening a BESTlogicPlus File

To open a saved BESTlogicPlus file, click on the Logic Library drop-down button on the BESTlogicPlus
Programmable Logic toolbar and select Open Logic Library File. Use normal Windows techniques to
browse to the folder where the file is located.
Protecting a BESTlogicPlus File

Objects in a logic diagram can be locked so that when the logic document is protected these objects
cannot be changed. Locking and protecting is useful when sending logic files to other personnel to be
modified. The locked object(s) cannot be changed. To view the lock status of the object(s), select Show
Lock Status from the Protection drop-down menu. To lock object(s), use the mouse to select object(s) to
be locked. Right click on the selected object(s) and select Lock Object(s). The gold colored padlock next
13-34 9469200995
to the object(s) will change from an open to a locked state. To protect a logic document, select Protect
Logic Document from the Protection drop-down button. A password is optional.
Uploading a BESTlogicPlus File

To upload a BESTlogicPlus file to the DGC-2020ES, you must first open the file through BESTCOMSPlus
or create the file using BESTCOMSPlus. Then pull down the Communication menu and select Upload
Logic.
Downloading a BESTlogicPlus File

To download a BESTlogicPlus file from the DGC-2020ES, you must pull down the Communication menu
and select Download Logic. If the logic in your BESTCOMSPlus has changed, a dialog box will open
asking you if want to save the current logic changes. You may choose Yes or No. After you have taken
the required action to save or not save the current logic, the downloading is executed.
Printing a BESTlogicPlus File

To view a preview of the printout, click on the Print Preview icon located on the BESTlogicPlus
Programmable Logic toolbar. If you wish to print to a printer, select the printer icon in the upper left corner
of the Print Preview screen.
You may skip the print preview and go directly to print by clicking on the Printer icon on the
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic toolbar. A dialog box, Select Views to Print opens allowing you to
check which views you would like to print. Next, the Print dialog box opens with the typical Windows
choice to setup the properties of printer. Execute this command, as necessary, and then select Print.
A Page Setup icon is also provided on the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic toolbar allowing you to
select Paper Size, Paper Source, Orientation, and Margins.
Clearing the On-Screen Logic Diagram

Click on the Clear button to clear the on-screen logic diagram and start over.
BESTlogic™Plus Examples
Example 1 - GENBRK Logic Block Connections
Figure 13-5 illustrates the GENBRK logic block, three input logic blocks, and two output logic blocks.
Output 3 is active while the GENBRK is sending an “open breaker” command and Output 4 is active while
the GENBRK is sending the “close breaker” command.
Figure 13-5. Example 1 – GENBRK Logic Block Connections
Example 2 - AND Gate Connections

Figure 13-6 illustrates a typical AND gate connection. In this example, Output 11 will become active when
the Low Fuel alarm AND the Low Oil Pressure alarm are true.
9469200995 13-35
Figure 13-6. Example 2 – AND Gate Connections
Example 3 - Multiple Logic Connections

In this example, there are two comment boxes, which may be placed on the logic diagram. Double-click a
comment box to modify the inside text. Output 3 becomes true when the 27TRIP is true. Output 1
becomes true when the High Coolant Temp is true. Output 2 becomes true when the DGC-2020ES is in
RUN mode (RUN Mode true). Refer to Figure 13-7.
Figure 13-7. Example 3 – Multiple Logic Connections
13-36 9469200995
9469200995 14-1
14 • Exhaust Treatment
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
In order to meet Tier 4 emission requirements, some engine manufacturers are applying Diesel
Particulate Filters (DPF) to the exhaust system of the engine. A Diesel Particulate Filter traps particulate
matter contained in diesel exhaust and prevents it from distributing into the air. The particulate matter is
later burned off during a regeneration process.
The DGC-2020ES communicates DPF control and status information to and from the engine ECU via
J1939 communications in the form of various Parameter Group Numbers (PGN) and Suspect Parameter
Numbers (SPN). These are summarized in the following paragraphs.
Regeneration
Regeneration is accomplished by operating the engine at elevated exhaust temperatures where the
accumulated particulate is burned off. If, in normal operation, the engine can be loaded to a high enough
level to achieve the elevated exhaust temperature, then regeneration can occur as a part of normal
operation. This is known as passive regeneration.
High exhaust temperatures can also be accomplished by methods such as providing dampers in the
exhaust stream or heating the exhaust through the burning of fuel. This is known as active regeneration
since it is outside of normal engine operation.
Heavily loaded engines will seldom require active regeneration. A lightly loaded engine will likely undergo
active regeneration when regeneration is required.
DPF Control
DPF control information is sent from the DGC-2020ES to the Engine ECU through PGN Number 57244
(0xE000). A manual regeneration request is sent using SPN 3695, Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration
Force Switch. Regeneration can be inhibited by SPN 3695, Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Inhibit
Switch.
Manual Regeneration
The operator can force a regeneration cycle by turning on the Manual Regeneration setting found on the
front panel under Settings > Communication > CANBus Setup > ECU Setup > DPF Regenerate Setup.
The parameter will remain on for a few seconds then go off. The ECU will respond to the momentary
setting by logging the request to force a manual regeneration. A continuous request is not used because
this can be problematic for some engine ECUs.
Manual regeneration can also be initiated by clicking the Manual Regeneration button on the ECU Setup
screen in BESTCOMSPlus®. BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic can also be used to initiate manual
regeneration by setting the DPF Manual Regeneration (DPFMANREGEN) logic element true.
Regeneration Inhibit
The operator can inhibit regeneration by turning on the DPF Regeneration Disable setting found on the
ECU Setup screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
Regeneration can also be disabled by turning on the Disable Regeneration setting on the ECU Setup
screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTlogicPlus programmable logic can also be used to inhibit regeneration by setting the DPF
Regeneration Inhibit (DPFREGENINHIBIT) logic element true.
DGC-2020ES Exhaust Treatment

14-2 9469200995
DPF Status and Pre-Alarms

The DGC-2020ES receives DPF status information which is broadcast from the engine ECU in various
Parameter Group Numbers (PGN) and Suspect Parameter Numbers (SPN). The DGC-2020ES displays
this information on the front panel, and in BESTCOMSPlus, via DPF related pre-alarms. The J1939
parameters and the resulting DGC-2020ES pre-alarms are summarized in the following paragraphs.
• PGN 64892 (0xFD7C) Diesel Particulate Filter Control 1
o SPN 3697, Diesel Particulate Filter Lamp Command
DPF REGEN REQUIRED Pre-Alarm: When SPN 3697 has a
value of 1 or 4 indicating the DPF lamp is on, the DGC-2020ES
will annunciate a pre-alarm with text of DPF REGEN REQUIRED.
The DPF symbol, shown to the right, will accompany the text
when the pre-alarm appears on the DGC-2020ES front panel.
o SPN 3698, Exhaust System High Temperature Lamp Command
HIGH EXHAUST TEMP Pre-Alarm: When SPN 3698 has a value
of 1 indicating the high exhaust temperature lamp is on, the DGC-
2020ES will annunciate a pre-alarm with text of HIGH EXHAUST
TEMP. The high exhaust temperature symbol, shown to the right,
will accompany the text when the pre-alarm appears on the DGC-
2020ES front panel.
o SPN 3701 Diesel Particulate Filter Status
SPN 3701 indicates that regeneration is required at the lowest level, moderate level, or most
severe level. The DGC-2020ES uses this parameter for DPF Soot Level Pre-alarms which
are described in the following paragraphs.
o SPN 3703 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Inhibit Switch
DPF REGEN INHIBITED Pre-Alarm: When SPN 3703 has a value
of 1 indicating the DPF Regeneration is inhibited due to the inhibit
switch being set, the DGC-2020ES will annunciate a pre-alarm
with text of DPF REGEN INHBTD. The DPF regeneration inhibited
symbol, shown to the right, will accompany the text when the pre-
alarm appears on the DGC-2020ES front panel.
• DPF Soot Level Annunciation
The DGC-2020ES annunciates DPF Soot Level pre-alarms which are described in the following
paragraphs.
o SOOT LEVEL HIGH Pre-Alarm
This pre-alarm is annunciated when one of the following occurs.
 A DTC is received with SPN 3719 (Diesel Particulate Filter Soot Load Percent) with
FMI = 15 (Data Valid But Above Normal Operating Range Least Severe Level)
 SPN 3701 (Diesel Particulate Filter Status) is received with a value of 001
(regeneration is needed – lowest level)
The pre-alarm text is SOOT LVL HI.
The DPF symbol, shown to the right, accompanies the text when the pre-alarm
appears on the DGC-2020ES front panel.
o SOOT LEVEL MODERATELY HIGH Pre-Alarm
FMI = 16 (Data Valid But Above Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe Level)
Exhaust Treatment DGC-2020ES

9469200995 14-3
(regeneration is needed – moderate level)
The pre-alarm text is SOOT LVL MOD HI.
The DPF warning symbol, shown to the right, accompanies the text
when the pre-alarm appears on the DGC-2020ES front panel.
o SOOT LEVEL EXTREMELY HIGH Pre-Alarm
FMI = 0 (Data Valid But Above Normal Operating Range Most Severe Level)
(regeneration is needed – highest level)
The pre-alarm text is SOOT LVL EXT HI.
The DPF stop symbol, shown to the right, accompanies the text
when the pre-alarm appears on the DGC-2020ES front panel. If the
DPF soot level reaches the most severe level, the engine ECU may
shut the engine down, preventing it from running, or allow it to run,
but at a reduced power level. The DGC-2020ES only indicates a
pre-alarm, it does not prevent the engine from running or cause
operation at a reduced power level. However, the operator should be
aware that the engine ECU or after treatment system may cause
such behavior.
Exhaust After-Treatment Systems (EATS)

In order to meet Tier 4 emission requirements, some engine manufacturers are adding Exhaust After
Treatment Systems (EATS) which treat the engine exhaust within the exhaust system to reduce
particulate matter and harmful contaminants prior to releasing the exhaust into the atmosphere. One such
system uses urea-based Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) catalyst which is combined with the exhaust gasses
in the EATS to bring the emissions to acceptable levels.
The DGC-2020ES meters EATS information from the engine ECU via J1939 CANBus and
displays the DEF level within the DEF tank(s), and also displays several pre-alarms
related to the EATS system. Any DEF related pre-alarms annunciated on the front panel
display the symbol used for DEF functions which is shown to the right.
Most systems will contain one DEF tank, while some may contain two tanks. The DGC-2020ES front
panel displays the level of DEF in each tank under Metering > Alarms-Status > J1939 Status > DEF
Tank1 LVL% and Metering > Alarms-Status > J1939 Status > DEF Tank2 LVL%. The tank 1 level is sent
from the ECU via SPN 1761 in J1939 PGN 65110 - After Treatment 1 Reagent Tank 1 Information. The
tank 2 level is sent from the ECU via SPN 4367 in J1939 PGN 64829 - After Treatment 1 Reagent Tank 2
Information. The tank levels are expressed in units of percent.
Pre-Alarms
The ECU sends DEF level diagnostics to the DGC as SPNs 5245 and 5246 in PGN 65110 (the AT1TI
PGN). SPN 5245 communicated DEF level diagnostics, whereas SPN 5246 communicates DEF
inducement level status.
There are several pre-alarms related to the EATS which annunciate DEF level diagnostics and DEF
inducement level status. They are always enabled and will annunciate when received from the engine
ECU. Each of them contains the symbol for DEF functions when annunciated on the front panel; however
it will not be displayed in BESTCOMSPlus. The pre-alarms are summarized in the following paragraphs.
• DEF FLUID LOW: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5245 has a value of 1, indicating that the DEF
tank level is low. The exact DEF levels which constitute a low DEF condition vary among manufacturers.
14-4 9469200995
• DEF LOW SEVERE: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5245 has a value of 4, indicating that the DEF
tank level is severely low or empty. The exact DEF levels which constitute a severely low DEF condition
vary among manufacturers. When this occurs and is not remedied, the engine ECU may enter a mode
of inducement not to operate the engine where some of the conditions in the pre-alarms descriptions
below may occur.
• DEF WARNING: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 1. This is the lowest level of
warning which indicates the EATS is not functioning properly or DEF quality or level is insufficient for
proper operation.
• DEF WARNING LVL2: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 2. This is a higher level
of warning which indicates the EATS is not functioning properly or DEF quality or level is insufficient for
proper operation. If the problem causing this warning is not corrected, the system will eventually enter
the DEF inducement states. In these states, the engine power or operating speed may be derated
depending on the engine manufacturer and engine application.
• DEF INDUCEMENT: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 3, indicating the first level
of inducement. The engine power or operating speed may be derated at this level of inducement
depending on engine manufacturer and engine application. This is the lowest level of inducement and
is caused by either the EATS not functioning properly or insufficient DEF quality or level for proper
operation.
• DEF PRESEVERE INDUCEMENT: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 4, indicating
the Pre-Severe Inducement level of inducement. This indicates that the engine has entered the second
highest level of inducement not to operate. This is caused by either the EATS not functioning properly
or insufficient DEF quality or level for proper operation. The engine power or operating speed may be
derated at this level of inducement depending on engine manufacturer and engine application. The
ECU will allow the engine to run for a limited time in this condition after which the engine will enter the
severe inducement state.
• DEF SEVERE INDUCEMENT: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of
5, indicating the Severe Inducement level of inducement. This is caused by either the
EATS not functioning properly or insufficient DEF quality or level for proper operation. In
this condition, the engine may either operate with reduced power or RPM or be shut
down depending on manufacturer or engine application. The engine will remain at this
level of inducement until the problem causing the inducement is resolved.
• DEF INDUCEMENT OVERRIDE: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 6, indicating
the Temporary Override of inducement. This indicates DEF inducement is temporarily overridden. The
engine may operate with reduced power, or for a limited time, after which time it may re-enter the
SEVERE INDUCEMENT state.
Exhaust System Status Annunciation

When an exhaust system condition requires annunciation, the DGC-2020ES displays the exhaust system
information across the bottom of the front panel screen. The parameters and symbols in the Exhaust
System Status Display are listed below. The symbol images below are the actual bit-mapped images that
are viewed on the front panel screen of the DGC-2020ES.
DEF Tank Level – The DEF Tank Level is the level of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) in the DEF Tank. When
the DEF Level is getting low and DEF related conditions require annunciation, the caption of the DEF
Tank level will change from “DEF” to the DEF symbol. Details of the DEF symbol are described below.
DEF Symbol – When the symbol is on solid, it indicates that DEF is low or there is an issue
with the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system. When it is flashing, it indicates the DEF
level is critically low or there is a critical issue with the SCR system.

9469200995 14-5
DPF Symbol – When the DPF symbol is on solid, it indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) or exhaust system filter requires regeneration. When flashing it indicates a more
urgent need for regeneration. Some manufacturers also show this symbol along with the
High Exhaust Temperature Symbol when a Regeneration is in process.
Regeneration Inhibited Symbol – When this symbol is visible, it indicates that Regeneration
is Inhibited. Operation with Regeneration Inhibited is not recommended. If Regeneration is
not allowed when required, eventually the machine may shut down and cannot be restarted
without a service call from the engine manufacturer. However, ample warning is given
through various pre-alarms to allow removal of the inhibit so regeneration can occur and
prevent an unwanted exhaust related shutdown condition.
Exhaust System Malfunction Symbol – When this symbol is visible, an exhaust system
malfunction is in effect. Pre-alarms and/or Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) will provide
additional information. It may be necessary to contact the engine manufacturer if the pre-
alarms and DTC’s do not provide sufficient failure information.
High Exhaust Temperature Symbol – This is visible when the exhaust system temperature
has been elevated to perform a DPF Regeneration and typically indicates a DPF
Regeneration is active. Some manufacturers also show this symbol when there is a
mechanism to heat the exhaust stream and it is in the process of heating in preparation for a
DPF Regeneration.
Check Engine Symbol – This is visible when Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are
present.
Torque Limit Symbol – This symbol is visible when operating in a Limited Torque mode due
to exhaust system issues. When on solid, it indicates torque reduction. When flashing, it
indicates increased torque reduction.
Amber Warning Lamp Symbol– This symbol indicates the engine ECU is lighting the Amber
Warning Lamp. When flashing, it indicates a higher degree of severity.
Red Lamp Symbol – This symbol indicates the engine ECU is lighting the Red Warning
Lamp. When flashing, it indicates a higher degree of severity. An engine shutdown may
accompany this symbol.
Wait To Start Symbol – This symbol is visible when the engine is in a state of preparation for
starting the engine. Examples include engine pre-heating or engine pre-lubrication.

14-6 9469200995
Exit Conditions for DEF Severe Inducement

• First Restart: Return to 0% torque reduction in exit condition, until proper DEF level and quality
evaluation. If low level or poor DEF quality is detected during the next monitoring cycle, the severe
inducement will be active after the next restart. After the second restart, a service tool is required to
exit the severe inducement.
• With Service Tool Clearing: Invoke 0% torque reduction with service tool clearing until proper DEF
level and quality evaluation. If low level or poor DEF quality is detected during the next monitoring
cycle, the severe inducement will be active after the next restart.

9469200995 15-1
Communications
Communication chapter.

the main bus.
Inputs and Outputs


Metering/Display
15-2 9469200995

43, and 45).

36, 37, and 38.


rotation.
9469200995 15-3

ground.
overall system.

GENBRK logic element description in the BESTlogic™Plus chapter.
Step 2: Review the section on breaker close requests in the Breaker Management chapter.
screen.
DETECTION screen.
15-4 9469200995
original diagram.

GENBRK logic element description in the BESTlogicPlus chapter.
Step 2: Review the section on breaker operation requests in the Breaker Management chapter.
original diagram.

9469200995 15-5
original diagram.

original diagram.

CEM DEBUG
and the DGC-2020ES.
15-6 9469200995

etc.
9469200995 16-1
16 • BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader

Tool
Introduction
The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is a software application, which allows the user to instantly
upload settings to Basler BESTCOMSPlus-compatible products by scanning a pre-registered bar code,
which promotes consistency, reduces potential errors, and saves time.
Setup
The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool software and a bar code reader (acquired separately) must be
installed on the same PC.
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool Installation

System Recommendations
The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is bundled with BESTCOMSPlus software. BESTCOMSPlus
software is built on the Microsoft® .NET Framework. The setup utility that installs BESTCOMSPlus on
your PC also installs the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool and the required version of .NET
Framework (if not already installed). BESTCOMSPlus operates with systems using Windows® XP 32-bit
SP3, Windows Vista 32-bit SP1, Windows 7 32-bit (all editions), Windows 7 64-bit (all editions), Windows
8, and Windows 10. Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on your PC before installing
BESTCOMSPlus. System recommendations for the .NET Framework and BESTCOMSPlus are listed in
Table 16-1.
Table 16-1. System Recommendations for BESTCOMSPlus and the .NET Framework
System Type Component Recommendation
32/64 bit Processor 2.0 GHz
32/64 bit RAM 1 GB (minimum), 2 GB (recommended)
950 MB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC)
To install and run BESTCOMSPlus, a Windows user must have Administrator rights.
Installation
Note
1. Insert the BESTCOMSPlus CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.

2. When the BESTCOMSPlus Setup and Documentation CD menu appears, click the Install button for
the BESTCOMSPlus application. The setup utility installs BESTCOMSPlus, the .NET Framework (if
not already installed), the USB driver, and the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool on your PC.
DGC-2020ES BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool

16-2 9469200995
Basler Electric folder in the Programs menu. The Basler Electric folder contains an icon that starts the
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.
Bar Code Reader and Bar Codes

The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is compatible with bar code readers, which conform to
UnifiedPOS specifications. Bar code readers and bar code labels are not provided and must be acquired
separately. Refer to the bar code reader’s documentation for installation instructions.
Any bar code compatible with your bar code reader may be used.
BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool settings are found on two main screens, the Loader Grid and
Configuration screen. The Loader Grid contains management options for the product settings files and
their associated bar codes. The Configuration screen contains product-specific options for the default
behavior of the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool. These settings are described in the following
paragraphs.
Loader Grid
One entry, or row, in the Loader Grid contains all of the necessary data to associate a product settings file
with a bar code. New entries can be added. Existing entries can be edited, deleted, and uploaded to a
Basler product.
Figure 16-1. Loader Grid
Scanning Bar Codes

Place the cursor in the text field, found at the top of the Loader Grid screen, and scan a bar code. If
successful, the digits which comprise the bar code appear in the text field. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool DGC-2020ES

9469200995 16-3
Loader Tool automatically searches for this bar code among the entries in the Loader Grid and displays
the matching entry. Click Clear to remove the digits from the text field.
Adding an Entry
Click Add to create an entry. The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool: Add Device dialog box appears
(Figure 16-2).
Figure 16-2. Add Device Screen

Enter the name of the entry in the Name field. This appears in the first column of the Loader Grid.
Select the product type from the Type drop-down menu. This appears in the second column of the Loader
Grid.
Enter the bar code of the entry in the UPC Barcode field by placing the cursor in the UPC Barcode field
and scanning the bar code.
To select the product settings file for the entry, click the browse (…) button in the Location field. Use
standard Windows methods to navigate to the desired product settings file and click Open. Ensure that
the selected product type in the Type field matches that of the product settings file specified in the
Location field.
Click OK when finished.
Editing an Entry
To Edit an existing entry, select the entry in the Loader Grid and click Edit. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings
Loader Tool: Edit Device dialog box appears. The options are identical to those of the Add Device dialog.
When the desired changes have been made, click OK.
Deleting an Entry
To delete an entry from the Loader Grid, select the entry and click the Delete button. A prompt appears
providing the option to confirm or cancel the deletion.
Uploading an Entry
Select an entry and click Upload. A dialog appears which provides connection options for the appropriate
type of device. Refer to the Basler product instruction manual for detailed connection information. Once a
connection is established, the product settings associated with the entry are uploaded.
Configuration Settings
For configuration settings, click the Configure button in the bottom left of the Loader Grid. The product
tabs on the left represent the compatible Basler products. Each product tab contains tabs for Settings
Files and Connection Options. The options on these tabs are described below.

16-4 9469200995
Setting Files Options

Use Saved Path: When enabled, the path specified in the Loader Grid entry is used when uploading the
settings file.
Single Folder: When enabled, this specifies a single folder which contains all settings files for the
product. The Windows filename specified in the Location field of the Loader Grid entry is searched for in
the Single Folder location. For example, all settings files for a product are located in “C:\files”. The
Location field in the Loader Grid entry for a device contains “C:\documents\settings\DGC-2020ES
Settings.bstx”. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool searches in “C:\files” for the file named “DGC-
2020ES Settings.bstx”.
Append Bar-Code to Location: When enabled, the bar code is appended to the specified location when
uploading the settings file. For example, an entry with the bar code “0002” is located in C:\files\0002 and
an entry with the bar code “0003” is located in C:\files\0003.
Logon: If User Name and Password are specified, you will not be prompted for credentials when
required.
Save After Upload: After uploading a settings file, the settings are downloaded from the connected
device and saved to the specified location, when enabled.
Upload Security: When enabled, the security settings stored in the settings file are uploaded to the
device. Credentials will be requested if not already specified.
Figure 16-3 illustrates the Setting Files tab.
Figure 16-3. Configuration, Settings Files Tab

9469200995 16-5
Connection Options
Connection options consist of the three selections described below. Refer to the Basler product
instruction manual for detailed connection information.
Always Prompt for Connection: When enabled, a dialog appears which provides connection options for
the appropriate type of device each time a connection attempt is made.
Ethernet Connection: When enabled, the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool automatically attempts
to connect to the specified IP address before uploading settings.
USB Connection: When enabled, the BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool automatically attempts to
connect to the device via USB port before uploading settings.
Figure 16-4 illustrates the Connection Options tab.
Figure 16-4. Configuration, Connection Options Tab
General Operation
The steps listed below are provided as a general guideline for how to operate the BESTCOMSPlus
Settings Loader Tool when the initial setup is complete and the settings files are associated with bar
codes.
1. Power on the device which will receive the new settings. Ensure proper communication connections
have been made between the device and the PC running BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.
2. Run BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.
3. Place cursor in search bar.

16-6 9469200995
4. Scan bar code.

5. Settings file is automatically highlighted and isolated in the grid.
6. Click Upload.
7. BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool automatically connects to device and uploads settings. Device
connection is automatic unless “Always prompt for connection” is enabled.

Fax: +1 618.654.2351 P.R. CHINA Tel: +65 68.44.6445
DGC-2020ES
Operation Instruction Manual

Tel +1 618.654.2341 • Fax +1 618.654.2351 9469200996, Rev B
December 2019
9469200996 i
Preface
This instruction manual provides information about the operation of the DGC-2020ES Digital Genset
• Controls and indicators
• Operating modes
• Metering
• Reporting and alarms
• Troubleshooting

Warning!

Caution
Note

9469200996 Operation (this manual)
DGC-2020ES Preface
ii 9469200996

www.basler.com
info@basler.com
Tel: +1 618.654.2341
Fax: +1 618.654.2351

All rights reserved
Warning!
manual.
Preface DGC-2020ES
9469200996 iii
Revision History
histories.

Manual
Change
Revision and Date
• Removed standalone Revision History chapter. (Revision histories
for hardware, firmware, and software are now in separate documents
on www.basler.com.)
• Added support for firmware version 1.04.00 and BESTCOMSPlus
version 4.01.00.
DGC-2020ES Contents
iv 9469200996
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200996 v
Contents
Controls and Indicators .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
Operating Modes ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Metering ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Alarms ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
MTU Fault Codes ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Diagnostic Trouble Codes .......................................................................................................................... 6-1
Yanmar Fault Codes .................................................................................................................................. 7-1
Event Recording ......................................................................................................................................... 8-1
DGC-2020ES Contents
vi 9469200996
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200996 1-1
1 • Controls and Indicators

DGC-2020ES controls and indicators are located on the front panel and are intended for local control and
monitoring of DGC-2020ES operation. Front panel controls consist of pushbuttons. Front-panel indicators
consist of LED (light emitting diode) indicators and a backlit LCD (liquid crystal display).
DGC-2020ES controls and indicators are illustrated in Figure 1-1. Lettered locators in Figure 1-1
correspond to the control and indicator descriptions of Table 1-1.
Figure 1-1. Front Panel

Table 1-1. Front-Panel HMI Descriptions
Locator Description
A Liquid Crystal Display. The backlit, 64 by 128 pixel LCD serves as the local information
source for metering, alarms, pre-alarms, and protective functions. Display operation is
maintained at −40°C.
B Supplying Load Indicator. This green LED lights when the generator current is greater
than Emergency Power Supply (EPS) threshold current.
C Alarm Indicator. This red LED lights continuously during alarm conditions and flashes
during pre-alarm conditions.

1-2 9469200996
Locator Description
D Not in Auto Indicator. This red LED lights when the DGC-2020ES is not operating in Auto
mode. When the DGC-2020ES is operating in Run or Off mode, this LED is on.
E Run Pushbutton and Mode Indicator. Pressing this button places the DGC-2020ES in
Run mode. The green Run mode LED lights when Run mode is active.
F Off Pushbutton and Mode Indicator. Pressing this button places the DGC-2020ES in Off
mode. The red Off mode LED lights when the DGC-2020ES is in Off mode. This button
also resets the Breaker Management Pre-Alarms and all MTU ECU Alarms.
G Auto Pushbutton and Mode Indicator. Pressing the Auto button places the DGC-2020ES
in Auto mode. The green Auto mode LED lights when Auto mode is active.
H Back Pushbutton. This button is pressed to cancel a settings editing session and discard
any settings changes. When navigating through menus, pressing this button moves
upward a level. When pressed momentarily, this button also resets the Breaker
Management Pre-Alarms and all MTU ECU Alarms. This button is also used to reset the
Maintenance Interval when pressed for 10 seconds while viewing Hours Until
Maintenance or Maintenance Due Pre-Alarm.
I Alarm Silence Pushbutton Combination. Simultaneously pressing both the Back and Edit
buttons opens the relay output programmed as the horn output.
J Edit Pushbutton. Pressing this button starts an editing session and enables changes to
DGC-2020ES settings. At the conclusion of an editing session, the Edit pushbutton is
pressed again to save the setting changes. When navigating through menus, pressing
this button moves downward one level. When entering a string, such as a password, this
button locks the selected character and moves to the next position. When finished, press
Edit twice to submit the string.
K Arrow Pushbuttons. These two buttons are used to navigate through the front-panel
display menus and modify settings. Within a level, the up- and down-arrow buttons are
used to move among items within the menu level. Pressing the down-arrow button moves
to items lower in the list. Pressing the up-arrow button moves to items higher in the list.
During a settings editing session, the up- and down-arrow buttons are used to raise and
lower the value of the selected setting.
L Lamp Test Pushbutton Combination. Simultaneously pressing both the Up- and Down-
arrow buttons tests the DGC-2020ES indicators by exercising all LCD pixels and lighting
all LEDs for as long as both buttons are held.
Display Operation and Navigation

The front-panel display is used to make settings changes and display metering values. Refer to locators
H, J, and K in Table 1-1 for information on changing settings through the front panel and navigating
through the Metering screens.
Login and Permissions

To login, navigate to the SETTINGS, ENTER PASSWORD screen and press the Edit key. Use the
Up/Down arrow keys to scroll through the characters. Use the Edit key to accept a character and move to
the next space. Once the password has been entered, press the Edit key again to login. A LOGOUT
selection now appears in the list of SETTINGS. To logout, navigate to SETTINGS > LOGOUT and press
the Edit key. The LOGOUT selection is removed from the SETTINGS list.
If communication access is active through the USB port, the front panel will display REMOTE COMMS,
FRONT PANEL IS READ ONLY, and the summary screen. This informs the user that the front panel can
only be used for viewing metering data and settings information. USB port access must be ended before
modifying settings through the front panel.
If a front-panel key is not pressed for more than 15 minutes, the user is automatically logged out.

9469200996 1-3
Summary Screen and Configurable Metering

The summary screen can be set to standard or scrolling. When set to standard, only the following
parameters are displayed:
• VOLT∗
• AMP∗
• PH∗
• Hz
• OIL
• FUEL
• TEMP
• BATT
∗ When set to standard, individual phase information can be automatically toggled at a rate set by the
Phase Toggle Delay setting. Navigate to the SETTINGS > GENERAL SETTINGS > FRONT PANEL HMI
screen and edit PH TOG DELAY. When the Phase Toggle Delay is set to zero, information for each
phase is obtained by pressing the Up or Down arrow keys on the front-panel HMI. When it is set to a
number other than zero, the display will toggle through the phases automatically at the rate specified by
the Phase Toggle Delay Setting.
When the summary screen is set to scrolling, you can select/configure the metering values that are
displayed. Up to 20 values can be displayed and these values will scroll at a delay time specified by the
user. To select a standard or scrolling summary, navigate to the SETTINGS > GENERAL SETTINGS >
FRONT PANEL HMI screen and edit the SUMMARY VIEW. The SCROLL DELAY setting is also found on
this screen.
To select the scrolling values, navigate to the SETTINGS > GENERAL SETTINGS > FRONT PANEL HMI
screen and edit the CONFIGURABLE METERING. The following parameters may be placed in the
scrolling summary:
• GEN VBN
• BATT V
• GEN VCA
• BLANK (Shows nothing on this line) • GEN VCN
• BOOST PRESS • INJ RAIL PRS
• BUS Hz • INTAK MNFLD TMP
• BUS VAB • kVA A
• BUS VBC • kVA B
• BUS VCA • kVA C
• CHRG AIR TMP • kVA TOT
• COOLANT PRESS • kvar A
• DEF1 % • kvar B
• DEF2 % • kvar C
• ENGINE % LOAD • kvar TOTAL
• ENG INTCLR TEMP • kW A
• ENG OIL TEMP • kW B
• FUEL • kW C
• FUEL DELV P • kW LD%
• FUEL RATE • kWh
• FUEL TEMP • kW TOT
• GEN Hz • NONE (Removes a line from the scrolling list)
• GEN IA • OIL P
• GEN IB • RPM
• GEN IC • RPM SRC
• GEN PF • RUN HRS
• GEN VAB • TEMP
• GEN VAN • TOTAL FUEL USED
• GEN VBC

1-4 9469200996
Sleep Mode
Sleep mode de-energizes the LCD backlight and heater and turns off the front-panel LEDs when no
pushbutton activity is detected for 15 minutes and the DGC-2020ES is operating in OFF mode or Auto
mode with the engine not running. Normal display operation resumes when any pushbutton is pressed or
the genset is started remotely via the ATS input. Sleep mode will not be entered while an alarm is active.
Sleep mode can be permanently disabled through BESTCOMSPlus® or the front panel.
One-Line Diagram
A one-line diagram of the breaker hardware configuration can be displayed on the front panel. This
diagram changes in real time to reflect the current state of the configured breakers. The one-line diagram
is disabled by default. To display the one-line diagram using front panel controls, navigate to Settings >
General Settings > Front Panel HMI > One-Line Diagram and enable the setting. If using
BESTCOMSPlus, navigate to Settings Explorer, General Settings, Front Panel HMI and select Enable on
the One-Line Diagram setting.
Once enabled, the one-line diagram appears on both the front-panel Summary and Main Menu screens.
The One-Line Diagram Menu screen provides metering for mains fail transfer, generator and bus
parameters as well as breaker controls. To access the One-Line Diagram Menu screen, go to the Main
Menu and select the one-line diagram as you would a normal menu option and press the Edit pushbutton.
The one-line diagram, mains fail transfer state (if enabled), generator and bus parameters, and breaker
controls are displayed respectively from the top of the menu.
Further mains fail transfer state metering is available by selecting the “MAINSFAIL XFER STATE” and
pressing the Edit pushbutton. Mains fail transfer state, transfer delay, return delay, and max transfer time
are displayed.
To issue a breaker open or breaker close command, select the appropriate menu option, press Edit and
select ON.
The ONE-LINE DIAGRAM screen options are shown in Figure 1-2.
G
L
MAINSFAIL XFER STATE
DISABLED
0 VLL 0 VLN
0.0 Hz 0 A
0 kW 0 KVar
PF 1.00 LEAD
BUS 0 VLL 0.0 Hz
GN BRK OPN CMD OFF
GN BRK CLS CMD OFF
MN BRK OPN CMD OFF
MN BRK CLS CMD OFF
P0071-89
Figure 1-2. One-Line Diagram Menu Options (Available when One-Line Diagram is Enabled)

9469200996 1-5
Generator and mains breakers are configured and

G both breakers are open.
L
Generator and mains breakers are configured. The
G generator breaker is closed and the mains breaker
L is open.
G Generator and mains breakers are configured. The

generator breaker is open and the mains breaker is
L closed.
G L Generator breaker is configured and open.
G L P0071-88
No breakers are configured.
Figure 1-3. One-Line Diagram: Breaker Hardware Status Indication
Mains Fail Transfer Status Display

Mains Fail Transfer Status can be viewed from three locations; however, the DGC-2020ES must be
equipped with Mains Fail Transfer (style number xx2) and Mains Fail Transfer must be enabled.
To enable Mains Fail Transfer, navigate to Settings > Breaker Management > Breaker Hardware > Mains
Fail Transfer using the front panel controls or Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Mains Fail using
BESTCOMSPlus.
Mains Fail Transfer Status is displayed on the front panel in Metering > Alarms-Status > Mains Fail
Transfer and also on the Breaker Hardware One-Line Diagram screen. It is displayed in BESTCOMSPlus
on the Metering Explorer, Mains Fail Transfer Status screen.
These screens display the Mains Fail Transfer State and any timers relevant to the mains fail transfer
process. These parameters are listed below.
Mains Fail Transfer State: The different mains fail transfer states are described below.
Power From Mains: Power is being supplied to the load from the mains bus.
Transfer Timer Active: Transfer Delay timer is actively counting.
Transferring to Gens: Load is being transferred to the generator bus.
Power From Gens: Power is being supplied to the load from the generator bus.
Return Timer Active: Return Delay timer is actively counting.
Transferring to Mains: Load is being transferred to the mains bus.
Disabled: DGC-2020 is in the OFF or RUN operating mode or in the alarm state.
Transfer Delay: Displays the current timer value in seconds.
Return Delay: Displays the current timer value in seconds.
Max Transfer Time: Displays the current timer value in seconds.
Note
The Mains Fail Transfer screen found at Metering > Alarms-Status >
Mains Fail Transfer shows only timers that are actively counting and
are relevant to mains fail transfer. They are not otherwise visible.

1-6 9469200996
Changing a Setting
To change a setting, navigate to the setting you want to change and press the Edit key. If you are not
already logged in, you will be prompted for your password. Use the Up/Down arrow key to raise or lower
the value. Press the Edit key again when finished.
Front-Panel Display Structure

The front-panel display structure begins with the SUMMARY SCREEN. Pressing the Edit key opens the
MAIN MENU screen. The MAIN MENU screen consists of METERING, SETTINGS and, when enabled,
the ONE-LINE DIAGRAM, indicated by this symbol: G L
. The METERING screen branches are
shown in Figure 1-4. Details of the METERING screen branches follow Figure 1-4. The SETTINGS
screen branches are shown in Figure 1-5. Details of the SETTINGS screen branches follow Figure 1-5.
METERING
ENGINE
GENERATOR
POWER
RUN STATISTICS
ALARMS-STATUS
DIAGNOSTICS
P0067-82
Figure 1-4. Metering Screen Branches
ENGINE
● OIL PRESSURE
● COOLANT TMP
● BATTERY VOLT
● RPM
● SPEED SRC
● FUEL LEVEL
● ENGINE LOAD
● COOLANT LEVL (Visible when CAN Bus is enabled.)
● RUN HOURS
● HRS TO MAINT
● DEF TANK 1 LVL % (Visible when CAN Bus is enabled.)
● DEF TANK 2 LVL % (Visible when CAN Bus is enabled.)
● REQUESTED RPM
● REQ ACCL PEDAL (Visible when the selected ECU type is Volvo Penta.)
● REQ SPEED BIAS (Visible when the selected ECU type is Cummins.)
GENERATOR
● GEN CONNECT
● GEN VAB
● GEN VBC
● GEN VCA
● GEN VAN
● GEN VBN
● GEN VCN
● GEN FREQ
● GEN AMPS A
● GEN AMPS B
● GEN AMPS C
● BUS CONNECT
● BUS VAB
● BUS FREQ

9469200996 1-7
POWER
● kW A
● kW B
● kW C
● kW TOTAL
● kVA A
● kVA B
● kVA C
● kVA TOTAL
● kvar A
● kvar B
● kvar C
● kvar TOTAL
● PF
RUN STATISTICS
● CUMULATIVE
○ CUMULATIVE
■ START
■ # STARTS
■ HRS TO MAINT
■ kW-HRS
○ TOTAL RUN TIME
■ HOURS
■ MINUTES
○ LOADED RUN TIME
■ HOURS
■ MINUTES
○ UNLOADED RUN TIME
■ HOURS
■ MINUTES
● SESSION
○ SESSION
■ START
■ kW-HRS
○ TOTAL RUN TIME
■ HOURS
■ MINUTES
○ LOADED RUN TIME
■ HOURS
■ MINUTES
○ UNLOADED RUN TIME
■ HOURS
■ MINUTES
ALARMS-STATUS
● ACTIVE ALARMS
● ACTIVE PRE-ALARMS
● MTU FAULT CODES (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC, MTU ADEC, MTU ECU7/ECU8 or MTU
Smart Connect.)
● MTU STATUS (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC, MTU ADEC, MTU ECU7/ECU8, or MTU Smart
Connect.)
○ NMT-ALIVE STATUS (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ SPS_NODE
■ SW_TYP
■ SW_VAR
■ SW_ED1
■ SW_ED2
■ REV
■ SW_MOD
○ TRIP FUEL (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ TRIP HRS
1-8 9469200996
■ TRIP IDLE HRS

■ FUEL RATE
■ TRIP FL RATE
■ TOTAL RUN TM
■ DAILY FUEL
■ TOTAL FUEL
○ FUEL (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC.)
■ DAY TANK LVL
■ STORE TANK LVL
○ ENGINE STATUS (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU ECU7/ECU8, or MTU Smart
Connect.)
■ MTU FAULT CODES
■ ENG RUNNING
■ CYL CUTOUT
■ ENG OPTIMIZED (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ PREHT NT RCHD (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ SPEC TORQUE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ SPD DMD FL MD (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC.)
■ CURR P DEGREE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC.)
■ LOAD GEN ON (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU ECU7/ECU8, or MTU
Smart Connect.)
■ PRIME PUMP ON (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC.)
■ RUNUP SPD LO (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC.)
■ IDLE SPD LO (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC.)
■ CYL CUTOUT CD (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ RPM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ DROOP % (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8 or MTU Smart Connect.)
■ ENG COOL TEMP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ CHRG AIR TMP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ INTRCOOLR TEMP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ ENG OIL TEMP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ FUEL TEMP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ ECU TEMP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ OIL PRESSURE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ CHG AIR P (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ FUEL DELV P (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ FL RAIL P (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ CAMSHAFT RPM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ IDLE RPM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ ECU SHUTDOWN (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ TOTAL RUN TM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ ECU SUPP VOLTS (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ INJCT DBR % (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ RATED RPM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ INJCT QTY (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ RATED KW (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ RESRV PWR % (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ START SEQ (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8 or MTU Smart Connect.)
■ ECU OVRD FDBK (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU Smart Connect.)
■ COOLNT PRHT DONE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU Smart Connect.)
■ REQ TORQUE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU Smart Connect.)
■ EXT STOP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU Smart Connect.)
■ OPERATING MODE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU Smart Connect.)
○ SPEED (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU ECU7/ECU8, or MTU Smart Connect.)
■ SPD DMD SRC
■ CAN SPD DMD
■ ANLG SPD DMD
■ SPEED DEMAND (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU Smart Connect.)
■ SEL SPD DMD (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ EFF SET SPEED (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ SPD DMD FL MD (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8 or MTU Smart
Connect.)
■ RATED RPM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ RPM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ CAMSHAFT RPM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)

9469200996 1-9
■ IDLE RPM (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)

■ FREQ RPM DMD (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
○ SIGNL FEEDBK (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU ECU7/ECU8, or MTU Smart
Connect.)
■ ECU_OVRD_FDBK
■ EXT STOP
■ SPD UP IN
■ SPD DN IN
■ CAN MODE FDBK (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ CYL CUTOUT (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
○ DIAGNOSTICS (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ AL PWR AMP 1
■ AL PWR AMP 2
■ XSTR OUT AL
■ XSTR OUT STS
■ ECU SHUTDOWN
○ CAN BUS (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ CAN MODE FDBK
■ CAN NODES
■ LOST NODES
○ LIMITS (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ OIL PRESSURE
■ LO LIM OILP
■ LOLOLIM OILP
■ ENG COOL TEMP
■ CLNT LMT HI
■ CLNT LMT HIHI
■ CHRG AIR TMP
■ CHG AIR LMT HI
■ ECU SUPP VOLTS
■ L1L ECU VOLTS
■ L2L ECU VOLTS
■ U1L ECU VOLTS
■ U2l ECU VOLTS
■ INTRCOOLR TMP
■ INTCLR LMT HI
● STATUS
○ AUTO XFER SWITCH (Visible when the Auto Transfer Switch programmable function is configured to
be driven by an input.)
○ EPS SUPP. LOAD
○ GEN BREAKER
○ MAINS BREAKER
○ BATTLE OVERRIDE (Visible when the Battle Override programmable function is configured to be
driven by an input.)
○ LOW LINE OVERRIDE (Visible when the Low Line Override programmable function is configured to be
○ LOW COOL LEVEL (Visible when the Low Coolant Level programmable function is configured to be
○ LOW FUEL LEVEL (Visible when the Low Coolant Level programmable function is configured to be
○ BATT CHRG FAIL (Visible when the Battery Charger Fail programmable function is configured to be
○ FUEL LEAK DETECT (Visible when the Fuel Leak Detect programmable function is configured to be
○ GRND DELTA O-RIDE (Visible when Generator Connection is configured for Delta and the Grounded
Delta Override programmable function is configured to be driven by an input.)
○ 1 PHASE O-RIDE (Visible when the 1-Phase Override programmable function is configured to be driven
by an input.)
○ BUS DEAD
○ BUS STABLE
○ BUS FAILED
○ GEN DEAD
○ GEN STABLE
○ GEN FAILED
○ ENG RUNNING

1-10 9469200996
○ CLDN TMR ACTVE

○ OFF MODE COOLDN
○ COOLDN REQ
○ COOL & STOP REQ
○ EXT START DEL
○ START DEL BYPASS
○ ALT FRQ O-RIDE
○ RESET
○ ALARM SILENCE
○ LAMP TEST
○ IDLE REQUEST
○ LOAD TAKEOVER
○ MAINS FAIL TEST
○ CEM CONNECTED
○ MF TRANSFER INHBT
○ AUTO BRKR OP INH
● INPUTS
○ INPUT X (X = 1 to 7 (8 to 17 optional))
● OUTPUTS
○ START
○ RUN
○ PRESTART
○ OUTPUT X (X = 1 to 4 (5 to 28 optional))
● LOGIC CTL RELAYS
○ LCR X (X = 1 to 16)
● CONF ELEMENTS
● EVENT LOG
○ [EVENT NAME]
■ ACTIVE
■ OCCURRENCE COUNT
■ FIRST DATE
■ FIRST TIME
■ LAST DATE
■ LAST TIME
■ FIRST ENG HRS
■ LAST ENG HRS
■ DETAILS
□ OCCURRENCE (Use the Edit/Up/Down keys to change the occurrence.)
□ DATE
□ TIME
□ ENG HRS
■ CLEAR EVENT (Visible when logged in through the front panel.)
● J1939 DATA (Visible when CAN bus is enabled and ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU ADEC,
GM/Doosan, Cummins, MTU Smart Connect, Scania, or John Deere.)
○ ENGINE ECU ADDR
○ THROTTLE POSITN
○ LOAD @ CRNT RPM
○ ACTUAL ENG TORQ
○ ENGINE SPEED
○ DESIRED SPEED
○ INJ CNTRL PRESS
○ INJ RAIL PRS
○ ENGINE HOURS
○ TRIP FUEL
○ TRIP AVE FL RT
○ TOTAL FUEL USED
○ ENG COOLANT TEMP
○ COOLNT PRHT DONE
○ FUEL TEMP
○ ENG OIL TEMP
○ ENG INTCLR TEMP
○ INTRCR CLNT LVL
○ FUEL DELV P
○ ENG OIL LEVEL

9469200996 1-11
○ ENG OIL PRESS

○ COOLANT PRESS
○ COOLANT LEVEL
○ FUEL RATE
○ BAROMETRIC PRESS
○ AMB AIR TEMP
○ AIR INLET TEMP
○ BOOST PRESS
○ INTAK MNFLD TEMP
○ INTAK MNFLD1 ABS PRESS
○ AIR FLTR DIF PRS
○ EXHAUST GAS TEMP
○ BATTERY VOLTAGE
○ ECU INPUT VOLTS
○ TRANS OIL PRESS
○ TRANS OIL TEMP
○ WINDG 1 TEMP
○ WINDG 2 TEMP
○ WINDG 3 TEMP
○ ECU TEMP
○ AUX PRESSURE1
○ AUX PRESSURE2
○ RATED KW
○ RATED RPM
○ EXHAUST TMP A
○ EXHAUST TMP B
○ AFT1 DPF OUT TEMP
○ CHRG AIR TMP
○ FUEL 1 LEAK
○ FUEL 2 LEAK
○ ALARM RST FDBK
○ ECU SHUTDOWN
○ DEF TANK 1 LVL %
○ DEF TANK 2 LVL %
○ DPF SOOT LEVEL %
○ DPF ASH LEVEL %
○ CRANKCASE PRESSURE
○ FUEL FLT DF PRS
○ OIL FLTR DIFF PRS
○ DOC INLET TEMP
○ DOC OUTLET TEMP
● J1939 ENGINE CONFIG (Visible when CAN bus is enabled and ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta,
○ SPD @ IDLE PNT 1
○ TRQ @ IDLE PNT 1
○ SPD @ PNT 2
○ TRQ @ PNT 2
○ SPD @ PNT 3
○ TRQ @ PNT 3
○ SPD @ PNT 4
○ TRQ @ PNT 4
○ SPD @ PNT 5
○ TRQ @ PNT 5
○ SPD @ PNT 6
○ ENDSPEED GOV KP
○ REF ENG TORQUE
○ O-RIDE SPD PNT 7
○ O-RIDE TIME LMT
○ SPEED LOWER LMT
○ SPEED UPPER LMT
○ TORQUE LOWER LMT
○ TORQUE UPPER LMT
● J1939 ECU LAMP STATUS
○ WARNING LAMP
○ RED LAMP

1-12 9469200996
○ PROTECT LAMP
○ MALFUNC LAMP
● J1939 ACTIVE DTC
● J1939 PREV DTC
● J1939 DTC CLEAR
○ CLEAR ACTIVE DTCS
○ CLEAR PREV DTCS
● ISUZU STATUS (Visible when CAN bus is enabled and ECU is configured for Isuzu)
○ DPF AMBER LAMP
○ DPF GREEN LAMP
○ DPF MODE
● YANMAR STATUS (Visible when CAN bus is enabled and ECU is configured for Yanmar)
○ REGEN STATUS
○ EGR STATUS
○ AMB AIR TEMP
○ INTK MANIFLD PRESSURE
○ EXH MANIFOLD PRESSURE
○ DOC INLET TEMP
○ DOC OUTLET TEMP
○ DPF SOOT LEVEL %
○ DPF ASH LEVEL %
○ REGEN INTRLK STATUS
○ REGEN MODE
○ REGEN REQ FLG
○ ASH CLEAN REQ
● MAINS FAIL TRANSFER (Visible when DGC-2020ES style number is xx2 and Mains Fail Transfer is enabled.)
○ MAINSFAIL XFER STATE
■ DISABLED ( The possible mains fail transfer states are as follows: Power From Mains,
Transfer Timer Active, Transferring to Gens, Power From Gens, Return Timer Active,
Transferring to Mains, Disabled (when DGC is in OFF or RUN modes, or in the alarm state))
○ TRANSFER DELAY (Visible when actively counting and relevant to mains fail transfer.)
○ RETURN DELAY (Visible when actively counting and relevant to mains fail transfer.)
○ MAX TRANSFER TIME (Visible when actively counting and relevant to mains fail transfer.)
DIAGNOSTICS
● FLASH WR
SETTINGS
GENERAL SETTINGS
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM PARAMS
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
ALARM CONFIGURATION
BREAKER MANAGEMENT
LOGIC TIMERS
ENTER PASSWORD
P0067-83
Figure 1-5. Settings Screen Branches
GENERAL SETTINGS
● FRONT PANEL HMI
○ SUMMARY VIEW
○ SCROLL DELAY
○ PH TOG DELAY
○ LCD CONTRAST
○ SLEEP MODE
○ LANGUAGE
○ CONFIGURABLE METERING
■ ITEM X (X = 1 to 20)
○ ONE LINE DIAGRAM

9469200996 1-13
○ ENG HRS DISPLAY

○ OVERVIEW
○ EXH DISPLAY
○ EXH DISPL SCRN
○ BATT CHG DISPLAY
○ FUEL LVL DISPLAY
● CONFIGURE DATE/TIME
○ YEAR
○ MONTH
○ DAY
○ HOURS
○ MINUTES
○ SECONDS
○ UTC OFFSET
○ DST ENABLED
○ CLK NOT SET WRN
● VIEW DATE/TIME
● VERSION INFO
○ DGC-2020ES
■ SERIAL NUMBER
■ PART NUMBER
■ MODEL NUMBER
■ LANGUAGE VERSION
■ LANGUAGE PART NUM
■ FONT VERSION
■ FONT PART NUM
■ STYLE CODE
○ CEM-2020 (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
■ SERIAL NUMBER
■ PART NUMBER
■ MODEL NUMBER
■ BUILD DATE
COMMUNICATIONS∗
∗(Visible when the optional J1939 CAN bus is enabled, style code xCx.)
● CAN BUS SETUP
○ CAN BUS SETUP
■ CAN BUS ENABLE
■ DTC ENABLE (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ SPN CONV METHOD (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ CAN BUS ADDR (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENGINE ECU ADDRESS (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ECU OPT SLCT (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ECU PULSING (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENG SHTDN TM (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ PLS CYCL TM (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ECU SET TM (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ RESP TIMEOUT (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ COOL TEMP SRC (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ OIL PRESS SRC (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENGINE RUN TM SRC (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
○ ECU SETUP (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ECU CONF
■ CUMMINS ECU SETUP
□ CUMMINS GEN CONTROL
■ ISUZU ECU SETUP
□ CLEAR ECU MEMORY
□ ESCAPE MODE
■ YANMAR ECU SETUP

1-14 9469200996
■ NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
■ GEN DATA TRANSMIT
■ ENGINE PARAM XMT
■ TRIP RESET (Visible when ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU ADEC,
GM/Doosan, Cummins, or MTU Smart Connect.)
■ START MODE
■ DPF REGENRATE SETUP (Visible when ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU
ADEC, GM/Doosan, Cummins, or MTU Smart Connect.)
□ DPF MANUAL REGEN
□ DPF REGEN DISABLE
■ BATT CHARGER SETUP
□ CHARGER 1 TYPE
□ CHARGER 2 TYPE
■ BATT CHARGR PREALARMS
□ CH1 COMMS FAIL
□ CH1 AC OFF
□ CH2 COMMS FAIL
□ CH2 AC OFF
■ SENS CHARGR PREALARMS
■ SPEED SELECT (Visible when ECU is configured for Volvo Penta.)
■ ACCEL POSITION (Visible when ECU is configured for Volvo Penta.)
■ MODULE TYPE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ ALIVE MSG (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC or MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
■ SPEED SETUP
□ J1939 RPM ENABLE (Visible when ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta,
□ ENGINE RPM
□ SAVE RPM ADJUSTS
□ RPM BAND WIDTH
□ IDLE RPM
□ RPM CHECKSUM
□ SPEED UP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC 304, MTU
□ SPEED DN (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC 304, MTU
□ TEST OVRSPEED (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC
□ SPD DMAND SRC (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC
□ IDLE REQUEST (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, MTU
□ INCREASE IDLE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
■ ECU SETUP (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC, MTU MDEC 304, MTU
□ TRIP RESET (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ INT OIL PRIME

9469200996 1-15
□ GOV PRM SW (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ADEC or MTU Smart
Connect.)
□ ENG STRT PRIME (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ FAN OVERRIDE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ MODE SWITCH (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ GOV PARAM SET (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU ECU7/ECU8.)
□ DIS CYL CUT 1 (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, or MTU
ECU7/ECU8.)
□ DIS CYL CUT 2 (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU MDEC 304, MTU
ECU7/ECU8 or MTU Smart Connect.)
□ OPERATING MODE (Visible when ECU is configured for MTU Smart Connect.)
SYSTEM PARAMS
● SYSTEM SETTINGS
○ GEN CONNECT
○ BUS CONNECT
○ RATED kW
○ RATED VOLTS
○ RATED FREQ
○ ALTRNATE FRQ
○ RATED RPM
○ RATED PF
○ ROTATION
○ EPS
■ EPS THRESHLD
function.)
○ FUEL LVL TYP
○ SYSTEM UNITS
○ PRESSURE UNITS (Visible when Metric is selected for System Units.)
○ BATTERY VOLT
○ FLYWHL TEETH
○ SPEED SOURCE
○ MAINT RESET
○ NFPA LEVEL
○ POWER UP DELAY
● REMOTE MODULE SETUP
○ CEM SETUP
■ ENABLE
■ OUTPUTS (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
■ CAN BUS ADDR (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
■ VERSION INFO (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
□ FIRMWARE VERSION
□ BOOT CODE VERSION
□ SERIAL NUMBER
□ PART NUMBER
□ MODEL NUMBER
□ BUILD DATE
■ CEM DEBUG MENU (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
□ DGC TO CEM BP
□ CEM TO DGC BP
● CRANK SETTINGS
○ DISCNCT LMIT
○ PRECRNK DELY
○ PRESTRT CNTCT
○ STYLE
○ # CYCLES (Visible when Cycle is selected for Cranking Style.)
○ CONT TIME (Visible when Continuous is selected for Cranking Style.)

1-16 9469200996
○ CYCLE TIME
○ REST TIME
○ COOLDWN TIME
○ COOLDOWN CONFIG
○ RESTART DELAY
○ OFF MODE COOLDN
○ PRESTART REST CONFIG
■ CONF
○ OIL PRS CRANK DISC
■ ENABLE
■ CRANK DISC PRS
● AUTOMATIC RESTART
○ ENABLE
○ ATTEMPTS
○ INTERVAL
● EXERCISE TIMER
○ MODE
○ RUN WITH LOAD
○ START HOUR
○ START MINUTE
○ RUN HOURS
○ RUN MINUTES
● SENSING TRANS
○ GEN PT PRI V
○ GEN PT SEC V
○ GEN CT PRI A
○ CT LOW LINE SF (Visible when an input is selected for the Low Line Override programmable function.)
○ BUS PT PRI V
○ BUS PT SEC V
● RELAY CONTROL
○ START
○ RUN
○ PRESTART
● AUTO CONFIG DETECT
○ ENABLE
○ LOW LINE THRESH
○ 1-PH THRESH
○ 1 PH GEN CONN
● ENGINE STATISTICS
○ START YEAR
○ START MONTH
○ START DAY
○ # STARTS
○ HRS TO MAINT
○ kW-HRS
○ TOTAL HRS
○ LOADED HRS
○ UNLOADED HRS
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
● CONFIGURABLE INPUTS
○ INPUT X (X = 1 to 7)
■ ALARM CONFIG
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ RECOGNITION
● PROG FUNCTIONS
○ EMERGENCY STOP
■ INPUT
○ AUTO XFER SWITCH
■ INPUT
○ GRND DELTA O-RIDE
■ INPUT

9469200996 1-17
○ BATTLE OVERRIDE
■ INPUT
○ LOW LINE OVERRIDE
■ INPUT
○ 1 PHASE O-RIDE
■ INPUT
○ BATT CHRG FAIL
■ INPUT
○ LOW COOL LEVEL
■ INPUT
○ LOW FUEL LEVEL
■ INPUT
○ FUEL LEAK DETECT
■ INPUT
● CONFIG ELEMENTS
■ ALARM CONFIG
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ RECOGNITION
ALARM CONFIGURATION
● HORN CONFIGURATION
○ HORN
○ NOT IN AUTO HORN
● PRE-ALARMS
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ LOW COOLANT TEMP
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ LOW FUEL LEVEL
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ HYSTERESIS
○ ENGINE OVERLOAD
■ ENG KW OVRLD 1
■ ENG KW OVRLD 2
■ ENG KW OVRLD 3
○ MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ BATTERY OVERVOLTAGE

1-18 9469200996
■ENABLE
■THRESHOLD
○ LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ WEAK BATTERY VOLTAGE
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ HIGH FUEL LEVEL
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ HYSTERESIS
○ ACTIVE DTC (Visible when DTC is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
○ ECU COMMS FAIL (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
○ COOLANT LEVEL (Visible when CAN BUS is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ CEM COMM FAIL (Visible when CEM-2020 is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
○ CHECKSUM FAIL
■ ENABLE
■ ENABLE
■ ENABLE
○ REVERSE ROTATION
■ ENABLE
• ALARMS
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ARMING DELAY
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ARMING DELAY
○ LOW FUEL LEVEL
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ OVERSPEED
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ COOLANT LEVEL (Visible when CAN bus is enabled.)
■ ENABLE
■ THRESHOLD
○ CAN LOW COOL LEVEL
Note
The HIGH COOLANT TEMP and LOW OIL PRESSURE alarms have an ARMING
DLY setting that disables the alarm for the specified time after engine startup.
● SENDER FAIL
○ COOL TEMP SENDR FAIL
■ CONFIG TYPE
■ RECOGNITION
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ MIN OHMS

9469200996 1-19
■ MAX OHMS
■ SF DISPLAY
○ OIL PRESS SENDR FAIL
■ CONFIG TYPE
■ RECOGNITION
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ MIN OHMS
■ MAX OHMS
■ SF DISPLAY
○ FUEL LEVL SENDR FAIL
■ CONFIG TYPE
■ RECOGNITION
■ ACTIVATN DLY
■ MIN OHMS
■ MAX OHMS
■ SF DISPLAY
○ VOLTAGE SENSE FAIL
■ CONFIG TYPE
■ ACTIVATN DLY
○ SPEED SENDR FAIL
■ TIME DELAY
● 27 UNDERVOLTAGE
■ PICKUP
■ HYSTERESIS
■ TIME DELAY
■ FREQ INHIBIT
■ ALARM CONFIG
● 59 OVERVOLTAGE
■ PICKUP
■ HYSTERESIS
■ TIME DELAY
■ ALARM CONFIG
● 47 PHASE IMBALANCE
○ PICKUP
○ HYSTERESIS
○ TIME DELAY
○ ALARM CONFIG
● 81 O/U FREQUENCY
○ UNDERFREQUENCY
■ INHIBIT VOLTS
■ PICKUP
■ HYSTERESIS
■ TIME DELAY
■ ALARM CONFIG
○ OVERFREQUENCY
■ PICKUP
■ HYSTERESIS
■ TIME DELAY
■ ALARM CONFIG
○ ALTRNT FRQ SCALE FCTR
■ ALT FREQ SF
● 50 OVERCURRENT
■ PICKUP
■ TIME DELAY
■ ALARM CONFIG

1-20 9469200996
BREAKER MANAGEMENT
● BREAKER HARDWARE
○ MAINS FAIL TRANSFER
■ ENABLE
■ RETURN DELAY
■ TRANSFER DELAY
■ MAX TRANSFER TIME
○ CLOSE WAIT TIME
■ TIME
○ GEN BREAKER
■ CONTINUOUS
■ CLOSING TIME
■ OPEN CMD
■ CLOSE CMD
○ MAINS BREAKER
■ CONFIGURED
■ CONTINUOUS (Visible when configured.)
■ CLOSING TIME (Visible when configured.)
■ OPEN CMD (Visible when configured.)
■ CLOSE CMD (Visible when configured.)
● BUS CONDITION DETECT
○ GEN DEAD
■ THRESHOLD
■ TIME DELAY
○ GEN STABLE
■ OV PICKUP
■ OV DROPOUT
■ UV PICKUP
■ UV DROPOUT
■ OF PICKUP
■ OF DROPOUT
■ UF PICKUP
■ UF DROPOUT
■ TIME DELAY
function.)
■ ALT FREQ SF
○ GEN FAILED
■ TIME DELAY
○ BUS DEAD
■ THRESHOLD
■ TIME DELAY
○ BUS STABLE
■ OV PICKUP
■ OV DROPOUT
■ UV PICKUP
■ UV DROPOUT
■ OF PICKUP
■ OF DROPOUT
■ UF PICKUP
■ UF DROPOUT
■ TIME DELAY
function.)
■ ALT FREQ SF
○ BUS FAILED
■ TIME DELAY

9469200996 1-21
LOGIC TIMERS
● TIMER X (X = 1 to 10)
○ HOURS
○ MINUTES
○ SECONDS
ENTER PASSWORD
LOGOUT (Visible when logged in through the front panel.)

1-22 9469200996

9469200996 2-1
2 • Operating Modes
Three operating modes provide the versatility to meet the application’s needs. The DGC-2020ES
operates in Off, Run, or Auto mode. These operating modes are described in the following paragraphs.
Off
In OFF mode, the DGC-2020ES will not start under any circumstance. It cannot be started automatically.
Programmable logic functions normally in this mode.
Run
In RUN (manual) mode, the DGC-2020ES runs and cannot be shut off automatically. The breaker can be
opened or closed through programmable logic inputs. Programmable logic functions normally in this
mode.
Auto
In AUTO mode, the DGC-2020ES may be started automatically or “self-start” from an automatic starting
feature described in the following paragraphs. If the DGC-2020ES is not in AUTO mode, the self-starting
modes will have no effect. The self-starting modes are independent, meaning that if any self-starting
mode indicates that the unit should run, it will run. It will not shut down unless all self-starting modes
indicate that the unit should not be running.
ATS Contact Input

The ATS (automatic transfer switch) programmable function has an input mapped to it through
BESTCOMSPlus®. The unit will start and run when this contact is closed, and will stop when the contact
is open.
Generator Exerciser
The unit starts at the designated time and runs for the specified duration. The breaker will be closed if
“Run with Load” is checked in the generator exerciser settings.
Mains Fail Transfer Functionality

If mains fail transfer is enabled, the unit runs when any phase of the utility is dead or unstable, and will
not stop until all phases of the utility are stable and the load has been transitioned to the utility.
Run-with-Load Logic Element

When the run-with-load logic element start input is energized, the unit starts and closes its breaker. When
the run-with-load logic element stop input is energized, the unit opens its breaker and stops.
Engine Run Logic Element

When the engine run logic element start input is energized, the unit starts. When the engine run logic
element stop input is energized, the unit opens its breaker if needed, cools down, and then stops.
Operating States
The DGC-2020ES goes through the operating states listed in Table 2-1 when starting and stopping the
generator.
DGC-2020ES Operating Modes

2-2 9469200996
Table 2-1. Operating States

State Description
Reset The first state after a DGC-2020ES power up. Not running and not able to run until
system initialization is complete.
Ready The engine is not running. The DGC-2020ES is ready to run. This is the normal state of
the DGC-2020ES in OFF mode, and in AUTO mode when the engine is not running, or in
the process of starting or stopping.
Cranking The DGC-2020ES is cranking the engine as part of the start sequence.
Resting The DGC-2020ES is resting (not cranking) the starter between crank cycles as part of
the start sequence.
Running The engine is running.
Alarm The engine is not running and is in the Alarm state. The engine cannot be run until the
alarm is cleared by pressing the OFF button on the front panel. If the engine was running
when the alarm state was entered, the unit will shut down.
Prestart The DGC-2020ES is in a pre-start state for engine pre-heat or pre-lube purposes in
anticipation of an engine start.
Cooling The engine is running to allow cooldown in anticipation of an engine shutdown.
Connecting The engine is not running. The DGC-2020ES is attempting to connect to the engine ECU
to read data or establish communications for control. This state precedes an engine
startup as part of the start sequence.
Disconnect The engine is not running and possibly spinning down after completion of a run session.
The DGC-2020ES removes KEY ON from the ECU after a run session is complete. This
allows the engine to spin down prior to reconnecting to the ECU to read data after the
engine has stopped.
Pulsing The engine is not running. The DGC-2020ES is attempting to connect to the ECU to read
data from it.
Unloading When the DGC-2020ES is part of a multiple-unit, load-sharing system or is operating in
parallel with utility power, the engine is running, but kW output is being reduced in
anticipation of cooldown and subsequent shutdown.
Operating Mode Control

Controls for selecting operating mode are located on the front panel and within BESTCOMSPlus.
Refer to the Controls and Indicators chapter for more information.
Operating Modes DGC-2020ES

9469200996 3-1
3 • Metering
The DGC-2020ES provides comprehensive metering of internal and system conditions. These
capabilities include extensive parameter metering, status indication and reporting.
Metering Explorer
DGC-2020ES metering is accessed through the metering explorer menu on the front panel display or the
BESTCOMSPlus® metering explorer.
Front Panel
On the front panel, the metering explorer is accessed through the Metering branch of the menu. Refer to
the Controls and Indicators chapter for more information.
BESTCOMSPlus®
In BESTCOMSPlus, the metering explorer is located in the upper left portion of the application window.
Metering Screen Docking

A docking feature within the metering explorer allows arrangement and docking of multiple metering
screens. Clicking and dragging a metering screen tab displays a blue, transparent square, several arrow
boxes, and a tab box. These docking elements are illustrated in Figure 3-1 and described in Table 3-1.
Figure 3-1. Metering Screen Docking Options
DGC-2020ES Metering
3-2 9469200996
Table 3-1. Descriptions of Call-outs in Error! Reference source not found..

Call-
Symbol Description
Out
Holding the left mouse button down on a metering tab and dragging it to one
of the four arrow boxes will place the metering tab inside the selected window
A
on the location selected. To place the metering tab as a tab inside the
selected window, drop it on the tabs button in the center of the arrow buttons.
Holding the left mouse button down on a metering tab and dragging it to this
arrow box will place it across the top of the screen. Click on the (thumbtack)
B
to dock it on the top bar. To display a screen that is docked, simply use the
mouse to hover the pointer over the tab on the top bar.
arrow box will place it across the side of the screen. Click on the
C
(thumbtack) to dock it on the side bar. To display a screen that is docked,
simply use the mouse to hover the pointer over the tab on the side bar.
arrow box will place it across the bottom of the screen. Click on the
D
(thumbtack) to dock it on the bottom bar. To display a screen that is docked,
simply use the mouse to hover the pointer over the tab on the bottom bar.
Holding the left mouse button down on a metering tab and dragging it
anywhere other than an arrow box will place it as a floating metering screen.
E
This floating screen can later be closed by clicking on the in the upper right
corner. It can also be dragged to one of the arrow boxes used for docking.
BESTspace™
BESTspace provides the ability to manage customized workspaces. Refer to the BESTCOMSPlus
chapter in the Configuration manual for more information on BESTspace.
Engine
The Engine metering screen (Figure 3-2) provides information and metering of engine components.
Parameters that do not apply to your engine are marked as either NS (not sent) or NA (not applicable).
The Engine screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer. If using the front panel, navigate
to Metering > Engine.
Figure 3-2. Metering Explorer, Engine Screen
Metering DGC-2020ES
9469200996 3-3
Battery Charger
This screen provides information and metering for battery chargers 1 and 2. Refer to Figure 3-3.
The Battery Charger screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer. If using the front panel,
navigate to Metering > Battery Charger.
Figure 3-3. Metering Explorer, Battery Charger Screen
Generator
This screen provides metering of generator voltages and currents. See Figure 3-4.
The Generator screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer. If using the front panel,
navigate to Metering > Generator.
DGC-2020ES Metering
3-4 9469200996
Figure 3-4. Metering Explorer, Generator Screen
Power
This screen provides metering of generator power and power factor. See Figure 3-5.
The Power screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer. If using the front panel, navigate to
Metering > Power.
Figure 3-5. Metering Explorer, Power Screen
Run Statistics
This screen provides Cumulative Run Statistics, Session Run Statistics, and Commission Date. See
Figure 3-6.
The Cumulative Run Statistics are tracked from the first time the genset was started. The Session Run
Statistics are tracked from the last time the genset was started until the following shutdown.
The Number of Starts, Hours Until Maintenance, Total kWh, Total Engine Run Time, Loaded Run Time,
and Unloaded Run time can be changed by clicking the Edit Cumulative Run Statistics button. This is
helpful when installing the DGC-2020ES into a pre-existing system. This allows the current statistics of
the genset to be transferred into the DGC-2020ES for uninterrupted tracking.
The Hours Until Maintenance pre-alarm is configured on the Pre-Alarms screen in the Settings Explorer.
The Hours Until Maintenance field displays “OFF” when the Maintenance Interval pre-alarm is disabled.
Clicking Reset Maintenance Interval resets the Hours Until Maintenance to the value set for the
Maintenance Interval pre-alarm on the Pre-Alarms screen in the Settings Explorer.
Metering DGC-2020ES
9469200996 3-5
To change the commission date, click Edit DGC Commission Date. The DGC Commission Date dialog
box appears. Enter the new commission date and click Upload Data to Device. Click Close. Note that the
Commission Date field on the BESTCOMSPlus screen updates after the Close button is clicked.
The Run Statistics screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer. If using the front panel,
navigate to Metering > Run Statistics.
Figure 3-6. Metering Explorer, Run Statistics Screen
Status Indication
This screen indicates status of breakers, modes, switches, and I/O connection status. The status is TRUE
when the corresponding indicator is red. See Figure 3-7.
The Status screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer. If using the front panel, navigate to
Metering > Alarms-Status > Status.
Figure 3-7. Metering Explorer, Status Screen
Inputs
Contact Inputs
This screen indicates the status of contact inputs, contact input alarms, and contact input pre-alarms. The
status is TRUE when the corresponding indicator is red. See Figure 3-8.
DGC-2020ES Metering
3-6 9469200996
The Contact Inputs screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer under the Inputs category.
If using the front panel, navigate to Metering > Alarms-Status > Inputs.
Figure 3-8. Metering Explorer, Inputs, Contact Inputs Screen
Contact Input Timers

This screen displays the current time (count) of the Activation Delays for the contact inputs. See Figure
3-9
Figure 3-9. Metering Explorer, Inputs, Contact Input Timers Screen
Remote Contact Inputs

When an optional CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module) is connected, the status of the remote contact
inputs, configurable remote contact input alarms, and remote contact input pre-alarms are shown on this
screen. The status is TRUE when the corresponding indicator is red. See Figure 3-9.
The Remote Contact Inputs screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer under the Inputs
category. If using the front panel, navigate to Metering > Alarms-Status > Inputs.
Figure 3-10. Metering Explorer, Inputs, Remote Contact Inputs Screen

Metering DGC-2020ES
9469200996 3-7
Logic Control Relays

This screen indicates the status of logic control relays. The status is TRUE when the corresponding
indicator is green. See Figure 3-10.
The Logic Control Relays screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer under the Inputs
category. If using the front panel, navigate to Metering > Alarms-Status > Logic Control Relays.
Figure 3-11. Metering Explorer, Inputs, Logic Control Relays Screen
Outputs
Contact Outputs
This screen indicates the status of contact outputs. The status is TRUE when the corresponding indicator
is green. See Figure 3-11.
The Contact Outputs screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer under the Outputs
category. If using the front panel, navigate to Metering > Alarms-Status > Outputs.
Figure 3-12. Metering Explorer, Outputs, Contact Outputs Screen
Remote Contact Outputs

When an optional CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module) is connected, the status of the remote contact
outputs is shown on this screen. The status is TRUE when the corresponding indicator is green. See
Figure 3-12.
The Remote Contact Outputs screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer under the
Outputs category. If using the front panel, navigate to Metering > Alarms-Status > Outputs.
DGC-2020ES Metering
3-8 9469200996
Figure 3-13. Metering Explorer, Outputs, Remote Contact Outputs Screen
This screen indicates the status of configurable elements. It also indicates alarms and pre-alarms of
configurable elements. The status is TRUE when the corresponding indicator is green. See Figure 3-13.
The Configurable Elements screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer under the Outputs
category. If using the front panel, navigate to Metering > Alarms-Status > Configurable Elements.
Metering DGC-2020ES
9469200996 3-9
Figure 3-14. Metering Explorer, Outputs, Configurable Elements Screen
Control
Controls for stopping/starting the engine, opening/closing breakers, and opening/closing switches are
accessed using BESTCOMSPlus through the Metering Explorer, Control screen. This set of controls is
especially useful when commissioning the DGC-2020ES. The PC or laptop running BESTCOMSPlus
must be connected to the DGC-2020ES via the USB port (see the Communication chapter in the
Configuration manual for details). When running BESTCOMSPlus in Live mode, these buttons interact
with the DGC-2020ES in real time. Otherwise, you will be prompted before the settings are sent.
Using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus, open the Control branch. Refer to Figure 3-14.
Emergency Stop
The user has control to stop the generator in case of emergency by clicking on the Emergency Stop
button.
Engine Control
The engine can be started and stopped by clicking on the Start and Stop buttons. This function requires a
connection to a properly configured ECU via J1939 (CANBus).
Run, Auto, Off

The operating mode can be set to Run, Auto, or Off.
DGC-2020ES Metering
3-10 9469200996
Generator and Mains Breakers

There are controls for opening and closing the generator breaker and mains breaker. The breaker is open
when the corresponding indicator is green and closed when red. This function requires that the Generator
and Mains breakers be configured.
Switches 1 through 4
Each of these switches can be opened or closed by clicking on the Open or Close buttons. The switch is
closed when the corresponding indicator is red. These buttons control the virtual inputs found in
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic. The number of the switch corresponds to the number of the virtual
input it controls. See the BESTlogicPlus chapter in the Configuration manual for more information.
Figure 3-15. Metering Explorer, Control Screen
Mains Fail Transfer Status

The Mains Fail Transfer Status screen (Figure 3-15) displays the Mains Fail Transfer State and any
timers relevant to the mains fail transfer process. These parameters are listed below.
Mains Fail Transfer State: The different mains fail transfer states are described below.
Power From Mains: Power is being supplied to the load from the mains bus.
Transfer Timer Active: Transfer Delay timer is actively counting.
Transferring to Gens: Load is being transferred to the generator bus.
Power From Gens: Power is being supplied to the load from the generator bus.
Return Timer Active: Return Delay timer is actively counting.
Transferring to Mains: Load is being transferred to the mains bus.
Disabled: DGC-2020ES is in the OFF or RUN operating mode or in the alarm state.
Metering DGC-2020ES
9469200996 3-11
Remaining Transfer Delay: Displays the current timer value in seconds.

Remaining Return Delay: Displays the current timer value in seconds.
Figure 3-16. Metering, Mains Fail Transfer Status
Diagnostics
Sender Inputs
The Sender Inputs screen (Figure 3-16) displays the resistance level of the enabled senders.
Figure 3-17. Metering, Diagnostics, Sender Inputs
Auto Export Metering

This function automatically exports metering data over a user-defined period when a DGC-2020ES
connection is active. To display the Auto Export Metering screen, click the Tools pull-down menu from the
upper menu bar and click Auto Export Metering. Specify the Number of Exports and the Interval between
each export. Enter a filename for the metering data and a folder in which to save. The file is saved in
.CSV (comma separated values) format. The first export is performed immediately after clicking the Start
button. Click the Filter button to select specific metering screens.
DGC-2020ES Metering
3-12 9469200996
Metering DGC-2020ES
9469200996 4-1
4 • Alarms
The DGC-2020ES monitors ECU data, generator protection functions, and engine senders. An alarm or
pre-alarm is annunciated when the monitored parameter exceeds its threshold settings.
When an alarm condition exists, the engine is stopped by opening the Fuel output contact. An existing
pre-alarm condition is annunciated only.
When alarms are active, the front panel Overview screen is replaced by the Active Alarms screen. When
only pre-alarms are active, the front panel Overview screen is alternated with the Active Pre-Alarms
screen in one-second intervals. Active alarms and pre-alarms can be viewed through BESTCOMSPlus®.
The front panel Alarm LED is illuminated when alarms are active. When pre-alarms are active, the Alarm
LED flashes in one-second intervals.
If programmed and enabled, the horn output is closed when alarms are active. When pre-alarms are
active, the horn output toggles in one-second intervals.
Active alarms are also indicated on the optional remote display panel in the form of LEDs and an audible
horn. Red alarm LEDs light and the horn sounds when the corresponding alarm setting is exceeded. If an
active alarm condition is not annunciated by the remote display panel, the Switch Not In Auto LED lights
and the horn sounds.
Alarm configuration is described in the Configuration manual.
A detailed list of alarms is provided in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. Available Alarms
Name Description
Alarms
AUTO RESTART FAIL Automatic Restart Failure
BATT CHRG FAIL Battery Charger Fail
DEF SEVERE INDUCMT DEF Severe Inducement
DIAG TRBL CODE Diagnostic Trouble Code
ECU SHUTDOWN ECU Shutdown
EMERGENCY STOP Emergency Shutdown
EXHAUST SYSTEM ERR Exhaust System Error
FUEL LEAK DETECT Fuel Leak Detected
GEN TRANSFER FL Transfer Fail
GLBL ALARM Global Alarm
GLBL SNDR FAIL Global Sender Fail
HI COOLANT TMP High Coolant Temp
LOST ECU COMM Loss of ECU Communication
LOW COOL LEVEL Low Coolant Level
LOW FUEL LEVEL Low Fuel Level
LOW OIL PRES Low Oil Pressure
MAINS FL TR FAILED Mains Fail Transfer Failed
MTU COMBINED RED MTU Combined Red
OVERCRANK Overcrank
OVERSPEED Overspeed
UNEXPECTED SHUTDN Unexpected Shutdown
DGC-2020ES Alarms
4-2 9469200996
Name Description
Contact Expansion Module
CEM COMM FAIL CEM Communication Failure
CEM HW MISMATCH CEM Hardware Mismatch
MULTIPLE CEM Duplicate CEMs
Pre-alarms
BATT CHRG FAIL Battery Charger Fail
BATT OVERVOLT Battery Overvoltage
BUS REV ROT Reverse Bus Rotation
CEM COMM FAIL CEM Communication Failure
CHECKSUM FAIL Checksum Failure
DEF CONSUMPT ERROR DEF Consumption Error
DEF FLUID LOW DEF Fluid Low
DEF INDUCEMENT DEF Inducement
DEF INDUCMT O-RIDE DEF Inducement Override
DEF LOW SEVERE DEF Low Severe
DEF QUALITY POOR DEF Quality Poor
DEF PRESVR INDUCMT DEF Pre-Severe Inducement
DEF SEVERE INDUCMT DEF Severe Inducement
DEF TAMPERING DEF Tampering
DEF WARNING DEF Warning
DEF WARNING LVL2 DEF Warning Level 2
DIAG TRBL CODE Active DTC
DPF REGEN INHBTD DPF Regenerate Disabled
DPF REGEN REQD DPF Regenerate Required
DPF SOOT HIGH DPF Soot Level High
DPF SOOT LVL EXT HI DPF Soot Level Severely High
DPF SOOT LVL MOD HI DPF Soot Level Moderately High
LOW COOL LEVEL DTC DTC Low Coolant Level
ENG KW OVRLD-1 Engine kW Overload 1
ESCAPE MODE Escape Mode
EXHAUST SYSTEM ERR Exhaust System Error
FUEL 1 LEAK Fuel Filter 1 Leak
FUEL 2 LEAK Fuel Filter 2 Leak
FUEL LEAK DETECT Fuel Leak Detect
GEN REV ROT Reverse Generator Rotation
GN BRK CL FL Generator Breaker Close Failure
GN BRK OP FL Generator Breaker Open Failure
Alarms DGC-2020ES
9469200996 4-3
Name Description
HEATING FOR REGEN Heating for Regeneration
HI COOLANT TMP High Coolant Temp
HIGH EXHAUST TEMP High Exhaust Temperature
HIGH FUEL LEVEL High Fuel Level
LOST ECU COMM Loss of ECU Communication
LOW BATT VOLT Low Battery Voltage
LOW COOL LEVEL Low Coolant Level
LOW COOL TMP Low Coolant Temp
LOW FUEL LEVEL Low Fuel Level
LOW OIL PRES Low Oil Pressure
MN BKR CL FL Mains Breaker Close Fail
MN BRK OP FL Mains Breaker Open Fail
MF RETURN FL Mains Fail Return Fail
MAINT INTERVAL Maintenance Due
MPU FAIL MPU Failure
MTU FAULT CODES MTU Fault Code Active
MULTIPLE CEM Duplicate CEM
REGEN ACTIVE Regenerate Active
SERFLASH RD FAIL Serial Flash Read Failure
SVCTOOL FRC REGEN Service Tool Forced Regenerate
SWITCH FRC REGEN Switch Forced Regenerate
TORQUE LIMIT Torque Limit
TRQ LIMIT SEVERE Torque Limit Severe
WEAK BATTERY Weak Battery Voltage
Sender Fail
COOLANT LEVEL Coolant Level Sender Fail (from ECU)
COOL SNDR FAIL Coolant Temp Sender Fail
FUEL LEVEL SNDR Fuel Level Sender Fail
LOSS OF VOLT Voltage Sensing Fail
OIL SNDR FAIL Oil Pressure Sender Fail
SPD SNDR FAIL Speed Sender Fail
Generator Protection
27 UNDVOLT TRP Undervoltage (27)
47 PHS IMBAL TRP Phase Imbalance (47)
50 OVRCURR TRP Overcurrent (50)
59 OVRVOLT TRP Overvoltage (59)
81O OVRFREQ TRP Frequency (81O)
81U UNDFREQ TRP Frequency (81U)
DGC-2020ES Alarms
4-4 9469200996
Retrieving Alarm Information

Alarms can be viewed on the front panel display and through BESTCOMSPlus.
Front Panel Display

The lists of active alarms and pre-alarms can be viewed by navigating to Metering > Alarms-Status >
Active Alarms or Active Pre-alarms. These lists are scrollable by using the Up and Down pushbuttons.
BESTCOMSPlus®
The status of each alarm and pre-alarm is displayed on the Alarms screen (Figure 4-1). This screen is
found in the Metering Explorer. Alarms with a red indicator are active.
Figure 4-1. Metering Explorer, Alarms Screen
Resetting Alarms and Pre-Alarms

Most pre-alarms automatically reset when the alarm condition no longer exists. Pre-alarms that do not
automatically reset are listed below:
• Weak Battery
• Breaker Fail to Open
• Breaker Fail to Close
These pre-alarms are reset by navigating to the Overview screen on the front panel display and holding
the Back pushbutton for two seconds.
Alarms do not automatically reset. Manually reset alarms by pressing the Off pushbutton.
Alarms DGC-2020ES
9469200996 4-5
Horn
The audible horn can be silenced by simultaneously pressing the Back and Edit pushbuttons. This does
not reset the alarm or pre-alarm causing the horn to annunciate.
Maintenance Interval
To reset the maintenance interval pre-alarm through the front panel, navigate to the Settings > System
Params > System Settings > Maint Reset screen. Operator, Settings, or OEM access level is required to
reset the maintenance interval pre-alarm. If the maintenance interval pre-alarm is not enabled, the Maint
Reset parameter is not visible on the front panel.
To reset the maintenance interval pre-alarm by using BESTCOMSPlus, use the Metering Explorer to
open the Run Statistics screen and click on the Reset Maintenance Interval button.
To reset the maintenance interval pre-alarm from the front panel, navigate to the Overview screen and
hold the Back pushbutton for 12 seconds.
Checksum Failure
The checksum failure pre-alarm can be cleared by holding the Back pushbutton for two seconds while
displaying the Overview screen. However, the pre-alarm will reoccur the next time the checksum is
verified if the data is still corrupted. Some checksum calculations are done only on power-up, so this may
not occur until the next time operating power is cycled.
If there are consistent checksum failure pre-alarms, attempt the following actions to correct the problem:
1. Load default settings by holding the Up and Down pushbuttons on the front panel while cycling
power. After loading defaults, upload the settings file through BESTCOMSPlus if necessary.
Caution
Loading default settings will erase all custom settings. All reports and
events will be cleared. It is recommended that all settings are
downloaded and saved through BESTCOMSPlus before attempting to
load defaults. Once defaults are loaded, the saved settings can then
be uploaded.
2. If the problem persists, reload the firmware file through BESTCOMSPlus. See the
BESTCOMSPlus chapter in the Configuration manual for more information.
3. Contact Basler Electric Technical Support.
4. The checksum failure pre-alarm can be disabled. This disables only the annunciation of the pre-
alarm and does not correct any error conditions.
DGC-2020ES Alarms
4-6 9469200996
Alarms DGC-2020ES
9469200996 5-1
5 • MTU Fault Codes

A DGC-2020ES connected to a genset equipped with an MTU engine ECU tracks and displays the active
fault codes issued by the MTU engine ECU. Active MTU fault codes can be viewed through
BESTCOMSPlus® by using the Metering Explorer to expand the MTU tree or through the front panel
display by navigating to METERING > ALARMS-STATUS > MTU FAULT CODES.
Each fault code is displayed with a fault description and the fault number. If the DGC-2020ES does not
have descriptive information about a fault number that was received, the fault description will display
as “NO TEXT AVAILABLE”. Fault codes displayed by the DGC-2020ES are listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1. MTU Fault Codes
Fault
Code String Description
Number
3 HI T FUEL Fuel temperature too high (limit 1).
4 SS T FUEL Fuel temperature too high (limit 2).
5 HI T CHRG AIR Charge air temperature too high (limit 1).
6 SS T CHRG AIR Air temperature too high (limit 2).
9 HI T INTERCOOLER Coolant temperature of InterCooler too high (limit 1).
10 SS T INTERCOOLER Coolant temperature of InterCooler too high (limit 2)
15 LO P LUBE OIL Pressure of lube oil too low (limit 1).
16 SS P LUBE OIL Pressure of lube oil too low (limit 2).
19 HI T EXHAUST A Exhaust gas temperature (A-side) too high (limit 1).
20 SS T EXHAUST A Exhaust gas temperature (A-side) too high (limit 2).
21 HIT T EXHAUST B Exhaust gas temperature (B-side) too high (limit 1).
22 SS T EXHAUST B Exhaust gas temperature (B-side) too high (limit 2).
23 LO COOLANT LEVEL Coolant level too low (limit 1).
24 SS COOLANT LEVEL Coolant level too low (limit 2).
25 HI P DIFF LUBE OIL Differential pressure of oil filter too high (limit 1).
26 SS P DIFF LUBE OIL Differential pressure of oil filter too high (limit 2).
27 HI LEVEL LEAKAGE FUEL Level of leakage fuel too high (limit 1).
29 HI ETC IDLE SPD TOO HI Idle speed of one of the switchable chargers too high.
30 SS ENGINE OVERSPEED Engine overspeed (limit 2).
31 HI ETC1 OVERSPEED Speed of basic charger too high (limit 1).
32 SS ETC1 OVERSPEED Speed of basic charger too high (limit 2).
33 L1 P FUELFLT DIF Differential pressure of fuel filter too high (limit 1).
36 HI ETC2 OVERSPEED Speed of 1st switchable charger too high (limit 1).
37 SS ETC2 OVERSPEED Speed of 1st switchable charger too high (limit 2).
38 AL ETC SPEED DEVIATION Speed deviation between basic turbo charger and one of the switchable
chargers.
39 AL ETC2 CUTIN FAIL Switching of charger ETC2 failed.
44 LO LEVEL INTRCLR Coolant level of intercooler too low (limit 1).
45 FAULT L2 LEVEL INTRCLR Coolant level of intercooler too low (limit 2).
51 HI T LUBE OIL Lube oil temperature too high (limit 1).
52 SS T LUBE OIL Lube oil temperature too high (limit 2).
53 HI T INTAKE AIR Air intake temperature high (Limit 1).
54 HIHI T INTAKE AIR Air intake temperature high (Limit 2).
57 LO P COOLANT Coolant pressure too low (limit 1).
58 SS P COOLANT Coolant pressure too low (limit 2).
59 SS T COOLANT L3 Coolant temperature too high/too low (limit 3).
DGC-2020ES MTU Fault Codes

5-2 9469200996
Fault
Number
60 SS T COOLANT L4 Coolant temperature too high/too low (limit 4).
61 HI P ADCRANK CS L1 Crankcase pressure too high (Limit 1). Abnormal continuous rise.
62 HI P ADCRANK CS L2 Crankcase pressure too high (Limit 2). Abnormal continuous rise.
63 HI P CRANKCASE Crankcase pressure too high (limit 1).Abrupt rise.
64 SS P CRANK CASE Crankcase pressure too high (limit 2). Abrupt rise.
65 LO P FUEL Fuel supply pressure too low (limit 1).
66 SS P FUEL Fuel supply pressure too low (limit 2).
67 HI T COOLANT Coolant temperature too high (limit 1).
68 SS T COOLANT Coolant temperature too high (limit 2).
69 L1 T EXTERN 1 Limit 1, out of range.
73 L1 P EXTERN 1 Limit 1, out of range.
77 LIM EXT CLNT LEV Binary signal 1 Plant active.
78 LIM INTERCLR LEV Binary signal 2 Plant active.
79 L BIN EXTERN 3 Binary signal 3 Plant active.
80 L BIN EXTERN 4 Binary signal 4 Plant active.
81 AL RAIL LEAKAGE Rail pressure gradient too low for Start or too high for Stop.
82 HI P FUEL COMON RAIL Rail pressure > setpoint value.
83 LO P FUEL COMMON RAIL Rail pressure < setpoint value.
85 HI T UMBLASSEN ‘Umblasen’ temperature too high (limit 1).
86 SS T UMBLASSEN ‘Umblasen’ temperature too high (limit 2).
89 SS SPEED TOO LOW Engine is being stalled. The engine speed of the normally operating engine
dropped below the limit from parameter 2.2500.027 Limit Engine Speed Low
without any stop request. For safety reason the engine is stopped when this
event occurs.
90 SS IDLE SPEED LOW Idle speed not reached.
91 SS RELEASE SPEED LO Acceleration speed not reached.
92 SS STARTER SPEED LO Starter speed not reached.
93 SS PREHT TMP Preheat temperature too low (limit 2).
94 LO PREHT TMP Preheat temperature too low (limit 1).
95 AL PRELUBE FAULT Prelubrication fault.
99 DUMMY FAULT Dummy fault - this is not a real fault, but is used on some ECUs to test the fault
reporting mechanism.
100 EDM NOT VALID Checksum fault EDM.
101 IDM NOT VALID Checksum fault IDM.
102 INVLD FUEL CNS 1 Fuel consumption counter detect.
103 INVLD FUEL CNS 2 Consumption monitoring 2 not valid.
104 ENG HRS INVALID 1 Engine Hours Counter defect.
105 ENG HRS INVALID 2 Checksum fault.
106 ERR REC1 INVALID Checksum fault.
107 ERR REC2 INVALID Checksum fault.
118 LO ECU SUPPLY VOLTS Power supply voltage too low (limit 1).
119 LOLO ECU SUPPLY VOLTS Power supply voltage too low (limit 2).
MTU Fault Codes DGC-2020ES

9469200996 5-3
Fault
Number
120 HI ECU SUPPLY VOLTS Power supply voltage too high (limit 1).
121 HIHI ECU SUPPLY VOLTS Power supply voltage too high (limit 2).
122 HI T ECU Temperature of electronic too high (limit 1).
134 15v POSECU DEFCT Internal electronic fault.
136 15V NEGECU DEFCT Internal electronic fault.
137 L1 5V BUFFR TEST Pressure-sensor fault, pressure-sensor wiring, or internal electronic fault.
138 SENSOR PWR DEFCT Pressure-sensor fault, pressure-sensor wiring, or internal electronic fault.
139 L1 TE BUFFR TEST Internal electronic fault.
140 TE BUF ECU DEFCT Internal electronic fault.
141 AL POWER TOO HIGH AL power too high.
142 MCR EXCEEDED 1 HR STR AL MCR exceeded 1 hour.
143 BANK1 ECU DEFECT Internal electronic fault.
144 BANK2 ECU DEFECT Internal electronic fault.
145 15V GOODECU DFCT Internal electronic fault.
147 AD TST1ECU DEFCT Internal electronic fault.
170 MI MODULE FAIL Module in maintenance indicator defect.
171 MI NOT ACTIVE WI not active anymore.
172 TBO EXPIRED TBO expired.
173 MODL WRITE LIMIT EEPROM write limit reached.
176 AL LIFE DATA NA No (fitting) LifeData-Backup-System is available within a delay time after ECU
Reset.
177 AL LIFE DATA INCPLT If the ADEC has to restore the LifeData from the backup-system and at least one
checksum is wrong after the upload or the upload is incomplete, then this failure
is set.
180 AL CAN1 NODE LOST Connection to a node on CAN 1 lost.
181 AL CAN2 NODE LOST Connection to a node on CAN 2 lost.
182 AL CAN WRONG PARAMS Incorrect CAN parameter values have been entered.
183 AL CAN NO PU DATA A CAN mode is selected which the communication is initialized aided of the PU
data module. However, required PU data module is not present or is not valid.
184 AL CAN PUDATA ERR During attempt to copy a received PU data module to Flash module, a program
error occurred.
185 CAN LESS MAILBXS CAN less mailboxes.
186 AL CAN1 BUS OFF CAN controller 1 is in “Bus Off” state.
187 AL CAN1 ERR PASSV CAN controller 1 has signaled a warning.
188 AL CAN2 BUS OFF CAN controller 2 is in “Bus Off” state.
189 AL CAN2 ERROR PASSV CAN controller 2 has signaled a warning.
190 AL EMU PARAM NO EMU parameters are not supported.
SUPPORT
198 AL COMB ALM YEL Combined Yellow Alarm - a yellow alarm is a warning and does generally not
result in engine shutdown.
201 SD T COOLANT Coolant temperature-sensor defect.
202 SD T FUEL Fuel temperature-sensor defect.
203 SD T CHARGE AIR Charge air temperature-sensor defect.
205 SD T CLNT INTERC Intercooler coolant temperature-sensor defect.
206 SD T EXHAUST A Exhaust gas temperature-sensor on A-side defect.
207 SD T EXHAUST B Exhaust gas temperature-sensor on B-side defect.
208 SD P CHARGE AIR Charge air pressure-sensor defect.

5-4 9469200996
Fault
Number
211 SD P LUBE OIL Lube oil pressure-sensor defect.
212 SD P COOLANT Coolant pressure-sensor defect.
213 SD P COOLANT Intercooler coolant pressure-sensor defect.
INTRCOOLR
214 SD P CRANKCASE Crankcase pressure-sensor defect.
215 SD P HD Rail pressure-sensor defect.
216 SD T LUBE OIL Lube oil temperature-sensor defect.
219 SD T INTAKE AIR Intake air temperature-sensor defect.
220 SD COOLANT LEVEL Sensor for coolant level defect.
221 SD P DIFF LUBE OIL Sensor for differential pressure of lube oil defect.
222 SL LVL LKG FUEL Sensor for leakage level of fuel defect.
223 SD LVL INTERCLR Sensor for coolant level of intercooler defect.
227 SD PRE FILT P LUBE OIL Pressure sensor for lube oil before filter defect.
228 SD P FL PRE FILTR Sensor defect on the fuel pre-filter pressure sensor.
229 AL SD CAM STOP Sensor of Camshaft defect and sensor of crankshaft defect before.
230 SD CRANKSHFT SPD Sensor defect on crankshaft.
231 SD CAMSHAFT SPD Sensor defect on camshaft.
232 SD CHARGER1 SPEED Speed-sensor of basic charger defect.
233 SD CHARGER2 SPEED Speed-sensor of switching charger defect.
239 SD P DIFF FUEL Sensor defect in the fuel filter differential pressure sensor.
240 SD P FUEL Fuel pressure-sensor defect.
241 SD T UMBLASSEN Temperature-sensor of recirculated charge air defect.
242 SD T COOLANT R Redundant coolant temperature-sensor defect.
244 SD P LUBE OIL R Redundant pressure sensor for lube oil defect.
245 SD POWER SUPPLY Internal ECU error.
246 SD T ELECTRONIC Internal ECU fault.
249 SD CAN STOP Missing data CAN.
250 SD CAN SPD DEMND Missing data CAN.
251 SD CAN UP DOWN Missing data CAN.
252 SD CAN NOTCH POS Missing data CAN.
253 SD CAN OVERRIDE Missing data CAN.
254 SD CAN TST OVRSP Missing data CAN.
255 SD CAN ENGAGE SIG Missing data CAN.
256 SD CAN CYL CUTOUT Missing data CAN.
257 SD CAN LOCAL Missing data CAN.
258 SD CAN RCS ENGAGE Missing data CAN.
259 SD CAN RCS CYL CT Missing data CAN.
260 SD 15V POS SPPLY Internal ECU fault.
261 15V POS SPPLY Internal ECU fault.
262 SD 5V BUFFR TEST Internal ECU fault.
263 SD TE BUFFR TEST Internal ECU fault.
264 SD BANK 1 TEST Internal ECU fault.
265 SD BANK 2 TEST Internal ECU fault.
266 SD SPD DEMAND AN Analog speed demand defect.
267 SD SPDMTEST BNCH Short circuit, cable breakage.
268 SD SPINUT Analog spinning value defect.
269 SD LOAD ANLG FLT Filtered analog load pulse signal not available.

9469200996 5-5
Fault
Number
270 SD FREQUENCY INPUT Frequency input defect.
271 SD T EXTERN 1 Missing data CAN.
272 SD T EXTERN 2 Missing data CAN.
273 SD P EXTERN 1 Missing data CAN.
274 SD P EXTERN 2 Missing data CAN.
275 SD EXT CLNT LVL Missing data CAN.
276 SD INTERCLER LVL Missing data CAN.
277 SD BIN EXT3 Missing data CAN.
278 SD BIN EXT4 Missing data CAN.
279 SD CANRES TRIPFL Missing data CAN.
280 SD CAN ALRM RST Missing data CAN.
281 SD ADTEST1 SPPLY Internal ECU fault.
282 SD ADTEST 2 SPPLY Internal ECU fault.
283 SD ADTEST3 SPPLY Internal ECU fault.
284 SD CAN LAMP TEST Missing data CAN.
285 SD CAN IDLE RQ SR Missing data CAN.
286 SD CAN IDLE REQ Missing data CAN.
287 SD CAN IDLE REQ Missing data CAN.
288 SD CAN TRBOSW LCK Missing data CAN.
301 TIMING CYLNDR A1 Error in timing of injector cylinder A1: timing value too low/high.
311 TIMING CYLNDR B1 Error in timing of injector cylinder B1: timing value too low/high.
321 WIRING CYLNDR A1 Short circuit in injector cable of cylinder A1.

5-6 9469200996
Fault
Number
331 WIRING CYLNDR B1 Short circuit in injector cable of cylinder B1.
341 OPN LD CYLNDR A1 Open load in injector cable of cylinder A1.
351 OPN LD CYLNDR B1 Open load in injector cable of cylinder B1.
361 AL POWER STAGE LOW Internal error of electronic.
362 AL POWER STAGE HIGH Internal error of electronic.
363 AL STOP POWER STAGE Internal error of electronic.
364 AL STOP POWER STAGE 2 Internal error of electronic.
365 AL MV WIRING GND Cable line error.
371 AL WIRING TO 1 Short circuit or open load on transistor output 1 (TO 1).
381 AL WIRING TOP 1 Short circuit or open load on transistor output plant 1 (TOP 1).

9469200996 5-7
Fault
Number
390 AL MCR EXCEEDED DBR/MCR Function: MCR (Maximum Continuous Rating) in exceeded.
392 HI T COOLNT R Redundant coolant temperature too high (limit 1).
393 SS T COOLNT R Redundant coolant temperature too high (limit 2).
394 LO P LUBE OIL R Redundant pressure of lube oil too low (limit 1).
395 SS P LUBE OIL R Redundant pressure of lube oil too low (limit 2).
396 TD T COOLANT Maximum deviation of T-Coolant sensors.
397 TD P LUBE OIL Maximum deviation of P-Oil sensors.
399 AL INTERFACE ECU Interface ECU.
400 AL OPN LD DIGIN 1 Open load on digital input 1.
408 AL OPN LD E STOP Open load on input for emergency stop.
410 LO U PDU Power driver voltage (injectors) too low (limit 1).
411 LOLO U PDU Power driver voltage (injectors) too low (limit 2).
412 HI U PDU Power driver voltage (injectors) too high (limit 1).
413 HIHI U PDU Power driver voltage (injectors) too high (limit 2).
414 HI L WATER FUEL PREFILT Water level of fuel prefilter too high (limit 1).
415 LO P COOLANT Coolant pressure of InterCooler too low (limit 1).
INTRCOOLR
416 SS P COOLANT Coolant pressure of InterCooler too low (limit 2).
INTRCOOLR
417 SD L WATER FUEL PREFILT Water level-sensor of fuel prefilter defect.
418 SD INTAKE AIR B Sensor defect of the Intake Air B temperature sensor.
419 SD PRE_ENG T COOL Sensor defect in the Coolant Temperature Sensor before engine coolant intake.
420 AL L1 AUX 1 Input of Aux 1 injured limit 1.
421 AL L2 AUX 1 Input of Aux 1 injured limit 2.
422 SD T CHRG AIR B Sensor defect in the Charge Air B Temperature Sensor.
423 LO P COOLANT DIFF Low Coolant Differential Pressure.
424 AL L1 AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Alarm Level 1 Alarm.
425 AL L2 AUX 2 Auxiliary 2 Alarm Level 2 Alarm.
426 SD AIR MASS A Sensor defect in Air Mass Sensor A.
427 SD AIR MASS B Sensor defect in Air Mass Sensor B.
428 AL L1 T AUX 1 Temperature input of Aux 1 injured limit 1.
429 HI P COOLANT High Coolant Pressure.
430 LO PRE ENG P COOLNT Low Pre-Engine Coolant Pressure (Limit 1).
431 SS PRE ENG P COOLNT Low Pre-Engine Coolant Pressure (Limit 2).
432 AL L1 T AUX2 Auxiliary Temperature 2 Level 1 Alarm.
433 AL L2 T AUX2 Auxiliary Temperature 2 Level 2 Alarm.
434 HI PRE ENG T COOLNT High Pre-Engine Coolant Temperature (Limit 1).
435 SS PRE ENG T COOLNT High Pre-Engine Coolant Temperature (Limit 2).
436 AL L1 P AUX 2 Auxiliary Pressure 2 Level 1 Alarm.
437 AL L2 P AUX 2 Auxiliary Pressure 2 Level 2 Alarm.

5-8 9469200996
Fault
Number
438 LO P FUEL RAIL 2 STR Low pressure on fuel rail 2.
439 HI P FUEL RAIL 2 STR Hi pressure on fuel rail 2.
440 AL L1 P AUX 1 Pressure input of Aux 1 injured limit 1.
441 AL RAIL 2 LEAKAGE STR Alarm fuel rail 2 leak detected.
442 AL L2 P AUX 1 Pressure input of Aux 1 injured limit 2.
443 HI P CHG MIX DIFF High Charge Mix Differential Pressure.
444 SD U PDU Sensor defect of Injector Power driver unit.
445 SD P AMBIENT AIR Ambient air pressure-sensor defect.
446 SD P HD2 Sensor Defect In HD 2 Pressure Sensor.
447 HIHI P CHG MIX DIFF Charge Mixture Differential Pressure High (Limit 2).
448 HI P CHARGE AIR Pressure of charge air too high (limit 1).
449 SS P CHARGE AIR Pressure of charge air too high (limit 2).
450 SD IDLE END TRQ IN Input of Idle/End-Torque defect
451 HI T CHARGE MIX High Charge Mixture Temperature (Limit 1).
452 HI HI T CHARGE MIX High Charge Mixture Temperature (Limit 2).
453 LO T CHARGE MIX Low Charge Mixture Temperature.
454 SS PWR RED ACT Power Reduction is activated.
455 AL L1 AUX1 PLANT Input of Aux 1 (plant) injured limit 1.
456 AL L2 AUX1 PLANT Input of Aux 1 (plant) injured limit 2.
457 LO T INTAKE AIR Low Intake Air Temperature (Limit 1).
458 LO LO T INTAKE AIR Low Intake Air Temperature (Limit 2).
459 SD P CLNT B ENG Sensor Defect In the Coolant Before Engine Pressure Sensor.
460 HI T EXHAUST EMU Exhaust gas temperature of EMU too high (limit 1).
461 LO T EXHAUST EMU Exhaust gas temperature of EMU too low (limit 1).
462 HI T COOLANT EMU Coolant temperature of EMU injured limit 1.
463 SD AUX 2 Sensor defect on Aux 2.
464 SD P AUX 1 Analog input for pressure Aux 1 defect.
465 SD P AUX 2 Sensor Defect in the Auxiliary 2 Pressure Sensor.
466 SD T AUX 2 Sensor Defect in the Auxiliary 2 Temperature Sensor.
467 AL L2 T AUX 1 Temperature input of Aux 1 injured limit 2.
468 SD T AUX 1 Analog input for Temperature Aux 1 defect.
469 SD AUX 1 Analog input for Aux 1 defect.
470 SD T ECU ECU temperature-sensor defect.
471 SD COIL CURRENT Coil Current sensor defect.
472 AL STOP SD Engine stop, because critical channel has sensor defect.
473 AL WIRING PWM CM2 Open load or short circuit on channel PWM CM2.
474 AL WIRING FREQ OUT Open load or short circuit on frequency output (FO) channel.
475 AL CR TRIG ENG ST Released in case of an engine stop in order to trigger the crash recorder.
476 AL CRASH REC ERR Initial error of crash recorder.
477 WRT MISTK BIN VAL Binary Data Write Error.
478 AL COMB ALM YEL Combined Alarm YELLOW (Plant).
479 AL COMB ALM RED Combined Alarm RED (Plant).
480 AL EXT ENG PROT External Engine Protection function active.
481 SD COIL CURRENT 2 Sensor Defect In Coil Current 2 Sensor.
482 SD T EXHAUST C Sensor Defect In Exhaust System C Temperature Sensor.
483 SD T EXHAUST D Sensor Defect In Exhaust System D Temperature Sensor.
484 HI T EXHAUST C High Exhaust C Temperature (Limit 1).

9469200996 5-9
Fault
Number
485 SS T EXHAUST C High Exhaust C Temperature (Limit 2).
486 HI T EXHAUST D High Exhaust D Temperature.
487 SS T EXHAUST D Shutdown due to High Exhaust D Temperature.
488 HI ETC 3 OVERSPD High Turbo Charger ETC 3 Overspeed (Limit 1).
489 SS ETC 3 OVERSPD High Turbo Charger ETC 3 Overspeed (Limit 2).
490 HI ETC 4 OVERSPD High Turbo Charger ETC 4 Overspeed (Limit 1).
491 SS ETC 4 OVERSPD High Turbo Charger ETC 4 Overspeed (Limit 2).
492 HI ETC 4 CUTIN FAIL High Turbo Charger ETC 4 Cut In Failure (Limit 1).
493 HI ETC 3 CUTIN FAIL High Turbo Charger ETC 3 Cut In Failure (Limit 2).
494 SD THROTL A FDBK Sensor Defect In Throttle A Feedback Sensor.
495 SD THROTL B FDBK Sensor Defect In Throttle B Feedback Sensor.
496 SD P CHARGE MIX A Sensor Defect In Charge Mix A Pressure Sensor.
497 SD P CHARGE MIX B Sensor Defect In Charge Mix B Pressure Sensor.
498 SD P CHRG MIX DIFF Sensor Defect In Charge Mix Differential Pressure Sensor.
499 SD P CHARGE MIX Sensor Defect In Charge Mix Pressure Sensor.
500 AL WIRING POM STARTER A wiring fault has been detected in the connection of starter 1 of POM.
1
501 AL WIRING POM STARTER A wiring fault has been detected in the connection of starter 2 of POM.
2
502 AL OPEN LD POM An open load on POM’s alternator output has been detected.
ALTRNATR
503 AL BATT NOT CHARGING Battery is not being charged by alternator.
504 AL CAN POM NODE LOST POM is missing on CAN bus.
505 AL NEW POM FOUND New POM found.
506 AL LOW STARTER VOLTS Battery voltage is too low for starting.
507 AL POM ERROR A general POM error has been detected.
508 AL WRONG POM ID POM sends a different identification number (ID) than expected.
509 AL CHECK POM FUSE Check POM fuse.
510 AL OVERRIDE APPLIED Override applied.
511 HIHI P CHG MIX A Hi Charge Air Mix A Pressure (Limit 2).
512 HIHI P CHG MIX B Hi Charge Air Mix B Pressure (Limit 2).
513 SD P COOLNT DIFF Sensor Defect In Coolant Differential Pressure Sensor.
514 WRITE ERR FLASH Write Error Occurred when writing data to Flash Memory.
515 STARTER NOT ENGAGED Starter of POM could not be engaged.
516 OILNIVEAU CAL ERR Remote Oil Level Watchman Calibration Error.
517 SD CHG MX PR THRT Sensor Defect In Charge Pre-Throttle Mix Pressure Sensor.
518 SD THROT BYPASS FDBK Sensor Defect In Throttle Feedback Bypass Sensor.
519 OIL LVL CAL ERROR Oil Level Calibration Error.
520 SD P IN AIR AFT FLT A Sensor Defect In Intake Air After Filter A Pressure Sensor.
521 SD P OIL MID VAL Lube Oil Pressure Middle Value (Limit 2).
522 SD P IN AIR AFT FLT B Sensor Defect In Intake Air After Filter B Pressure Sensor.
523 SD T COOL RED MIDVL Coolant Temperature Mid value (Limit 2).
524 SS ENG OVRSPD MIDVL Engine Speed Middle Value too high (Limit 2).
525 SD P LUBE OIL R2 Sensor Defect In Lube Oil Pressure (R2) Sensor.
526 SD T COOL OIL R2 Sensor Defect In Oil Coolant Temperature (R2) Sensor.
527 TD ENG SPD SNS DEV Engine Speed Sensor Deviation.
528 SD ENG SPD SENSR 3 Sensor Defect in Engine Speed Third Sensor.
529 SS T COOL RED 2 Coolant Temperature Red 2 Alarm (Limit 2).

5-10 9469200996
Fault
Number
530 SS P LUBE OIL RED 2 Lube Oil Pressure Red 2 Alarm (Limit 2).
531 AL WIRING PWM CM1 PWM CM1 Wiring Issue.
532 AL WIRING PWM1 PWM 1 Wiring Issue.
533 AL WIRING PWM2 PWM 2 Wiring Issue.
534 HIHI POWER DIFF Power Difference High (Limit 2).
535 LOLO POWER DIFF Power Difference Low (Limit 2).
536 AL WIRING PWM1 CM1 PWM CM1 Wiring Issue.
537 SD P VNTRI DLTA SD A Sensor Defect In Venturi Side A Delta Pressure Sensor.
538 SD P VNTRI DLTA SD B Sensor Defect In Venturi Side B Delta Pressure Sensor.
539 SD P EGR VNTRI STATIC Sensor Defect In EGR Venturi Static Pressure Sensor.
540 SD T EGR Sensor Defect In EGR Temperature Sensor.
541 AL L1 T EGR EGR Temperature (Limit 1) Alarm.
542 AL L2 T EGR EGR Temperature (Limit 2) Alarm.
543 MULTIPLE FDH SLAVES There is more than one device which is configured as Backup for FDH-
Functionality.
544 CONFIGURATION Gets active in case of changing system configuration e.g. by changing ECU- or
CHANGED SAM-Device. Remains until undo procedure or data is transferred by a valid
maintenance case. Is cancelled automatically.
545 AL L1 P EXT PLNT1 External Plant 1 Pressure Alarm (Limit 1).
546 AL L1 P EXT PLNT2 External Plant 2 Pressure Alarm (Limit 1).
547 AL L1 T EXT PLNT1 External Plant 1 Temperature Alarm (Limit 1).
548 AL L1 T EXT PLNT2 External Plant 2 Temperature Alarm (Limit 1).
549 AL PWR CUTOFF DET Power Cutoff Detected.
550 SS ENG OVRSP RED2 Engine Overspeed Red2 (Limit 1) Alarm.
551 SS ENG OVRSPD CAMSFT Engine Overspeed Camshaft (Limit 1) Alarm.
552 AL GAS CTRL CHK FLT Gas Control Check Fault Alarm.
553 AL AUX DEVICES FLT Auxiliary Devices Alarm.
554 AL IGNITION FAULT Ignition Fault Alarm.
555 AL CALL FIELD SERVICE Gets active in case of completing a maintenance-case which manipulates
Engine-Parameters. Remains also after switching on-off ECU until a valid
release code is entered via Display- and Button-Control of SAM-Device. Release
Code is available via Internet by a special procedure.
556 AL GAS VALVE FLT Gas Valve Fault Alarm.
557 AL ENG SPD COLL. FLT Engine Speed Collapse Fault Alarm.
559 AL MIX THRT A FLT Throttle A Mixture Fault Alarm.
560 AL MIX THRT B FLT Throttle B Mixture Fault Alarm.
561 AL LIM EXT PLNT BIN1 External Plant Bin 1 Limit Alarm.
565 L1 P AFTER AIR FLT A Intake A Air Pressure After Filter (Limit 1).
566 L2 P AFTER AIR FLT A Intake A Air Pressure After Filter (Limit 2).
567 L1 P AFTER AIR FLT B Intake B Air Pressure After Filter (Limit 1).
568 L2 P AFTER AIR FLT B Intake B Air Pressure After Filter (Limit 2).
569 AL SAM MSG DATA FLT SAM Module Missing Data Fault.
570 L1 CAN MAX TIMG RETRD Maximum Timing Retard from CAN (Limit 1).

9469200996 5-11
Fault
Number
573 SD P DIFF STR VS VRD Sensor Defect in Pressure Differential Sensor Pitot Tube vs. Pressure.
574 SD M AIR EGR BEF CLR Sensor Defect In Air Mass Sensor before EGR Cooler.
575 SD M INTAKE AIR Sensor Defect In Intake Air Mass Sensor.
576 AL ESCM OVERRIDE STR Exceeding of the corrected current MCR - odr DBR/MCR value.
577 SD T LUBE OIL PAN Sensor Defect In Oil Pan Lube Oil Temperature Sensor.
578 AL L1 T LUBOIL PAN Lube Oil Pan Temperature (Limit 1).
579 AL MD CANRQ IDLE SPD MD Idle Speed Request over Can Bus.
580 AL CAN SPD LIMIT MD Speed Limitation From Can Bus.
581 AL PWM CM3 PWM CM3 Alarm.
582 AL EMERG STOP FL Emergency Stop Failed Alarm.
583 AL BRKR CLOSED Circuit Breaker Closed Alarm.
584 AL CAN STRTCLR FL Start Clearance from Can Bus Fail Alarm.
585 AS MOTORSTRT BL Engine Start Blocked Alarm.
586 LO P OIL REFILL PMP Refill Pump Lower Oil Pressure.
588 SD P OIL REFILL PUMP Sensor Defect In Refill Pump Oil Pressure Sensor.
589 SD T EGR SIDE B Side B EGR Temperature Alarm.
590 SD P DLTA EXHAUST A Sensor Defect In Exhaust A Pressure Delta Sensor.
591 SD P EGRB VNTRI STATC Sensor Defect In Side B EGR Venturi Static Pressure Sensor.
592 AS P DLTA EXH B Sensor Defect In Exhaust B Pressure Delta Sensor.
593 SD OIL T J1939 Sensor Defect in Lube Oil Pan Temperature Sensor.
594 AL L1 PRV 1 DEFECT STR Yellow alarm pressure relief valve first rail.
595 AL L2 PRV 1 DEFECT STR Red alarm pressure relief valve first rail.
596 DEVELOP PR SET Develop PR Set Alarm.
598 AL L1 PRV 2 DEFECT STR Yellow alarm pressure relief valve second rail.
599 AL L2 PRV 2 DEFECT STR Red alarm pressure relief valve second rail.
600 SD T EXG A+B Sensor Defect In Exhaust A Plus B Temperature Sensor.
601 SD ETC1 + EC2 Turbo Charger Speed Sensors 1 and 2 Faulty.
602 AK CAB ENG STRT LOCK Engine Start Lock from Can Alarm.
603 SD AIR HUMIDITY Sensor Defect In Air Humidity Sensor.
604 AL HUT CHGSPD MAX HUT Speed Change Maximum Limit Alarm.
605 AL HUT DEV TOO HI HUT DEV too high limit alarm.
606 AL DBL NODES LOST 1+2 Nodes Lost on Can1 and Can2 Alarm.
607 AL MD CAN STOP MD Can Stop Alarm.
610 AL WIRING SUCK RESTRCT Open load or short circuit on PWM HP fuel control block channel.
1 STR
611 AL WIRING SUCK RESTRCT Open load or short circuit on PWM HP fuel control block channel 2.
2 STR
612 AL WIRING PRESS CTRL Open load or short circuit on PWM pressure regulating valve channel.
VLV 1 STR
613 AL WIRING PRESS CTRL Open load or short circuit on PWM pressure regulating valve channel 2.
VLV 2 STR
614 L1 P FUEL SEC FLTDIFF Secondary Filter Fuel Pressure Limit 1 Alarm.
615 AL EIL PROTECTION STR Alarm for Protection Module in response to faulty or manipulated EIL.
616 AL EIL ERROR STR EIL Error.

5-12 9469200996
Fault
Number
617 LO ACTUAL HU VAL HU Actual Value Low (Limit 1).
618 LOLO ACTUAL HU VAL HU Actual Value Low (Limit 2).
619 HI ACTUAL HU VAL HU Actual Value High (Limit 1).
620 HIHI ACTUAL HU VAL HU Actual Value High (Limit 2).
621 LO NOX VALUE NOX Value Low (Limit 1).
622 LOLO NOX VALUE NOX Value Low (Limit 2).
623 HI NOX VALUE NOX Value High (Limit 1).
624 HIHI NOX VALUE NOX Value High (Limit 2).
625 SD P FUEL ADD SEC FLT Sensor Defect in Pressure Sensor that meters Fuel Pressure Before
supplemental Filter.
629 EGR THOTTLE A DFCT EGR Throttle EGR Defect.
630 EGR THOTTLE B DFCT EGR Throttle EGR Defect.
631 AL BYPASS THROT DFCT Bypass Throttle Defect.
632 AL DISPNS THRTL DFCT Dispenser Throttle Defect.
633 SD P AMBAIR HDT2800 Sensor Defect in Ambient HD2800 Air Pressure Sensor.
634 SD T AMBAIR HDT2800 Sensor Defect in Ambient HD2800 Air Temperature Sensor.
635 SD H AMBAIR HDT2800 Sensor Defect in Ambient HD2800 Air Humidity Sensor.
636 SD OIL LVL J1939 Sensor Defect in J1939 Lube Oil Level Sensor.
637 SD OIL T J1939 Sensor Defect in J1939 Lube Oil Temperature Sensor.
638 AL WIRING PWM SIG1 PWM SIG1 Wiring Issue.
639 AL WIRING PWM SIG2 PWM SIG2 Wiring Issue.
640 SD SM NOX O2 FACTR Sensor Defect In Smart NOX Oxidation Factor Sensor.
641 AS SYS WATCHDG RST System Restart by Watchdog Detected.
642 SD ELCT ENG PWR AI2 Sensor Defect In Engine Power AI2 Electronic Sensor.
643 SP P FUEL BOF Sensor Defect in BOF Fuel Pressure Sensor.
644 AL L1 P FUEL BOF BOF Fuel Pressure Limit 1.
645 AL L2 P FUEL BOF BOF Fuel Pressure Limit 2.
646 AL KNOCK INTNSTY Knock Intensity Too High.
647 SD P EXH LAMBDA Sensor Defect in Exhaust Lambda Pressure Sensor.
648 SD P CHRG AIR B Sensor Defect In Charge Air B Pressure Sensor.
649 AL REQ ANGL THRT A Throttle A Angle Alarm.
650 AL REQ ANGL THRT B Throttle B Angle Alarm.
651 AL PREHT ERROR Preheating Error Alarm.
652 AL GET COM LOST GET Communications Lost.
653 AL IX92X COMM LOST IC92X Communications Lost.
654 AL FSERIES COMM LOST F Series Communications Lost.
655 AL TECJET COMM LOST TECJET Communications Lost.
656 AL PROACT A COMM LST PROACT A Communications Lost.
657 AL PROACT B COMM LST PROACT B Communications Lost.
658 AL NOXA COMM LOST NOX A Communications Lost.
659 AL NOXB COMM LOST NOX B Communications Lost.
660 AL PHYTRNA COM LST PHYTRON A Communications Lost.
661 AL PHYTRNB COM LST PHYTRON B Communications Lost.
662 SD SMRT NOX HTR Sensor Defect in Smart NOX Heater Element Sensor.

9469200996 5-13
Fault
Number
663 SD SMRT NOX CONC. Sensor Defect in Smart NOX Concentration Sensor.
664 AL OIL REFILL ERR Oil Refill Error.
665 AL GET YELLOW GET Yellow Alarm.
666 AL IC92X YELLOW IC92X Yellow Alarm.
667 AL FSERIES YELLOW F Series Yellow Alarm.
668 AL TECJET YELLOW TECJET Yellow Alarm.
669 AL PROACTA YELLOW PROACT A Yellow Alarm.
670 AL PROACTB YELLOW PROACT B Yellow Alarm.
671 AL NOXA YELLOW NOX A Yellow Alarm.
672 AL NOXB YELLOW NOX B Yellow Alarm.
673 AL PHYA YELLOW PHYTRON A Yellow Alarm.
674 AL PHYB YELLOW PHYTRON B Yellow Alarm.
675 AL GET RED GET Red Alarm.
676 AL IC92X RED IC92X Red Alarm.
677 AL FSERIES RED F Series Red Alarm.
678 AL TECJET RED TECJET Red Alarm.
679 AL PROACTA RED PROACT A Red Alarm.
680 AL PROACTB RED PROACT B Red Alarm.
681 AL NOXA RED NOX A Red Alarm.
682 AL NOXB RED NOX B Red Alarm.
683 AL PHYA RED PHYTRON A Red Alarm.
684 AL PHYB RED PHYTRON B Red Alarm.
685 AL LUBE OIL MIN Lube Oil Minimum.
686 AL LUBE OIL MAX Lube Oil Maximum.
687 AL LUBEOIL LVL SW Lube Oil Level Switch is Faulty.
688 LO OIL REFILL Low Oil Refill.
689 HI OIL REFILL High Oil Refill.
690 AL LUBEOIL LVL LO Lube Oil Level Low.
691 HI LUBEOIL LVL REFILL Lube Oil Refill Level High.
692 AL ECU PWR OFF ON REQ ECU configuration changed, switch power off/on.
STR
693 AL MB VALVE ERR MB Valve Error.
694 SD T GAS Sensor Defect in Gas Temperature Sensor.
695 AL EGR FAILURE EGR Failure Alarm.
696 AL SMARTCONCT USB ERR Alarm configuration parameter.
STR
697 AL SMARTCONCT RS485 Alarm configuration parameter.
ERR STR
698 AL SD STOP BUTTON STR Channel signals open load or internal error.
700 AL SD START BUTTON STR Channel signals open load.
701 AL SD UP BUTTON STR Channel signals open load.
702 AL SD DN BUTTON STR Channel signals open load or internal error.
703 AL SD EXT SPEED DMD SW Channel signals open load.
STR
704 AL SD SPEED DMD Channel signals open load or internal error.
INCREASE STR
705 AL SD BINARY SPD DMD Channel signals open load or internal error.
LMT STR

5-14 9469200996
Fault
Number
706 AL SD DROOP 2 SWITCH Channel signals open load or internal error.
STR
707 AL SD FREQUENCY Channel signals open load or internal error.
SWITCH STR
709 AL SD OVERRIDE BUTTON Channel signals open load or internal error.
STR
710 AL SD ALARM RESET STR Channel signals open load or internal error.
711 AL SD CYLINDER CUTOUT Channel signals open load or internal error.
STR
712 AL SD RQST BIN OUT TST Channel signals open load or internal error.
STR
713 AL SD EXT ENGINE Channel signals open load or internal error.
PROTECTN STR
714 AL SD PRELUBE SIGNAL Channel signals open load.
STR
715 AL SD EXT INC IDLE BIN Channel signals open load.
STR
716 AL SD EXT INC IDLE BIN Channel signals open load.
BRK STR
717 AL SD RQST PLANT DBR Channel signals open load.
STR
718 INTK AIR THRTL DFCT Intake Air Throttle Defect.
719 AL T GAS L1 Gas Temperature Limit Alarm (Limit 1).
723 SD T EXH BEF DOC A Sensor Defect Exhaust Temperature Sensor before DOC.
724 SD T EXH BEF DPF A Sensor Defect Exhaust Temperature Sensor before DPF.
725 SD T EXH AFTR DPF A Sensor Defect Exhaust Temperature Sensor after DPF
726 SD P DELTA EXH DPF A Sensor Defect in DPF Exhaust Pressure Delta Sensor.
727 L1 DELTA T_NT INTRCLR NT Intercooler NT Temperature (Limit 1) Alarm.
728 L2 DELTA T_NT INTRCLR NT Intercooler NT Temperature (Limit 2) Alarm.
729 L1 T EXH BEF DOC Exhaust Temperature Before DOC (Limit 1) Alarm.
730 L2 T EXH BEF DOC Exhaust Temperature Before DOC (Limit 2) Alarm.
731 L2 T EXH BEF DPF Exhaust Temperature Before DPF (Limit 1) Alarm.
732 L2 T EXH BEF DPF Exhaust Temperature Before DPF (Limit 2) Alarm.
733 L1 T EXH AFTR DPF Exhaust Temperature After DPF (Limit 1) Alarm.
734 L2 T EXH AFTR DPF Exhaust Temperature After DPF (Limit 2) Alarm.
735 L1 P_DPF DIFF DPF Exhaust Pressure Difference Alarm (Limit 1) Alarm.
736 L2 P_DPF DIFF DPF Exhaust Pressure Difference Alarm (Limit 2) Alarm.
737 L1 P_DPF NORM DIFF DPF Normal Difference Pressure (Limit 1) Alarm.
741 DPF RIGOROUS TM ABORT DPF Rigorous TM Aborted Alarm.
742 DPF PER RIGOROUS TM DPF Periodic Rigorous TM Alarm.
743 DPF RIG TM SUPPR DPF Rigorous TM Suppressed Alarm.
744 DPF FLASH READ ERR DPF Flash Memory Read Error Alarm.
745 AL EMISSN FLT Emission Fault Alarm.
746 AL EMISSN FLT2 Emission Fault 2 Alarm.

9469200996 5-15
Fault
Number
747 SD P INTK AIRFLT DIFF Sensor Defect in the Intake Air Filter Differential Pressure Sensor.
748 SD T EXH BEF SCR F1 Sensor Defect in Exhaust Temperature Sensor Before SCR Filter 1.
749 SD T EXH BEF SCR F2 Sensor Defect in Exhaust Temperature Sensor Before SCR Filter 2.
750 SD T EXH AFTR SCR F1 Sensor Defect in Exhaust Temperature Sensor After SCR Filter 1.
751 SD T EXH AFTR SCR F2 Sensor Defect in Exhaust Temperature Sensor After SCR Filter 2.
752 SD DEF TANK LVL Sensor Defect in DEF Tank Level Sensor.
753 SD T RM TANK Sensor Defect in RM Tank Temperature Sensor.
754 SD BOSCH LSU LMBDA SNS Sensor Defect In Bosch LSU Lambda Sensor.
755 SELCTD MODE NOT VLD Selected Mode Not Valid Alarm.
756 NO VLD MODE SW SGNL No Valid Mode Switch Alarm.
757 AL LIM T COOL LT FAN Coolant LT Fan Limit (Limit 1) Alarm.
758 DEF NOZZLE DAMG DEF Nozzle Damage Alarm.
759 L1 T FUEL B ENGINE Fuel Temperature Before Engine too high (Limit 1) Alarm.
760 L2 T FUEL B ENGINE Fuel Temperature Before Engine too high (Limit 2) Alarm.
761 SD T FUEL B ENGINE Sensor Defect In Sensor metering Fuel Temperature Before Engine Alarm.
762 AL SMRT CNCT LOST Smart Connect Lost Alarm.
763 AL OL ASO FLP FDBK B OL ASO Flap B Feedback Alarm.
764 ASO FLP B CLSD A FL ASO Flap B Closed A Failed Alarm.
765 AL OL ASO FLP FDBK A OL ASO Flap A Feedback Alarm.
766 ASO FLP A CLSD B FL ASO Flap A Closed B Failed Alarm.
767 ASP FLAPS CLOSED ASO Flaps Closed Alarm.
768 ST T EXH V HPTURBN A1 Sensor Defect In Exhaust V HP Turbine A1 Temperature Sensor.
769 SD T EXH AFTR ENG Sensor Defect In Exhaust Temperature After Engine Sensor.
770 SD T SEA WATER PUMP Sensor Defect In Sea Water After Pump Temperature Sensor.
771 SD T FUEL B Sensor Defect In Fuel Temperature B Sensor.
772 SD LVL OIL REFILL TNK Sensor Defect In Refill Tank Oil Level Sensor.
773 SD P FUEL RTN PATH Sensor Defect In Return Path Fuel Pressure Sensor.
774 SD P FUEL BEFR ENG Sensor Defect In Fuel Pressure Before Engine Sensor.
775 SD P SCHM AFT LVL PMP Sensor Defect In After Level Pump Oil Pressure Sensor.
776 SD P SCHM AT HPPUMP A Sensor Defect In Oil Pressure at HP Pump A Sensor.
777 SD P SCHM AT HPPUMP B Sensor Defect In Oil Pressure at HP Pump B Sensor.
778 ASO FLPS OPN FL TO CLS ASO Flaps Open, Failed to Close Alarm.
779 WRONG NOX SNSR E1 NOX Sensor E1 Wrong Position Alarm.
782 SD P LUBOIL ETC A Turbo Charger A Lube Oil Pressure Too High.
783 SD T EXH BEFR SCR F3 Sensor Defect In Before SCR Exhaust Temperature Sensor.
784 SD T EXH AFTR SCR F3 Sensor Defect In After SCR Exhaust Temperature Sensor.
785 L1 P OIL BEF HD PMP A Oil Pressure Before HD PUMP A (Limit 1) Alarm.
786 L1 P OIL BEF HD PMP B Oil Pressure Before HD PUMP B (Limit 1) Alarm.
787 L1 P OILNIV PUMP Oil Pressure in Oil Niveaux Pump (Limit 1) Alarm.
788 ETC SPD FL DETECT Turbo Charger Speed Failure Detected.
789 WRONG POS TMP SNS E1 Temperature Sensor E1 Wrong Position Alarm.
792 L1 P CHARGE AIR B Charge Air B Pressure (Limit 1) Alarm.
793 L2 P CHARGE AIR B Charge Air B Pressure (Limit 2) Alarm.

5-16 9469200996
Fault
Number
794 L1 P FL BEFR ENGN Fuel Pressure Before Engine (Level 1) Alarm.
795 L1 P FUEL RTN Fuel Pressure in Return Path (Limit 1) Alarm.
796 HI T CHARGE AIR B High Charge Air B Temperature (Limit 1) Alarm.
797 HIHI T CHRG AIR B High Charge Air B Temperature (Limit 2) Alarm.
798 L1T EXH BEF HPTRBN A1 Exhaust Temperature Before HP Turbine A1 (Limit 1) Alarm.
799 L2T EXH BEF HPTRBN A1 Exhaust Temperature Before HP Turbine A1 (Limit 2) Alarm.
800 L1 T EXH AFTR ENGINE Exhaust Temperature After Engine (Limit 1) Alarm.
801 L1T RAW WATR AFTR PMP Raw Water After Pump Temperature (Limit 1) Alarm.
802 L1T FUEL BEFR ENGINE Fuel Temperature Before Engine (Limit 1) Alarm.
803 HI T FUEL B High Fuel B Temperature (Limit 1) Alarm.
804 SS T FUEL B High Fuel B Temperature (Limit 2) Alarm.
805 LO OIL LVL REFILL Refill Oil Level Low Alarm.
806 SD CHARGR 3 SPD Sensor Defect In Turbo Charger 3 Speed Sensor.
809 SD F1 NOX BEFOR SCR Sensor Defect In F1 NOX Before SCR sensor.
810 NO COMS F1NOX BF SCR Communications Lost with F1 NOX Before SCR sensor.
811 SD F1 NOX AFTR SCR Sensor Defect In F1 NOX After SCR sensor.
812 NO COMS F1NOX AF SCR F1 NOX After SCR Communications lost alarm.
814 NO COMS F2NOX BF SCR F2 NOX Before SCR Communications lost alarm.
818 NO COMS F3NOX BF SCR F3 NOX Before SCR Communications lost alarm.
821 HI ETC1 IDLE SPEED Turbo Charger 1 Speed at Idle Too High.
826 AL ETC1 SPD DEVTN Turbo Charger 1 Speed Deviation.
831 AL ETC JOB ROTATN Turbo Charger Job Rotation Alarm.
832 EIL DIFF ENG NUMBR EIL Different Engine Number Alarm.
833 AL EMISSION WRN Emission Warning Alarm.
834 AL GAS PATH WRN Gas Path Warning Alarm.
835 AL GAST PATH FLT Gas Path Fault Alarm.
836 AL SPEED DMD FAIL Speed Demand Failure Alarm.
837 BYPASS VLV DEFCT Bypass Valve Defect Alarm.
838 AL ASH VOLUME Ash Volume Alarm.
839 ECU NT CLS ECO FLAP A ASO Flap A not closed by ECU Alarm.
840 ECU NT CLS ECO FLAP B ASO Flap B not closed by ECU Alarm.

9469200996 5-17
Fault
Number
841 SD P GASLN COM RL Sensor Defect in Gasoline Common Rail Pressure Sensor.
842 AL ACT FL VLV POS L1 ACT Fuel Valve Position (Limit 1) Alarm.
843 SD T CHRG AIR BEF EGR Sensor Defect in Charge Air Before EGR Temperature Sensor.
844 HI T CHRG AIR BEF EGR Charge Air Before EGR High Temperature (Limit 1) Alarm.
845 HIHI T CHRGAIR BF EGR Charge Air Before EGR High Temperature (Limit 2) Alarm.
846 HI T CHRG AIR DIFF AB Charge Air Differential AB High Temperature (Limit 1) Alarm.
847 HIHI T CHRG AIR DF AB Charge Air Differential AB High Temperature (Limit 2) Alarm.
848 AL REL HUMIDTY L1 Relative Humidity (Limit 1) Alarm.
849 AL IBT FUNCT ACTV IBT Function Active Alarm.
850 SD ALIVE FIP Sensor Defect in ALIVE FIP sensor.
851 AL EXT STRT HD HI External Start and HD Too High Alarm.
852 MAX BLNK SH TM EXP Max Blank Shot Time Expired Alarm.
853 HSB1 COMMS LOST HSB1 Communications Lost Alarm.
854 HSB1 ACUTATR DEFCT HSB1 Actuator Defect Alarm.
855 BYPASS THR2 DEFCT Bypass Throttle 2 Defect Alarm.
856 SD P LUBOIL ETC B Sensor Defect In Turbo Charger Oil Pressure Sensor.
857 NOX ATO1 SENSR DEFCT NOX ATO 1 Sensor Defect Alarm.
858 L1 P LUBOIL ETC B Turbo Charger B Oil Pressure Low (Limit 1).
861 DEF IN PIPE S_ACT SYS DEF in DEF Pipe in ACT system Alarm.
862 DEF TNK HT SNS_ACT SD DEF Tank ACT Sensor Defect.
867 L1 P LUBOIL ETC A Turbo Charger A Oil Pressure Low (Limit 1).
868 L2 P LUBOIL ETC A Turbo Charger A Oil Pressure Low (Limit 2).
869 L2 P LUBOIL ETC B Turbo Charger B Oil Pressure Low (Limit 2).
870 AL MB VLV DEFCT 2 MB Valve Defect 2 Alarm.
871 NOX ATO1 COMS LOST NOX ATO 1 Communications Lost Alarm.
872 EGR A REF LEARN FAIL EGR Reference Learning Algorithm Failure Alarm.
873 DEF TNK LVL EMPTY DEF Tank Level Empty Alarm.
874 SCR FAIL SCR Failure Alarm.
875 ADBLUE TANK LOW ADBLUE (DEF) Tank Level Low Alarm.
876 EGR B REF LEARN FAIL EGR B Reference Learning Algorithm Failure Alarm.
877 BYP A REF LEARN FAIL Bypass A Reference Learning Algorithm Failure Alarm.
878 BYPASS B FAST LRN FL Bypass B Fast Learn Algorithm Failure Alarm.
879 DISPNSR REF LRN FL Dispenser Reference Learn Algorithm Failure Alarm.
880 INTAKEAIR REF LRN FL Intake Air Reference Learn Algorithm Failure Alarm.
881 AL UREA QLTY RELEASE Urea Quality Release Alarm.
882 SCR F1 SU REVLTN RNG SCR F1 SU Revolution Range Alarm.
883 SCR F2 SU REVLTN RNG SCR F2 SU Revolution Range Alarm.
884 SCR F1 SU ADBLUE QNTY SCR F1 SU ADBLUE Quantity.
885 SCR F2 SU ADBLUE QNTY SCR F2 SU ADBLUE Quantity.
886 SCR ADBLUE PRESSR SCR ADBLUE Pressure Alarm.
887 SCR SU PRIME REQUEST SCR SU Priming Request Alarm.

5-18 9469200996
Fault
Number
888 SCR SU ADBLUE PRESSR SCR SU ADBLUE Pressure Alarm.
889 SD T LUBEOIL ETC Sensor Defect In Turbo Charger Oil Temperature Sensor.
890 L2 T LUBEOIL ETC Lube Oil Temperature Too High (Limit 2).
891 AL TURNING ACTIVATED Turning Activation Alarm.
892 FLO1 SPPLYUNT1 COM LS Lost Communications with Air Flow 1 Supply Unit 1.
898 TRICAN COMMS LOST Communications Lost on TRICAN network.
899 OLT COMMS LOST Communications to OLT Lost.
900 SCRF3 SU REV RNG SCR F3 SU Revolution Range Alarm.
901 SCRF3 SU ADBLUE QTY SCR F3 SU Adblue Quantity Low.
902 HI TCOOL CYL HEAD High Cylinder Head Coolant Temperature (Limit 1).
903 SD TCOOL CYL HEAD Sensor Defect in Cylinder Head Coolant Temperature Sensor.
904 SS TCOOL CYL HEAD High Cylinder Head Coolant Temperature (Limit 2).
905 ADBLUE EXP CNS FL ADBLUE Expected Consumption Failure Alarm.
906 ADBLUE BALANCE FL ADBLUE Balance Failed Alarm.
907 NOX RAW EMISSN FL NOX Raw Gas Emission Failed Alarm.
908 APPRCH NOX DOS STP FL Approach NOX Dosing Stop Failed Alarm.
909 SCR TEXH BTW FLOWS FL Exhaust Temperature Between SCR Flows Failed Alarm.
910 EXP TEXH BFR SCR FL Expected Exhaust Temperature Before SCR Failure Alarm.
911 EXP TEXH AFT SCR FL Expected Exhaust Temperature After SCR Failure Alarm.
912 SCR F1 TEXH BFR GRDNT SCR F1 Exhaust Temperature Before Gradient Alarm.
915 SCR F1 TEXH AFT GRDNT SCR F1 Exhaust Temperature After Gradient Alarm.
918 L1 T LUBEOIL ETC Turbo Charger Lube Oil Temperature High (Limit 1).
919 ENERGY CNTR DEFCT Energy Counter Defect Alarm.
920 L1 TEXH BFR SCRF1 Exhaust Temperature Before SCR F1 (Limit 1) Alarm.
922 L1 TEXH AFT SCRF1 Exhaust Temperature After SCR F1 (Limit 1) Alarm.
932 AL MIC5 YELLOW MIC 5 Yellow Alarm.
933 AL MIC5 RED MIC 5 Red Alarm.
934 AL MIC5 COMM LOST MIC 5 Comms Lost Alarm.

9469200996 5-19
Fault
Number
935 LO F1 TEXH BFR SCR F1 Exhaust Temperature before SCR Too Low Alarm.
938 LO F1 TEXH AFT SCR F1 Exhaust Temperature after SCR Too Low Alarm.
941 LO SCR OPRATING T SCR Operating Temperature Too Low Alarm.
942 CATLY CONV LO F1 Catalytic Conversion Too Low F1 Alarm.
945 L1 L VOLTAGE ASO Low ASO Voltage (Limit 1) Alarm.
946 L2 L VOLTAGE ASO Low ASO Voltage (Limit 2) Alarm.
947 INVALD LSI CHANL CFG Invalid LSI Channel Configuration Alarm.
948 AL ESI ACTIVATED ESI Activated Alarm.
949 SD VOLTAGE ASO Sensor Defect in ASO Voltage Sensor.
950 SCR SU FLT S EXST F1 SCR SU Fault S F1 Exists alarm.
951 ETC0 CUTIN FAIL Turbo Charger 0 Cut In Failure.
952 ETC1 CUTIN FAIL Turbo Charger 1 Cut In Failure.
953 LAMBDA VALUE INVALID Lambda Value Invalid Alarm.
954 NOX VALUE INVALID NOX Value Invalid Alarm.
955 THRML MANGMT ACTV Thermal Management Active Alarm.
956 P5 CNTVAR LIM MN ACTV P5 Control Variable Minimum Limit Active Alarm.
957 P5 CV MAX BOI MN ACT P5 Control Variable Max BOI Minimum Active Alarm.
958 LMDA CTLVR LMT MN ACT Lambda Control Variable Minimum Limit Active Alarm.
959 LMDA CV MX BOI MN ACT Lambda Control Variable Max BOI Minimum Active Alarm.
960 NOXP5 MN BOI MX ACTV NOX P5 Minimum BOI Maximum Active.
961 NOXP5 MX BOI MN ACTV NOX P5 Maximum BOI Minimum Active.
962 GPS LMDA CV MAX ACTV GPS Lambda Control Variable Maximum Active Alarm.
963 GPS P5 CV MAX ACTV GPS P5 Control Variable Maximum Active Alarm.
964 GPS P5 CV MIN ACTV GPS P5 Control Variable Minimum Active Alarm.
965 SCR SU FLT S EXIST F2 SCR SU Fault S F2 Exists Alarm.
966 SCR SU FLT S EXIST F3 SCR SU Fault S F3 Exists Alarm.
967 SCR SU PRIM REQ F1 SCR SU Priming Request F1 Alarm.
970 SD P EXHAUST Sensor Defect in Exhaust Pressure Sensor.
971 COLD ENGINE ALARM Cold Engine Alarm.
972 MIC5 SINGATURE DIFF MIC5 Signature Difference Alarm.
973 AL CHECKSUM IIG IIG Check Sum Alarm.
974 AL CAN3 BUS OFF Can3 Bus Off Alarm.
975 CAN3 ERR PASSIVE Can3 Error Passive Alarm.
976 AL CAN4 BUS OFF Can4 Bus Off Alarm.
977 CAN4 ERR PASSIVE Can4 Error Passive Alarm.
978 HI ETC5 OVERSPEED Turbo Charger 5 Overspeed (Limit 1).
979 SS ETC5 OVERSPEED Turbo Charger 5 Overspeed (Limit 2).
980 ADBLUE TEMP HI F1 ADBLUE (DEF) Temperature Too High F1 Alarm.

5-20 9469200996
Fault
Number
983 STOP ON TRIG CRSHRECR Stop on Crash Recorder Trigger Alarm.
984 NOX ATO2 SNSR DEFCT NOX ATO2 Sensor Defect Alarm.
985 NOX ATO2 SNS COM LOST NOX ATO 2 Communications Lost Alarm.
1000 SD LVL DEF TNK B Sensor Defect In DEF Tank B Level Sensor.
1001 SD LVL COOL WTR Sensor Defect In Coolant Water Level Sensor.
1002 SD LVL HYD OIL Sensor Defect In Hydraulic Oil Level Sensor.
1003 L1 LVL COOL WTR Coolant Water Level (Limit 1) Alarm.
1004 L2 LVL COOL WTR Coolant Water Level (Limit 2) Alarm.
1005 L1 LVL HYD OIL Hydraulic Oil Level (Limit 1) Alarm.
1006 L2 LVL HYD OIL Hydraulic Oil Level (Limit 2) Alarm.
1007 L1 LVL LUBEOIL J1939 J1939 Lube Oil Level (Limit 1) Alarm.
1008 L2 LVL LUBEOIL J1939 J1939 Lube Oil Level (Limit 2) Alarm.
1009 SD P FLTR MONITR Sensor Defect In Fuel Filter Pressure Sensor.
1010 L1 P FLTR MONITR Fuel Filter Pressure (Limit 1) Alarm.
1011 DEF TANK LVL LO DEF Tank Level Low Alarm.
1012 MIC5 PARM DNLOAD ACTV MIC5 Parameter Download Active Alarm.
1013 HI DELTA NOX AB HI Delta NOX A-B (Limit 1) Alarm.
1014 HIHI DLTA NOX AB HI Delta NOX A-B (Limit 2) Alarm.
1015 TTL BKDN NOX SNRS NOX Sensors Total Breakdown alarm.
1016 REDUND LOSS NOX SNRS NOX Sensors Redundancy Loss Alarm.
1017 HI DELTA P5 FOR NOX High Delta P5 for NOX Alarm.
1018 F1 DEF CONSUMPT ERROR F1 DEF Consumption Error Alarm.
1019 F1 DEF BALANCE ERROR F1 DEF Balance Error Alarm.
1020 F1 RAW GAS EMSN ERROR F1 Raw Gas Emission Error Alarm.
1021 F1 NOX ANNHRG ERROR F1 NOX Approaching Error Condition Alarm.
1022 TEX BEF SCR BET F1&F2 Exhaust Temperature Before SCR Between F1 and F2 Alarm.
1023 TEX AFT SCR BET F1&F2 Exhaust Temperature After SCR Between F1 and F2 Alarm.
1024 LOLO P FUEL COMM RL A Fuel Common Rail A Low Fuel Pressure (Limit 2) Alarm.
1025 LOLO P FUEL COMM RL B Fuel Common Rail B Low Fuel Pressure (Limit 2) Alarm.
1026 IAP COMMS LOST IAP Communications Lost Alarm.
1027 ENGN COLD ACTIV Engine Cold Active Alarm.
1028 F1EXP TEX BFR SCR ERR F1 Expected Exhaust Temperature Before SCR Error Alarm.
1029 IAP MISSNG ENERG DATA IAP Missing Energization Data Error.
1030 LO P CRANK CASE Low Crankcase Pressure (Limit 1) Alarm.
1031 LOLO P CRK CASE Low Crankcase Pressure (Limit 2) Alarm.
1032 INJ DRIFT LMT1 CYL A1 Cylinder A1 Injector Drift Limit 1 Alarm.
1041 INJ DRFT LMT1 CYL A10 Cylinder A10 Injector Drift Limit 1 Alarm.
1042 INJ DRIFT LMT1 CYL B1 Cylinder B1 Injector Drift Limit 1 Alarm.

9469200996 5-21
Fault
Number
1051 INJ DRFT LMT1 CYL B10 Cylinder B10 Injector Drift Limit 1 Alarm.
1061 INJ DRFT LMT2 CYL A10 Cylinder A10 Injector Drift Limit 2 Alarm.
1062 INJ DRIFT LMT2 CYL B1 Cylinder B1 Injector Drift Limit 2 Alarm
1071 INJ DRFT LMT2 CYL B10 Cylinder B10 Injector Drift Limit 2 Alarm.
1072 F1EXP TEX AFT SCR ERR F1 Expected Exhaust Temperature After SCR Error Alarm.
1073 F1GRD TEX BFR SCR ERR F1 Exhaust Temperature Gradient Before SCR Error Alarm.
1074 F1GRD TEX AFT SCR ERR F1 Exhaust Temperature Gradient After SCR Error Alarm.
1075 F1 T DEF TOO HI F1 DEF Temperature Too High Alarm.
1078 F2 DEF CONSMPT ERR F2 DEF Consumption Error Alarm.
1079 F2 DEF BALNC ERR F2 DEF Balance Error Alarm.
1080 F2 RAW GAS EMISN ERR F2 Raw Gas Emission Error Alarm.
1081 F2 NOX ANNHRG ERROR F2 NOX Approaching Error Condition Alarm.
1082 F2EXP TEX BFR SCR ERR F2 Expected Exhaust Temperature Before SCR Error Alarm.
1083 F2EXP TEX AFT SCR ERR F2 Expected Exhaust Temperature After SCR Error Alarm.
1084 F2GRD TEX BFR SCR ERR F2 Exhaust Temperature Gradient Before SCR Error Alarm.
1085 F2GRD TEX AFT SCR ERR F2 Exhaust Temperature Gradient After SCR Error Alarm.
1086 F2 T DEF TOO HI F2 DEF Temperature Too High Alarm.

5-22 9469200996

9469200996 6-1
6 • Diagnostic Trouble Codes

Diagnostic engine information is obtained from a compatible engine control unit (ECU). The DGC-2020ES
will receive an unsolicited message of a currently active diagnostic trouble code (DTC). Previously active
DTCs are available upon request. Active and previously active DTCs can be cleared on request. Table
6-1 lists the diagnostic information that the DGC-2020ES obtains over the CAN interface.
Table 6-1. Diagnostic Information Obtained Over the CAN Interface
Transmission
Parameter
Repetition Rate
Active diagnostic trouble code 1s
Lamp status 1s
Previously active diagnostic trouble code On request
Request to clear active DTCs On request
Request to clear previously active DTCs On request
DTCs are reported in coded diagnostic information that includes the Suspect Parameter Number (SPN),
Failure Mode Identifier (FMI), and Occurrence Count (OC). All parameters have an SPN and are used to
display or identify the items for which diagnostics are being reported. The FMI defines the type of failure
detected in the subsystem identified by an SPN. The reported problem may not be an electrical failure but
a subsystem condition needing to be reported to an operator or technician. The OC contains the number
of times that a fault has gone from active to previously active.
For certain DTCs, if the DGC-2020ES recognizes a pair of SPN and FMI numbers, it displays a single
string as listed in Table 6-2. If the DGC-2020ES recognizes an SPN in Table 6-2, but the FMI does not
match the FMI in Table 6-2, then it displays the string from Table 6-2 corresponding to the table entry
where the FMI is # and a second string corresponding to the FMI number listed in Table 6-3. For
example, if the DGC-2020ES receives SPN 29 and FMI 13, it displays ACCEL PEDAL 2 POSITN and
OUT OF CALIBRATION. If the DGC-2020ES does not have descriptive information about an SPN and
FMI that was received, the description will display as “NO TEXT AVAILABLE”.
Table 6-2. DTCs Displayed by the DGC-2020ES
SPN FMI String Displayed Description
27 # EGR1 VALVE POSITN EGR1 Valve Position
28 # ACCEL PEDAL 3 POSITN accelerator pedal 3 position
28 3 Throttle Volt HI Throttle Voltage High
28 4 Throttle Volt LO Throttle Voltage Low
28 14 Throttle Volt OOR Throttle Input Voltage Out of Range
29 3 Throttle Volt HI Throttle Voltage High
29 4 Throttle Volt LO Throttle Voltage Low
29 14 Throttle Volt OOR Throttle Input Voltage Out of Range
29 # ACCEL PEDAL 2 POSITN accelerator pedal 2 position
51 # ENG THROTTLE POSITN Engine Throttle Position
52 # INTERCOOLER TEMP Engine Intercooler Temperature
52 15 INTERCOOLER TEMP HI Engine Intercooler Temperature is above the HIGH threshold
69 # 2 SPEED AXLE SWITCH Two Speed Axle Switch
70 # PARKING BRAKE SWITCH Parking Brake Switch
84 # VEHICLE SPEED vehicle speed signal
91 # ACCEL POSITION Accelerator Position
DGC-2020ES Diagnostic Trouble Codes

6-2 9469200996

91 3 Thr Pos Sns Volt HI Throttle Position Sensor Input Voltage (High)
91 4 Thr Pos Sns Volt LO Throttle Position Sensor Input Voltage (Low)
91 14 Thr Pos Sns Volt OOR Throttle Voltage (Out of Range)
94 # FUEL DELIVERY PRESS Fuel Delivery Pressure
94 1 FUEL DELIV PRS LO LO Engine Fuel Delivery Pressure is below the LOW LOW
threshold
94 3 Fuel Pmp Prs Volt HI Fuel Pump Pressure Input Voltage (High)
94 4 Fuel Pmp Prs Volt LO Fuel Pump Pressure Input Voltage (Low)
94 17 Fuel Pressure LO Fuel Supply Pressure (Low Least Severe)
95 # FUEL FLT DF PRS Fuel Filter Differential Pressure
96 # FUEL LEVEL Fuel Level
97 # Water in Fuel Water in Fuel

97 3 Water In Fl Volt HI Water In Fuel Signal Voltage High
97 4 Water In Fl Volt LO Water In Fuel Signal Voltage Low
97 16 Water in Fuel Water In Fuel Detected
98 # ENG OIL LEVEL Engine Oil Level
99 # OIL FILTER DIFF PRESS oil filter differential pressure parameter
100 # ENG OIL PRESS Engine Oil Pressure
100 1 ENG OIL PRESS LO LO Engine Oil Pressure is below the LOW LOW threshold
100 3 Oil Prs Snsr Volt HI Oil Pressure Sensor Input Voltage (High)
100 4 Oil Prs Snsr Volt LO Oil Pressure Sensor Input Voltage (Low)
100 17 ENG OIL PRESS LO Engine Oil Pressure is below the LOW threshold
100 18 Oil Prs Snsr Volt MLO Oil Pressure Sensor Input Voltage (Moderately Low)
100 31 Oil Pressure INVLD Oil Pressure (Invalid)
101 # CRANKCASE PRESSURE crankcase pressure
102 # INTK MNFLD1 PRESSURE intake manifold 1 pressure
102 2 Manifld Air Prs INVD Manifold Air Pressure Invalid
102 3 Mnfld AirP SnsVlt HI Manifold Air Pressure Sensor Input Voltage High
102 4 Mnfld AirP SnsVlt LO Manifold Air Pressure Sensor Input Voltage Low
103 # TURBO CH1 SPEED Turbo Speed
103 0 Trbo Overspd Severe Turbo Overspeed (Most Severe)
103 2 Trbo Speed MisMatch Turbo Speed (Mismatch)
103 5 Trbo Spd Sns Curr LO Turbo Speed Sensor Current (Low)
103 6 Trbo Spd Sns Curr HI Turbo Speed Sensor Current (High)
103 8 Trbo Speed INVLD Turbo Speed (Invalid)
103 31 Trbo Speed MISSING Turbo Speed (Missing)
104 # TRBO CH OIL PRESS Turbocharger Oil Pressure
105 # INTAK MNFLD TMP Intake Manifold Temperature
105 0 EGR Mixed Air Tmp HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Mixed Air High (Least Severe)
105 3 EGR Air Temp Vlt HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Mixed Air Temp Voltage (High)
105 4 EGR Air Temp Vlt LO Exhaust Gas Recirculation Mixed Air Temp Voltage (Low)
105 15 EGR Mixed Air Tmp HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Mixed Air High (Least Severe)
105 16 EGR MxdAir Tmp MHI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Mixed Air Temp (Moderately High)
Diagnostic Trouble Codes DGC-2020ES

9469200996 6-3

106 # INTAKE AIR PRESSR Intake Air Pressure
107 # AIR FLTR DIF PRS Air Filter Differential Pressure

107 0 Air Filt Restricted Air Filter Restriction (High)
108 # BAROMETRIC PRESS Barometric Pressure
108 2 Barometrc Prs INVLD Barometric Pressure (Invalid)
108 31 Barometrc Prs ERR Barometric Pressure (Error)
109 # COOLANT PRESS Coolant Pressure
109 1 ENG COOLNT PRS LO LO Engine Coolant Pressure is below the LOW LOW threshold
109 17 ENG COOLANT PRS LO Engine Coolant Pressure is below the LOW threshold
110 # COOLANT TEMP Engine Coolant Temperature
110 0 ENG COOLNT TMP HI HI Engine Coolant Temperature is above the HIGH HIGH
threshold
110 3 Cool Tmp Sns Volt HI Coolant Temp Sensor Input Voltage (High)
110 4 Cool Tmp Sns Volt LO Coolant Temp Sensor Input Voltage (Low)
110 15 ENG COOLANT TEMP HI Engine Coolant Temperature is above the HIGH threshold
110 16 Cool Temp MHI Coolant Temp Sensor Input (Moderately High)
110 17 Cool Temp LO Coolant Temp Sensor Input (Low Least Severe)
111 1 Coolnt Lvl LO Coolant Level (Low)
111 17 ENG COOLANT LVL LO Engine Coolant Level is below the LOW threshold
111 # LOW COOL LEVEL Low Coolant Level string used in event log and/or Alarm and
Pre-alarm annunciation
157 # INJ RAIL PRS Fuel Injection Rail Pressure
157 3 Fuel Rail Prs Vlt HI Fuel Rail Pressure Input Voltage (High)
157 4 Fuel Rail Prs Vlt LO Fuel Rail Pressure Input Voltage (Low)
157 10 Fuel Rail Prs LOSS Fuel Rail Pressure Loss Detected
157 17 Fuel Rl Prs NOT DEV Fuel Rail Pressure Not Developed
158 # BATTERY VOLTAGE Battery Voltage
158 # KEY SW BATT VOLTAGE key switch battery potential

158 0 KSW BATT VOLTS HI HI Key Switch Battery Potential is above the HIGH HIGH
threshold
158 1 KSW BATT VOLTS LO LO Key Switch Battery Potential is below the LOW LOW threshold
158 15 KSW BATT VOLTS HI Key Switch Battery Potential is above the HIGH threshold
158 17 KSW BATT VOLTS LO Key Switch Battery Potential is below the LOW threshold
161 # TR INPUT SHAFT SPD Transmission Input Shaft Speed
167 # CHARGING SYSTM VOLT Charging System Voltage
168 # LOW BATT VOLT Low Battery Voltage string used in event log and/or Alarm and
Prealarm annunciation
171 # AMB AIR TEMP Ambient Air Temperature
172 # AIR INLET TEMP Air Inlet Temperature
173 # EXHAUST GAS TEMP Exhaust Gas Temperature
174 # FUEL TEMP Fuel Temperature
174 0 Fuel Temp EXT HI Fuel Temp (Extremely High)
174 3 Fuel Tmp Sns Volt HI Fuel Temp Sensor Input Voltage (High)
174 4 Fuel Tmp Sns Volt LO Fuel Temp Sensor Input Voltage (Low)

6-4 9469200996

174 16 Fuel Temp MHI Fuel Temp (Moderately High)
175 # ENG OIL TEMP Engine Oil Temperature
176 # TRBO CH OIL TEMP Turbo Charger Oil Temperature
188 # IDLE SPEED Idle Speed parameter
188 17 SPEED AT IDLE LO Engine Idle speed is below the LOW threshold
189 # RATED SPEED Engine Rated Speed
189 0 Engine Spd DERATE Engine Speed Derate
190 0 Engine OvrSpd EXTRM Engine Overspeed (Extreme)
190 1 ENGINE SPEED LOW Engine speed is below the LOW threshold
190 16 Engine OvrSpd MODRT Engine Overspeed (Moderate)
190 17 SPEED AT IDLE LO Engine Idle speed is below the LOW threshold
190 # ENGINE SPEED Engine Speed
191 # TR OUTPUT SHAFT SPD Transmission Output Shaft Speed
237 2 VIN Data MisMatch VIN Data Mismatch with other controllers
247 # ENGINE HOURS Engine Run Time in Hours
250 # TOTAL FUEL USED Total Fuel Usage
354 # RELATIVE HUMIDITY Relative Humidity
412 # EGR GAS TEMP Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Gas Temperature
412 0 EGR Temp EXT HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temp (Extremely High)
412 3 EGR Temp In Vlt HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temp Input Voltage (High)
412 4 EGR Temp In Vlt LO Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temp Input Voltage (Low)
412 16 EGR Temp MHI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temp (Moderately High)
441 # AUX TEMP 1 Aux Temperature 1
443 # BATTERY VOLT 2 Battery Voltage 2
444 # AUX PRESSURE2 Auxiliary Pressure 2
515 # DESIRED SPEED speed demand desired from the engine.

520 # RETARDER % TORQUE retarder % torque
523 # TRANS CURRNT GEAR Transmission Current Gear
524 # TRANS SELECTD GEAR Transmission Selected Gear
558 # ACCEL PEDAL IDLE SW Accelerator Pedal Idle Switch
559 # ACCEL PEDAL KICKDN SW Accelerator Pedal Kickdown Switch

563 # ABS ACTIVE Antilock Brake System (ABS) active
573 # TRQCNV LOCKUP ENGAGD Transmission Torque Converter Lockup Engaged
574 # TR SHIFT IN PROGRESS Transmission Shift in Process
596 # CRUISE CNTL ENABLE SW Cruise Control Enable Switch
597 # BRAKE SWITCH Brake Switch
598 # CLUTCH SWITCH Clutch Switch
599 # CRUISE CNTL SET SW Cruise Control Set Switch
600 # CRUISE CNTL COAST SW Cruise Control Coast (Decelerate) Switch
601 # CRUISE CNTL RESUME SW Cruise Control Resume Switch
602 # CRUISE CNTL ACCEL SW Cruise Control Accelerate Switch
9469200996 6-5

609 # CONTROLLER #2 Controller Number 2
611 # SYS DIAGNST CODE 1 System Diagnostic Code 1
611 0 LOSS OF VOLTAGE Loss of Voltage Sensing from Voltage Regulator over CAN Bus
SENSING
611 3 Inj Short to PWR Injector Wiring Shorted to Power
611 4 Inj Short to GND Injector Wiring Shorted to Ground
612 14 EDM FAULT Exciter Diode Monitor Fault Status from Voltage Regulator over
CAN Bus
620 # 5 VOLT SUPPLY 5 Volt Supply
623 # RED STOP LAMP Red Stop Lamp
624 # DIAGNOSTIC LAMP Diagnostic Lamp

624 # COMBINED YELLOW a Yellow Alarm from the Engine ECU
625 # PROP COMM NETWK 1 Proprietary Communications Network 1

627 1 Inj Spply Vlt Problm Injector Supply Voltage Problem
627 16 ECU Power Volt HI ECU Power High Voltage
627 18 ECU Power Volt LO ECU Power Low Voltage
627 13 ECU ERROR ECU Error
628 # PROGRAM MEMORY Program Memory
629 # CONTROLLER #1 Controller 1

630 # ECU INTERNAL ERROR ECU Internal Error
630 # ECU INTERNAL ERROR ECU Internal Error
632 # FUEL SHUTOFF 1 Fuel shutoff 1 control
632 5 FUEL SHUTOFF Fuel shutoff is shorted or open

OPEN/SHORT
632 7 FUEL PRESSURE LOW Fuel pressure is low
632 12 FUEL SHUTOFF Fuel shutoff is shorted or open

MALFUNCTN
633 # THROTTLE ACT 1 CNTL Throttle Actuator 1 Control
636 # ENG POSITION SENSOR Engine Position Sensor
636 2 Pump Pos Sns Noisy Pump Position Sensor Input Noise
636 5 Pump Pos Sns Curr LO Pump Position Sensor Current (Low)
636 6 Pump Pos Sns Curr HI Pump Position Sensor Current (High)
636 8 Pump Pos Sns In MSNG Pump Position Sensor Input Missing
636 10 Pump Pos Sns In ERR Pump Position Sensor Input Pattern Error
637 2 Crank Pos Sns Noisy Crank Position Input Noise
637 5 Crank Pos Sns Curr LO Crank Position Sensor Current (Low)
637 6 Crank Pos Sns Curr HI Crank Position Sensor Current (High)
637 7 Crnk/Pmp Pos Tmg OOS Crank/Pump Position Timing Moderately Out of Sync
637 8 Crank Pos Sns MSNG Crank Position Missing
637 10 Crank Pos Sns In ERR Crank Position Input Pattern Error
639 # J1939 NETWORK 1 J1939 Network number 1
641 4 Trbo Actuator ERR Turbo Actuator Error
641 12 ECU/Trbo Comm ERR ECU/Turbo Communication Error

6-6 9469200996

641 13 TrboAct Lrnd Val ERR Turbo Actuator Learned Value Error
641 16 Trbo Act Temp MHI Turbo Actuator Temp (Moderately High)
651 2 Cyl 1 EUI PN INVLD Cylinder #1 EUI Part Number (Invalid)
651 5 Cyl 1 EUI Ckt OPEN Cylinder #1 EUI Circuit (Open)
651 6 Cyl 1 EUI Ckt SHORT Cylinder #1 EUI Circuit (Shorted)
651 7 Cyl 1 EUI Ckt MECH FL Cylinder #1 EUI Circuit (Mechanical Failure)
651 13 Cyl 1 EUI QR INVLD Cylinder #1 EUI Circuit QR Code (Invalid)
651 # CYLINDER 1 INJECTOR Cylinder 1 Injector

9469200996 6-7

667 # CYLINDER 17 INJECTOR Cylinder 17Injector
675 # ENG GLOW PLUG LAMP Glow Plug Lamp
676 # ENG GLOW PLUG RELAY Engine Glow Plug Relay
677 # ENGINE START RELAY Engine Start Relay
697 # AUX PWM DRIVER 1 Auxiliary PWM Driver 1
701 # AUX I/O 1 Auxiliary I/O 1
723 # SPEED SENSOR #2 Engine Speed Sensor #2
724 # O2 SENSOR O2 Sensor
729 # INTAKE HEATER #1 Intake Air Heater #1
730 # INTAKE HEATER #2 Intake Air Heater #2
731 # KNOCK SENSOR #1 Knock Sensor 1
855 # HEATER CIRCUIT 2 UEGO Heater Circuit #02

6-8 9469200996

870 # HEATER REGEN SYSTM Heater Regeneration System
898 2 REQ SPD DATA ERRATIC Speed Demand Data is erratic
898 9 Spd/Trq Msg INVLD Vehicle Speed/Torque Message Invalid
898 # ENGINE REQSTED SPEED Engine Requested Speed
904 # FRONT AXLE SPEED Front Axle Speed
920 # AUDIBLE ALARM Audible Alarm
923 # PWM OUTPUT Engine PWM Output
924 # AUX OUT #1 Auxiliary Output 1
966 31 ENGINE TST MD SW ON Engine Test Mode Switch On
970 2 Aux Eng SD SW INVLD Auxiliary Engine Shutdown Switch (Invalid)
970 31 Aux Eng SD SW ACTV Auxiliary Engine Shutdown Switch Active
971 31 Eng Derate SW ACTV External Engine Derate Switch Active
973 # ENG RETARDR SELECTN Engine Retarder Selection
974 # REMOTE ACCEL PEDAL Remote Accelerator Pedal
975 # FAN SPEED Engine Fan Speed
977 # FAN DRIVE STATE Fan Drive State
986 # REQSTD FAN SPEED Requested Fan Speed
1004 # TRIP VEH IDLE FL USED Trip Vehicle Idle Fuel Used
1005 # TRIP CRUISE FL USED Trip Cruise Fuel Used
1015 # TRIP AVG LOAD FACTOR Trip Average Load Factor
1072 # ENG BRAKE OUTPUT 1 Engine Brake Output 1
1072 # ENG COMPR BRK OUTPUT1 Engine (Compression) Brake Output 1
1073 # ENG COMPR BRK OUTPUT2 Engine (Compression) Brake Output 2
1074 # ENG EXHAUST BRAKE OUT Engine Exhaust Brake Output
1075 5 Fuel TR Pump Curr LO Fuel Transfer Pump Current (Low)
1075 6 Fuel TR Pump Curr HI Fuel Transfer Pump Current (High)
1075 12 Fuel TR Pump ERR Fuel Transfer Pump (Error)
1079 # SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTS 1 Sensor Supply Voltage 1
1080 3 Snsr Supp 1 Volt LO Sensor Supply 1 Voltage (Low)
1080 4 Snsr Supp 1 Volt HI Sensor Supply 1 Voltage (High)
1081 # ENG WAIT TO START LMP Engine Wait to Start Lamp
1109 31 Eng Shutdown WARNING Engine Shutdown Warning
1109 # EPS SHUTDN APPROACHG Indicates that Engine Protective System Shutdown Is
Approaching
1110 31 Eng Prot Shutdown Engine Protection Shutdown
1127 # TURBOCHG1 BOOST PRS Turbo Charger 1 Boost Pressure

9469200996 6-9

1131 # INTK MNFLD2 TEMP Intake Manifold 2 Temperature
1136 # ECU TEMP ECU Temperature
1136 0 ECU Temp EXT HI ECU Temperature (Extremely High)
1136 15 ENG ECU TEMP HI ECU Temperature has exceeded the HIGH level
1136 16 ECU Temp MHI ECU Temperature (Moderately High)
1168 # TRBO CH2 OIL PRESS Turbo Charger 2 Oil Pressure
1169 # TURBO CH2 SPEED Turbo 2 Speed
1172 3 Trbo Cmp Tmp Volt HI Turbo Compressor Inlet Temp Input Voltage (High)
1172 4 Trbo Cmp Tmp Volt LO Turbo Compressor Inlet Temp Input Voltage (Low)
1172 16 Trbo Cmp In Tmp MHI Turbo Compressor Inlet Temp (Moderately High)
1180 0 Trbo Trbn Tmp EXT HI Turbo Turbine Inlet Temp (Extremely High)
1180 16 Trbo Trbn In Tmp MHI Turbo Turbine Inlet Temp (Moderately High)
1184 # TURBOCHG1 OUTLET Turbo Charger 1 Outlet Temperature
TEMP
TEMP
TEMP
TEMP
1188 # TRBO WST GT ACT1 POS Turbo Waste Gate Actuator 1 Position
1189 # TRBO WST GT ACT2 POS Turbo Waste Gate Actuator 2 Position
1192 # TRBO WSTGT ACT AIR PR Engine Turbocharger Waste gate Actuator Control Air Pressure
1203 # INTRCOOLER COOLNT PRS Intercooler Coolant Pressure
1204 # ELECTRICAL LOAD Electrical Load
1208 # PRE FLT OIL PRESSR Oil Pressure Before Oil Filter
1209 # EXH PRESSURE Exhaust Pressure
1213 # MALFUNC LAMP the malfunction indicator lamp status that is broadcast by ECU
as part of diagnostic trouble code information
1227 # TEST LIMIT MAX Caption Indicating Test Limit Maximum
1237 # ENG SHUTDN ORIDE SW Engine Shutdown Override Switch
1237 31 AL OVERRIDE ON Alarm Override is On
1239 # FUEL LEAKAGE1 Fuel Leakage 1 Parameter
1240 # FUEL LEAKAGE2 Fuel Leakage 2 Parameter
1247 # ENGINE POWER Engine Power
1268 # IGNITION COIL 1 Engine Ignition Coil 1

6-10 9469200996

1321 # STARTER LKOUT RLY DRV Engine Starter Solenoid Lockout Relay Driver Circuit
1322 # MULTI CYL MISFIRE Misfire detected on multiple engine cylinders
1323 # MISFIRE CYLINDER 1 Misfire detected on a single engine cylinder

9469200996 6-11

1347 # FUEL PUMP ASSY #1 Fuel Pump Pressurizing Assembly #1
1347 3 Pump Ctrl Vlv Curr HI Pump Control Valve Current (High)
1347 5 Pmp Ctrl Vlv C MSMCH Pump Control Valve Current (Mismatch)
1347 7 Fuel Rl Prs Ctrl ERR Fuel Rail Pressure Control (Error)
1348 # FUEL PUMP ASSY #2 Fuel Pump Pressurizing Assembly #2
1349 # INJ RAIL PRS2 Injection Metering Rail 2 Pressure
1350 # TIME SINCE LST SERVC Time Since Last Service
1352 # KNOCK LVL CYL 1 Engine Cylinder 1 Knock Level
1380 # OIL RESVR LEVEL Oil Reservoir Level
1384 # J1939 COMANDED SHUTDN J1939 Commanded Shutdown
1390 # FUEL VALVE1 INLET PRS Fuel Valve 1 Inlet Pressure
1391 # FUEL VALVE 1 DIFF PRS Engine Fuel Valve 1 Differential Pressure
1442 # FUEL VALVE1 POSITN Engine Fuel Valve 1 Position
1485 # ECU MAIN RELAY ECM Main Relay
1557 # FAN 2 DRIVE STATE Fan 2 Drive State
1569 31 Fuel Derate Fuel Derate
1623 # TACOGRPH OUT SHFT SPD Tachograph Output Shaft Speed
1624 # TACOGRPH VEHICLE SPD Tachograph Vehicle Speed
1633 # CRUISE CNTL PAUSE SW Cruise Control Pause Switch
1634 # CALIB VERIFICATN NMBR Calibration Verification Number
1636 # INTK MNFD1 TMP HI RES Intake Manifold 1 Air Temperature (High Resolution)
1638 # HYDRAULIC TEMP Hydraulic Temperature
1639 # FAN SPEED Fan Speed
1639 1 Fan Speed Zero Fan Speed Detected (Zero)
1639 16 Fan Speed HI Fan Speed Detected (High)
1639 18 Fan Speed LO Fan Speed Detected (Low)
1675 # STARTER MODE Engine Starter Mode
1692 # INTKMNFLD1 DESIRD PR Engine Intake Manifold Desired Absolute Pressure

6-12 9469200996

1695 # EGO SNSR FUEL CORRCTN Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Fueling Correction
1716 # RETRDR SEL NON ENGINE Retarder Selection non-engine
1761 # DEF 1 TANK LEVEL Diesel Exhaust Fluid 1 Tank Level
1908 # AUX VLV0 STATE CMD Aux Valve 0 State Command
2000 13 Security Violation Security Violation
2005 9 TSC CAN Msg NT RCV TSC CAN Message Not Received
2030 9 AC Clutch Msg NT RCV A/C Clutch Status CAN Message Not Received
2071 9 Tr Oil Can Msg NT RCV Trans. Oil, Tier Size, Vehicle Speed CAN Message Not
Received
2433 # EXH GAS TMP RT MNFLD Right Manifold Exhaust Gas Temperature
2434 # EXH GAS TMP LFT MNFLD Left Manifold Exhaust Gas Temperature
2436 # GEN AVG FREQUENCY Generator Average AC Frequency
2440 # GEN LL VOLTAGE Generator Line to Line Voltage
2452 # GEN TOTAL POWER Generator Total Real Power
2456 # TRBO 1 OUT TMP HI HI Turbocharger 1 outlet pressure is above the HIGH HIGH
threshold
2602 # HYDRAULIC OIL LVL Hydraulic Oil Level
2629 0 TRBO 1 OUT TMP HI HI Turbocharger 1 outlet pressure is above the HIGH HIGH
threshold
2629 15 TURBO 1 OUT TMP HI Turbocharger 1 outlet pressure is above the HIGH threshold
2630 0 EGR FrAir Tmp EXT HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Fresh Air Temp (Extremely High)
2630 3 EGR FrAir Tmp Vlt HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Fresh Air Temp Input Voltage
(High)
2630 4 EGR FrAir Tmp Vlt LO Exhaust Gas Recirculation Fresh Air Temp Input Voltage (Low)
2630 15 EGR FrAir Tmp HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Fresh Air Temp (High Least
Severe)
2630 16 EGR FrAir Tmp MHI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Fresh Air Temp (Moderately High)
2634 # POWER RELAY main Power Relay
2659 2 EGR Flo/Tmp MISMATCH Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow/Temp Mismatch
2659 15 EGR Flo Rt High Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow Rate (High Least Severe)
2659 17 EGR Flo Rt LO Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow Rate (Low Least Severe)
2790 16 Trbo Cmp Out Tmp HI Turbo Compressor Outlet Temp (Moderately High)
2791 2 EGR Vlv Pos Invld Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Position Invalid
2791 3 EGRVlv Pos In Vlt HI Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Position Input Voltage (High)
2791 4 EGRVlv Pos In Vlt LO Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Position Input Voltage (Low)
2791 13 EGR Vlv Control ERR Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Control Error
2791 31 EGR Valve Cal ERR Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Calibration Error
2791 # EGR VALVE CONTROL EGR Valve Control
2795 7 Trbo Act Pos MSMATCH Turbo Actuator Position Mismatch
2797 # INJECTOR GROUP 1 Engine Injector Group 1
2798 # INJECTOR GROUP 2 Engine Injector Group 2
2899 # START ENABL DEV 1 CFG Engine Start Enable Device 1 Configuration
2950 # INTK VALVE ACUATOR 1 Intake Valve Actuator 1
9469200996 6-13

2951 # INTK VALVE ACUATOR 2 Intake Valve Actuator 2
2980 # FUEL PRESSR Fuel Pressure
3031 # DEF TEMP DEF Temperature
3050 # CATALYST SYSTM MONITR Catalyst 1 System Monitor
3056 # EGO SENSOR MONITOR 1 Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor
3057 # EGO SENSOR MONITOR 2 Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor 2 Monitor
3217 # AFTR TRT 1 INTK O2 Aftertreatment 1 Intake O2
3218 # AFT1 INTK SNSPWR IN RG Aftertreatment 1 Intake Gas Sensor Power In Range
3219 # AFT1 INTK SNSR AT TMP Aftertreatment 1 Intake Gas Sensor at Temperature
3220 # AFT1 INTK NOX STBL Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOX Reading Stable
3221 # AFT1 INTK WR O2 STBL Aftertreatment 1 Intake Wide-Range Percent O2 Reading
Stable
3222 # AFT1 INTK SNS HTR FMI Aftertreatment 1 Intake Gas Sensor Heater Preliminary FMI
3224 # AFT1 INTK NOXSNSR FMI Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOX Sensor Preliminary FMI
3225 # AFT1 INTK O2 SNSR FMI Aftertreatment 1 Intake O2 Sensor Preliminary FMI
3226 # AFT 1 OUTLET NOX Aftertreatment 1 Outlet Nox
3227 # AFT 1 OUT OXYGN % Aftertreatment 1 Outlet Percent O2
3232 # AFT1 OUT SNS HTR FMI Aftertreatment 1 Outlet Gas Sensor Heater Preliminary FMI
3234 # AFT1 OUT NOX SNSR FMI Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOX Sensor Preliminary FMI
3242 # AFT1 DPF IN TEMP Aftertreatment1 DPF Intake Temperature
3246 # AFT1 DPF OUT TEMP Aftertreatment 1 DPF Outlet Temperature
3250 # DPF INTRMED GAS TEMP Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Intermediate Gas
Temperature
3251 # AFT1 DPF DIFF PRESSR Aftertreatment 1 DPF Differential Pressure
3256 # AFTR TRT 2 INTK O2 Aftertreatment 2 Intake Percent O2
3257 # AFT2 INTK SNSPWR IN RG Aftertreatment 2 Intake Gas Sensor Power In Range
3260 # AFT2 INTK WR O2 STBL Aftertreatment 2 Intake Wide-Range Percent O2 Reading
Stable
3261 # AFT2 INTK SNS HTR FMI Aftertreatment 2 Intake Gas Sensor Heater Preliminary FMI
3264 # AFT2 INTK O2 SNSR FMI Aftertreatment 2 Intake O2 Sensor Preliminary FMI
3271 # AFT2 OUT SNS HTR FMI Aftertreatment 2 Outlet Gas Sensor Heater Preliminary FMI
3361 # AFT1 CTLYST DOSE UNIT Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst Dosing Unit
3363 # AFT1 SCR TANK HTR Aftertreatment 1 SCR Tank Heater
3380 # FIELD VOLTAGE Field Voltage
3381 # FIELD CURRENT Field Current
3468 # FUEL TEMP 2 Fuel Temperature 2
3485 # AFT1 SUPPLY AIR PRESS Aftertreatment 1 Supply Air Pressure
3511 # SNSR SUPPLY VOLT 3 Sensor Supply Voltage 3

6-14 9469200996

3515 # DEF TEMP DEF Temperature
3516 # DEF CONCENTRATION Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst Reagent Concentration
3517 # DEF TANK 2 LVL % Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 2 Level %
3520 # DEF QUALITY Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst Reagent Properties Preliminary
FMI
3563 # INTK MNFLD1 PRESSURE Intake Manifold 1 Pressure
3597 # ECU SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1 ECU Power Supply Voltage 1
3601 # FUEL VLV LK TEST CTL Engine Fuel Shutoff Valve Leak Test Control
3605 # COOLANT PUMP CTL Coolant Pump Control
3607 # ENGINE SHUTDOWN Engine Shutdown
3609 # DPF INTAKE PRESSR 1 DPF Intake Pressure 1
3610 # DPF OUTLET PRESSR 1 DPF Outlet Pressure 1
3611 # DPF INTAKE PRESSR 2 DPF Intake Pressure 2
3612 # DPF OUTLET PRESSR 2 DPF Outlet Pressure 2
3668 # INTRCR CLNT LVL Intercooler Coolant Level
3673 # THROTTLE POSITION 2 Engine Throttle 2 Position
3695 # REGEN INHIBIT SWITCH Regenerate Inhibit Switch
3703 # DPF RGN INH DUE TO SW DPF Regeneration Inhibited Due to Inhibit Switch
3719 # DPF SOOT LEVEL % Soot level in the Diesel Particulate Filter
3719 0 DPF SOOT LVL EXT HI Diesel Particulate Filter Soot Level High - Most Severe Level
3719 15 DPF SOOT LVL HI Diesel Particulate Filter Soot Level High - Least Severe Level
3719 16 DPF SOOT LVL MOD HI Diesel Particulate Filter Soot Level High - Moderately Severe
Level
3720 # DPF ASH LEVEL % DPF Ash Level Percent
3822 # EGR1 VLV 2 POSITION Engine Exhaust Gas Recirculation 1 Valve 2 Position
3826 # DEF AVG CONSUMPTION DEF Average Consumption
3828 # DEF CURRNT CONSUMPTN DEF Current Consumption
3938 # GOVERNING BIAS Generator Governing Bias
4096 # NOx HI DEF EMPTY NOx Limits Exceeded Due to Diesel Exhaust Fluid Empty
4213 # ENG CRNK WITHOUT_FUEL Engine Crank Without Fuel
4257 # INJECTOR GROUP 3 Injector Group 3
4332 # DEF SYSTEM STATE DEF System State
4334 # DEF ABSOLUTE PRESSR DEF Absolute Pressure
4335 # DEF DOSING AIR ABS PR DEF Dosing Air Assist Absolute Pressure
4336 # AFT1 DOSE AIR ASSTVLV Aftertreatment 1 SCR Dosing Air Assist Valve
4348 # AFT1 REQ DOSING QTY Aftertreatment 1 Requested Dosing Reagent Quantity
4354 # AFT1 DEF LINE HTR Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst Reagent Line Heater 1
4360 # AFTTRT1 INTK GAS TMP Aftertreatment 1 Catalyst Intake Gas Temperature
4363 # AFTTRT1 OUT GAS TMP Aftertreatment 1 Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature
4364 # SCR CNVRSN EFFICIENCY SCR Conversion Efficiency
4375 # AFTTRT1 PUMP DRV % Aftertreatment 1 Catalyst Pump Drive Percentage
9469200996 6-15

4401 # AFT2 REQ DOSING QTY Aftertreatment 2 Requested Dosing Reagent Quantity
4415 # AFTTRT2 OUT GAS TMP Aftertreatment 2 Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature
4441 # AFTTRT2 PUMP DRV % Aftertreatment 2 Catalyst Pump Drive Percentage
4490 # SPECIFIC HUMIDITY Specific Humidity
4755 # AFT1 CTLYST DIFF PRS Aftertreatment 1 Gas Oxidation Catalyst Differential Pressure
4794 # AFT1 CTLYST SYS MSSNG Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst System Missing
4809 # AFT1 DEF WARM IN TMP Aftertreatment 1 Warm Up Diesel Oxidation Catalyst Inlet
Temperature
4810 # AFT1 DEF WARM OUT TMP Aftertreatment 1 Warm Up Diesel Oxidation Catalyst Outlet
Temperature
4990 # BATT CHARGER Battery Charger
5078 # AMBER WARNING Engine Amber Warning Lamp Command
5246 # SCR INDUCMT SEVERITY Selective Catalytic Reduction Inducement Severity Level
5264 # EGR2 VALVE 1 CONTROL Engine Exhaust Gas Recirculation 2 Valve 1 Control
5422 # CHG AIR B PRESSURE Charge Air B Pressure
5571 # FUEL RTN PRESSURE Fuel Return Path Pressure
10029 0 PURGE TIMEOUT ERROR Purge did not complete within the maximum allowed time
516098 # KNOCK SENSR 2 Knock Sensor 2
516131 # PROPANE/GAS LOCKOFF Propane/Natural Gas Lockoff
520555 # UEGO INRC Manufacturer Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer
for details.
520556 # EXH GAS SENSR 2 Exhaust Gas Sensor 2
520700 # TSC1 MESSAGE Torque/Speed Control 1 Message - Manufacturer Assignable
SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer for details.
520707 # DIAG TOOL CAN NETWK 1 Diagnostic Tool CAN Bus Network #1 - Manufacturer
Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer for details.
520708 # OHECS MESSAGE Manufacturer Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer
for details.
520709 # GTACP MESSAGE Manufacturer Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer
for details.
520710 # GC2 MESSAGE Manufacturer Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer
for details.
520711 # EBC1 MESSAGE Manufacturer Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer
for details.
520712 # ACS MESSAGE Manufacturer Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer
for details.
520713 # INTER ECU COMM MSG Inter-ECU Communications Message - Manufacturer
Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer for details.
520714 # CCVS MESSAGE Manufacturer Assignable SPN – Contact Engine Manufacturer
for details.
520837 1 STARTER SPEED LO LO Starter Speed is below the LOW LOW threshold
520838 1 RUN UP SPEED LO LO Run Up Speed is below the LOW LOW threshold
522192 12 MTU ENGINE BAD Component failure of the MTU engine control ECU
523212 # ENGPRT CAN MSG Proprietary MTU CAN Message
523216 # PREHTENCMD CAN MSG Proprietary MTU CAN Message

6-16 9469200996

523218 # RxCCVS CAN MSG Proprietary MTU CAN Message
523222 # TC01 CAN MSG Proprietary MTU CAN Message
523238 # SWTOUT CAN MSG Proprietary MTU CAN Message
523239 # DECV1 CAN MSG Proprietary MTU CAN Message
523240 # FUNMODCTL CAN MSG Proprietary MTU CAN Message
523350 # CYL BANK 1 INJECTORS Cylinder Bank 1 Injectors
523354 # ECU ERROR ECU Error
523370 # RAIL PRESSURE Rail Pressure
523450 # MULTI STATE SWITCH 1 Multi State Switch 1
523470 # RAIL PRESSURE LMT VLV Rail Pressure Limit Valve
523500 # CAN MSG TIMEOUT Can Message Timeout has occurred
523561 # INJECTN PERIOD CYL 1 Single Cylinder Injection Period
523602 # FAN SPEED Engine Fan Speed
523604 # RXENGTMP CAN MSG CAN Message
523605 # TSC1-AE MSG MISSING CAN Message
523606 # TSC1-AR MSG MISSING CAN Message
523607 # TSC1-DE MSG MISSING CAN Message
523608 # TSC1-DR MSG MISSING CAN Message
523609 # TSC1-PE MSG MISSING CAN Message
523610 # TSC1-VE MSG MISSING CAN Message
523611 # TSC1-VR MSG MISSING CAN Message
523613 # RAIL PRESSURE Rail Pressure
523615 # METERING UNIT VALVE Metering Unit Valve

9469200996 6-17
Table 6-3. DTCs Displayed by the DGC-2020ES (FMI Strings)

FMI String Displayed Description
0 DATA HI MOST SEVERE Data is higher than expected at the most severe level
1 DATA LO MOST SEVERE Data is lower than expected at the most severe level
2 DATA ERRATIC OR BAD Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
3 VOLTS HI OR SHORTED Measured voltage is higher than expected or shorted to a high source
4 VOLTS LO OR SHORTED Measured voltage is lower than expected or shorted to a low source
5 CURRENT LO OR OPEN Measured current is lower than expected or the circuit is open
6 CURRENT HI OR SHORTED Measured current is higher than expected or shorted
7 MECHANICAL SYSTM ERR Mechanical system error
8 FREQ OR PWM ERROR Error in frequency, pulse width or period of any frequency or PWM signal
is outside its predetermined limits
9 ABNORMAL UPDATE RATE Update rate of parameter is abnormal
10 DATA RT OF CHG ERR Rate of change of data is abnormal
11 FAILURE CAUSE UNKNOWN String indicating failure cause is unknown
12 BAD INTELLIGNT DEVICE Engine ECU is reporting that an intelligent device or component failure
has been detected
13 OUT OF CALIBRATION Device or parameter is out of calibration
14 CONSULT ENG MFG DATA User should consult engine manufacturer's data
15 DATA HI LST SEVERE Data is higher than expected at the least severe level
16 DATA HI MODERATE SVR Data is higher than expected at a moderately severe level
17 DATA LO LST SEVERE Data is lower than expected at the least severe level
18 DATA LO MODERATE SVR Data is lower than expected at a moderately severe level
19 NETWORK DATA ERR String Indicating Network Data contained an error indication
20 DATA DRIFTED HI Data has drifted to a value higher than the maximum valid value.
21 DATA DRIFTED LO Data has drifted to a value lower than the minimum valid value.
22 FMI RESERVED BY SAE This FMI is reserved by the Society of Automotive Engineers.
31 CONDTN EXST OR FMI NA If the SPN refers to a parameter with status of ON or OFF, an FMI of 31
indicates ON. If the SPN refers to a parameter with a numeric value, an
FMI of 31 indicates that there is no FMI to describe the parameter’s
condition.

6-18 9469200996

9469200996 7-1
7 • Yanmar Fault Codes

The Yanmar fault codes are actually J1939 Diagnostic Trouble Codes with an additional Yanmar Fault
Code designator.
The DGC-2020 obtains Yanmar diagnostic engine information from the Yanmar engine control unit
(ECU). The DGC-2020 will receive an unsolicited message of a currently active diagnostic trouble code
(DTC). Previously active DTCs are available upon request. Active and previously active DTCs can be
cleared on request. Table 7-1 lists the diagnostic information that the DGC-2020 obtains over the CAN
Bus interface.
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Information Obtained Over the CAN Bus Interface
Transmission
Parameter
Repetition Rate
Active diagnostic trouble code 1s
Lamp status 1s
Previously active diagnostic trouble code On request
Request to clear active DTCs On request
Request to clear previously active DTCs On request
DTCs are reported in coded diagnostic information that includes the Suspect Parameter Number (SPN),
Failure Mode Identifier (FMI), and Occurrence Count (OC). All parameters have an SPN and are used to
display or identify the items for which diagnostics are being reported. The FMI defines the type of failure
detected in the subsystem identified by an SPN. The reported problem may not be an electrical failure but
a subsystem condition needing to be reported to an operator or technician. The OC contains the number
of times that a fault has gone from active to previously active.
For certain DTCs, if the DGC-2020 recognizes a pair of SPN and FMI numbers, it displays a single string
as listed in Table 7-3. If the DGC-2020 recognizes an SPN in Table 7-3, but the FMI does not match the
FMI in Table 7-3, then it displays the text string from Table 7-3 corresponding to the table entry where the
FMI is # and a second text string corresponding to the FMI number listed in Table 7-2. For example, if the
DGC-2020 receives SPN 29 and FMI 13, it displays ACCEL PEDAL 2 POSITN and OUT OF
CALIBRATION. If the DGC-2020 does not have descriptive information about an SPN and FMI that was
received, the description will display as “NO TEXT AVAILABLE”.
The Yanmar Fault Code designator consists of a letter and a four-digit number in the form LNNNN, where
L is either a U or a P, and NNNN is a four-digit hexadecimal number. This code uniquely identifies the
Yanmar fault information. Consult the Yanmar engine documentation or contact Yanmar to determine the
corrected action that will remedy the fault.
Table 7-2. DTCs Displayed by the DGC-2020 (FMI Strings)

FMI Text Displayed Description
0 DATA HI MOST SEVERE Data is higher than expected at the most severe level
1 DATA LO MOST SEVERE Data is lower than expected at the most severe level
2 DATA ERRATIC OR BAD Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
3 VOLTS HI OR SHORTED Measured voltage is higher than expected or shorted to a high source
4 VOLTS LO OR SHORTED Measured voltage is lower than expected or shorted to a low source
5 CURRENT LO OR OPEN Measured current is lower than expected or the circuit is open
6 CURRENT HI OR SHORTED Measured current is higher than expected or shorted
7 MECHANICAL SYSTM ERR Mechanical system error
DGC-2020ES Yanmar Fault Codes

7-2 9469200996
FMI Text Displayed Description

8 FREQ OR PWM ERROR Error in frequency, pulse width or period of any frequency or PWM signal
is outside its predetermined limits.
9 ABNORMAL UPDATE RATE Update rate of parameter is abnormal.
10 DATA RT OF CHG ERR Rate of change of data is abnormal.
11 FAILURE CAUSE UNKNOWN String indicating failure cause is unknown.
12 BAD INTELLIGNT DEVICE Engine ECU is reporting that an intelligent device or component failure
has been detected.
13 OUT OF CALIBRATION Device or parameter is out of calibration.
14 CONSULT ENG MFG DATA User should consult engine manufacturer's data.
15 DATA HI LST SEVERE Data is higher than expected at the least severe level.
16 DATA HI MODERATE SVR Data is higher than expected at a moderately severe level.
17 DATA LO LST SEVERE Data is lower than expected at the least severe level.
18 DATA LO MODERATE SVR Data is lower than expected at a moderately severe level.
19 NETWORK DATA ERR String Indicating Network Data contained an error indication.
20 DATA DRIFTED HI Data has drifted to a value higher than the maximum valid value.
21 DATA DRIFTED LO Data has drifted to a value lower than the minimum valid value.
31 CONDTN EXST OR FMI NA If the SPN refers to a parameter with status of ON or OFF, an FMI of 31
indicates ON. If the SPN refers to a parameter with a numeric value, an
FMI of 31 indicates that there is no FMI to describe the parameter’s
condition.
Table 7-3. DTCs with Yanmar Fault Code Designators Displayed by the DGC-2020
Yanmar
SPN FMI Text Displayed Description
Code
28 0 ACCEL PEDAL 3 POSITN accelerator pedal 3 position P1126
51 3 ENG THROTTLE POSITN Engine Throttle Position P02E9
51 4 ENG THROTTLE POSITN Engine Throttle Position P02E8
91 3 ACCEL POSITION Accelerator Position P0123
91 4 ACCEL POSITION Accelerator Position P0122
100 1 ENG OIL PRESS Engine Oil Pressure P1198
100 4 ENG OIL PRESS Engine Oil Pressure P1192
102 3 INTK MANFLD P SNS intake manifold pressure sensor malfunction P0238
BAD
BAD
BAD
Yanmar Fault Codes DGC-2020ES

9469200996 7-3
Yanmar
Code
BAD
105 3 INTK MANFLD T SNS Intake Manifold Temperature Sensor Malfunction P040D
BAD
105 4 INTK MANFLD T SNS Intake Manifold Temperature Sensor Malfunction P040C
BAD
105 10 INTK MANFLD T SNS Intake Manifold Temperature Sensor Malfunction P1676
BAD
108 3 ATMOSPHERIC P SNS Caption string indicating Atmospheric Pressure P2229
BAD Sensor Malfunction
110 0 COOLANT TMP Engine Coolant Temperature P0217
110 3 COOLANT TMP SENSR Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor P0118
BAD Malfunction
BAD Malfunction
BAD Malfunction
157 0 INJ RAIL PRS Injector Rail Pressure P0088
157 16 INJ RAIL PRS Injector Rail Pressure P000F
167 1 CHARGING SYSTM Charging System Voltage P1568
VOLT
167 5 CHARGING SYSTM Charging System Voltage P1562
VOLT
172 3 AIR INLET TEMP Air Inlet Temperature P0113
172 4 AIR INLET TEMP Air Inlet Temperature P0112
173 3 EXH MANFLD T SNS Exhaust Manifold Temperature Sensor P0546
BAD Malfunction
BAD Malfunction
BAD Malfunction
174 0 FUEL TEMP Fuel Temperature P0168
190 0 ENGINE SPEED Engine Speed P0219
237 13 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U3002
237 31 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U0168
412 3 EGR GAS TMP SNSR EGR Gas Temperature Sensor Malfunction P041D
BAD
412 4 EGR GAS TMP SNSR EGR Gas Temperature Sensor Malfunction P041C
BAD
412 10 EGR GAS TMP SNSR EGR Gas Temperature Sensor Malfunction P1675
BAD
630 12 EE PROM the EEPROM memory inside the engine ECU P0601
633 3 SCV (MPROP) Proprietary caption text for YANMAR Diagnostic P0629
Trouble Codes

7-4 9469200996
Yanmar
Code
Trouble Codes
Trouble Codes
651 3 CYLINDER 4 INJECTOR Cylinder 4 Injector P1271
1209 3 EXH MANFLD P SNS Exhaust Manifold Pressure Sensor Malfunction P0473
BAD
BAD
BAD
BAD
1485 2 ECU MAIN RELAY ECU Main Relay P068A
1485 7 ECU MAIN RELAY ECU Main Relay P068B
2791 0 EGR VALVE Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Malfunction P0404
MALFUNCTN
MALFUNCTN
MALFUNCTN
2791 9 EGR VALVE Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Malfunction U0401
MALFUNCTN
MALFUNCTN
2797 6 INJECTOR GROUP 1 Engine Injector Group 1 P1146
2798 6 INJECTOR GROUP 2 Engine Injector Group 2 P1149
2950 3 INTK THROTTL DRV CKT Engine Intake Throttle Drive Circuit P1658
3242 0 DPF INLET T SENSR Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Inlet Temperature P1436

9469200996 7-5
Yanmar
Code
3242 10 DPF INLET T SENSR Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Inlet Temperature P167E
3250 0 DPF INTRMED GAS Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Intermediate P1426
TEMP Temperature Sensor Malfunction
3250 1 DPF INTRMD T SNS BAD Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Intermediate P0420
Temperature Sensor Malfunction
3250 10 DPF INTRMD T SNS BAD Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Intermediate P167A
3251 0 DPF DIFF PRS SNSR Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Differential P2452
BAD Pressure Sensor Malfunction
3251 10 DPF DIFF PRS SNSR Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Differential P167B
3609 3 DPF HIGH PRS SNS BAD Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) High Pressure P1455
Sensor Malfunction
3609 4 DPF HIGH PRS SNS BAD Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) High Pressure P1454
Sensor Malfunction
3609 10 DPF HIGH PRS SNS BAD Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) High Pressure P167C
Sensor Malfunction
3695 14 REGEN INHIBITED Text announcing that diesel particulate filter P1425
regeneration is disabled
3719 0 DPF SOOT LEVEL % the level of soot in the Diesel Particulate Filter P1424
3720 0 DPF ASH LEVEL % the level of ash in the Diesel Particulate Filter P1420
3720 16 DPF ASH LEVEL % the level of ash in the Diesel Particulate Filter P242F
4257 12 INJECTOR COMMON Injector common P0611
4795 31 DPF SUBSTRATE the substrate has been removed from the Diesel P226D
REMOVED Particulate Filter (DPF)
522243 5 ENGINE START RELAY Engine Start Relay P0543
522243 6 ENGINE START RELAY Engine Start Relay P0541
522323 0 AIR CLEANER SWITCH the Air Cleaner Switch P1101
522329 0 OIL/WATER the Oil/Water Separator Device P1151
SEPARATOR
522400 2 CRANKSHAFT SENSOR Crankshaft Sensor P0336
522400 5 CRANKSHAFT SENSOR Crankshaft Sensor P0337
522401 2 CAMSHAFT SENSOR Camshaft Sensor P0341
Trouble Codes
Trouble Codes

7-6 9469200996
Yanmar
Code
522572 6 SCV (MPROP) Proprietary caption text for YANMAR Diagnostic P062A
Trouble Codes
Trouble Codes
522573 0 DPF Diesel Particulate Filter P2463
522576 12 EE PROM EEPROM memory inside the engine ECU P160E
522578 12 EE PROM EEPROM memory inside the engine ECU P160F
MALFUNCTN
MALFUNCTN
522581 7 EGR VALVE Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Malfunction P148A
MALFUNCTN
522582 7 EGR VALVE Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Malfunction P049D
MALFUNCTN
MALFUNCTN
MALFUNCTN
522585 12 ECU INTERNAL ERROR ECU Internal Error P1613
522596 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U0292
522597 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1301
522599 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1292
522600 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1293
522601 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1294
522603 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1296
522605 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1298
522609 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1300
522610 9 EGR VALVE Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Malfunction U010B
MALFUNCTN
522611 9 EXHAUST THROTTLE Exhaust Throttle U1107
522617 12 EGR VALVE Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Malfunction U1401
MALFUNCTN
522618 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1302
522619 9 CAN 2 Can Bus 2 U1303
522623 7 ACCELERTN SNSR 1 / 2 Acceleration Sensor 1 or Acceleration Sensor 2 P1647
522624 7 ACCELERTN SNSR 1 / 2 Acceleration Sensor 1 or Acceleration Sensor 2 P1646
522746 12 EXHAUST THROTTLE the Exhaust Throttle P1438
523249 5 CRANK/CAM SENSOR Crankshaft Sensor or the Camshaft sensor P0008
9469200996 7-7
Yanmar
Code
523460 7 RAIL PRESSURE the Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor P1670
SENSOR
523462 13 QR DATA YANMAR specific fault code P1648
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
523489 0 RAIL PRESSURE Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor P1668
SENSOR
523491 0 RAIL PRESSURE Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor P1669
SENSOR

7-8 9469200996

9469200996 8-1
8 • Event Recording
An event log retains history of system events in nonvolatile memory. Fifty event records are retained and
each record contains a time stamp of the first and last event occurrence, and the number of occurrences
for each event. In addition, each record contains details of the time, date, and engine hours for the most
recent 30 occurrences of the event. The number of occurrences stops incrementing at 99. If an event
occurs which is of a type that differs from those in the 50 records in memory, the record that has the
oldest “last” event occurrence is removed from the log, and the new category takes its place. Since 50
event records with up to 99 occurrences each are retained in memory, a history of nearly 5,000 specific
events are retained by the DGC-2020ES. Detailed occurrence information is retained for the most recent
30 occurrences of each event record, and there are 50 event records. Thus the time, date, and engine
hours details for up to 1,500 specific event occurrences are retained in the event log.
Event Log
An event log can be downloaded into BESTCOMSPlus® for viewing and storage. The Options button is
used to save the entire event log to a file, or to save the list to the computer clipboard making it available
for insertion into other software applications. It is possible to copy a portion of the log to the computer
clipboard by selecting the desired portion with the mouse then using the Options->Copy Selection feature.
The Download button refreshes the event log list by performing a fresh download of the list from the
DGC-2020ES. The Clear button gives the user the option of clearing selected or all event logs. Refer to
Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1. Metering Explorer, Event Log Screen (Sorted by Event ID)
The event log may also be viewed on the front panel display by navigating to Metering, Alarms-Status,
Event Log. Use the Up/Down keys to highlight an event and press the Right key to view the summary of
that event record. The summary contains the description of the event, date, time, and engine hours of the
first occurrence of the event, along with date, time, and engine hours of the most recent occurrence of the
event. To view details of specific event occurrences, press the Down key until DETAILS is highlighted,
and then, press the Right key. The occurrence number can be changed by pressing the Edit key,
Up/Down keys to select #, and pressing the Edit key again to exit. Table 8-1 lists all possible event strings
(as shown in the event log).
DGC-2020ES Event Recording

8-2 9469200996
Table 8-1. Event List

Event String Event Description Event Type
27 UNDVOLT TRP A 27 Undervoltage Trip Alarm
27 UNDVOLT TRP P 27 Undervoltage Trip Pre-Alarm
47 PHS IMBAL TRP A 47 Phase Imbalance Trip Alarm
47 PHS IMBAL TRP P 47 Phase Imbalance Trip Pre-Alarm
50 OVRCURR TRP A 50 Overcurrent Trip Alarm
50 OVRCURR TRP P 50 Overcurrent Trip Pre-Alarm
59 OVRVOLT TRP A 59 Overvoltage Trip Alarm
59 OVRVOLT TRP P 59 Overvoltage Trip Pre-Alarm
81O OVRFREQ TRP A 81 Overfrequency Trip Alarm
81O OVRFREQ TRP P 81 Overfrequency Trip Pre-Alarm
81U UNDFREQ TRP A 81 Underfrequency Trip Alarm
81U UNDFREQ TRP P 81 Underfrequency Trip Pre-Alarm
ATS INPUT CLOSED ATS Input Status
AUTO RESTART Automatic Restart in Progress Status
AUTO RESTART FAIL A Automatic Restart Fail Alarm
BATT CHRG FAIL A Battery Charger Fail Alarm
BATT CHRG FAIL P Battery Charger Fail Pre-Alarm
BATT OVERVOLT P Battery Overvoltage Pre-Alarm
BATTLE OVERRIDE Battle Override Status
CAN BUS OFF CAN Bus entered Bus Off state Status
CAN ERROR PASSIVE CAN Bus entered Error Passive state Status
CEM COMM FAIL P CEM-2020 Communications Failure Pre-Alarm
CEM HW MISMATCH P Connected CEM-2020 is wrong type Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 AC OFF P Battery Charger 1, AC Off Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 BATT FAIL P Battery Charger 1, Battery Failure Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 COMMS FAIL P Battery Charger 1, Communications Failure Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 FAILURE P Battery Charger 1,Charger Failure Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 HI DC VOLTS P Battery Charger 1,High Output Voltage Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 INVALID SETTINGS P Battery Charger 1,Invalid Settings Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 LO CRANKING V P Battery Charger 1,Low Cranking Voltage Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 LOW DC VOLTS P Battery Charger 1, Low Output Voltage Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 SINGLE UNIT FAIL P Battery Charger 1,Single Unit Failure Pre-Alarm
CHARGER1 THERMAL LIMIT P Battery Charger 1,Thermal Limit Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 AC OFF P Battery Charger 2, AC Off Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 BATT FAIL P Battery Charger 2, Battery Failure Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 COMMS FAIL P Battery Charger 2, Communications Failure Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 FAILURE P Battery Charger 2,Charger Failure Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 HI DC VOLTS P Battery Charger 2,High Output Voltage Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 INVALID SETTINGS P Battery Charger 2,Invalid Settings Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 LO CRANKING V P Battery Charger 2,Low Cranking Voltage Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 LOW DC VOLTS P Battery Charger 2, Low Output Voltage Pre-Alarm
CHARGER2 SINGLE UNIT FAIL P Battery Charger 2,Single Unit Failure Pre-Alarm
Event Recording DGC-2020ES

9469200996 8-3

CHARGER2 THERMAL LIMIT P Battery Charger 2,Thermal Limit Pre-Alarm
CHECKSUM FAIL P Corrupt user settings or firmware code Pre-Alarm
COMBINED RED A Combined Red Alarm
COMBINED YELLOW P Combined Yellow Pre-Alarm
CONFIG ELEMENT X A (X = 1 to 8) Configurable Element X (X = 1 to 8) Alarm
CONFIG ELEMENT X P (X = 1 to 8) Configurable Element X (X = 1 to 8) Pre-Alarm
COOL LVL SNDR FL A Coolant Level Sender Fail Alarm
COOL SNDR FAIL Coolant Temperature Sender Fail Status
COOL SNDR FAIL A Coolant Temperature Sender Fail Alarm
COOL SNDR FAIL P Coolant Temperature Sender Fail Pre-Alarm
DEFAULTS LOADED Default settings were uploaded into the DGC, Status
DEF FLUID EMPTY P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Empty Pre-Alarm
DEF FLUID LOW P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Low Pre-Alarm
DEF CONSUMPTN ERR P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Consumption Incorrect Pre-Alarm
DEF INDUCEMENT P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Inducement Pre-Alarm
DEF INDUCMT O-RIDE P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Inducement Override Pre-Alarm
DEF LOW SEVERE P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Low Severe Pre-Alarm
DEF PRESVR INDUCMT P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pre-Severe Inducement Pre-Alarm
DEF QUALITY POOR P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Quality Poor Pre-Alarm
DEF SEVERE INDUCMT P Diesel Exhaust Fluid Severe inducement Pre-Alarm
DEF TAMPERING Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tampering Pre-Alarm
DEF WARNING Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pre-Inducement Warning Level 1 Pre-Alarm
DEF WARNING LEVEL 2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pre-Inducement Warning Level 2 Pre-Alarm
DGC HEARTBEAT FAIL P DGC Heartbeat Fail Pre-Alarm
DIAG TRBL CODE P Diagnostic Trouble Code Pre-Alarm
DPF REGNRATE DISABLD P Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Disabled Pre-Alarm
DPF REGEN REQD P Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Required Pre-Alarm
DPF SOOT LVL EXT HI P Diesel Particulate Filter Soot Level Extremely High Pre-Alarm
DPF SOOT LVL MOD HI P Diesel Particulate Filter Soot Level Moderately High Pre-Alarm
ECU SHUTDOWN A ECU Shutdown Alarm
EMERGENCY STOP A Emergency Stop Alarm
ENGINE RUNNING Engine Running Status
EPS SUPPLYING LOAD Emergency Power System is Supplying Load Status
FUEL FLT PRS HI P Fuel Filter Differential Pressure High Pre-Alarm
FUEL LEAK 1 P Fuel Filter 1 Leak Pre-Alarm
FUEL LEAK 2 P Fuel Filter 2 Leak Pre-Alarm
FUEL LEAK DETECT A Fuel Leak Detect Alarm
FUEL LEAK DETECT P Fuel Leak Detect Pre-Alarm
FUEL LEVL SENDR A Fuel Level Sender Fail Alarm
FUEL LEVL SENDR FAIL Fuel Level Sender Fail Status
FUEL LEVL SENDR P Fuel Level Sender Fail Pre-Alarm
GEN TEST LOADED Generator Exerciser Test with Load Status
GEN TEST UNLOADED Generator Exerciser Test without Load Status

8-4 9469200996

GLBL SNDR FAIL A Global Sender Fail Alarm
GN BKR CL FL P Generator Breaker Fail to Close Pre-Alarm
GN BKR OP FL P Generator Breaker Fail to Open Pre-Alarm
GN BKR SYN FL P Generator Breaker Synchronization Fail Pre-Alarm
HI COOLANT TMP A High Coolant Temp Alarm
HI COOLANT TMP P High Coolant Temp Pre-Alarm
HI DAY TANK LEVEL P High Day Tank Level Pre-Alarm
HI ECU VOLTS A High ECU Supply Voltage Alarm
HI EXHAUSE B T P High Exhaust Temp B Pre-Alarm
HI EXHAUST A T P High Exhaust Temp A Pre-Alarm
HI PRESSURE IN 1 P High Pressure Input 1 Pre-Alarm
HI PRESSURE IN 2 P High Pressure Input 2 Pre-Alarm
HI SUPPLY VOLTS P High Voltage Supply Pre-Alarm
HI T FUEL P High Fuel Temp Pre-Alarm
HIGH AMB TEMP P High Ambient Temp Pre-Alarm
HIGH CHARGE AIR TEMP A High Charge Air Temp Alarm
HIGH CHARGE AIR TEMP P High Charge Air Temp Pre-Alarm
HIGH COIL TEMP 1 P High Temp Coil 1 Pre-Alarm
HIGH COOLANT TEMP A High Coolant Temp Alarm
HIGH COOLANT TEMP P High Coolant Temp Pre-Alarm
HIGH ECU TEMPERATURE P High ECU Temp Pre-Alarm
HIGH EXHAUST TEMP P High Exhaust Temp Pre-Alarm
HIGH FUEL LEVEL P High Fuel Level Pre-Alarm
HIGH FUEL RAIL PRESS P High Fuel Rail Pressure Pre-Alarm
HIGH INTRCOOLER TEMP P High Intercooler Temp Pre-Alarm
HIGH OIL TEMPERATURE P High Oil Temp Pre-Alarm
HIGH OIL TERMPERATURE A High Oil Temp Alarm
HIGH STRG TANK LEVEL P High Storage Tank Level Pre-Alarm
IDLE SPD LO P Idle Speed Low Pre-Alarm
INPUT X A (X = 1 to 17) User Configurable Input X (X = 1 to 17) Alarm
INPUT X P (X = 1 to 17) User Configurable Input X (X = 1 to 17) Pre-Alarm
LO AFTERCLR COOL LVL A Low After Cooler Cool Level Alarm
LO CHG AIR CLNT LVL P Low Charge Air Coolant Level Pre-Alarm
LO DAY TANK LEVEL P Low Day Tank Level Pre-Alarm
LO ECU VOLTS P Low ECU Supply Voltage Pre-Alarm
LO FUEL DLV PRESSURE A Low Fuel Delivery Pressure Alarm
LO SUPPLY VOLTS P Low Voltage Supply Pre-Alarm
LOAD TAKEOVER Load Takeover Status
LOGIC OUPUT A Logic Output Alarm
LOGIC OUPUT P Logic Output Pre-Alarm
LOSS OF VOLT Voltage Sensing Fail Status

9469200996 8-5

LOSS OF VOLT A Voltage Sensing Fail Alarm
LOSS OF VOLT P Voltage Sensing Fail Pre-Alarm
LOSS REM COMS P Loss of Remote Module Communication Pre-Alarm
LOST ECU COMM A Loss of ECU Communication Alarm
LOST ECU COMM P Loss of ECU Communication Pre-Alarm
LOW BATT VOLT P Low Battery Voltage Pre-Alarm
LOW CHARGE AIR PRESS P Low Charge Air Pressure Pre-Alarm
LOW COOL LEVEL A Low Coolant Level Alarm
LOW COOL LEVEL P Low Coolant Level Pre-Alarm
LOW COOL TMP A Low Coolant Temperature Alarm
LOW COOL TMP P Low Coolant Temperature Pre-Alarm
LOW COOLANT LEVEL P Low Coolant Level Pre-Alarm
LOW FUEL DELIV PRESS P Low Fuel Delivery Pressure Pre-Alarm
LOW FUEL LEVEL A Low Fuel Level Alarm
LOW FUEL LEVEL P Low Fuel Level Pre-Alarm
LOW FUEL RAIL PRESS P Low Fuel Rail Pressure Pre-Alarm
LOW OIL PRES A Low Oil Pressure Alarm
LOW OIL PRES P Low Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm
LOW OIL PRESSURE A Low Oil Pressure Alarm
LOW OIL PRESSURE P Low Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm
LOW STRG TANK LEVEL P Low Storage Tank Level Pre-Alarm
MAINS FAIL TEST Mains Fail Test Status
MAINT INTERVAL P Maintenance Interval Pre-Alarm
MF TRANSFER Mains Fail Transfer Complete Status
MF TRANSFER FAIL Mains Fail Transfer Fail Status
MN BKR CL FL P Mains Breaker Fail to Close Pre-Alarm
MN BKR OP FL P Mains Breaker Fail to Open Pre-Alarm
MPU FAIL P Magnetic Pickup Fail Pre-Alarm
MULTIPLE CEM P Multiple CEM-2020’s Pre-Alarm
NORM SHUTDOWN Normal Shutdown Status
OIL SNDR FAIL Oil Pressure Sender Fail Status
OIL SNDR FAIL A Oil Pressure Sender Fail Alarm
OIL SNDR FAIL P Oil Pressure Sender Fail Pre-Alarm
OVERCRANK A Overcrank Alarm
OVERSPD TEST ON P Overspeed Test On Pre-Alarm
OVERSPEED A Overspeed Alarm
PRIMING FAULT P Priming Fault Pre-Alarm
PROT SHUTDOWN Protective Shutdown Status
REV BUS ROT P Reverse Bus Rotation Pre-Alarm
REV GEN ROT P Reverse Generator Rotation Pre-Alarm
RUNUP SPD LO P Run Up Speed Low Pre-Alarm
SERFLASH RD FAIL Serial Flash Read Fail Pre-Alarm
SPD SNDR FAIL Speed Sender Fail Status

8-6 9469200996

SPD SNDR FAIL A Speed Sender Fail Alarm
SPEED DMD FL P Speed Demand Fail Pre-Alarm
SPEED TOO LOW P Engine Speed Too Low Pre-Alarm
SS OVERRIDE ON P Shutdown Override Pre-Alarm
START SPEED LOW P Start Speed Low Pre-Alarm
VOLTAGE SENSE FAIL Voltage Sensing Fail Status
VOLTAGE SENSE FAIL A Voltage Sensing Fail Alarm
VOLTAGE SENSE FAIL P Voltage Sensing Fail Pre-Alarm
UNKNOWN SHUTDOWN A Unknown Shutdown Alarm
WEAK BATTERY P Weak Battery Pre-Alarm

9469200996 9-1
Communications

the main bus.
Inputs and Outputs


Metering/Display
9-2 9469200996

43, and 45).

36, 37, and 38.


rotation.
9469200996 9-3

ground.
overall system.

manual.
screen.
DETECTION screen.
9-4 9469200996
original diagram.

original diagram.

9469200996 9-5
original diagram.

original diagram.

CEM DEBUG
and the DGC-2020ES.
etc.
9-6 9469200996
Fax: +1 618.654.2351 P.R. CHINA Tel: +65 68.44.6445
DGC-2020ES
Accessories Instruction Manual

Tel +1 618.654.2341 • Fax +1 618.654.2351 9469200997, Rev B
November 2019
9469200997 i
Preface
This instruction manual provides information about the accessories for the DGC-2020ES Digital Genset
• CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module)

Warning!

Caution
Note

9469200997 Accessories (this manual)
DGC-2020ES Preface
ii 9469200997

www.basler.com
info@basler.com
Tel: +1 618.654.2341
Fax: +1 618.654.2351

All rights reserved
Warning!
manual.
Preface DGC-2020ES
9469200997 iii
Revision History
histories.

Manual
Change
Revision and Date
• Removed standalone Revision History chapter.
A, Sep-18 • Updated output contacts ratings and added hazardous location
specs in the CEM-2020 chapter
• Updated Revision History chapter
DGC-2020ES Contents
iv 9469200997
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200997 v
Contents
CEM-2020 .................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
DGC-2020ES Contents
vi 9469200997
Contents DGC-2020ES
9469200997 1-1
1 • CEM-2020
General Information
The optional CEM-2020 is a remote auxiliary device that provides additional DGC-2020ES contact inputs
and outputs. Two types of modules are available. A low current module (CEM-2020) provides 24 contact
outputs and high current module (CEM-2020H) provides 18 contact outputs.
Features
CEM-2020s have the following features:
• 10 Contact Inputs
• 18 Contact Outputs (CEM-2020H) or 24 Contact Outputs (CEM-2020)
• Functionality of Inputs and Outputs assigned by BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic
• Communications via CAN
Specifications
Operating Power
Nominal .................................................. 12 or 24 Vdc
Range ..................................................... 8 to 32 Vdc (Withstands cranking ride-through down to
6 Vdc for 500 ms)
Maximum Power Dissipation

CEM-2020 ............................................... 14 W
CEM-2020H ............................................ 8 W
Contact Inputs
The CEM-2020 contains 10 programmable inputs that accept dry contacts.
Time from a CEM-2020 input application to:
• Shut down the generator via an alarm = 700 ms max
• Close a relay on board the DGC-2020ES = 300 ms max
• Close a relay on board the CEM-2020 = 550 ms max
Notes
A CEM-2020 contact input is true (on) if the input is connected to
battery ground with a resistance of less than 200 ohms.
The maximum length of wire that can be accommodated depends on
the resistance of the wire, and the resistance of the contacts of the
device driving the input at the far end of the wire.
The maximum wire length can be calculated as follows:
Lmax = (200 – Rdevice)/(Resistance per Foot of Desired Wire)
Contact Outputs
Ratings
CEM-2020
Outputs 5 through 16 .............................. 1 Adc at 30 Vdc, Form C *
Outputs 17 through 28 ............................ 4 Adc at 30 Vdc, Form C – 1.2 A Pilot Duty †
DGC-2020ES CEM-2020
1-2 9469200997
CEM-2020H
Outputs 5 through 16 .............................. 2 Adc at 30 Vdc, Form C *
Outputs 17 through 22 ............................ 10 Adc at 30 Vdc, Form C – 1.2 A Pilot Duty †
* Gold contacts intended for low voltage signaling to dry circuits. Not rated for inductive loads or pilot duty.
† For pilot duty, the load must be in parallel with a diode rated at least 3 x the coil current and 3 x the coil
voltage.
Communications Interface
CAN
Differential Bus Voltage........................... 1.5 to 3 Vdc
Maximum Voltage ................................... –32 to +32 Vdc with respect to negative battery terminal
Communication Rate ............................... 250 kb/s
Type Tests
Shock
Withstands 15 G in three perpendicular planes.
Vibration
Swept over the following ranges for12 sweeps in each of three mutually perpendicular planes with each
15-minute sweep consisting of the following:
5 to 29 to 5 Hz ......................................... 1.5 G peak for 5 min.
29 to 52 to 29 Hz ..................................... 0.036 in (0.914 mm) Double Amplitude for 2.5 min.
52 to 500 to 52 Hz ................................... 5 G peak for 7.5 min.
Ignition System
Tested in close proximity to an unshielded, unsuppressed Altronic DISN 800 ignition system.
HALT (Highly Accelerated Lift Testing)

HALT is used by Basler Electric to prove that our products will provide the user with many years of
reliable service. HALT subjects the device to extremes in temperature, shock, and vibration to simulate
years of operation, but in a much shorter period span. HALT allows Basler Electric to evaluate all possible
design elements that will add to the life of this device. As an example of some of the extreme testing
conditions, the CEM-2020 was subjected to temperature tests (tested over a temperature range of –80°C
to +130°C), vibration tests (of 5 to 50 G at +25°C), and temperature/vibration tests (tested at 10 to 20 G
over a temperature range of –60°C to +100°C). Combined temperature and vibration testing at these
extremes proves that the CEM-2020 is expected to provide long-term operation in a rugged environment.
Note that the vibration and temperature extremes listed in this paragraph are specific to HALT and do not
reflect recommended operation levels. These operational ratings are included in this section.
Environment
Humidity .................................................. Complies with IEC 68-2-38
Temperature
Operating................................................. –40 to +158°F (–40 to +70°C)
Storage ................................................... –40 to +185°F (–40 to +85°C)
UL Approval (CEM-2020 Only)

The CEM-2020 and CEM-2020H are Recognized Components applicable to the Canadian and US safety
standards and requirements by UL. The product is covered under UL File (E97035 FTPM2/FTPM8) and
evaluated to the following standards through UL:
• UL6200
• CSA C22.2 No. 14
CEM-2020 DGC-2020ES
9469200997 1-3
The CEM-2020 is a Recognized Component for the US and Canada under UL file E470837 (CCN-
FTWD2/FTWD8) for use in Hazardous Locations:
• Class I Division 2
• Groups A, B, C & D
CSA Certification
The CEM-2020 and CEM-2020H are Certificated under CSA report 1042505 (LR23131-138S) and
evaluated to the following standards through CSA:
• CSA C22.2 No. 0
• CSA C22.2 No. 14
CE Compliance
This product has been evaluated and complies with the relevant essential requirements set forth in the
following EC Directives and by the EU legislation:
• Low Voltage Devices (LVD) - 2014/35/EU
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - 2014/30/EU
• Hazardous Substances (ROHS2) -2011/65/EU
Harmonized Standards used for evaluation:
• EN 50178 - Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations
• EN 61000-6-4 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards, Emission Standard for
Industrial Environments
• EN 61000-6-2 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Generic Standards, Immunity for Industrial
Environments
• EN 50581 – Technical Documentation for the Assessment of Electrical and Electric Products with
Respect to the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (ROHS2)
NFPA Compliance
Designed to comply with NFPA Standard 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power.
EAC Mark (Eurasian Conformity)

• TC RUUS.HO03.B.00742
Physical
Dimensions.............................................. See Installation later in this chapter.
Weight
CEM-2020 ............................................... 2.25 lb (1.02 kg)
CEM-2020H ............................................ 1.90 lb (0.86 kg)
Functional Description
Contact Inputs
The CEM-2020 provides 10 programmable contact inputs with the same functionality as the contact
inputs on the DGC-2020ES. The label text of each contact input is customizable.
Contact Outputs
CEM-2020
The CEM-2020 provides 24 programmable contact outputs with the same functionality as the contact
outputs on the DGC-2020ES. Outputs 5 through 16 can carry 1 A. Outputs 17 through 28 can carry 4 A.
The label text of each contact output is customizable.
DGC-2020ES CEM-2020
1-4 9469200997
CEM-2020H
The CEM-2020H provides 18 programmable contact outputs with the same functionality as the contact
outputs on the DGC-2020ES. Outputs 5 through 16 can carry 2 A. Outputs 17 through 22 can carry 10 A.
The label text of each contact output is customizable.
Communications
CAN
A Control Area Network (CAN) is a standard interface that enables communication between the CEM-
2020 and the DGC-2020ES.
BESTCOMSPlus® Software
BESTCOMSPlus provides the user with a point-and-click means to set and monitor the Contact
Expansion Module. Installation and operation of BESTCOMSPlus is described in the BESTCOMSPlus
chapter.
Installation
Contact Expansion Modules are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage. Upon receipt of
a module, check the part number against the requisition and packing list for agreement. Inspect for
damage, and if there is evidence of such, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler
Electric regional sales office or your sales representative.
free environment.
Mounting
Contact Expansion Modules are contained in a potted plastic case and may be mounted in any
convenient position. The construction of a Contact Expansion Module is durable enough to mount directly
on a genset using ¼-inch hardware. Hardware selection should be based on any expected
shipping/transportation and operating conditions. The torque applied to the mounting hardware should not
exceed 65 in-lb (7.34 N•m).
See Figure 1-1 for CEM-2020 overall dimensions. All dimensions are shown in inches with millimeters in
brackets.
CEM-2020 DGC-2020ES
9469200997 1-5
Figure 1-1. CEM-2020 Overall Dimensions

See Figure 1-2 for CEM-2020H overall dimensions. All dimensions are shown in inches with millimeters in
brackets.
DGC-2020ES CEM-2020
1-6 9469200997
Figure 1-2. CEM-2020H Overall Dimensions
Connections
Contact Expansion Module connections are dependent on the application. Incorrect wiring may result in
damage to the module.
Note
Although reverse polarity will not cause damage, the CEM-2020 will
not operate.
Be sure that the CEM-2020 is hard-wired to earth ground with no
terminal on the module.
Terminations
The terminal interface consists of plug-in connectors with screw-down compression terminals.
CEM-2020 connections are made with one 5-position connector, two 18-position connectors, and two 24-
position connectors with screw-down compression terminals. These connectors plug into headers on the
CEM-2020. The connectors and headers have dovetailed edges that ensure proper connector orientation.
The connectors and headers are uniquely keyed to ensure that the connectors mate only with the correct
headers. Connector screw terminals accept a maximum wire size of 12 AWG (3.31 mm2). Maximum
screw torque is 5 inch-pounds (0.56 N•m).
Operating Power
The Contact Expansion Module operating power input accepts either 12 Vdc or 24 Vdc and tolerates
voltage over the range of 6 to 32 Vdc. Operating power must be of the correct polarity. Although reverse
CEM-2020 DGC-2020ES
9469200997 1-7
polarity will not cause damage, the CEM-2020 will not operate. Operating power terminals are listed in
Table 1-1.
It is recommended that a fuse be added for additional protection for the wiring to the battery input of the
Contact Expansion Module. A Bussmann ABC-7 fuse or equivalent is recommended.
Table 1-1. Operating Power Terminals
P1- (SHIELD) Chassis ground connection

P1- – (BATT–) Negative side of operating power input
P1 + (BATT+) Positive side of operating power input
Contact Inputs and Contact Outputs

The CEM-2020 (Figure 1-3) has 10 contact inputs and 24 contact outputs. The CEM-2020H (Figure 1-4)
has 10 contact inputs and 18 contact outputs.
Note
To follow UL guidelines, a fuse must be implemented in the 2 Adc
contact circuits (Outputs 5 through 16) of the CEM-2020H used in
hazardous locations. The suggested fuse size in Adc = (100/Contact
Voltage) with a maximum fuse size of 5 Adc.
DGC-2020ES CEM-2020
1-8 9469200997
Figure 1-3. CEM-2020 Contact Input and Contact Output Terminals
CEM-2020 DGC-2020ES
9469200997 1-9
Figure 1-4. CEM-2020H Contact Input and Contact Output Terminals
CAN Interface
These terminals provide communication using the SAE J1939 protocol and provide high-speed
communication between the Contact Expansion Module and the DGC-2020ES. Connections between the
CEM-2020 and DGC-2020ES should be made with twisted-pair, shielded cable. CAN interface terminals
are listed in Table 1-2. Refer to Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.
Table 1-2. CAN Interface Terminals
P1- HI (CAN H) CAN high connection (yellow wire)
P1- LO (CAN L) CAN low connection (green wire)
P1- (SHIELD) CAN drain connection
DGC-2020ES CEM-2020
1-10 9469200997
Notes
1. If the CEM-2020 is providing one end of the J1939 bus, a 120
ohm, ½ watt terminating resistor should be installed across
terminals P1- LO (CANL) and P1- HI (CANH).
2. If the CEM-2020 is not part of the J1939 bus, the stub connecting
the CEM-2020 to the bus should not exceed 914 mm (3 ft) in
length.
grounded elsewhere, do not connect the drain to the CEM-2020.
Other
Devices
Stub Bus
CAN-H
CEM-2020
Engine
(Optional)
CAN-L
P0067-96
120 ohm 120 ohm
DGC-2020ES
Figure 1-5. CAN Interface with CEM-2020 providing One End of the Bus
CEM-2020
(Optional)
Stub Bus
CAN-H
DGC-2020ES Engine
CAN-L
P0067-85
120 ohm 120 ohm
Devices
Figure 1-6. CAN Interface with DGC-2020ES providing One End of the Bus
CEM-2020 DGC-2020ES
9469200997 1-11
Remote Contact Input Configuration

The CEM-2020 provides 10 contact inputs. Each of the 10 contact inputs can be independently
configured to annunciate an alarm or pre-alarm when the input senses a contact closure. A user-
adjustable time delay can be set to delay recognition of a contact input. By default, all inputs are
configured so that they do not trigger an alarm or pre-alarm.
To make identifying the contact inputs easier, a user-assigned name can be given to each input.
Contacts can be recognized always or only while the engine is running.
The remote contact inputs are incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by
selecting them from the I/O group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus chapter
in the Configuration manual.
Remote contact input status is available in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic when “None” is selected
for Alarm Configuration.
The Remote Contact Inputs screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the
Configurable Inputs. The BESTCOMSPlus Remote Contact Inputs screen is illustrated in Figure 1-7.
Figure 1-7. Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Remote Contact Inputs Screen
Remote Contact Output Configuration

To make identifying the contact outputs easier, each of the contact outputs can be given a user-assigned
name.
The contact outputs are incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by selecting
them from the I/O group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus chapter in the
The Remote Contact Outputs screen is found in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Explorer under the
Programmable Inputs category. If using the front panel, navigate to Settings > Programmable Outputs >
Configurable Outputs. The BESTCOMSPlus Contact Outputs screen is illustrated in Figure 1-8.
DGC-2020ES CEM-2020
1-12 9469200997
Figure 1-8. Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Remote Contact Outputs Screen
Firmware Updates
Refer to the Device Information chapter in the Configuration manual for information on upgrading
firmware in the CEM-2020.
Repair
Contact Expansion Modules are manufactured using state-of-the-art surface-mount technology. As such,
Basler Electric recommends that no repair procedures be attempted by anyone other than Basler Electric
personnel.
Before returning the CEM-2020 for repair, contact Basler Electric Technical Services Department at 618-
654-2341 for a return authorization number.
Maintenance
Preventive maintenance consists of periodically checking that the connections between the CEM-2020
and the system are clean and tight.
Storage
This device contains long-life aluminum electrolytic capacitors. For devices that are not in service (spares
in storage), the life of these capacitors can be maximized by energizing the device for 30 minutes once
per year.
CEM-2020 DGC-2020ES
9469200997 2-1
Communications

the main bus.
Inputs and Outputs


Metering/Display
2-2 9469200997

43, and 45).

36, 37, and 38.


rotation.
9469200997 2-3

ground.
overall system.

manual.
screen.
DETECTION screen.
2-4 9469200997
original diagram.

original diagram.

9469200997 2-5
original diagram.

original diagram.

CEM DEBUG
and the DGC-2020ES.
etc.
2-6 9469200997
Fax: +1 618.654.2351 P.R. CHINA Tel: +65 68.44.6445

DGC 2020ES Combined Manuals English PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DGC 2020ES Combined Manuals English PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DGC-2020ES

Digital Genset Controller

12570 Route 143 • Highland, Illinois 62249-1074 USA Publication

Conventions Used in this Manual

Warning boxes call attention to conditions or actions that may cause

DGC-2020ES Instruction Manual Catalog

12570 State Route 143

© 2019 by Basler Electric

Instruction Manual Revision History

Features and Functions

Generator Protection and Metering

Engine Protection and Metering

Contact Inputs and Outputs

Automatic Transfer Switch Control (Mains Failure)

Figure 1-1. DGC-2020ES Style Chart

Optional Features and Capabilities

Remote Display Panel

7.635 (194.0) max

5.433 (138) max

0.320 (8.1) max

Figure 2-1. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions

Figure 2-2. Overall Dimensions

3 • Terminals and Connectors

Figure 3-1. Rear Panel

DGC-2020ES Terminals and Connectors

Table 3-1. Rear Panel Terminal and Connector Descriptions

Terminals and Connectors DGC-2020ES

Connections for Typical Applications

2 SENDER COM DGC-2020ES OUT 3 29

7 Emergency Stop INPUT 1

Figure 4-1. Three-Phase Wye Connections for Typical Applications

DGC-2020ES Typical Connections

GEN CKT MAINS CKT

2 SENDER COM DGC-2020ES OUT 3 29

7 Emergency Stop INPUT 1

Figure 4-2. Three-Phase Delta Connections for Typical Applications

Typical Connections DGC-2020ES

GEN CKT L MAINS CKT

2 SENDER COM DGC-2020ES OUT 3 29

7 Emergency Stop INPUT 1

Figure 4-3. Single-Phase A-B Connections for Typical Applications

DGC-2020ES Typical Connections

2 SENDER COM DGC-2020ES OUT 3 29

7 Emergency Stop INPUT 1

Figure 4-4. Single-Phase A-C Connections for Typical Applications

Typical Connections DGC-2020ES

Figure 4-6. CAN Interface with Other Devices

DGC-2020ES Typical Connections

Figure 4-7. DGC-2020ES and CEM-2020 CAN Connections

Installation for CE Systems

Installation in an Ungrounded System Application

Typical Connections DGC-2020ES

Figure 5-1. Typical User Interface Components

Install BESTCOMSPlus from CD

Activation of the DGC-2020ES Plugin

Connect a USB Cable

Start BESTCOMSPlus® and Activate the DGC-2020ES Plugin Automatically

Figure 5-2. BESTCOMSPlus Language Selection Dialog

Figure 5-3. Communication Pull-Down Menu

Figure 5-4. DGC-2020ES Connection Dialog

Figure 5-5. Device Manager

Installing the USB Driver if Automatic Installation Fails

Manual Activation of the DGC-2020ES Plugin